JP6732598B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachi-slot machine.

Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and a start lever is operated (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of the reels arranged on the surface of the reels starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given in accordance with the above, is known.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, as shown in Patent Document 1, in recent years, information advantageous for a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, is provided so that a winning combination determined as an internal winning combination is not lost. There is known a gaming machine that informs. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time), and the AT function is provided. Gaming machines are called AT machines and ART machines.

JP, 2010-057732, A

Among gaming machines having such an AT function, there is known an AT machine for managing the number of games, which manages the duration of AT by the number of games. By the way, in such an AT machine that manages the number of games, if the number of winnings of the winning combination (for example, the push order bell) during the AT period is small, there are few medals that can be acquired during the AT period, and However, the player sometimes complained.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing the interest of the game from decreasing during the AT period.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are displayed (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R), and a symbol that changes the symbol by rotating the reel based on the establishment of a start condition. A changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39 and the main control board 71) and a winning combination determining means (for example, the main control board 71) that determines a winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations with a predetermined probability based on the establishment of the start condition. ) And a stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch 7S, a main control board 71) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and the combination determining means. Based on the detected winning combination and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detecting means, the stop control means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol, and a predetermined start condition are set. When satisfied, a notification game starting means (for example, a main control board 71) for starting a notification game state (for example, a specific section) and a notification target combination (for example, a push forward combination) that is a combination of the notification targets during the notification game state. ) Is determined as the winning combination, the notification means (for example, the main control board 71, the instruction monitor 147, the sub-control board 72, a display) for notifying the mode of the stop operation (for example, the correct pressing order) that is advantageous to the player. The unit 100), the notification game ending means (for example, the main control board 71) that ends the notification game state when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, and the notification game start means after the notification game state is started. Counting means (for example, main control board 71) that counts the number of continuations indicating the number of unit games, and notification means (for example, main control board 71, status) that the current game state is the notification game state. And a display device 147b), wherein the notification game ending means is configured such that the number of continuations counted by the counting means is a predetermined number in a situation where the notification by the notification means is performed for a guaranteed number of times or more during the notification game state. When the number of continuations reaches a predetermined number of times, the notification game state is terminated, and the counting means is in a situation where the notification by the notification means is not performed more than the guaranteed number of times during the notification game state. When the number of continuations to be counted reaches a predetermined number, after that, the notification game state is ended on condition that the notification by the notification means has reached the guaranteed number of times, and the notification means ends the notification game state. When, the notification that the current game state is the notification game state is finished.

According to such a gaming machine, the notification game state basically ends when the number of continuations in the notification game state reaches a predetermined number, but when the notification of the notification target combination has not been performed for the guaranteed number of times. Does not end even if the number of times of continuation reaches a predetermined number of times, and then continues until the number of times of notification of the notification target combination is performed for the number of times of guarantee, so in the information game state, at least the number of times of notification of the number of times of guarantee is performed. Become. For the player, even if the number of winnings of the notification target combination is small, the guaranteed number of times of notification will be performed, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the game during the notification game state is increased. It is possible to prevent the deterioration.
It should be noted that, because the notification means is notified by the notification means, if the notification game state has not ended even if the number of continuations reaches a predetermined number, the player continues the notification game state from the notification content of the notification means. You can understand what you are doing. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game from being accidentally ended during the notification game state.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the plurality of winning combinations are allowed to be stopped and displayed for a plurality of symbol combinations including the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination when the winning combination is determined. 1 combination (for example, a push sequence combination that guarantees the number of times of navigation), and a second that allows a stop display for a plurality of symbol combinations including the third symbol combination or the fourth symbol combination when it is determined as the winning symbol combination. A combination (for example, a push order combination that does not guarantee the number of navigation times) is included, and when the first symbol combination is displayed when the variation of the symbol is stopped, a first quantity of gaming value is given. Then, when the second symbol combination is displayed, a gaming value less than the first quantity is given or no gaming value is given, and when the third symbol combination is displayed, the first quantity is displayed. A game value of less than the second quantity is given, while a game value less than the second quantity is given or no game value is given when the fourth symbol combination is displayed. Value providing means (for example, main control board 71) is further provided, and the notification means, when the first winning combination is determined as a winning combination, a stop necessary for displaying the first symbol combination. Notifying the mode of operation, and when the second winning combination is determined as a winning combination, it notifies the mode of the stop operation necessary for displaying the third symbol combination, and the notifying game ending means is When the number of continuations counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined number in a situation where the notification of the first combination by the notification means is performed at least the guaranteed number of times during the notification game state, the second combination is executed. Regardless of the number of times the notification is given, the notification game state is terminated on condition that the number of times of continuation reaches a predetermined number, and the notification number for the first combination by the notification means is guaranteed during the notification game state. When the number of continuations counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined number in a situation where the notification is not performed above, regardless of the number of times the notification is given to the second winning combination, the notification by the notification means is then issued. It is characterized in that the notification game state is ended on condition that the guaranteed number of times is reached.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, at least the guaranteed number of times is notified during the notification game state. However, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, while guaranteeing the guaranteed number of times of notification for the first role, The second role is not guaranteed to be informed of the guaranteed number of times. Here, according to the notification for the first winning combination, a first quantity of game media is provided, and according to the notification for the second winning combination, a second quantity of game media smaller than the first quantity is provided, so that the present invention is realized. In such a gaming machine, the guaranteed number of times of notification is guaranteed for the first role to which many game media are added, and the guaranteed number of times of notification is guaranteed to the second role to which a small number of game media is added. Not not.

In recent game machines, in order to balance profits, a combination in which the number of medals does not increase, a combination in which medals decrease, or a combination in which medals increase is extremely small (for example, a three-combination combination in which the bet number and the payout number match) , A combination of one bet in which the bet number is smaller than the payout number, a four-character combination in which the payout number is slightly larger than the bet number, etc.) may be provided during the notification game state. Such a combination does not increase (or decrease) the number of medals even if it follows the notification, so that the player does not need to guarantee the number of notifications during the notification game state. On the other hand, for a winning combination in which the number of medals increases (for example, a winning combination in which the number of payouts is larger than the number of bets, etc.), the total number of medals (game media) given during the notification game state is affected Therefore, it is preferable for the player to guarantee the number of notifications during the notification game state.

In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the number of times of notification is guaranteed for the first winning combination to which a large number of game media are provided, and the number of notifications is not guaranteed to the second winning combination to which a small number of game media is added. For example, even if the notification for the second winning combination has been sufficiently given before the number of times of continuation in the notification game state reaches a predetermined number, if the notification for the first winning combination has not been given the guaranteed number of times. , The notification game state is continued without ending. For the player, the number of times of notification of the first role is guaranteed to affect the total number of game media given during the notification game state, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind and play the game during the notification game state. It is possible to prevent the interest from decreasing.

According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game during the notification game state from decreasing.

It is a figure which shows the function flow of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is the whole perspective view showing the external structure of the above-mentioned pachi-slot machine. It is the whole front view showing the external structure of the above-mentioned pachi-slot machine. It is a schematic layout drawing of the inside of the housing of the pachi-slot machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachi-slot machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachi-slot machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a mirror mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of a projector mechanism and a mirror mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the attachment state of a mirror mechanism. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is a perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is a front view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a display unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a display unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the opening part for operation. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to a fixed screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to a front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to a rear screen mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which removed the right side plate of a screen housing. It is a perspective view of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operating state of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operating process of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operating process of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operating process of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is a figure which shows a part of display screen displayed on the sub display apparatus of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the sub-control board of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state regarding the presence or absence of the notification of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement table memorize|stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize|stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize|stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize|stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize|stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table memorize|stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table memorize|stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachi-slot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachi-slot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachi-slot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachi-slot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachi-slot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachi-slot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the internal winning combination in the said pachi-slot machine, and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the internal winning combination in the said pachi-slot machine, and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure showing the abbreviation of the winning combination in the pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the general game state in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the normal medium-high probability random determination table memorize|stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the CZ lottery table memorize|stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the mode up lottery table in CZ1 memorize|stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the CZ2 middle point up lottery table memorize|stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table in CZ memorize|stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table in CZ memorize|stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in normal ART in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table in ART memorize|stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART level determination table memorize|stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure showing a normal ART medium-high probability random determination table stored in the pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the CT lottery table in ART memorize|stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the addition lottery table in normal ART memorize|stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game during CT in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the lottery table in CT memorize|stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table in CT memorize|stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the addition lottery table in CT memorize|stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the lottery table added on the number of sets in CT memorize|stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the bonus in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a diagram showing a bonus type lottery table stored in the pachi-slot machine. It is a diagram showing a lottery table for adding the number of bonus ART games stored in the pachi-slot machine. It is a diagram showing a bonus lot end CT lottery table stored in the pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the exceptional game in the general game state in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table during non-ART memorize|stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the notification performed by the main side and the notification performed by the sub side in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flow chart which shows the main control processing of the above-mentioned pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the control processing according to the state of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flag conversion process of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flow chart which shows processing at the time of a start during the above of a pachi-slot machine normally. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of CZ start of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process in CZ1 (CZ2) of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process in CZ1 (CZ2) of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process in CZ3 of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flow chart which shows processing at the time of start during normal ART of the pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of CT start of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of BB start of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop initialization process of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flow chart which shows reel stop control processing of the above-mentioned pachi-slot machine. It is a flow chart which shows BB check processing of the above-mentioned pachi-slot machine. It is a flow chart which shows RT check processing of the above-mentioned pachi-slot machine. It is a flow chart which shows RT check processing of the above-mentioned pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of CZ/ART termination of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-side navigation control process of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the player registration process of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the history management process of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the display screen of the sub display apparatus of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game during the CT sign in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the internal winning combination in the said pachi-slot machine, and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the internal winning combination in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment, and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the internal winning combination in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment, and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table in normal ART memorize|stored in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the add-on lottery table in ART memorize|stored in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game during CT in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table in CT memorize|stored in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the CT meter promotion lottery table in CT memorize|stored in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the addition lottery table during CT stored in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in CZ in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the CZ2 end random determination table memorize|stored in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the lock lottery table memorize|stored in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game during CT precursor in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the content of the notification during MB flag in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of the correspondence of the notification performed by the main side and the notification performed by the sub side in a pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the corresponding relationship of the lock state and the notification in the pachi-slot machine of a modification. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the notification performed by the main side in the pachi-slot machine of a modification, and the notification performed by the sub side. It is a figure which shows an example of the notification performed by the sub side in the pachi-slot machine of a modification. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the main control board of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the ratio indicator of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the information display of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the example of a pattern of the lighting timing of the status indicator in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the notification method of the presence or absence of the lottery of transfer lottery to a specific area in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the basic game flow of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of each game state which the said pachi-slot machine has. It is a figure showing an internal lottery table and a transfer lottery table stored in the pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the realization method of CZ in the case of performing the lottery transfer to the ART gaming state with a uniquely determined probability. It is a figure which shows the counting method of the limit game number in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the method of the limit process of the specific area in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the method of the navigation guarantee process at the time of the end of a specific area in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the example of a pattern of the signal output timing to the external device in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect|action in cooperation with the external device performed in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect|action in cooperation with the external device performed in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the navigation securing method in the specific area in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the sign realization method which used the specific area in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the sign realization method which used the specific area in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the saving method of the frequency|count of navigation when performing the specific area of navigation frequency management in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the game at the time of separately managing a lip navigation and a bell navigation in a specific area in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the game at the time of separately managing a lip navigation and a bell navigation in a specific area in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect at the time of separately managing a lip navigation and a bell navigation in a specific area in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the game at the time of separately managing a lip navigation and a bell navigation in a specific area in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the game at the time of separately managing a lip navigation and a bell navigation in a specific area in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the game at the time of separately managing a lip navigation and a bell navigation in a specific area in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the selection method of CZ with a different end period in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the reel control method at the time of starting a specific area in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the reel control method at the time of starting a specific area in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the reel control method at the time of starting a specific area in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the content of control at the time of setting change in the said pachi-slot machine.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a pachi-slot machine showing an embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the pachi-slot machine of the present embodiment, medals are used as a game medium for playing a game. As the game medium, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, etc. can be applied in addition to medals. Further, the present invention is not limited to a gaming machine that dispenses gaming media, and is applied to an enclosed gaming machine that encloses gaming media such as gaming balls and grants benefits as electronic data such as points earned when a predetermined grant condition is met. It is also possible to do so. Further, in the present embodiment, the replay probability is higher than the normal time during an assist time (hereinafter, referred to as “AT”) that is a function of navigating the establishment of a specific small winning combination by a lamp or the like and a specific number of plays. A pachi-slot having a function of assist replay time (hereinafter, referred to as “ART”) that simultaneously operates with RT will be described.

[Function flow of pachi-slot machine]
As shown in FIG. 1, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when a player inserts a medal and the start lever 6 is operated, one value (from a random number in a predetermined numerical value range (for example, 0 to 65535) ( Hereinafter, a random number value) is extracted.

The internal winning combination determination means (main CPU 31 described later) performs a lottery based on the extracted random number value to determine an internal winning combination. That is, the internal winning combination determination means determines a predetermined winning probability from a plurality of winning combinations based on the detection of the start operation of the unit game for the start lever 6 by the start switch 6S (see FIG. 30) (establishment of a predetermined starting condition). Determines the internal winning combination.

By the determination of the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that is allowed to be displayed along the pay line described below is determined. The types of symbol combinations include those related to "winning prizes" in which benefits such as payout of medals, operation of replay (replay), and operation of bonus are given to the player, and other so-called "miss". The related items are provided.

Subsequently, when the player presses the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R after the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotated, reel stop control means (main CPU 31, which will be described later, motor drive circuit, which will be described later). 39, stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R, which will be described later, perform control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R based on the internal winning combination and the timing of pressing the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R. To do.

Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R within a specified time (190 msec) from when the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R are pressed. .. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R within the specified time is referred to as "the number of sliding pieces", and the maximum number is four symbols (the maximum number of sliding pieces). ).

The reel stop control means, when the internal winning combination allowing the display of the winning combination of symbols is determined, the reel combination is used for the winning combination (hereinafter referred to as “effective line”) by using the above specified time. The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces so that it is displayed as much as possible.

On the other hand, for combinations of symbols that are not allowed to be displayed by the internal winning combination, the specified time is used and the reels are reeled within the maximum number of sliding pieces so as not to be displayed along the activated line. Stop rotation of 3L, 3C and 3R.

In this way, when all the rotations of the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped, the winning determination means (main CPU 31 described later) determines whether the combination of symbols displayed along the activated line is related to winning. Determine whether or not.

That is, the winning determination means determines the winning or non-winning of the winning combination based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the activated line based on the fact that the reel stop control means stops the fluctuation of the symbols.

When it is determined that the game is related to winning, a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player. A series of flows as described above is performed as one game (unit game) in the pachi-slot machine 1.

In the present embodiment, the reel stop operation (operation of the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that is first performed when all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotating is the first stop operation, the first stop operation. The stop operation performed next to the stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the stop operation performed subsequent to the second stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, in the above-described series of flows, various effects can be produced by using the output of light (video) performed by the display unit 100, the output of sound performed by the speakers 9L and 9R, or a combination thereof. Done.

When the start lever is operated, a random number value for rendering (hereinafter, a random number value for rendering) is extracted in addition to the random number value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the random number value for effect is extracted, the effect content determination means randomly determines, from among a plurality of types of effect content associated with the internal winning combination, the effect content to be executed this time. A sub-control board, which will be described later, is responsible for the effect content determination means.

When the content of the effect is determined, the display unit 100 and the speakers 9L and 9R execute the corresponding effect in synchronization with each trigger such as the start of the rotation of the reel, the stop of the rotation of each reel, and the determination of the presence/absence of a prize. To do. In this way, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of the symbols to be aimed for) is executed by executing the effect contents associated with the internal winning combination. It is provided to the player and the interest of the player can be improved.

[Pachislot machine structure]
The functional flow of the pachi-slot machine 1 has been described above. Next, the structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3.

FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a front view of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

A casing 60 forming the entire pachi-slot machine 1 is a box-shaped cabinet 61 having a rectangular opening on the front side, an upper door 62a arranged on the upper front portion of the cabinet 61, and a lower front portion of the cabinet 61. And a lower door 62b disposed in the. The cabinet 61 accommodates devices used in the game (for example, reels). The upper door 62a and the lower door 62b are formed so as to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet 61. The upper door 62a is provided so as to be able to close the upper part of the opening in the cabinet 61, and the lower door 62b is provided so as to be able to close the lower part of the opening in the cabinet 61.
Since the cabinet 61 is a member that fixes the upper door 62a and the lower door 62b, it may be referred to as a fixed frame, and the upper door 62a and the lower door 62b may be referred to as a front door.

The upper door 62a has the display unit 100 in the center. The display unit 100 is an effect device that produces an effect according to the progress of the game, and displays various images according to the progress of the game under the control of the sub-control board 72 described later. The display unit 100 may be, for example, a display device such as a liquid crystal display or an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, but in the present embodiment, a so-called projection mapping device is used as described later.

A display window 4 formed as a rectangular opening is provided in the upper center of the lower door 62b. The display window 4 constitutes a symbol display means for displaying a part of a plurality of symbols displayed on reels 3L, 3C, 3R described later. In the display window 4, an upper right diagonal cross-up line, an upper top line, a middle center line, a lower bottom line, and a downward right diagonal cross down line are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 3, the display window 4 displays three symbols of the symbols displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. Therefore, the display window 4 displays a 3×3 pattern. The five lines of the cross-up line to the cross-down line displayed on the display window 4 are lines that linearly connect the 3×3 symbols displayed by the display window 4.

In the present embodiment, the center line of the five lines is the effective line, and the winning determination is made based on the combination of the symbols displayed along the center line. On the other hand, the four lines other than the center line are pseudo lines that are not used for winning determination.

The activated line (center line) is activated by operating a MAX bet button 11 described later or inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 22. Here, operating the MAX bet button 11 is synonymous with inserting a medal. Therefore, for example, “the number of inserted medals” includes both the number of BETs by the operation of the MAX bet button 11 and the number of inserted coins actually inserted into the medal insertion slot 22.

In the cabinet 61, a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotatably provided in a horizontal row. Each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R has a reel band on the outer peripheral surface of which a symbol string as identification information composed of a plurality of types of symbols necessary for the game is drawn. That is, a plurality of symbols are displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

The design drawn on each reel band can be visually recognized from the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1 through the display window 4. Further, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R rotate at a constant speed rotation (for example, 80 rotations/minute) to variably display the symbol row.

A pedestal portion 10 having a substantially horizontal plane is formed below the display window 4. In the horizontal plane of the pedestal portion 10, a medal slot 22 is provided on the right side, and a MAX bet button 11 and a 1 bet button (not shown) are provided on the left side. Inside the MAX bet button 11, there is provided a bet button LED 103 (see FIG. 30) that lights up when a medal can be inserted.

By depressing the MAX bet button 11, the number of medals (3) provided for the unit game (one game) is inserted, and the activated line is activated. On the other hand, one medal is inserted each time the 1 bet button is pressed. When the 1 bet button is operated three times, the three medals used for the unit game are inserted and the activated line is activated.

The operation of the MAX bet button 11, the operation of the 1 bet button, and the operation of inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 22 (the operation of inserting a medal for playing a game) are referred to as “insertion operation”.

An information display 14 is provided in the center of the pedestal portion 10 in the horizontal plane. The information display 14 is provided with an LED (not shown) that lights up corresponding to the number of medals inserted in the game this time (hereinafter, the inserted number). In addition, the information display 14 displays information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter, the number of payouts) and the number of medals stored in the pachi-slot machine 1 (hereinafter, the number of credits). A digital display (not shown) for digitally displaying to the player is provided.

Further, the information display 14 has an instruction monitor (not shown) for notifying the information of the stop operation necessary for displaying the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination along the activated line. It is provided. The instruction monitor is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and notifies the player of necessary stop operation information by lighting or blinking in a manner uniquely corresponding to the notified stop operation information. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, a “push order combination”, which is a combination in which different combinations of symbols are displayed according to the order of stop operations (push order), is provided. The aspect uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation to be notified is, for example, displaying “1” when notifying the pressing order “1st (perform the first stop operation to the left reel 3L)”. , "2nd" is displayed when the push order "2nd (perform the first stop operation on the inner reel 3C)" is displayed, and the push order "3rd (the first stop operation is performed on the right reel 3R). Is performed”) is displayed when “3” is displayed. Details of the notification of the stop operation information on the instruction monitor will be described later with reference to FIG. 74.

As shown in FIG. 30, which will be described later, the information display 14 is controlled by the main control board 71 via the door relay board 74. Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, in addition to the instruction monitor controlled by the main control board 71, other means controlled by the sub control board 72 may be used to notify the stop operation information. The display unit 100 may notify the information of the stop operation.

In this case, the notification mode of the instruction monitor and the notification mode of the other means may be different modes. That is, in the instruction monitor, it is sufficient to notify in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation to be notified, and it is not always necessary to directly notify the information of the stop operation (for example, "1" in the instruction monitor). Even if displayed, some players may not be able to specify the content of the notification, and cannot be said to be a direct notification). On the other hand, in the notification by other means, the information of the stop operation may be directly notified. For example, when notifying the pressing order “1st”, the instruction monitor uniquely displays “1” corresponding to the pressing order to be notified, while the other means (display unit 100) causes the first stop operation to be left. It is also possible to directly notify what is to be done to the reel 3L.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible not only to control the sub control board 72 but also to control the main control board 71 to notify the information of the necessary stop operation according to the internal winning combination. Of course, the notification of the stop operation information may be controlled according to the game state. More specifically, the information about the stop operation may be notified in the below-described ART game state (see FIG. 33) without notifying the information about the stop operation in the below-described general game state (non-ART).

Further, on the left side of the front surface portion of the pedestal portion 10, there is provided a settlement button 13 for switching the credit/payout of medals acquired by the player by a push button operation. By switching the settlement button 13, medals are paid out from the medal payout opening 15 at the lower front, and the paid-out medals are stored in the medal receiving portion 16.

On the right side of the settlement button 13, a start lever 6 as a start operation means for rotating the reels 3L, 3C, 3R by the tilting operation of the player and starting the variable display of the symbols in the display window 4 is predetermined. It is mounted so that it can be tilted within the angle range.

Stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R as stop operation means for stopping the rotations of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R by a player's pressing operation are provided at substantially the center of the front surface of the pedestal portion 10. ing. In the embodiment, one game (unit game) is basically started by operating the start lever 6, and ends when all reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped.

A first sub display device 201 and a second sub display device 202 are provided on the front surface of the upper portion of the lower door 62b. The first sub display device 201 and the second sub display device 202 are liquid crystal displays and organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) displays, and display various information. As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the first sub-display device 201 and the second sub-display device 202 are lateral to the surface of the front surface of the lower door 62b that is erected substantially vertically from the horizontal plane of the pedestal portion 10. The first sub display device 201 is provided on the left side (MAX bet button 11 and the start lever 6 side), and the second sub display device 202 is provided on the right side (medal slot 22 side).

At least one of the first sub display device 201 and the second sub display device 202, in the present embodiment, a touch sensor 201a is provided on the display surface of the first sub display device 201. The display can be switched according to the received operation of the player. The touch sensor 201a operates according to a predetermined operation principle such as an electrostatic capacitance method, and upon receipt of a player's operation, outputs a signal corresponding to the operation as touch input information. The first sub display device 201 is controlled by the sub control board 72 (see FIG. 31) based on the touch input information output from the touch sensor 201a.

Speakers 9L and 9R for producing effects such as sound effects and voices are provided on the front side of the lower portion of the lower door 62b, and a medal payout port 15 for paying out medals is provided between the speakers 9L and 9R. ing. The medal receiving portion 16 that stores the paid out medals is provided at the lowermost portion of the lower door 62b.

Further, in the lower front surface of the lower door 62b, on the surface sandwiched between the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R and the medal receiving portion 16 above and below, there is a waist panel 25 having a design corresponding to the motif of the model. It is installed. The waist panel 25 is illuminated by a waist panel illuminator (not shown) provided behind.

[Structure of display unit]
Next, the structure of the display unit 100 included in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 28.

(Display unit 100)
As shown in FIG. 4, a display unit 100 is provided inside the cabinet 61 behind the upper door 62a. As shown in FIG. 5, the display unit 100 is detachably provided on the intermediate support plate 301 in the cabinet 61. The intermediate support plate 301 functions as a partition wall between the upper space and the lower space in the cabinet 61. The display unit 100 is a so-called projection mapping device including an irradiation light device B that emits irradiation light including an image and a screen device C that causes the image to appear by being irradiated with the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B. ..

Here, the projection mapping device is for projecting an image on the surface of a three-dimensional object such as a building or a natural object, and for example, its position (projection distance or angle By projecting an image generated according to the effect information, which is generated based on the shape) and the shape, it is possible to achieve an advanced and powerful effect.

(Display unit 100: irradiation light device B)
As shown in FIG. 6, the irradiation light device B is a projector mechanism B2 that emits the irradiation light forward, and a screen that is arranged in front of the projector mechanism B2 and obliquely lower rear side of the irradiation light from the projector mechanism B2. It has a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects in the direction of the device C, and a projector cover B1 that houses the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3.

(Display unit 100: irradiation light device B: projector mechanism B2)
The projector mechanism B2 is arranged in the rear part of the cabinet 61. The projector mechanism B2 has a horizontally arranged flat plate-shaped base member B22. A lens mechanism B21 and a light source (not shown) are provided on the lower surface of the base member B22. The lens mechanism B21 is arranged so as to emit the irradiation light emitted from the light source toward the front mirror mechanism B3.

Further, heat removal mechanisms B23 and B24 are provided on the lower surface of the base member B22. The heat removal mechanisms B23 and B24 are arranged on the right and left sides of the lens mechanism B21 and the light source, respectively. The heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24 have a duct for circulating air and a fan for sending air, and by blowing the air backward, the heat generated when the irradiation light is generated is forced to the backward direction. It is designed to flow. As shown in FIG. 2, ventilation holes 21a of the cabinet 61 are arranged in the air flow direction in the heat exhausting mechanisms B23 and B24. As a result, the heat discharging mechanisms B23 and B24 can forcibly discharge the heat of the projector mechanism B2 together with air to the outside of the machine through the ventilation hole 21a.

(Display unit 100: irradiation light device B: mirror mechanism B3)
As shown in FIG. 6, a mirror mechanism B3 is arranged in front of the projector mechanism B2 (direction of emission of irradiation light). As shown in FIG. 7, the mirror mechanism B3 includes a mirror holder B31, an optical mirror B32 housed in the mirror holder B31, and mirror stoppers B33 and B34 that fix both ends of the optical mirror B32 to the mirror holder B31. doing. As shown in FIG. 8, the front surface of the mirror holder B31 is formed in a rectangular plate shape. An angle adjustment hole B311 is formed at each corner of the mirror holder B31, and a recess B312 is formed on the front surface around the angle adjustment hole B311. Further, mounting holes B314 and B314 are vertically symmetrically formed between the angle adjusting holes B311 and B311 in the vertical direction.

Further, a mirror holding portion B313 is formed on the rear surface of the mirror holder B31. The mirror holding portion B313 is formed in the central portion and has a size that does not overlap the angle adjusting hole B311 and the mounting hole B314. Mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are provided on the left and right sides of the mirror holding portion B313, respectively. The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 have angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 and mounting holes B334 and B344, respectively. The angle adjusting holes B331, B341 and the mounting holes B334, B344 in the mirror stoppers B33, B34 are arranged so as to correspond to the angle adjusting holes B311, B311 and the mounting holes B314, B314 in the mirror holder B31.

The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed so as to partially overlap the mirror holding portion B313. As a result, the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 come into contact with the left and right sides of the optical mirror B32 fitted in the mirror holding portion B313, and are screwed to the mirror holder B31 by the mounting holes B314, B334, and B344. The optical mirror B32 is held by the mirror holder B31.

As shown in FIG. 9, the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above is provided on the inner side surface of the reflector holding portion B11 of the projector cover B1. The reflector holding portion B11 is formed at the center of the front surface of the projector cover B1 and is arranged so as to be exposed to the front side when the upper door 62a is opened. The reflector holding portion B11 has an angle adjustment hole B111. The angle adjustment hole B111 is formed at a position corresponding to the angle adjustment hole B311 of the mirror mechanism B3.

A screw (not shown) is inserted from the front side into the angle adjustment hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11, and this screw penetrates the angle adjustment hole B311 of the mirror holder B31. The angle adjusting holes B331, B341 of the mirror stoppers B33, B34 are formed as screw holes into which screws can be screwed, and the screw penetrating the angle adjusting hole B311 of the mirror holder B31 is the screw of the mirror stoppers B33, B34. The angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 are screwed together.

Then, when the screw is rotated in a direction in which the screw engagement with the angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 is loosened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is increased. On the other hand, when the screw is rotated in the direction in which the screwing with the angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 is tightened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is shortened.

As described above, the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33, B34 are screw-fastened through the mounting holes B314, B334, B344, whereby the optical mirror is provided between the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33, B34. B32 is clamped. As described above, the mirror holder B31, the optical mirror B32, and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are integrated as a mirror mechanism B3, and the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is changed by the rotation of the screw. As a result, the distance between the reflector holder B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be increased or decreased. Then, since the angle adjusting holes B311, 331, B341 are arranged in four directions corresponding to the corners of the mirror mechanism B3, the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism at the positions where the angle adjusting holes B311, 331, B341 are arranged. By increasing or decreasing the distance from B3, it is possible to finely adjust the reflection angle of the optical mirror B32 with respect to the traveling direction of the irradiation light emitted from the projector mechanism B2.

A spring (not shown) is provided between the reflector holder B11 and the mirror holder B31. The rear end surface of the spring is in contact with the recess B312 of the mirror holder B31, and the front end surface is in contact with the inner wall surface (rear wall surface) of the reflector holding portion B11, so that the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror holder B31 are connected to each other. It is sandwiched between. The screw inserted through the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 penetrates the spring. As a result, even if the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 increases as the screw rotates, the screw head comes into contact with the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 by the biasing force of the spring. It is possible to prevent the screw head from protruding from the angle adjusting hole B111 and breaking the positional relationship between the reflector holding portion B11 and the screw.

(Display unit 100: irradiation light device B: projector cover B1)
As shown in FIG. 10, the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above are housed in the projector cover B1. The projector cover B1 includes a horizontally arranged upper wall portion B12, a reflector holding portion B11 arranged on the front side of the upper wall portion B12, and side wall portions B13, B13 symmetrically arranged in the left-right direction of the upper wall portion B12. And have. A front portion of the upper wall portion B12 is projected more forward than the cabinet 61 of FIG. A reflector holding portion B11 is formed in a central portion on the front side of the upper wall portion B12 so as to project forward, and the above-mentioned mirror mechanism B3 is held in the space formed by the projection so that the angle can be adjusted. ..

In addition, the side wall portions B13, B13 have a protruding portion B131 protruding horizontally from the lower end portion. The protruding portion B131 has a first protruding portion B131a on the front side and a second protruding portion B131b on the rear side. The first protrusion B131a is formed at a position corresponding to the opening of the cabinet 61 when the projector cover B1 is mounted on the cabinet 61, and is set to have a width slightly smaller than the width of the opening of the cabinet 61. Has been done. On the other hand, the second projecting portion B131b is formed at a position corresponding to the space behind the opening of the cabinet 61 when the projector cover B1 is mounted on the cabinet 61, and is wider than the width of the space behind. It is set to a slightly smaller width. That is, in each of the side wall portions B13 and B13, the width of the second protruding portion B131b is wider than the width of the first protruding portion B131a. As a result, the projector cover B1 can cover most of the internal space of the cabinet 61.

A perforated plate B15 having a plurality of holes B151 is provided on the lower surface side of the projector cover B1. The perforated plate B15 is a punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed by punching a metal plate (for example, stainless steel, iron, steel, aluminum, etc.). The plurality of holes B151 are formed on the entire surface of the perforated plate B15 in a substantially evenly dispersed manner. The perforated plate B15 allows air to flow through the entire surface of the perforated plate B15, and allows air to flow from the lower side to the upper side by suction by the heat exhausting mechanisms B23 and B24 of the projector mechanism B2. The size and the number of the holes B151 are set so that the inside of the projector cover B1 cannot be seen from the outside. The hole B151 is formed in a shape such as a circle, a square, or a hexagon, and the hole diameter is about 3 to 5 mm.

The perforated plate B15 is formed so as to cover the first protruding portion B131a and the second protruding portion B131b of the projector cover B1 from the lower side position. As shown in FIG. 12, the perforated plate B15 has an upper part B15a on the front side, an inclined part B15b on the middle side, and a lower part B15c on the rear side. The upper part B15a is horizontally arranged. The inclined portion B15b is formed by being bent obliquely downward and rearward from the rear side of the upper portion B15a. The lower portion B15c is formed by bending the rear side of the inclined portion B15b in the horizontal direction.

The upper part B15a of the perforated plate B15 is attached to the side wall parts B13, B13 of the projector cover B1. Thereby, the perforated plate B15 is arranged so as to cover the front part of the projector cover B1 from below with the upper part B15a and cover it from below with the inclined part B15b and the lower part B15c from the middle part to the rear part of the projector cover B1. There is. As shown in FIG. 10, the front screen mechanism E1 of the screen device C is arranged below the perforated plate B15.

As will be described in detail later, the front screen mechanism E1 has a front standby position that is arranged in an upper position that is a standby posture that prohibits the appearance of an image by irradiation light and a lower side that is an exposure posture that allows the appearance of an image by irradiation light. The front screen mechanism E1 in the standby position is tilted substantially parallel to and close to the tilted part B15b of the perforated plate B15. On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the exposed posture, a large space portion appears below the perforated plate B15, and the air existing in this space portion reaches the perforated plate B15 without any flow resistance, and a plurality of air holes exist. By passing through the hole B151, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of air into the screen device C and enhance the cooling efficiency.

Further, the perforated plate B15 is provided so as to cover the lower surface of the projector cover B1, so that the eye position of the player located on the front side is the center of the screen device C in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction as shown in FIG. Even if the irradiation light device B exists on the horizontal line of the part and looks up from the eye position, the perforated plate B15 prevents the inside of the irradiation light device B from being visually observed.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C)
As shown in FIG. 14, the irradiation light device B configured as described above is connected to the upper surface of the screen device C by screw fastening. As a result, the display unit 100 can unitize the irradiation light device B and the screen device C into a unit and handle them integrally.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen housing C10)
The screen device C has a box-shaped screen housing C10. As shown in FIG. 15, the screen housing C10 includes a horizontally arranged bottom plate C1, a right side plate C2 standing upright at the right end of the bottom plate C1, and a left side plate C3 standing upright at the left end of the bottom plate C1. And a back plate C4 erected on the rear end of the bottom plate C1. As a result, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 are coupled to the bottom plate C1 by screw fastening, so that the front side on which the player is positioned and the top side on which the irradiation light device B is positioned. An open box-shaped screen casing C10 is formed.

The bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 that form the screen housing C10 are independently formed in a predetermined shape, and a predetermined functional component such as the fixed screen mechanism D can be attached thereto. Has been As a result, even if the entire unit of the screen device C cannot be shared, it is possible to share the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 for each plate member. Further, since it is possible to partially change each plate member, it is possible to easily change the specifications for each model of the gaming machine 1.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Bottom plate C1)
More specifically, the bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape in a top view. On the upper surface of the bottom plate C1, there are provided a central placing portion C11 arranged in the central portion, and a right placing portion C12 and a left placing portion C13 arranged in the left-right direction centering on the central placing portion C11. There is. These mounting portions C11, C12, C13 are formed in a concave shape. The central mounting portion C11 mounts the fixed screen mechanism D in a positionable manner by fitting the lower end portion of the fixed screen mechanism D into the central mounting portion C11. The right mounting portion C12 and the left mounting portion C13 are positioned at the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6 by fitting the lower ends of the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6, respectively. It is placed as possible.

Further, the front side portion C14 of the bottom plate C1 is bent downward so that the front end portion is located below the lower surface of the bottom plate C1. A plurality of through holes C141 are formed in the front side portion C14. As shown in FIG. 5, the front side portion C14 comes into contact with the front surface of the intermediate support plate 301 when the display unit 100 is mounted while being mounted on the intermediate support plate 301 of the cabinet 61. It is possible to perform rearward positioning. Then, the display unit 100 can be assembled and installed from the front side of the cabinet 61 by being screwed to the front surface of the cabinet 61 through the through hole C141 of the front side portion C14. It is possible.

(Display unit 100: screen device C: screen housing C10: right side plate C2, left side plate C3)
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen housing C10 have operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed as handles, and the display unit 100 can be carried by hooking a hand on the operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are arranged beside the crank gears E21 and E21 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed in a rectangular shape whose longitudinal directions are aligned in the horizontal direction. The opening areas of the operation openings C21 and C31 are set to such an extent that the crank gears E21 and E21 can be manually operated from the outside.

Thus, when the front screen mechanism E1 at the standby position is manually moved after the display unit 100 is installed in the cabinet 61, first, the display unit 100 is taken out from the front side of the cabinet 61 in which the upper door 62a is opened. Specifically, an operator located on the front side of the cabinet 61 releases the screws by fastening the screws of the display unit 100 to the cabinet 61. Then, the user extends his/her hand into the cabinet 61 and holds the operation openings C21 and C31 of the display unit 100 with both hands, and the display unit 100 is taken out of the cabinet 61. After that, as shown in FIG. 17, for example, a hand is extended into the screen device C from one operation opening C21 of the detached display unit 100, and the crank gear E21 which is viewed in the horizontal direction is rotated from the operation opening C21. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 in the locked state can be easily moved from the standby position. The locked state of the front screen mechanism E1 will be described later. When the locked state is released by the movement from the standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 can be quickly rotated to a desired position.

In the state where the upper door 62a is opened, the hand is reached from the front of the opening of the cabinet 61 into the space between the side wall 302 of the cabinet 61 and the right side plate C2 of the screen device C, and then from the operation opening C21. The crank gear E21 can be rotated by operating the crank gear E21. In this case, the front screen mechanism E1 can be unlocked without removing the display unit 100 from the cabinet 61.

Further, a motor housing portion C22 is formed on the right side plate C2. The motor housing portion C22 houses the drive motor F21 of the reel screen drive mechanism F2.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Back plate C4)
As shown in FIG. 18, the back plate C4 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape, and the relay board CK is provided on the back surface thereof. The relay board CK allows a plurality of signal lines in the display unit 100 to be aggregated to perform wiring with the outside of the display unit 100 at one place. The relay board CK is provided on the back surface of the back plate C4 so that the relay board CK is placed in front of the back wall 213 of the cabinet 61. That is, the relay board CK is arranged in the gap between the back wall 213 of the cabinet 61 and the back plate C4 of the screen housing C10. As shown in FIG. 5, a through hole 303 of an intermediate support plate 301 that supports the display unit 100 is arranged below the relay board CK, and a signal line of the relay board CK is inserted therethrough.

As a result, the relay board is disposed outside the screen device C to facilitate wiring work, and eliminates the need to secure an installation space for the relay substrate CK in the screen device C. The degree of freedom in designing the device C is expanded.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18, an operation opening C41 is formed in the back plate C4. The operation opening C41 is arranged on the lower right side and faces the intermediate gear E23 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation opening C41 is formed in a size that allows the intermediate gear E23 to be manually operated. Accordingly, when the front screen mechanism E1 at the standby position is manually moved after the display unit 100 is incorporated in the cabinet 61, the display unit 100 is first removed from the cabinet 61. After that, by extending the hand from the operation opening C41 into the screen device C and rotating the intermediate gear E23 which is seen in the horizontal direction from the operation opening C41, the front screen mechanism E1 in the locked state can be easily moved from the standby position. Can be moved.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen mechanism)
Inside the screen housing C10, a plurality of screen mechanisms for displaying an image by irradiation of irradiation light from the irradiation light device B are provided so that irradiation targets can be switched. Specifically, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1 are provided as a plurality of screen mechanisms. The detailed structure of each screen mechanism D, E1, F1 will be described later.

(Display unit 100: screen device C: screen positional relationship)
As shown in FIG. 19, the fixed screen mechanism D is provided in a fixed state at a fixed exposure position existing in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light. As shown in FIG. 20, the front screen mechanism E1 is rotatably provided between a front exposed position and a front standby position. The positional relationship between the fixed exposure position and the front exposure position is set such that the front exposure position exists in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and in front of the fixed exposure position. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front so that the image by the irradiation light appears only on the front screen mechanism E1. It is possible. When the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed so that the image by the irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D.

Further, as shown in FIG. 21, the reel screen mechanism F1 is rotatably provided between the reel exposed position and the reel standby position. The positional relationship between the reel exposure position and the fixed exposure position is set so that the reel exposure position exists in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and in front of the fixed exposure position. As a result, when the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel exposure position, the reel screen mechanism F1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front so that the image by the irradiation light appears only on the reel screen mechanism F1. It is possible. When the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed so that the image by the irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D.

The positional relationship between the front standby position and the reel standby position is set so that the front screen mechanism E1 existing at the front standby position and the reel screen mechanism F1 existing at the reel standby position do not interfere with each other. That is, the front standby position is arranged above the fixed screen mechanism D, while the reel standby position is arranged behind the fixed screen mechanism D. As a result, the turning distance of the front screen mechanism E1 is shorter than the turning distance of the reel screen mechanism F1.

The rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1 and the rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1 are different from each other in the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 so that the overlapping of the operation regions due to the rotation is minimized. ing. Specifically, the rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1 is set above the rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1 in the front standby position direction. As a result, the movement of the front screen mechanism E1 is set to the minimum.

Further, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are rotatable on condition that at least one of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 is present at the standby position. This prevents interference when the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 rotate.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Fixed screen mechanism D)
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the fixed screen mechanism D is fixed to the bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 by screwing. The fixed screen mechanism D has a front reflection portion D1, a right surface reflection portion D2, a left surface reflection portion D3, and a lower surface reflection portion D4. The reflecting surfaces of these reflecting portions D1 to D4 are set at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B, respectively.

The fixed screen mechanism D may have, for example, two, three, or five reflective portions as long as it has a plurality of reflective surfaces at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light. Alternatively, a reflecting portion having a curved or arcuate reflecting surface whose center of curvature is located on the front surface side and which has continuously different angles with respect to the optical axis may be provided.

The front reflection part D1 has a reflection surface arranged to face the player on the front side, and most of the reflected light from the irradiation light device B arranged in the upper front part of the fixed screen mechanism D is reflected to the front. Is set to. The right surface reflection part D2 and the left surface reflection part D3 are joined to the right side part and the left side part of the front reflection part D1, and are arranged symmetrically with respect to the front reflection part D1. The right surface reflection portion D2 and the left surface reflection portion D3 are arranged so that the width between the front end portions is larger than the width of the front reflection portion D1 in the left-right direction. As a result, the right-side reflecting portion D2 and the left-side reflecting portion D3 have a tendency that the reflecting direction of the irradiation light with respect to the reflecting surface is easily directed toward the front reflecting portion D1. The light is reflected in the direction of the reflecting portion D1. In addition, with respect to the lower surface reflecting portion D4 as well, since the reflection direction of the irradiation light with respect to the reflecting surface is easily directed to the front reflecting portion D1 direction, part of the irradiation light is directed to the front reflecting portion D1 direction while the image by the irradiation light appears. It is designed to reflect.

In the fixed screen mechanism D, the lightness of the reflecting surface is set lower than the lightness of each reflecting surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 described later. That is, in the fixed screen mechanism D, the amount of light reflected from the reflection surface of the irradiation light is smaller than the amount of light reflected from the reflection surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. As a result, the fixed screen mechanism D prevents white blur due to light mixing due to diffused reflection of the reflecting portions D1 to D4. In the fixed screen mechanism D, the brightness of the other reflecting portions D2, D3, D4 may be lower than the brightness of the front reflecting portion D1. In this case, the reflection of the irradiation light on the other reflecting portions D2, D3, D4 to the front reflecting portion D1 can be reduced, so that the white blur can be reduced while the image is strongly appearing on the front reflecting portion D1.

As the lightness, the brightness in the L ^* a ^* b ^* color system (L ^* a ^* b ^* color space) or the L ^* u ^* v ^* color system (L ^* u ^* v ^* color space) is adopted. However, any other color can be defined as long as it can express other colors with relative values with respect to white.

The lightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the lightness of the reflection surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are the same as the lightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the reflection of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. There is no particular limitation as long as it is lower than the brightness of the surface. For example, the brightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D may be set to a value that is about 5 to 25% (or 10 to 20%) lower than the brightness of the reflective surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1.

In order to make the lightness of the reflecting surface of the fixed screen mechanism D lower than the lightness of the reflecting surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, the color of the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is changed to the front screen. The color of the paint applied to the base material of the mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 may be made black. For example, a white paint is used as the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, and the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is the same as that of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. What added the black pigment to the coating material applied to a base material may be used.

In such a coating, the brightness of the reflection surface of the screen mechanism can be changed by changing the ratio of the white pigment (for example, titanium oxide) and the black pigment (for example, carbon black). For example, the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 contains only white pigments among white pigments and black pigments, and the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D includes Both white pigments and black pigments may be included. Further, the ratio of black pigment to white pigment in the paint applied to the fixed screen mechanism D is higher than that in the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 (for example, 5 to 25% (or It may be about 10 to 20%). As the coating material to be applied to the base material of these screen mechanisms, conventionally known coating materials for screens can be appropriately adopted and can be adjusted according to the type of the screen (for example, diffusion type or reflection type). ..

The black pigment is not included in the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D, but the black pigment is dispersed in the resin that is the material of the base material before molding the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D. By doing so, the base material itself may be colored to reduce the brightness of the base material itself.

Further, from the viewpoint of preventing diffused reflection of light, members constituting the screen casing C10 such as the peripheral walls (bottom plate C1, right side plate C2, left side plate C3, and back plate C4) and the inside of the screen casing C10. It is desirable to reduce the brightness of the other members (members other than the screen) arranged in the. It is desirable that the brightness of these members is lower than the brightness of the reflecting surface of the fixed screen mechanism D. For example, as for the surrounding wall, it is not necessary to consider that an image is projected as a screen. The lower the better. That is, it is preferable that the color of the surrounding wall be closer to black.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Front screen mechanism E1)
As shown in FIG. 22, the front screen mechanism E1 includes a rectangular front screen member E11 having a projection surface E11a on the entire surface and a front screen support base E12 having a pattern such as a first pattern surface E12a on both surfaces. Have The front screen member E11 is formed by applying screen paint to a thin flat panel. As a result, the front screen member E11 is configured such that the projection surface E11a is formed flat so that an image without distortion appears when the irradiation light is irradiated.

On the other hand, the front screen support base E12 has a holding recess E121 for holding the front screen member E11. The holding recess E121 has an opening shape similar to the projection surface E11a of the front screen member E11 in a slightly enlarged state, and accommodates the entire front screen member E11. In addition, the holding recess E121 is set to have two depths, a deep portion and a shallow portion. The shallow portion is realized by a step portion E121a formed on the peripheral portion of the front screen support E12 and a step portion E121b formed linearly across both ends in the lateral direction passing through the center portion.

As a result, the front screen member E11 housed in the holding recess E121 is brought into contact with and supported by the peripheral step E121a and the linear step E121b passing through the central portion, and is separated from the remaining deep portion. It is in a state. As a result, the deformation of the front screen support E12 in the deep portion is prevented from deforming the front screen member E11 and causing the projection surface E11a to be distorted.

The front screen support E12 has a first pattern surface E12a in a partial area around the projection surface E11a. The first pattern surface E12a is visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front exposure position. Further, the front screen support E12 has a second pattern surface E12b on the entire surface opposite to the first pattern surface E12a. The second pattern surface E12b is visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front standby position. The first pattern surface E12a and the second pattern surface E12b are three-dimensionally formed by unevenness, for example, a pattern related to a game effect.

The front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 configured as described above are formed separately and then integrated by being bonded with an adhesive. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 is in a state where the sink mark is mechanically separated from the front screen member E11 even if sink marks may occur due to molding shrinkage or the like when forming a pattern or the like on the front screen support base E12. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the front screen member E11 from being distorted due to sinking of the projection surface E11a.

The method of fixing the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 is not limited to bonding with an adhesive, but any method such as screw fastening can be adopted.

The flat panel forming the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 are each manufactured by injection molding. As a material for the flat panel forming the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12, a thermoplastic resin (for example, ABS resin) that may cause sink marks when injection molding is performed is appropriately adopted. it can.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Front screen drive mechanism E2)
The front screen mechanism E1 is rotatable by the driving force of the front screen drive mechanism E2. As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the front screen drive mechanism E2 includes a left front screen drive mechanism E2A connected to the lower surface of the left end portion of the front screen mechanism E1 and a right front screen drive mechanism E2 connected to the lower surface of the right end portion of the front screen mechanism E1. It has a front screen drive mechanism E2B.

As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B has a crank member E22, a crank gear E21, an intermediate gear E23, a motor shaft gear E24, and a drive motor E25. The crank member E22 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B has an upper end portion (one end portion) connected to the lower surface of the right end portion of the front screen mechanism E1. As shown in FIG. 25, the crank member E22 is rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 of FIG. 15 at the intermediate position E22a. As a result, the crank member E22 is rotatable at the upper end and the lower end (the other end) about the intermediate position E22a.

The crank member E22 has an upper region on the upper end side from the intermediate position E22a and a lower region on the lower end side from the intermediate position E22a. When the crank member E22 is viewed from the side as in FIG. 25, the center line in the upper region (a straight line that passes through the intermediate position E22a and the midpoint on the upper end side of the crank member E22) is vertically oriented in the standby posture. Is set to. On the other hand, the center line in the lower region (a straight line that passes through the intermediate position E22a and the midpoint on the lower end side of the crank member E22) is set so that the lower side inclines forward rather than the upper side in the standby posture.

A slide groove E22b is formed in the lower region of the crank member E22. The slide groove E22b is formed so that the groove wall surface E22b1 has a U-shape in a side view. The U-shape is composed of two straight line portions and a curved line portion connecting the ends of the two straight line portions. The two linear portions are formed in parallel, and the surface of the slide groove E22b corresponding to the linear portion of the groove wall surface E22b1 is set parallel to the center line of the lower region. A slide member E26 is movably engaged with the slide groove E22b. The groove width of the slide groove E22b (the distance between the two straight line portions) is substantially equal to the member width of the slide member E26, and is set to slide during movement. That is, the slide member E26 is always in contact with the groove wall surface E22b1 of the slide groove E22b. The upper end of the slide groove E22b is set so that the slide member E26 contacts the upper end surface (the surface corresponding to the curved portion) when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture. On the other hand, the lower end of the slide groove E22b is open so that a part of the slide member E26 can be exposed.

The slide member E26 is rotatably supported at the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21. The rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 is rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 shown in FIG. The rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 is a line segment connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby position or the exposed position, and the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the slide member. It is set so as to have a relationship orthogonal to the line segment connecting the center point of E26.

As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, even if a force acts in the direction of rotating the lower region of the crank member E22, the rotation center position is in the direction of giving all the components of this force. Since E21a exists and acts as a fixed end, the slide member E26 does not move. As a result, a truss structure is formed by a three-degree link having 0 degrees of freedom, in which the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 are fixed ends, and the slide member E26 is a free end. Even when the mechanism E1 is pushed by hand, the crank member E22 and the crank gear E21 act as a strong brake, so that the front screen mechanism E1 does not move.

An intermediate gear E23 is meshed with the crank gear E21. A motor shaft gear E24 is meshed with the intermediate gear E23. The drive shaft of the drive motor E25 is connected to the motor shaft gear E24. As a result, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B can transmit the rotational drive force of the drive motor E25 to the crank gear E21 via the motor shaft gear E24 and the intermediate gear E23.

Here, all components of the rotational driving force applied to the crank gear E21 coincide with the tangential direction of the turning locus of the slide member E26. Further, as shown in FIGS. 26 and 28, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby position or the exposed position, the line segment connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b is the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22. The tangential direction of the turning locus is parallel to the groove wall surface of the slide groove E22b of the crank member E22 because the tangential direction of the turning locus is set so as to be orthogonal to the line segment connecting the center point of the slide member E26. Accordingly, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, when a rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21, there is a groove wall surface that becomes a reaction force in the moving direction (tangential direction) of the slide member E26. Therefore, the crank gear E21 easily starts rotating.

When a rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21, the slide member E26 provided at the eccentric position E21b is movable along the slide groove E22b by sliding with the slide groove E22b. The intermediate position E22a and the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 are fixed ends, and the slide member E26 is a free end movable along the groove wall surface to form a two-degree-of-freedom link. Then, when the slide member E26 rotates, the crank member E22 having the slide groove E22b with which the slide member E26 is engaged rotates about the intermediate position E22a as a fulcrum to rotate the upper region of the crank member E22. Become. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 moves between the front standby position and the front exposure position.

Further, the moving speed of the front screen mechanism E1 is 0 in the stopped state when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, and the speed is gradually increased to an intermediate posture between the standby posture and the exposed posture (FIG. 27). After reaching the maximum speed, the speed gradually decreases, and the stopped state becomes 0 when the exposure posture and the standby posture are reached. As a result, the crank gear E21 can be started and stopped with a small angular acceleration (inertia moment), so that the torque required for the crank gear E21 can be reduced, and as a result, the drive mechanism ( It is possible to reduce breakdown and wear of the intermediate gear E23, the motor shaft gear E24, and the drive motor E25) due to overload.

As shown in FIG. 15, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B configured as described above has the same configuration as the left front screen drive mechanism E2A except for the motor shaft gear E24 and the drive motor E25. The left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are arranged symmetrically. The crank gear E21 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the crank gear E21 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are connected via the shaft member E3 so that the rotational driving force of the drive motor E25 is evenly applied. There is.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Reel screen mechanism F1)
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the reel screen mechanism F1 includes a reel screen portion F11 formed of a curved flat plate, a left reel screen support portion F12 connected to the left end of the reel screen portion F11, and a reel screen portion F11. And a right reel screen support portion F13 connected to the right end of the.

The reel screen portion F11 is curved in a shape similar to the rotation direction, and a pattern is formed on the back surface that is the rotation center side. The pattern on the back surface is visible to the player in front when the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel standby position. In addition, the surface of the reel screen portion F11 has a pattern formed on the peripheral portion, and the inner peripheral region of the peripheral portion serves as the projection surface. On the projection surface, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel exposure position, an image can be displayed by irradiation of irradiation light.

One ends of the left and right reel screen support parts F12 and F13 are connected to the reel screen part F11. On the other hand, the other end portions of the reel screen support portions F12 and F13 each have a protrusion not shown. The protruding portion horizontally protrudes to the outside of the reel screen support portions F12 and F13, and is connected to the reel screen drive mechanism F2 to serve as a rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Performance by screen device)
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, various effects are executed using the display unit 100 described above. Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1, by switching a plurality of screen mechanisms that cause an image to be displayed by the irradiation of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B, an effect using a planar image display and a sense of depth (stereoscopic effect) are obtained. It is possible to perform an effect using a certain image display and an effect using a curved image display.

For example, when the screen mechanism that causes an image to be emitted by the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is switched to the front screen mechanism E1, by causing the image to appear on the flat projection surface E11a, distortion occurs when the irradiation light is emitted. It is possible to make an image without the appearance appear, and it is possible to perform an effect using this flat image.

Further, for example, when the screen mechanism that causes an image to be displayed by the irradiation of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is switched to the fixed screen mechanism D, a plurality of reflecting portions included in the fixed screen mechanism D cause a sense of depth (stereoscopic effect). It is possible to cause a certain image to appear, and it is possible to perform an effect using this image with a sense of depth.

In addition, for example, when the screen mechanism for displaying an image by irradiation of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is switched to the reel screen mechanism F1, by displaying the image on the reel screen portion F11 formed of a curved flat plate, A curved image can be made to appear, and an effect using this curved image can be executed.

[Display Example of First Sub Display Device]
Next, the display screen displayed on the first sub display device 201 will be described. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a part of a display screen displayed on the first sub display device 201. As shown in FIG. 29, the first sub-display device 201 displays a plurality of display screens including a top screen 211, a menu screen 212, and game information screens 213, 214, and 215. The plurality of display screens are switched according to the operation of the player received via the touch sensor 201a.

The top screen 211 is an initial screen of the display screens displayed on the first sub display device 201, and displays a menu button 211a and a summary game history 211b. The menu button 211a is an operation button that calls the menu screen 212 by being operated (tapped) by the player. The outline game history 211b displays a part of the game history of the pachi-slot machine 1 (outline game history). In the present embodiment, as the outline game history, for example, the number of bonuses, the number of ARTs, and the number of games (number of games) in the pachi-slot machine 1 are displayed.

The menu screen 212 is a menu of the display screen displayed on the first sub display device 201, and includes a return button 212a, a registration button 212b, an explanation button 212c, an array payout button 212d, a reach button 212e, and a WEB. A site button 212f and a volume button 212g are displayed. The return button 212a is an operation button that calls the top screen 211 when operated by the player. Further, the registration button 212b to the volume button 212g are operation buttons that are called by the player to call up the corresponding display screens.

For example, when the registration button 212b is operated by the player, a registration screen (not shown) for registering the player who is playing the game is called. With pachi-slot machines of recent years, a service is widely used in which a player is registered for each model and various information such as the achievement status of a predetermined mission is managed based on the player's past game history. .. The registration screen called by the registration button 212b is a display screen for registering a player when receiving the provision of this service.

Further, when the explanation button 212c is operated by the player, an explanation screen (not shown) of the pachi-slot machine 1 is called. The contents to be explained on the explanation screen include, for example, a description of the specifications of the pachi-slot machine 1 such as a bonus winning probability and an ART winning probability for each set value, and introduction of characters appearing in the effect of the pachi-slot machine 1.

When the player operates the array payout button 212d, the array payout screen (not shown) of the pachi-slot machine 1 is called. On the array payout screen, for example, a correspondence relationship (payout table) between a combination of symbols determined to be a prize in the pachi-slot machine 1 and a privilege when a prize is determined, and symbols drawn on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R Rows (reel arrangement) etc. are displayed.

Further, when the reach eye button 212e is operated by the player, the reach eye screen (not shown) of the pachi-slot machine 1 is called. The reach eyes of the pachi-slot machine 1 are displayed on the reach eye screen. The reach eye is a combination of symbols to which a special privilege is given by being displayed along the activated line. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the reach eye lip shown in FIG. 35 and FIG. The combination of symbols is applicable. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the combination of the symbols of the reach-eye lip is displayed along the activated line, thereafter, a state advantageous to the player (for example, bonus state, normal ART or CT (FIG. 33). See))) will be decided to move to.

When the WEB site button 212f is operated by the player, the WEB introduction screen (not shown) of the pachi-slot machine 1 is called. On the WEB introduction screen, a two-dimensional code (for example, a QR code (registered trademark)) indicating the URL of any WEB site such as a special WEB site provided for each model of the pachi-slot machine 1 or a WEB site of the manufacturer of the pachi-slot machine 1 Is displayed. The player can access the corresponding WEB site by reading the two-dimensional code displayed on the WEB introduction screen with a mobile phone or the like.

When the volume button 212g is operated by the player, a volume adjustment screen (not shown) for adjusting the volume of the sound output from the speakers 9L and 9R is called. The player can adjust the volume of the effect sound of the pachi-slot machine 1 via the volume adjustment screen.

Here, since the first sub display device 201 is provided separately from the display unit 100 that performs the effect, it can be controlled separately from the display unit 100, and during the game (that is, the effect is executed by the display unit 100). Even if it is “medium”, the display of the first sub display device 201 can be switched. For the player, for example, there is a case where he or she wants to know the character that appears in the effect on the display unit 100. In such a case, by operating the explanation button 212c and calling the explanation screen, the relationship between the characters and the like can be understood. Can be grasped during the game. In addition, the player may want to grasp the symbols that should be used as a guide for winning the rare combination during the reel rotation when the so-called rare combination is won. In such a case, the array payout button 212d It is possible to grasp the reel arrangement by operating the and the arrangement payout screen.

The game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are display screens that display a detailed game history including a summary game history displayed on the top screen of the game history of the pachi-slot machine 1. The game information screen 213 displays a return button 213a, a menu button 213b, a previous button 213c, a next button 213d, and a game history 213e. The return button 213a and the menu button 213b are operation buttons that call the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212, respectively, when operated by the player. Further, the front button 213c and the next button 213d are operation buttons for switching the game information screen by being operated by the player, and when the front button 213c is operated, the game information screen 213 is switched to the game information screen. When the display screen is switched to 215 and the next button 213d is operated, the display screen is switched from the game information screen 213 to the game information screen 214. Further, the game history 213e displays the number of bonuses, the number of ARTs, and the number of games (number of games) in the pachi-slot machine 1.

The game information screen 214 displays a return button 214a, a menu button 214b, a previous button 214c, a next button 214d, and a game history 214e. The return button 214a and the menu button 214b are operation buttons that call the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212, respectively, when operated by the player. Further, the forward button 214c and the next button 214d are operation buttons that are operated by the player to switch the game information screen in a predetermined order. Further, the game history 214e displays the number of CZ (chance zone) rushes and the number of successes in the pachi-slot machine 1. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, since CZ1, CZ2, and CZ3 are included as CZ, the number of rushes and the number of successes of CZ1 to CZ1 are displayed in the game history 214e.

The game information screen 215 displays a return button 215a, a menu button 215b, a previous button 215c, a next button 215d, and a game history 215e. The return button 215a and the menu button 215b are operation buttons that are called by the player to call the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212, respectively. Further, the previous button 215c and the next button 215d are operation buttons that are operated by the player to switch the game information screens in a predetermined order. Further, the game history 215e displays the number of winnings of a so-called small winning combination in the pachi-slot machine 1 and the winning probability (fraction where the numerator is 1).

The display screens displayed on the first sub-display device 201 may be switched based on a tap operation on the operation buttons displayed on the respective display screens, or may be switched based on a swipe operation on the display screens. May be

[Circuit Structure of Pachi-Slot Machine]
The structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 has been described above. Next, with reference to FIG. 30 and FIG. 31, a configuration of a circuit included in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a main control board 71, a sub-control board 72, an external centralized terminal board 73 electrically connected to these, and a peripheral device (actuator).

<Main control board>
FIG. 30 shows an electrical configuration mainly including the main control board 71 of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

(Microcomputer)
The main control board 71 mainly includes the microcomputer 30 installed on the circuit board. The microcomputer 30 includes a CPU (hereinafter, main CPU) 31, a ROM (hereinafter, main ROM) 32, and a RAM (hereinafter, main RAM) 33.

The main ROM 32 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 31, a data table such as an internal lottery table, and data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control board 72. The main RAM 33 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing the control program.

(Random number generator, etc.)
A clock pulse generation circuit 34, a frequency divider 35, a random number generator 36, and a sampling circuit 37 are connected to the main CPU 31. The clock pulse generation circuit 34 and the frequency divider 35 generate clock pulses.

The main CPU 31 executes the control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 36 generates a random number within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 37 extracts at least one value from the generated random numbers according to the purpose.

(Peripheral devices and circuits)
The peripheral devices whose operations are controlled by the microcomputer 30 include stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R and a medal payout device (hereinafter referred to as a hopper) 40. Further, at the input/output port of the microcomputer 30, a motor drive circuit 39 for controlling the operation of each peripheral device, a hopper drive circuit 41, a reel position detection circuit 50, a payout completion signal circuit 51, an external centralized terminal board 73, and Various circuits such as the door relay board 74 and various boards are connected.

The motor drive circuit 39 constitutes a symbol variation means and controls the drive of the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. That is, the motor drive circuit 39 changes the symbols displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R by rotating the reels 3L, 3C, 3R based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition.

The reel position detection circuit 50 detects a reel index indicating that the reels 3L, 3C, 3R have completed one rotation, by an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, according to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. Here, the reel index is information indicating that the reels 3L, 3C, 3R have completed one rotation.

The stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R have a configuration in which the momentum is proportional to the number of output pulses and the rotation axis can be stopped at a designated angle. The driving force of the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R is transmitted to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. Each time a pulse is output to the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R once, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R rotate at a constant angle.

After detecting the reel index, the main CPU 31 counts the number of times pulses are output to the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. As a result, the main CPU 31 manages the rotation angle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (mainly, how many symbols the reel has rotated).

Next, the management of the rotation angle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 33. Then, every time the pulse counter counts the output of a predetermined number of pulses necessary for the rotation of one symbol, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 33 is incremented by one. The symbol counter is provided for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel position detection circuit 50 detects the reel index.

That is, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 31 manages the symbol counter to manage how many symbols are rotated after the reel index is detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is detected with reference to the position at which the reel index is detected.

The hopper drive circuit 41 controls the operation of the hopper 40. In addition, the payout completion signal circuit 51 manages the detection of medals performed by the medal detection unit 40S provided in the hopper 40, and checks whether or not the number of medals paid out from the hopper 40 to the outside has reached the payout number. ..

(External centralized terminal board)
The external centralized terminal board 73 receives signals such as the number of inserted/dispensed medals from the main control board 71, the number of games played, and bonus operation presence/absence information, and displays these signals on the number of games played and the number of bonus operations. Output to an external display or host computer in the game hall. The external display is installed, for example, above the pachi-slot machine 1, and updates the display in conjunction with the progress of the number of games and bonus operation, and notifies the bonus operation by a lamp or the like.

Here, the medal insertion signal is a signal that enables recognition of medal insertion, and is output when the start lever 6 is operated. The medal payout signal is a signal that enables recognition of medal payout or replay, and is output at the time of medal payout (including credit storage) or at the time of replay operation.

(Door relay board)
The door relay board 74 is a board that relays wiring between the main control board 71 and various buttons and switches and the information display 14. Further, the door relay board 74 is connected to the sub control board 72 via the sub relay board 75. The door relay board 74 is connected so that information can be transmitted only to the sub relay board 75, and the sub relay board 75 does not transmit information. As a result, the one-way communication between the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 is such that information can be transmitted only from the main control board 71 to the sub-control board 72.

A start switch 6S, a stop switch 7S, a medal sensor 42S, a MAX bet switch 11S, a bet switch (not shown), and a settlement switch 13S are connected to the door relay board 74.

The start switch 6S constitutes a start operation detecting means and detects that the start lever 6 has been operated by the player (start operation). Further, the stop switch 7S constitutes stop operation detecting means, and detects that each of the three stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R has been pressed by the player (stop operation).

The medal sensor 42S detects that the medal received in the medal insertion slot 22 has passed through the selector. Further, the MAX bet switch 11S detects that the MAX bet button 11 has been pressed by the player. Further, the 1 bet switch detects that the 1 bet button has been pressed by the player. The main CPU 31 activates the activated line based on the detection result of the medal sensor 42S or the MAX bet switch 11S and the 1 bet switch. The settlement switch 13S detects that the settlement button 13 has been pressed by the player.

Further, the door relay board 74 is provided inside each of the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R, and the stop button internal LEDs 107L, 107C, and 107R for displaying the receiving states of these are uniquely set for the number of medals and an advantageous stop operation. Is connected to the information display device 14 (instruction monitor).

<Sub control board>
FIG. 31 shows an electrical configuration mainly including the sub control board 72 of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. The sub control board 72 is electrically connected to the main control board 71 and performs processing such as determination and execution of effect contents based on a command transmitted from the main control board 71.

The sub-control board 72 basically includes a CPU (hereinafter, sub CPU) 81, a ROM cartridge board 82, a RAM (hereinafter, sub RAM) 83, a rendering processor 84, a drawing RAM 85, and a driver 86.

The sub CPU 81 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge board 82 in response to the command transmitted from the main control board 71. The ROM cartridge board 82 basically has a program storage area and a data storage area.

Various control programs executed by the sub CPU 81 are stored in the program storage area. In the control program stored in the program storage area, for example, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control board 71, a random number value for effect is extracted to determine effect contents (effect data), and An effect registration task for performing registration, a drawing control task for controlling display of an image by the display unit 100 based on the determined effect contents, a lamp control task for controlling light output by various LEDs 101, a speaker 9L, A program such as a voice control task for controlling the sound output by 9R is included.

In the data storage area, for example, a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data forming various effect contents, a storage area for storing animation data related to image creation, sound data regarding BGM and sound effects. And various storage areas such as a storage area for storing lamp data relating to a pattern of turning on/off light.

The sub RAM 83 has a storage area for registering the determined effect contents and effect data, a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control board 71, and the like.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the display unit 100, the first sub display device 201, and the second sub display device 202 are connected to the sub control substrate 72 via a predetermined relay substrate. For example, the sub-control board 72 has a accessory relay board (not shown) connected to the display unit 100, and a first sub-display apparatus 201 and a second sub-display apparatus via a liquid crystal relay circuit (not shown). It is connected to 202. The display unit 100, the first sub display device 201, and the second sub display device 202 are individually controlled under the control of the sub control board 72.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30, a sub relay board 75 is provided between the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72, and relays the wiring connecting the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72. Further, the sub relay board 75 connects the sub control board 72 and various peripheral devices by relaying the wiring that connects the sub control board 72 and a plurality of boards arranged around the sub control board 72. .. For example, the sub relay board 75 connects the sub control board 72 to the various LEDs 101, the reel illuminator 102, and the bet button LED 103 via an LED board (not shown). The sub relay board 75 connects the sub control board 72 to the speakers 9L and 9R via a sound I/O board (not shown), and the sub control board via a touch sensor relay board (not shown). 72 and the touch sensor 201a are connected.

[Pachislot machine game state transition flow]
Next, with reference to FIG. 32 and FIG. 33, a game state controlled by the main control board 71 (main CPU 31) of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment and its transition flow will be described.

<Basic game state transition flow>
In the present embodiment, the main control board 71 manages the gaming state based on the presence/absence of a bonus winning/actuation, the type of the internal winning combination relating to the replay, and the winning probability thereof. As shown in FIG. 32, the main control board 71 distinguishes the bonus non-winning state, the inter-flag state, and the bonus state based on whether or not the bonus (F_BB1, 2,) is won/actuated. Specifically, the bonus non-winning state is a state where the bonus is non-winning and the bonus is not activated, and the inter-flag state is the bonus winning state and the bonus is not operating, and the bonus state is Indicates that the bonus is operating.

Whether or not the bonus is won is managed based on the data stored in the internal winning combination storing area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 33, and whether or not the bonus is activated is provided in the main RAM 33. It is managed based on the data stored in the storage area (not shown). Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a bonus-related winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the bonus-related winning combination is carried over as an internal winning combination over a plurality of games until the bonus is activated. The inter-flag state is a state in which the bonus combination is carried over as an internal winning combination.

Further, the main control board 71 provides six types of states, RT0 gaming state to RT5 gaming state, in which the types of internal winning combinations related to replay and the winning probabilities thereof are different from each other. Note that the RT0 gaming state, the RT2 gaming state, and the RT5 gaming state are gaming states in which the probability of a replay combination being determined as an internal winning combination is low, and the RT1 gaming state is a replay combination being an internal winning combination. Is a gaming state in which the probability of being determined as is a medium probability. The RT3 gaming state and the RT4 gaming state are gaming states in which there is a high probability that the winning combination associated with replay is determined as an internal winning combination.

These RT0 gaming state to RT5 gaming state are managed based on data stored in a gaming state flag storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 33. Specifically, the pachi-slot machine 1 has five flags, RT1 gaming status flag to RT5 gaming status flag, and manages the RT gaming status by managing ON/OFF of these flags in the main RAM 33. More specifically, the main control board 71 specifies the RT game state according to the RT game state flag that is ON as the current RT game state. When all the RT game status flags are off, the main control board 71 specifies that the current RT game status is the RT1 game status.

As shown in FIG. 32, when the winning combination (F_BB1,2) is determined as the internal winning combination in the (1) bonus non-winning state, the main control board 71 changes from the bonus non-winning state to the inter-flag state. Transition state. Then, the main control board 71 shifts the game state from the inter-flag state to the bonus state when a bonus winning combination is won in the (2) inter-flag state.

Further, the main control board 71 ends the bonus state and shifts the game state from the bonus state to the RT1 gaming state when the number of medals paid out exceeds the specified number (216) in the (3) bonus state. In this RT1 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT1 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state when 20 games (4) have passed, and (5) Bell spill is displayed before 20 games have passed. Then, the game state is shifted from the RT1 game state to the RT2 game state. Also, in the RT0 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT0 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state when the (5) bell spill is displayed.

Further, the main control board 71, (6) RT3 transition state is displayed in the RT2 game state, the RT2 transition state is transferred from the RT2 game state to the RT3 game state, and the RT4 transition lip is displayed in the (7) RT3 game state. Then, the game state is shifted from the RT3 game state to the RT4 game state. Further, the main control board 71 (8) when the bell spill or the RT2 transition lip is displayed in the RT3 gaming state, shifts the gaming state from the RT3 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state, and similarly in the RT4 gaming state. When the spilled eye or the RT2 transition lip is displayed, the gaming state is shifted from the RT4 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state.

Here, the bell spill is determined for each type of push order bell when a push order bell (F_3 choice bell_1st, F_3 choice bell_2nd, F_3 choice bell_3rd), which will be described later, is determined as an internal winning combination. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is incorrect in the order of pressing. In addition, the RT2 transition rips are in the pushing order determined for each type of maintenance lips when the maintenance rips (F_maintenance rep_1st, F_maintenance rep_2nd, F_maintenance rep_3rd), which will be described later, are determined as the internal winning combination. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct. In addition, the RT3 transition rips, in the case where RT3 reps (F_RT3 rep_1st, F_RT3 rep_213, F_RT3 rep_231, F_RT3 rep_3rd), which will be described later, are determined as the internal winning combination, the pressing order determined for each type of the RT3 rep. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct. In addition, the RT4 transition rips, in the case where the RT4 rep (F_RT4 rep_123, F_RT4 rep_132, F_RT4 rep_2nd, F_RT4 rep_3rd), which will be described later, are determined as the internal winning combination, the pressing order determined for each type of the RT4 rep. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct.

<Game state transition flow regarding presence/absence of notification>
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 manages the game state based on whether or not the bonus is won/operated, the type of the internal winning combination related to the replay, and the winning probability thereof, while notifying the stop operation advantageous to the player. The game state is managed based on whether or not to play. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a transition flow of the game state regarding presence/absence of notification.

As shown in FIG. 33, the main control board 71 of the pachi-slot machine 1 distinguishes between the normal game state and the ART game state based on the presence or absence of the notification. The general game state is basically a game state in which the contents of the stop operation advantageous to the player are not notified (non-ART), and is a disadvantageous game state to the player. On the contrary, the ART game state is a game state in which a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, and is a game state advantageous to the player. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player plays the game so as to shift from the general game state (while sandwiching the bonus state depending on the situation) to the ART game state advantageous to the player. ..

The general gaming state is a gaming state in which the RT0 to RT4 gaming states are unwinned in ART. As shown in FIG. 33, the normal game state is composed of a normal game state and CZ (chance zone). The normal gaming state and the CZ are gaming states in which the destination gaming states are different from each other. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming state is changed from the normal gaming state to the CZ, and from the CZ to the ART gaming state. Is done.

The normal game state is the most unfavorable game state in the pachi-slot machine 1, and as shown in FIG. 33, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal game state to CZ. Specifically, in the normal game state, a lottery for shifting to CZ is performed, and (A) When this shift lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the game state from the normal game state to CZ.

CZ is a gaming state (chance zone) with a high degree of expectation of shifting to the ART gaming state, and as shown in FIG. 33, there is a possibility of shifting from the CZ to the normal gaming state or the ART gaming state. Specifically, in CZ, a lottery for transitioning to ART is performed, and (B) When this transition lottery is not won, the main control board 71 shifts the game state from CZ to the normal game state, and (C) When the transfer lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the game state from the CZ to the ART game state (normal ART or CT) via the ART preparation.

Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the ART gaming state is basically a gaming state in which the RT4 gaming state is winning the ART, and starts after the RT gaming state shifts to the RT4 gaming state after the ART winning. As shown in FIG. 32, since the RT4 gaming state is to be transferred from the RT0 to RT2 gaming states via the RT3 gaming state, the ART gaming state is not started immediately even after the ART winning. Absent. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the period until the transition to the RT4 gaming state after the winning of the ART is set as the ART preparation, and the stop operation necessary for the transition to the RT4 gaming state is notified during the ART preparation.

Subsequently, the ART gaming state is basically a gaming state where the ART is winning in the RT4 gaming state. As shown in FIG. 33, the ART gaming state is usually composed of ART and CT. Normal ART and CT are game states with different playability, and normal ART is a stop operation advantageous to the player for a predetermined number of games (for example, to display a combination of symbols with a large number of medals to be paid out). Is a game state in which a stop operation and a stop operation necessary to maintain the RT4 game state are notified), and CT is a notification of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player, and a normal ART duration is added to the addition. It is a game state that functions as a chance zone. During CT, a game is usually played without digesting the duration of ART.

As shown in FIG. 33, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal ART to the CT or the general game state. Specifically, in the normal ART, the transfer lottery to the CT is carried out. (D) If the transfer lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the game state from the normal ART to the CT. Further, the normal ART is managed for the duration, and (E) When this duration is over, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the normal ART to the normal gaming state (normal gaming state or CZ). Note that the method of managing the duration of the normal ART is arbitrary, but the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment manages the duration according to the number of games. Of course, the duration may be managed not by the number of games but by the number of medals paid out during the normal ART and the number of differences, and the number of notifications affecting the payout of medals during the normal ART (navi The duration may be managed according to the number of times.

As shown in FIG. 33, there is a possibility of shifting from CT to normal ART. Specifically, the duration of CT is managed, and (F) When this duration is over, the main control board 71 shifts the game state from CT to normal ART. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, CT is managed by the duration of one set of eight games, which will be described later in detail (see FIG. 63).

Further, as shown in FIG. 33, there is a possibility of shifting to the bonus state from the normal game state (normal game state or CZ) and the ART game state (normal ART or CT). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 32, (2) when a bonus winning combination is won in the general gaming state and the ART gaming state, the main control board 71 changes the gaming state from the general gaming state or the ART gaming state to the bonus state. To migrate.

In the bonus state, the transfer lottery to the ART is performed, and (G) When this transfer lottery is not won, the main control board 71 shifts the game state from the bonus state to the normal game state (normal game state or CZ). (However, when the ART game state (normal ART or CT) has been shifted to the bonus state, the main control board 71 is changed from the bonus state to the ART game state (normal ART or CT even if the transition lottery is not won. ) To move the game state). Further, (H) When the transfer lottery in the bonus state is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT). As described above, when the bonus state is over, the RT1 game state is entered. Therefore, when the game state is transitioned from the bonus state to the ART game state, the main control board 71 is in the ART preparation state. The game state is transferred to the ART game state via.

[Various data tables on the main control side]
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the main ROM 32 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 74.

<Design placement table>
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 34 represents the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R by data. The symbol arrangement table defines a correspondence relationship between 20 symbol positions “0” to “19” and symbols corresponding to each of these symbol positions.

The symbol positions “0” to “19” indicate the positions of the symbols arranged along the rotation direction in each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbols corresponding to the symbol positions “0” to “19” can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

As the types of symbols, "white 7", "blue 7", "chili top 1", "chili top 2", "chili bottom", "replay", "hat", "cactus 1", "cactus 2" And "Cactus 3" are included.

The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 34 assigns the symbol located in the middle stage of the display window 4 when the reel index is detected (the symbol passing through the middle stage of the display window 4) to the symbol position “0”, and the reel 3L. 3C, 3R, in the order of movement in the rotation direction, the correspondence relationship is assigned in which the symbol positions “0” to “19” are assigned to each of the 20 symbols.

In this way, by using the middle stage of the display window 4 as a reference, the type of symbols located in the middle stage of the display window 4 can be specified for each of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

<Design code table>
Further, as shown in FIG. 34, each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is specified by a symbol code table and distinguished by 1 byte (8 bits) data. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 34 shows codes for specifying the symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

The symbols used in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment are, as described above, "white 7", "blue 7", "chili top 1", "chili top 2", "chili bottom", "replay", "hat". , “Cactus 1”, “Cactus 2”, and “Cactus 3”.

In the symbol code table, "00000001" is assigned as data to the "white 7" symbol (symbol code 1). "00000010" is assigned as data to the "blue 7" symbol (symbol code 2). "00000011" is assigned as data to the "Chile 1" symbol (symbol code 3).

Similarly, for each pattern (design code 4 to 10) of "Chile top 2", "Chile bottom", "Replay", "Hat", "Cactus 1", "Cactus 2" and "Cactus 3". , “0000100” to “00001010” are assigned as data.

<Design combination table>
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 38. The symbol combination table is a combination of symbols determined in advance according to the type of privilege (combination), data to be stored in the main RAM 33 when the symbol combination is displayed, and a combination of the symbol is displayed. The corresponding relationship with the privilege (the number of medals paid out) is defined.

In the present embodiment, the winning combination is determined when the symbol combination displayed along the activated line matches the symbol combination (combination) defined in the symbol combination table. Then, when it is determined that the prize is won, the player is provided with benefits such as payout of medals, operation of replay (replay), and operation of bonus game (feature continuous operation device). In addition, when the symbol combination displayed along the activated line does not match any of the symbol combinations defined in the symbol combination table, the so-called “out” occurs. In other words, in the present embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to “off” is not defined in the symbol combination table, so that the symbol combination “out” is defined. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the “combination” item may be directly defined by providing a “combination” item in the symbol combination table.

The data column in the symbol combination table defines information for identifying the symbol combinations displayed along the activated line. Specifically, in the data column, "storage area" in which data of the corresponding symbol combination is stored, and "data (bit corresponding to the symbol combination in 1-byte data are stored in the storage area. Data for specifying))" is defined. In the present embodiment, by using 22 1-byte storage areas, each symbol combination is determined. For example, “C_BB1” shown in FIG. 35 is determined by storing 1 in bit 1 of storage area 0.

The combination defined in the symbol combination table means the symbol combination of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R displayed along the activated line when each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped. For each combination, a combination name is defined according to the role of the combination and the type of symbols forming the combination.

The payout number defined in the symbol combination table defines the number of medals to be paid out when the corresponding symbol combination (combination) is displayed. For example, referring to FIG. 37, if the combination name “C_9 coins A_01” is displayed, nine medals will be paid out.

Further, the content column in the symbol combination table indicates the role of each symbol combination and the feature of each symbol combination. With reference to FIG. 35, for example, the combination names “C_BB1” and “C_BB2” are combinations of symbols related to BB, and when displayed along the activated line, the gaming state shifts to the bonus state (see FIG. 32). ).

The combination names “R_RT transition eye A_01” to “R_RT transition eye B_02” are bell spilled eyes. When the bell spill is displayed along the activated line, the RT game state shifts to the RT2 game state (see FIG. 32).

The combination names "C_maintenance rep A_01" to "C_maintenance rep G_01" are replays. The replay is a combination of symbols in which "replay-replay-replay" is displayed on any of the three lines of the bottom line, top line, or cross-down line displayed on the display window 4. When the replay is displayed along the activated line, the replay is activated.

The combination names “C_RT2 Lip A_01” and “C_RT2 Lip A_02” are RT2 transition Lips. The RT2 transition lip is a combination of symbols in which "Replay-Replay-Replay" is displayed in the cross-up line displayed in the display window 4. When the RT2 transition lip is displayed along the activated line, the re-game operation is performed and the RT game state shifts to the RT2 game state (see FIG. 32).

Further, the combination name “C_RT3 Lip_01” is an RT3 migration Lip. The RT3 transition lip is a combination of symbols in which "replay-replay-replay" is displayed on the center line (effective line) displayed on the display window 4. When the RT3 transition lip is displayed along the activated line, the re-game operation is performed and the RT game state shifts to the RT3 game state (see FIG. 32).

The combination names “C_RT4 Lip A_01” to “C_RT4 Lip D_02” are RT4 transition Lips. When the RT4 transition lip is displayed along the activated line, the re-game operation is performed and the RT game state shifts to the RT4 game state (see FIG. 32).

Further, the combination names “C_Chillilip A_01” to “C_1 definite Chilelip D_01” are Chilelip. The chili lip is a combination of symbols in which chili symbols are displayed in the display window 4. Here, as shown in FIG. 34, in the present embodiment, the symbol “upper dust 1” and the symbol “lower dust” are arranged continuously on each reel. The Chile design is a name when the design “Chile top 1” and the design “Chile bottom” are regarded as one design. When the Chilelip is displayed along the activated line, the re-game is activated.

The combination name “C_Chillilip A_01” among the chilirips is a combination of symbols in which the chili symbols are displayed only on one reel among the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R displayed in the display window 4. Sometimes called "single lip". The combination name “C_Chililip B_01” and “C_Chililip C_01” among the Chilelips is a combination of symbols in which the Chile symbols are displayed on two reels 3L, 3C, 3R displayed in the display window 4. Yes, and in the following, it may be referred to as "double chili lip." Further, among the chillips, the combination names “C_chillip D_01” to “C_1 definite chillip D_01” are combinations of symbols in which the Chile symbols are displayed on all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R displayed on the display window 4 (or It is a combination of symbols displayed when the stop operation for displaying the combination of symbols fails (so-called, when the user presses a wrong button), and may be referred to as a "three consecutive chili lip" hereinafter.

Further, the combination names “C_reach eye lip A_01” to “C_reach eye lip P_02” are reach eye lip. The reach eye lip is a so-called reach eye and is a symbol combination in which a special symbol combination is displayed in the display window 4L. For example, the combination name “C_reach eye lip A_01” is a combination of symbols in which “white 7-white 7-white 7” is displayed along the top line. When the reach eye lip is displayed along the activated line, the re-game is activated.

Further, the combination names “C_RB combination A_01” to “C_RB combination G_02” are the ninth in BB. When the ninth coin out of the BB is displayed along the activated line, nine medals are paid out. In addition, among the 9 out of the BB, the combination of symbols excluding the combination name “C_RB role C_01” and “C_RB role C_02” is 7 symbols in any of the 5 lines displayed in the display window 4 (the symbol “White 7” or the symbol “blue 7”) is a combination of symbols displayed side by side (or a combination of symbols displayed when the stop operation for displaying the symbol combination fails), Hereinafter, it may be referred to as "7 in BB". On the other hand, the combination names “C_RB role C_01” and “C_RB role C_02” are combinations of symbols in which two 7 symbols are displayed side by side on any of the 5 lines, and in the following, “7 in BB” May be called.

The combination names “C_9 sheets A_01” to “C_9 sheets H_04” are bells. The bell is a combination of symbols in which "hat-hat-hat" is displayed on any of the five lines displayed on the display window 4. When the bell is displayed along the activated line, nine medals are paid out.

The combination names "C_1st_A_01" to "C_2nd_B_04" are the first sheets. When the first coin is displayed along the activated line, one medal is paid out. Further, the combination names “C_SP1_01” and “C_SP2_01” are confirmed results. When the confirmed outcome is displayed along the activated line, one medal is paid out.

The combination names “C_3 sheets A_01” to “C_3 sheets F_01” are cacti. When the cactus is displayed along the activated line, three medals are paid out. Further, the combination names “C_weak 2 pieces A_01” to “C_weak 2 pieces B_03” are weak cherries, and the combination names “C_strong 2 pieces A_01” to “C_strong 2 pieces C_09” are strong cherries. When a weak cherry or a strong cherry is displayed along the activated line, two medals are paid out.

<Internal lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 39 and FIG. 40, an internal lottery table that is referred to when determining an internal winning combination will be described. The internal lottery table is provided for each gaming state and defines the lottery value information corresponding to each winning combination. 39 is an internal lottery table referred to in each of the RT0 gaming state to RT4 gaming state, and FIG. 40 is an internal lottery table referred to in the RT5 gaming state or bonus state.

In the present embodiment, random number values for lottery extracted from a predetermined numerical value range “0 to 65535” are sequentially subtracted by lottery values according to each winning combination, and whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative ( An internal lottery is performed by determining whether or not a so-called "carriage" has occurred.

Therefore, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the winning combination assigned thereto will be determined as the internal winning combination. That is, the winning probability of each number can be represented by "lottery value corresponding to each number/the number of all random number values that may be extracted (65536)".

In the internal lottery table, basically, the type of winning combination and the winning probability associated with the replay determined as the internal winning combination is changed according to the type of the RT gaming state. By comparing the internal lottery tables of the RT0 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state shown in FIG. 39, it can be seen that the types and winning probabilities of the replays determined as the internal winning combinations are different in each gaming state. As the most characteristic point, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, "F_chiririp (No.25)" to "F_reach eye lip D (No.31)" are internally won in the RT0 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state. It is determined as an internal winning combination only in the RT4 gaming state without being determined as a combination. In the pachi-slot machine 1, in the RT4 game state, when "F_chiririp (No.25)" to "F_reach eye lip D (No.31)" are determined as the internal winning combination, peculiar control (described later) Flag conversion), but this specific control will be described later.

Even in the RT0 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state, the “F_reach-eye lip A to D” may be determined as an internal winning combination together with the “F_BB1, 2” (No. 3 to 6, No. 15-18), “F_reach-eye lip AD” is not determined as an internal winning combination alone. Therefore, when "F_reach eye Lips AD" is determined as an internal winning combination during the RT0 game state to RT3 game state (a combination of symbols corresponding to "F_reach eye Lips AD" is seen from the player). When displayed), the bonus winning combination (F_BB1,2) is simultaneously determined as the internal winning combination.

In addition, the RT5 gaming state, which is the state between flags, carries over the bonus-related winning combination as an internal winning combination. Therefore, in the internal lottery table in the RT5 gaming state shown in FIG. 40, the winning combination relating to the carried-over bonus is always determined as the internal winning combination.

<Comparison table of internal winning combination and symbol combination>
41 to 46 are comparative tables showing a correspondence relationship with a symbol combination (combination) that can be displayed on the activated line in each internal winning combination when each winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination. A circle in each correspondence table indicates a combination (combination) of symbols that can be displayed on the activated line in the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination.

In the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 changes the stop control according to the internal winning combination and the gaming state, and when a predetermined winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the correspondence relationship shown in FIGS. The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped so that a symbol combination (combination) can be displayed. The correspondence tables shown in FIG. 42 to FIG. 48 list combinations of all symbols that may be displayed when the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, but circle marks corresponding to the winning combinations. Even if it is a combination of symbols marked with, it may not be displayed.

That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the stop control (for example, the symbol to be preferentially drawn in) is made different depending on the combination of symbols that can be stopped and displayed and the current game state, and the circle to be preferentially drawn in is circled. Even a combination of marked symbols may not be displayed. Therefore, the correspondence between the combination of the winning combination and the combination of symbols actually stopped and displayed is shown in FIGS. 47 and 48.

<Correspondence between the winning combination during non-flag and the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state>
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship (a part of the combinations is omitted) between the winning combination in the gaming state excluding the state between flags and the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state. In the pachi-slot machine 1, as a plurality of winning combinations, a "pushing winning combination", which is a combination in which the combination of symbols displayed is different depending on the order (pressing order) of stop operations, is provided. The symbol combination associated with the “press order correct answer” in FIG. 47 is a symbol combination that is advantageous to the player among the symbol combinations displayed according to the pressing order, and corresponds to “incorrect press order”. The attached symbol combination is a symbol combination that is disadvantageous to the player among the symbol combinations displayed according to the pressing order. When notifying a stop operation that is advantageous for the player, the pressing order that is the correct answer is notified, and as a result, the combination of symbols associated with the "press order correct answer" is displayed. It should be noted that even in the ART game state, the pushing order which is an incorrect answer may be notified, which will be described later in detail.

Here, in the present embodiment, the end of the name of the push forward combination represents the correct push order. Specifically, the end "1st" of the combination name means that the correct pressing order is for the first reel stop operation on the left reel 3L, and the end "2nd" of the combination name is The correct pushing order means that the first stop operation is for the middle reel 3C, and the ending "3rd" of the winning combination name indicates that the correct pushing order is the first stop operation for the right reel. It is meant for 3R. Further, the ending "123" of the combination name means that the correct pressing order is "left, middle, right", and the ending "132" of the combination name is the correct pressing order is "left". , Right, middle ", and the end of the combination name "213" means that the correct answer is "middle, left, right", and the end of the combination name "231" Means that the correct pushing order is "left, right, middle".

As shown in FIG. 47, the combination “F_Cililip” is a combination in which the symbols displayed are different depending on the pressing order. When the pressing order is correct, the combination of FIG. 41 of the Chilelip (see FIG. 35) is displayed. ~ Any one of the combinations of displayable symbols shown in Fig. 46 is displayed along the activated line, and if the pressing order is not correct, refer to Figs. 41 to 46 of the replay (see Fig. 35). Any of the displayable symbol combinations shown is displayed along the activated line. 41 to 46, the combination "F_Chillilip" cannot display the triple chililip ("C_chililip D_01" to "C_1 accurate chililip D_01"), and the single chililip or the double chililip ("C_chililip" is not displayed. It can be seen that only A_01”, “C_chillip B_01”, and “C_chillip C_01”) can be displayed. That is, the winning combination “F_Chillip” is a winning combination that cannot display three consecutive Chilerips.

In addition, the combination “F_probable chililip” and “F_1 probable chililip” are different combinations of symbols to be displayed according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, among the chililip (see FIG. 35). If any of the combinations of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 are displayed along the activated line, and if the pressing order is not the correct answer, then FIG. 41 to FIG. Any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in 46 is displayed along the activated line. 41 to 46, it can be seen that the combination “F_probable chililip” and “F_1 probable chililip” can display three consecutive chilirips. That is, the winning combination “F_probable chililip” and “F_1 probable chililip” is a combination that can display three consecutive chilirips.

In addition, the combinations “F_reach-eye lip A” to “F_reach-eye lip D” have different combinations of symbols to be displayed according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, the reach-eye lip ( (See FIGS. 35 and 36 ), any of the combinations of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 are displayed along the activated line, and if the pressing order is not correct, the replay (FIG. 35)), any of the combinations of the displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 is displayed along the activated line.

In addition, the pressing order of the correct answer in the part “F_chiririp”, “F_certain chililip”, “F_1 sure chililip”, and the part “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” may be arbitrary. In the form, the pressing order in which the first stop operation is for the left reel 3L is the correct pressing order. Therefore, for example, in the game in which the combination “F_reach-eye lip A” is determined as the internal winning combination, when the player performs the first stop operation on the left reel 3L, the reach-eye lip is displayed. Will be done.

In addition, the combination "F_maintenance rep A" and "F_maintenance rep B" is any of the combinations of the displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 of the replay (see FIG. 35) regardless of the pressing order is the effective line. Is displayed along with. In addition, the combination “F_maintenance rep_1st” to “F_maintenance rep_3rd” is a combination in which the symbols displayed are different depending on the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, replay (see FIG. 35). If any of the combinations of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 are displayed along the activated line, and if the pressing order is not correct, then the RT2 transition rep (see FIG. 35) is selected. 41 to 46 of any of the displayable symbol combinations are displayed along the activated line.

Further, the combination “F_RT3 Lip_1st” to “F_RT3 Lip_3rd” has different combinations of symbols to be displayed according to the pressing order, and if the pressing order is correct, the RT3 transition rep (see FIG. 35). Is displayed along the activated line, and if the pushing order is not correct, one of the combinations of the displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 of the replay (see FIG. 35) is displayed on the activated line. Are displayed along.

Further, the combination “F_RT4 Lip_123” to “F_RT4 Lip_3rd” is a combination in which the symbols to be displayed are different according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, the RT4 transition rep (see FIG. 35). Is displayed along the activated line, and if the pushing order is not correct, one of the combinations of the displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 of the replay (see FIG. 35) is displayed on the activated line. Are displayed along.

Further, the combination “F_3 choice bell_1st” to “F_3 choice bell_3rd” has different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and when the pushing order is correct, the bell (see FIG. 37). Is displayed along the effective line, and if the pressing order is not correct, the bell spill (see FIG. 35) or the first sheet (see FIGS. 37 and 38) is displayed.

In addition, the combination “F_common bell” is displayed along the activated line, regardless of the order of pressing, among the bells (see FIG. 37), any of the combinations of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 46. In addition, the winning combination “F_Sabo 1” and “F_Sabo 2” are the combinations of the displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 of the cactus (see FIG. 38) regardless of the order of pressing along the effective line. Is displayed.

In addition, for the combination “weak chili”, any of the combinations of the displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 among the weak cherries (see FIG. 38) is displayed along the activated line regardless of the pressing order. In addition, the combination “F_strong chili 1” and “F_strong chili 2” is effective for any combination of the displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 of the strong cherry (see FIG. 38) regardless of the pressing order. Displayed along the line.

<Correspondence between the winning combination in the flags and the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state>
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between a winning combination in the inter-flag state and a combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state (a part of the combinations is omitted), and in particular, BB (“C_BB1 "C_BB2") can be displayed. In FIG. 48, “◯” in “whether or not BB is established” indicates that BB can be displayed, and “x” indicates that BB cannot be displayed.

When BB cannot be displayed, a combination of symbols corresponding to a combination other than the combination related to the bonus determined as the internal winning combination is displayed. The combinations of symbols displayed according to the winning combinations other than the winning combinations are as shown in FIG. 47. For example, in the winning combination “F_BB1+F_Chiririp”, BB cannot be displayed, and the combination of symbols of the correspondence shown in the winning combination “F_Chilliripu” is displayed. In this case, during the inter-flag state, it may be possible to display only the symbol combination displayed at the time of pressing order correct answer shown in FIG. 47, or only the symbol combination displayed at the time of pressing order incorrect answer can be displayed. You may

For example, in the role “F_BB1+F_3 choice bell_1st”, since BB cannot be displayed, the combination of symbols of the correspondence shown in the role “F_3 choice bell_1st” in FIG. 47 is displayed. In this case, May display only the bell that is displayed when the pressing order is correct, and may not display the bell spill or the first page that is displayed when the pressing order is incorrect. Further, in the case of the combination “F_BB1+F_RT3 rep_1st”, only the replay displayed when the pressing order is incorrect may be displayed, and the RT3 transition rep displayed when the pressing order is correct may not be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 48, in the inter-flag state, when the bonus winning combination and any one of the “out”, “F_special 1”, “F_special 2”, and “F_special 3” are determined as internal winning combinations, BB can be displayed.

<abbreviation of winning part>
The correspondence relationship between the winning combination and the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state has been described above. Next, a data table used when performing various types of lottery in the normal gaming state, the ART gaming state, etc. will be described. In the following, since the winning combination used when referring to the data table is represented by an abbreviation, the data table concerned The abbreviation of the winning combination will be explained before the explanation. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an abbreviation of a winning combination.

As shown in FIG. 49(A), in the following, the combination “F_BB1” and “F_BB2” is called the combination “BB”, and the combination “F_3 selection bell_1st” to “F_3 selection bell_3rd” is called the combination “push order bell”, The role "F_Common Bell" is called the role "Common Bell", the role "F_Sabo 1" and "F_Sabo 2" is called the role "Cactus", the role "F_Weak Chile" is called the role "Weak Cherry", and the role "F_Strong" Chili 1” and “F_strong chili 2” are called “strong cherry”.

In addition, the winning combination “F_probable chiririp” and “F_1 promising chiriplip” are called the winning combination “three consecutive chiripuripu” when the flag conversion lottery is won, and the “replay” when the flag conversion lottery is non-winning. Similarly, the winning combination "F_reach-eye lip A" to "F_reach-eye lip D" is called a winning combination "reach-eye lip" when winning the flag conversion lottery, and a non-winning winning when the flag conversion lottery is called "replay".

(Flag conversion lottery)
Here, the flag conversion lottery will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, any one of the roles “F_probable chilirip”, “F_1 probable chililip”, “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” as an internal winning combination during the RT4 game state. When determined, the flag conversion lottery is performed. Then, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the flag conversion lottery is won, a special privilege (for example, addition of the number of ART games or CT winning) is given.

As shown in FIG. 47, the combination of the symbols “F_probable chililip” and “F_1 probable chililip” is displayed when the correct pressing order is displayed, and the combination of symbols “replay” is displayed when the pressing order is incorrect. Is displayed. In the pachi-slot machine 1, when winning the flag conversion lottery, the information for displaying the combination of the symbols “3 consecutive chili lip” by treating the winning combination “F_certain chili lip” “F_1 sure chili lip” as the winning combination “3 consecutive chili lip” (For example, press the button to aim at the Chile pattern). On the other hand, in the case where the flag conversion lottery is not won, the winning combination “F_probable chiririp” and “F_1 promising chiriplip” are treated as a winning combination “replay”, and information for displaying the symbol combination of “replay” is notified (for example, , Informs the pressing order other than the normal pressing).

Similarly, for the combination “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D”, a combination of symbols of “reach eye lip” is displayed when the correct answer is in the pushing order, and a combination of symbols of “replay” when the wrong answer is in the pushing order. Is displayed. In the pachi-slot machine 1, when winning in the flag conversion lottery, the winning combination "F_reach-eye lip A" to "F_reach-eye lip D" is treated as a winning reel "reach-eye lip", and the combination of symbols of the "reach-eye lip" is handled. Information to be displayed is notified (for example, by pressing forward, the symbol "white 7" is aimed). On the other hand, in the case of not winning the flag conversion lottery, the information for displaying the combination of the symbols of "Replay" by treating the combination "F_reach-eye lip A" to "F_reach-eye lip D" as the role "replay". To inform.

By performing a stop operation in accordance with this notification, when the flag conversion lottery is won, a combination of symbols “3 consecutive chili lip” or “reach eye lip” is displayed, and a special privilege is given. From the pachi-slot machine 1, although a special privilege is given according to the fact that the flag conversion lottery is won, from the player's point of view, the special combination is displayed because the combination of the symbols "3 consecutive chilirips" is displayed. You will feel that you have been granted.

In order to improve the playability of the pachi-slot machine, it may be preferable that the appearance frequency of the combination of symbols to which the privilege is given is constant, rather than constant. Stop control (combination of symbols to be displayed) varies depending on the type of internal winning combination, so as a method of changing the appearance frequency of the combination of symbols to which the privilege is given, depending on the state, the winning probability of the combination is made different. A method can also be considered (in the pachi-slot machine 1, the winning probability of the winning combination can be made different according to the presence or absence of the bonus operation and the RT gaming state, so that, for example, only the RT4 gaming state is the gaming state corresponding to the ART gaming state. Instead, a method of providing another gaming state such as RT6 gaming state or RT7 gaming state is also possible). However, since the trigger for changing the winning probability of the winning combination (the trigger for shifting the RT gaming state) is limited, this method lacks flexibility.

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the winning probability of the winning combination is not changed, and in addition to the internal lottery for determining the internal winning combination, the flag conversion lottery and the notification based on the result of the lottery allow the privilege to be given. It is possible to flexibly change the appearance frequency of the combination of symbols to be given according to the state. That is, in a state where it is easy to win the flag conversion lottery, it is possible to increase the frequency of appearance of a combination of symbols to which the privilege is given, and conversely, in a state where it is difficult to win the flag conversion lottery, a combination of symbols to which the privilege is given. The appearance frequency of can be reduced.

In the following, in order to win the flag conversion lottery in the case where the winning combination “F_probable chiririp” and “F_1 probable chililip” are determined as the internal winning combination, the winning combination of “f_probable chililip” and “F_1 probable chililip” is “3 consecutive times”. It is sometimes referred to as "Cililip" (or simply converted into "three consecutive Chileips"), and when the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" are determined as internal winning combinations. Winning the flag conversion lottery is referred to as converting the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" to "reach eye lip" (or simply converting to "reach eye lip") There is.

[Game flow during general game state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, a game flow in the normal game state will be described. In the pachi-slot machine 1, by shifting from the normal gaming state of the general gaming state to the CZ of the general gaming state, and then shifting from the CZ of the general gaming state to the ART gaming state, the general gaming state (non-ART) to the ART gaming state (See FIG. 33). FIG. 50(A) is a diagram showing the flow of a game when shifting from the normal game state of the normal game state to the CZ of the general game state.

As shown in FIG. 50(A), the normal gaming state has a low-probability state and a high-probability state as a lottery state of CZ. The low-probability state and the high-probability state are states with different expectations for winning the CZ lottery that is performed during the normal gaming state, the low-probability state is difficult to win the CZ lottery, and the high-probability state is winning the CZ lottery. It is in a state where it is easy to do. In addition, when the CZ lottery performed in the normal game state is won, the game state is shifted from the normal game state to the CZ (see FIG. 33).

The pachi-slot machine 1 of this embodiment has a plurality of chance zones CZ1, CZ2, and CZ3 as CZs (chance zones). These CZ1 to CZ3 are chance zones with different expectations for winning the ART lottery performed during the CZ, CZ3 is a chance zone to win the ART lottery without fail, and CZ1 and CZ2 are ART lottery with a predetermined probability. It is a chance zone to win. In the CZ lottery performed during the normal game state, the CZ to be shifted from the normal game state is randomly selected from these CZ1 to CZ3.

Subsequently, FIG. 50(B) is a diagram showing a game flow when shifting from the general game state CZ1, CZ2 to the ART game state. CZ1 and CZ2 are composed of a first half and a second half. The first half is a period in which ranks with different expectations for winning the ART lottery during CZ are promoted, and the second half is a period in which the lottery result of the ART lottery based on the rank is notified by a battle effect.

During CZ1, six rank modes are used, and the higher the mode, the higher the expectation of winning the ART lottery. The first half of CZ1 continues the first game number (for example, 12 games at maximum), and the mode promotion lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination. Then, the ART lottery is performed based on the mode promoted in the first half of the first game of the second half of CZ1.

Further, during the CZ2, 10 ranks of points are used, and the higher the points, the higher the expectation of winning the ART lottery. In the first half of CZ2, the second number of games (for example, 15 games at maximum) is continued and the lottery for promotion of points is performed based on the internal winning combination. Then, the ART lottery is performed based on the points promoted in the first half of the first game of the second half of CZ2.

In the latter half of CZ1, a battle effect in which a teammate character and an enemy character A compete is performed, and in the latter half of CZ2, a battle effect in which a teammate character and an enemy character B compete. This battle effect continues for the third number of games (for example, 4 games at maximum), the win/loss is managed based on the result of the ART lottery, and when the ART lottery is won, the ally character wins and the non-winning is performed. The enemy character wins. In the latter half of CZ1 and CZ2, the ART lottery is performed based on each game and the internal winning combination. When the ART lottery is won, the result of the battle effect is rewritten. That is, when a so-called rare combination is determined as an internal winning combination during the battle effect, the ART lottery is performed and the result of the battle effect is rewritten based on the result.

In CZ1 and CZ2, in the case of not winning the ART, the player loses in the battle effect in the latter half of the game, and basically the game state thereafter shifts to the normal game state. On the other hand, in CZ1 and CZ2, when the player wins the ART, he wins in the battle effect in the second half, and then the game state shifts to the normal ART via the ART preparation. In the first half of CZ1 and CZ2, a freeze may occur, and in this case, the game state shifts to CT (additional chance zone) instead of normal ART (via ART preparation).

Subsequently, FIG. 50(C) is a diagram showing a flow of a game when shifting from the general game state CZ3 to the ART game state. The CZ3 continues for the fourth game number (for example, 17 games at the maximum), and performs the ART lottery based on each game and the internal winning combination. The CZ3 ends at the time when the ART lottery is won, and the game state shifts from the next game to CT (additional opportunity zone) via ART preparation. Further, in CZ3, a freeze may occur, and in this case also, the game state shifts from the next game to CT (additional opportunity zone) via ART preparation. On the other hand, when the fourth game number has passed without winning the ART lottery in CZ3, the game state shifts to the normal ART via the ART preparation. That is, CZ3 is a chance zone in which the transition to the ART gaming state is fixed at the time of transition.

[Data table used during normal gaming state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 51 to FIG. 56, the data table used during the normal gaming state will be described.

<Normal Medium/High Probability Lottery Table>
FIG. 51 is a normal medium-high probability random determination table used for the transition random determination in the CZ random determination state (low probability and high probability). In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the lottery state of CZ is shifted based on the internal winning combination, and the lottery state of CZ is also shifted at the end of the bonus or at the end of CZ and ART. FIG. 51(A) is a normal medium/high probability random determination table used when shifting the random determination state of CZ based on the internal winning combination, and is referred to every game during the normal game state. Further, FIG. 51B is a normal medium/high probability random determination table used when shifting the lottery state of CZ at the time of ending the bonus, etc., and is referred to at the time of changing the setting, at the time of ending the bonus, or at the time of ending CZ, ART.

The normal medium-high probability random determination table shown in FIG. 51(A) defines the lottery value information about the CZ random determination state after the transition in association with the current CZ random determination state and the winning combination.

The various data tables shown below conceptually show the lottery value information. In the figure, “0” means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability “0%” is defined, and “very low” means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability “0% to less than 1%”. It means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability “1% to less than 10%” is defined, and “very low” means that the lottery probability is “10%”. Means that a lottery value corresponding to "less than 30%" is defined, "medium" means that a lottery value corresponding to a lottery probability "30% to less than 60%" is defined, “High” means that a lottery value corresponding to a lottery probability “60% to less than 80%” is defined, and “extremely high” means a lottery corresponding to a lottery probability “80% to less than 99%”. The value is defined, "extremely high" means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability "99% to less than 100%" is defined, and "determined" is the lottery probability ". It means that the lottery value corresponding to “100%” is defined.

Then, in various data tables shown below, it is extracted from a predetermined range of numerical values (“0 to 255” when the probability denominator is 256, and “0 to 65535” when the probability denominator is 65536). An internal lottery is performed by sequentially subtracting the random number for lottery with the specified lottery value, and determining whether the result of the subtraction is negative (whether so-called "carriage" has occurred). Be seen.

Referring to the normal medium/high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 51A, it can be seen that when the current CZ lottery state has a low probability, it is easy to shift to a high probability when the weak cherry is an internal winning combination. .. Further, when the current CZ lottery state has a high probability, it is understood that the high probability is maintained by determining any of the common bell, the cactus, the weak cherry, and the strong cherry as the internal winning combination. ..

The normal medium/high probability random determination table shown in FIG. 51(B) defines lottery value information about the random determination state of the CZ after the transition according to the situation at the time of reference. By referring to the normal medium/high probability random determination table shown in FIG. 51(B), it can be seen that the random determination state of CZ always shifts to a high probability at the end of the bonus.

<CZ lottery table>
52 is a CZ lottery table used for the CZ lottery, and FIG. 52(A) is a CZ lottery table used when performing the CZ lottery based on the internal winning combination during the normal gaming state. B) is a CZ lottery table used when the CZ lottery is performed to determine whether or not to pull back the CZ when the CZ fails or the ART ends.

The CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 52A defines the lottery value information about the winning/non-winning numbers of CZ1, CZ2, and CZ3 in association with the current lottery state of CZ and the internal winning combination. By referring to the CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 52A, it is understood that when the current CZ lottery state is in high probability, the probability of winning the CZ lottery is higher than in the case of low probability.

The CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 52B defines lottery value information regarding winning/non-winning of CZ1, CZ2, and CZ3. At the time of CZ failure (at the time of not winning the ART lottery in CZ1 and CZ2) or at the end of the ART game state, the pullback lottery of the CZ is performed using the CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 52(B).

<Mode up lottery table during CZ1>
FIG. 53 is a CZ1 middle mode-up lottery table used for the CZ1 mode-up lottery in the first half of the CZ1. The CZ1 mode up lottery table defines the lottery value information about the result of the mode up lottery in association with the current mode and the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 55(A) described later, in CZ1, the probability of winning the ART lottery increases as the mode increases, and when the mode reaches 6, the ART lottery is surely won. The lottery result “mode 1UP” means that the mode of CZ1 is increased by 1, and the lottery result “mode 2UP” means that the mode of CZ1 is increased by 2. That is, if the current mode is "2" and the player wins "mode 2 UP", the mode of CZ1 is increased from "2" to "4". In addition, if the winning of the lottery result “mode 6UP_freeze occurrence” is won, a freeze occurs, and the winning of the ART lottery is won and CT is given.

<Point lottery table in CZ2>
FIG. 54 is a CZ2 middle point lottery table used for point-up lottery of CZ2 in the first half of CZ2. The CZ2 medium lottery table defines the lottery value information about the result of the point-up lottery in association with the current point and the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 55B, which will be described later, in CZ2, the higher the number of points, the higher the probability of winning the ART lottery, and when point 10 is reached, the ART lottery is surely won. In addition, "point 2UP" of the lottery result means that the point of CZ2 is increased by 2. For example, when the current point is "2", if "point 2UP" is won, the point of CZ2 is " It will go from "2" to "4". In addition, when the winning of the lottery result “occurrence of 10 UP_freeze” is won, a freeze occurs, and the lottery is won and the CT is given.

<ART lottery table in CZ>
FIG. 55 and FIG. 56 are CZ mid ART lottery tables used for ART lottery during CZ, and FIG. 55(A) is a CZ mid ART lottery table (for CZ1) used in the first game of the latter half of CZ1. 55B is a CZ mid ART lottery table (for CZ2) used in the first game of the second half of CZ2, and FIG. 55(C) is a CZ used for the second half of CZ1 and CZ2. FIG. 55D is a CZ medium ART lottery table (for CZ3) used for the ART lottery in CZ3, which is a medium ART lottery table (common for CZ1 and CZ2, during the second half battle).

The ART lottery table in CZ (for CZ1) shown in FIG. 55A defines the lottery value information regarding whether or not the ART lottery is won in association with the current mode. The CZ ART lottery table (for CZ2) shown in FIG. 55(B) defines lottery value information regarding whether or not the ART lottery is won in association with the current point. Referring to the CZ mid ART lottery table (for CZ1) and the CZ mid ART lottery table (for CZ2), it is understood that the higher the rank (mode or point) in the first half of CZ1 and CZ2, the easier it is to win the ART lottery.

The ART lottery table during CZ (common to CZ1 and CZ2 for the latter half battle) shown in FIG. 55C defines the lottery value information regarding whether or not the ART lottery is won in association with the internal winning combination. Referring to the ART lottery table during CZ (common to CZ1 and CZ2 during the second half battle), when the rare combination (weak cherry, cactus or strong cherry) is determined as the internal winning combination in the second half of CZ1 and CZ2, You can see that you win the ART lottery with a probability.

The ART lottery table during CZ (for CZ3) shown in FIG. 56(D) defines lottery value information about whether or not the ART lottery is won in association with the number of continuous games of CZ3 and the internal winning combination. By referring to the ART lottery table during CZ (for CZ3), it will be understood that if the ART lottery is won during CZ3, the CT is also won.

[Normal game flow during ART]
Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the flow of the game during the normal ART will be described. The pachi-slot machine 1 has a normal ART and CT as the ART game state (see FIG. 33), and the CT is added as a chance zone. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, a game is played aiming at the transition to CT during normal ART. FIG. 57(A) is a diagram showing the flow of the lottery for transition to CT during normal ART.

As shown in FIG. 57(A), the pachi-slot machine 1 has an ART level and a CT lottery state as states that affect various lottery normally performed during ART. The ART level is provided in four stages of level 1 to level 4, and is controlled mainly based on the number of continuous games during the normal ART. Then, the ART level affects the determination of the CT lottery state and the flag conversion lottery during the normal ART described later. The CT lottery state is provided with four stages of low probability, normal, high probability, and ultra-high probability, and is controlled mainly based on the ART level and the internal winning combination during the normal ART. The CT lottery state affects CT lottery performed during the normal ART and flag conversion lottery during the normal ART described later.

(Normal flag conversion during ART)
As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the role “F_certain Chilelip”, “F_1 certain Chilelip”, “F_reach eye Lip A” to “F_reach eye” during the RT4 game state (that is, during the ART game state). When any one of the “Dlips D” is independently determined as an internal winning combination, a flag conversion lottery is performed, and a special privilege (for example, addition of the number of ART games or CT winning) is given according to the lottery result. FIG. 57B is a diagram showing a flag lottery method during normal ART.

As shown in FIG. 57(B), the pachi-slot machine 1 refers to the ART level and the CT random determination state during the normal ART to perform the flag conversion random determination. As a result, in the case where the flag conversion lottery is won, a special benefit is given, and a notification for displaying a combination of symbols of “3 consecutive chili lip” and a symbol of “reach eye lip” (for example, Press to give a notice that the desired pattern is aimed at). On the contrary, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, a notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of "Replay" (for example, a notification of the pushing order other than the forward pressing) is performed. By performing a stop operation according to the notification by the player, a combination of symbols according to the contents of the notification, that is, a combination of symbols of "three consecutive chili lip" and a symbol of "reach eye lip" when the flag conversion lottery is won. The combination of symbols is displayed, and when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the combination of the symbols “Replay” is displayed.

[Data table normally used during ART]
Next, the data table used during normal ART will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 62.

<ART flag conversion lottery table>
FIG. 58 is an ART flag conversion lottery table used for flag conversion lottery during normal ART. In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the flag conversion lottery during the normal ART is performed in two stages. Specifically, when the winning combination "F_probable chiririp" or "F_1 probable chiririp" is determined as the internal winning combination, first, the flag conversion lottery for the first stage is performed, and if the first-stage flag conversion lottery is won, After that, the flag conversion lottery in the second stage is performed. When the second-stage flag conversion lottery is won, the winning combination “F_probable chilirip” “F_1 promising chililip” is converted into “three consecutive chili-rips” and the first-stage flag conversion lottery or the second-stage flag conversion lottery is performed. If the winning is not won, it is treated as a "replay" without converting the winning combination "F_probable chilirip" and "F_1 probable chililip" into "3 consecutive chilirips".

FIG. 58A is an ART mid-flag conversion lottery table used for the first-stage flag conversion lottery, and FIG. 58B is an ART mid-flag conversion lottery table used for the second-stage flag conversion lottery. is there. The ART flag conversion lottery table shown in FIG. 58A defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in the first stage in association with the internal winning combination. In addition, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the flag conversion lottery of the first stage is performed only for the winning combination “F_Sure Chile Lip” and “F_1 Sure Chile Lip”, and for the winning combinations “F_Reach Eye Lip A” to “F_Reach Eye Lip D”. Only the flag conversion lottery in the second stage is performed.

The ART flag conversion lottery table shown in FIG. 58B defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in the second stage in association with the internal winning combination, the ART level, and the CT lottery state. In the normal ART, the “first time (until once CT is won)” column of the item “ART level” is referred to until the CT is won once.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 58A and 58B, in each of the ART flag conversion lottery tables, random numbers (0 to 255) in the range of the probability denominator 256 are used for the first step and the second step. Since the flag conversion lottery is performed, the two-step flag conversion lottery can be simulated as lottery performed using a random number value in the range of the probability denominator 65536. In recent years, pachi-slot machines are required to perform lottery (ART lottery, etc.) for payout, which was conventionally performed on the sub side, on the main side, but the capacity of the storage means (ROM) on the main side is limited. Therefore, there is a demand for a mechanism that enables lottery without reducing the game playability while suppressing the capacity.

In this regard, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present invention, since the probability denominator 65536 can be randomly determined by performing the probability denominator 256 in two stages, the capacity can be suppressed. In addition, by referring to the ART level and the CT lottery state for the second stage lottery, it is possible to perform not only the internal winning combination but also the flag conversion lottery according to the current state, so that a variety of amusement is provided. You can carry out the flag conversion lottery you have.

<ART level decision table>
FIG. 59 is an ART level determination table used to determine the ART level. The determination of the ART level is performed at the time of winning the ART when the transition to the ART gaming state is decided, and during the normal ART. FIG. 59(A) is an ART level determination table for determining the ART level when the ART is won, and FIG. 59(B) is an ART level determination table for determining the ART level during normal ART.

The ART level determination table shown in FIG. 59A defines lottery value information for each ART level. If a freeze occurs at the time of winning the ART (see FIG. 53, etc.), ART level 2 is determined as the ART level. The ART level determination table shown in FIG. 59(B) defines lottery value information for the ART level of the transfer destination in association with the current ART level and the number of continuous games in the normal ART. The ART level determination table shown in FIG. 59B defines lottery value information about the ART level of the transfer destination in association with the current ART level and the number of continuous games in the normal ART at the time of entering the CT. .. That is, during the normal ART, the ART level shifts according to the number of continuous games, and also the ART level shifts at the timing when the normal ART enters the CT.

<Normal ART medium/high probability lottery table>
FIG. 60 is a normal ART medium/high probability random determination table for randomizing the CT random determination state during the normal ART. The normal ART medium/high probability random determination table defines the lottery value information regarding the CT random determination state of the transfer destination in association with the current CT random determination state and the internal winning combination. If you refer to the normal ART medium/high probability lottery table, the role “3 consecutive chilirips (role “F_probable chililip” “F_1 probable chililip” is won in the flag conversion lottery when the winning is won)” and the role “reach eye lip (role “F_reach eye lip From "A" to "F_reach-eye lip D" winning flag conversion lottery at winning), it is understood that the CT lottery state easily shifts (falls) to "low probability". In the above description, when the flag conversion lottery is won, a special privilege is given. Therefore, it may be contrary to the above description that the CT lottery state easily falls, but FIG. As will be described later, the winning combination “3 consecutive chiripuripu” and “reach eye lip” is always won in the CT lottery. Therefore, even if the CT lottery state falls, there is no change in giving a special privilege of CT winning.

<CT lottery table during ART>
FIG. 61 is an ART CT random determination table used for CT random determination during normal ART. The CT lottery table during ART defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the CT lottery in association with the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination. In the CT lottery table during ART, when “cactus”, “weak cherry”, “strong cherry”, “three consecutive chilirip”, “reach eye lip”, and “BB” are determined as the internal winning combinations, the probability denominator 256 is within the range. The CT lottery is performed using a random number value. On the other hand, when other winning combinations (for example, replay, common bell, push order bell, etc.) are determined as the internal winning combination, the CT random determination is performed using the random number value in the range of the probability denominator 65536.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has “normal CT” and “high-accuracy CT” as CT. “Normal CT” and “high-accuracy CT” have different expectations of the number of ART games to be added during CT (additional chance zone), and “high-accuracy CT” has a larger number of ART games than “normal CT”. Is easily added (see FIG. 66).

<Addition lottery table during normal ART>
FIG. 62 is a normal ART mid-game addition lottery table used for extra lottery to add the number of ART games to the normal ART. In the normal ART, the additional lottery table defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the additional lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

[Game flow during CT]
Next, with reference to FIG. 63, a game flow during CT will be described. As shown in FIG. 63(A), in the pachi-slot machine 1, CT is performed by one set of eight games. During CT, the number of ART games is added to the lottery based on the internal winning combination. When the additional lottery is won, the number of games is not subtracted. Only when the additional lottery is not won, the number of games is subtracted. To be done. Therefore, during CT, the game in which the number of ART games is added does not end, and the game in which the number of ART games is not added is ended in eight times in the same set.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 63(A) and (B), if the winning combination “3 consecutive chilirip” is won during CT (that is, if the winning of the flag conversion lottery upon winning the winning combination “F_probable chililip” is won, ) One set of eight games is reset. For example, if 7 games where the number of ART games is not added are played in the same set, and another game where the number of ART games is not added is played once, the CT ends, but the role "3 consecutive chiripuripu" If the winning is won, the CT is reset, and as a result, the CT will not end until a game is played in which the number of ART games is not added eight times. Therefore, CT becomes easier to continue as the winning combination “three consecutive chilirip” is won.

(Flag conversion during CT)
FIG. 63C is a diagram showing a flag lottery method during CT. During CT, the winning combination “F_Sure Chile Lip” and “F_1 Clear Chile Lip” are always converted to the winning combination “3 consecutive Chile Lips”. As described above, if the winning combination "3 consecutive chilirips" is won during CT, the CT is reset. Therefore, when the winning combination "F_probable chililip" or "F_1 probable chililip" is determined as the internal winning combination, the CT is re-issued. Will be set.

On the other hand, the winning probabilities of the flag conversion lottery are controlled based on the three-stage table (Tables 0 to 2) for the winning combinations “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D”. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63(C), table 0 has the lowest probability of conversion to “reach eye lip”, and table 1 has the next lowest probability of conversion to “reach eye lip”. Has the highest probability of being converted into "reach-eye lip". If the winning combination “Reach eye lip” is won during CT, CT is newly added as shown in FIG. 67 described later.

As shown in FIG. 63(C), in normal CT, the table is determined based on the ART level. Further, in the high probability CT, the table 0 is always decided regardless of the ART level.

[Data table used during CT]
Subsequently, a data table used during CT will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 67.

<Table lottery table during CT>
FIG. 64 is a during-CT table lottery table for determining a table used for the flag conversion lottery from the three-stage table. The in-CT table lottery table defines lottery value information about the table used in the flag conversion lottery in association with the ART level and the state such as the type of CT to be executed. The CT table lottery table is referred to when it is determined to win the CT lottery and shifts to CT, or is referred at the start of CT, and determines the table used for the flag conversion lottery during CT.

<CT flag conversion lottery table during CT>
FIG. 65 is a during-CT flag conversion lottery table used for the during-CT flag conversion lottery. The CT flag conversion lottery table defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the table used for the flag conversion lottery and the internal winning combination. By referring to the CT flag conversion lottery table, it is understood that the winning combination “F_probable chililip” and “F_1 promising chililip” are always converted to the winning combination “three consecutive chilirips” during CT.

<Addition lottery table during CT>
FIG. 66 is an additional lottery table during CT used for additional lottery to add the number of ART games during CT. The additional lottery table during CT defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the additional lottery in association with the internal winning combination. Note that winning combinations other than the winning combinations shown in FIG. 66 are not won in the additional lottery during CT.

In addition, in the additional lottery during the normal CT, the number of additional games differs depending on the number of times the winning combination “3 consecutive chilirip” is won. Specifically, if the number of times the winning combination "3 consecutive chilirip" is won during the same CT is "1 to 8 times", it is easy to determine "10 games" as the number of additional games, and the number of additional games is increased during the same CT. If the winning number of the winning combination “3 consecutive Chilelip” is “9 to 16”, it is easy to determine “20 games” as the number of additional games, and the winning number of winning the winning combination “3 consecutive Chilelip” during the same CT. Is "17 to 24 times", it is easy to determine "30 games" as the number of additional games, and if the number of times the winning combination "3 consecutive chilirip" is won during the same CT is "25 times or more" , It is easy to determine “50 games” as the number of additional games.

More specifically, in the additional lottery table during CT, when the number of times the winning combination “3 consecutive chilirip” is won during the same CT is “1 to 8 times”, the winning combination “3 consecutive chililip” in the figure is selected. The number of additional games corresponding to the lottery value "extremely high" is "10 games", and the number of additional games corresponding to the lottery value "extremely low" is "20 games". Then, when the number of times the winning combination "3 consecutive chilirips" is won during the same CT becomes "9 times or more", the number of additional games corresponding to the lottery value "extremely high" of the winning combination "3 consecutive chilirips" in the figure is ". 20 games”. Furthermore, if the number of times the winning combination "3 consecutive Chilelips" is won during the same CT is "17 times or more", the lottery values "extremely high" and "extremely low" of the winning combination "3 consecutive chililip" in the figure are corresponded The number of additional games will be promoted to "30 games". Similarly, when the number of times the winning combination "3 consecutive Chilelips" is won during the same CT is "25 times or more", the lottery values "extremely high" and "extremely low" of the winning combination "3 consecutive Chilelips" in the figure are handled. The number of additional games to be promoted to “50 games”.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of games to be added per one time is increased according to the number of times the winning combination “three consecutive chilirip” is won during CT. As described above, as long as the number of ART games is added, the CT will not end, and if the winning combination "3 consecutive chilirip" is won, the CT will be reset. The more you continue to have, the more you can expect to increase the amount of addition per time, and the interest during CT will improve. In addition, the number of times that increases the amount of addition per time is more than the number of games (8 times) for one set of CT (9 times or more), so an excessive profit is given to the player. This can be prevented from being given, and the profit of the player and the game store can be balanced.

<Lottery table with additional number of sets in CT>
FIG. 67 is a lottery random determination table for the number of sets in CT used for lottery in which the number of sets for adding a new CT to the CT is added. The number-of-sets lottery table during CT defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the lottery with the number of sets addition, in association with the type of CT being executed and the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 67, if the winning combination “Reach eye lip” is won during CT, a new CT is given. When a new CT is given in association with lottery by adding the number of sets, the new CT is restarted at the timing when the CT being executed is finished.

It should be noted that the number of times the above winning combination “three consecutive chilirip” is won is counted only during the same CT, but this “during the same CT” is when the lottery is won in addition to the number of sets performed during the CT. It may or may not include the new CT given to the.

[Game flow during bonus state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 68, a flow of the game in the bonus state will be described. FIG. 68(A) is a diagram showing the flow of the game in the case of shifting to the bonus state during the general game state (ART non-win), and FIG. 68(B) is the case of shifting to the bonus state during normal ART. 68C is a diagram showing the flow of the game, and FIG. 68C is a diagram showing the flow of the game when the bonus state is entered during CT. As shown in FIGS. 68(A) to (C), the pachi-slot machine 1 has a normal BB and a special BB as bonus types, and determines the bonus type when shifting to the bonus state. At this time, if the special BB is determined, after the bonus state is finished, the process shifts to CT via ART preparation. On the other hand, when the normal BB is determined, the flow is different depending on the state before shifting to the bonus state.

Referring to FIG. 68(A), in the case of shifting from the normal game state to the normal BB, the ART lottery is performed during the normal BB based on the internal winning combination. When this ART lottery is won, after the bonus state is finished, the process shifts to the normal ART via the ART preparation. After winning the ART lottery, the lottery for adding the number of ART games is performed during the bonus state.

Referring to FIG. 68(B), when the normal ART is changed to the normal BB, the CT lottery is performed at the end of the normal BB. There is a 50% chance that this CT lottery will be won, and if it is won, it will shift to CT after preparing for the ART after the bonus state ends, and if not winning, it will shift to normal ART after preparing for the ART state after the bonus state has ended. To do. In addition, during the bonus state shifted from the normal ART, the lottery for adding the number of ART games is also performed.

Referring to FIG. 68(C), when the CT is shifted to the normal BB or the special BB, after the bonus state is finished, the state is shifted to CT via the ART preparation. In addition, during the bonus state shifted from the normal ART, the lottery for adding the number of ART games is also performed.

[Data table used during bonus state]
Subsequently, a data table used during the bonus state will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71.

<Bonus type lottery table>
FIG. 69 is a bonus type lottery table for determining a bonus type (normal BB, special BB). The bonus type lottery table is referred to at the start of the bonus state, and defines lottery value information about the bonus type in association with the state before shifting to the bonus state.

<Additional number of bonus ART games in the lottery table>
FIG. 70 shows a bonus lottery addition table for bonus ART games, which is used for ART lottery and ART lottery addition lottery performed in the bonus state. The bonus lot ART game number addition lottery table defines the lottery result information of the ART lottery and the lottery value information about the number of additional games in association with the bonus type and the internal winning combination.

The bonus lottery additional lottery table is used for the ART lottery in the ART non-winning state (until the lottery is won in the ART BB in the normal BB shifted from the normal game state). That is, when 1 or more (actually, at least 50 games) is determined as the number of games to be added in the state of ART non-win, the ART lottery is won and the corresponding number of games is given. On the other hand, in the state after the winning of ART, the lottery table for adding bonus ART games is used for the additional lottery for ART games.

<CT lottery table at end of bonus>
FIG. 71 is a bonus-end CT lottery table used for CT lottery performed at the end of the bonus state. The bonus lot end CT lottery table defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the CT lottery, in association with the bonus type and the game state before shifting to the bonus state. When referring to the bonus lottery CT lottery table shown in FIG. 71, for example, when a normal BB is performed during a normal ART, it is found that there is a 50% probability of winning a CT at the end of the bonus state.

[Exceptional game flow during general game state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 72, an exceptional game flow in the normal game state will be described. In the pachi-slot machine 1, basically, during the normal game state, the normal game state is shifted to the CZ, and the ART lottery is won by winning the ART lottery in the CZ. Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the RT gaming state is realized by notifying during the RT4 gaming state, and as shown in FIG. 72, the RT gaming state is controlled according to the combination of symbols displayed. doing. As shown in FIG. 47, the combination of symbols for shifting the RT game state is displayed according to the order (pushing order) of the stop operation by the player, so that the notification is not performed. , It may happen to shift to the RT4 gaming state.

Further, in the RT4 gaming state, the combination “F_reach-eye lip A” to “F_reach-eye lip D” may be determined as an internal winning combination, so even in the normal gaming state (non-ART), Reach eyes (reach eye lip) to which special privilege is given can be displayed. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72, when the game is accidentally transferred to the RT4 game state during the general game state (non-ART), the combination of symbols of "reach eye lip" can be displayed. When it becomes a state, it is possible to shift to the ART game state (normal ART) without going through the CZ.

More specifically, when the combination “F_reach-eye lip A” to “F_reach-eye lip D” is determined as an internal winning combination during the normal game state and the RT4 game state, a flag conversion lottery is performed, and When the winning of the flag conversion lottery is won, the notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of "reach eye lip" is given and the right of ART is given. On the contrary, if the flag conversion lottery is not won, the notification for displaying the symbol combination of "Replay" is performed and the symbol combination of "Reach eye lip" is controlled not to be displayed.

<Non-art flag conversion lottery table>
FIG. 73 is a non-ART flag conversion lottery table used in the flag conversion lottery performed in the normal game state and the RT4 game state. The non-ART flag conversion lottery table defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

[Notification by main control]
In the pachi-slot machine, conventionally, the information of the stop operation (pushing order, etc.) is notified under the control of the sub (sub-control board 72) side in the ART machine. In recent years, the main (main control board 71) side that manages the profits of the player is required to give notification because it affects the so-called payout. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the information display 14 controlled by the main control board 71 is provided with an instruction monitor for notifying the information of the stop operation, and the information of the stop operation is notified under the control of the main side. I have decided.

FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between notification (navigation) performed on the main side and notification (navigation) performed on the sub side. As shown in FIG. 74, the main control board 71 informs the information of the stop operation by displaying the numerical values “1” to “11” on the instruction monitor. The numerical values of “1” to “11” uniquely correspond to the contents of the stop operation notified by each, and “1” to “3” respectively indicate the types of reels performing the first stop operation. "1" means performing the first stop operation on the left reel 3L, "2" means performing the first stop operation on the inner reel 3C, and "3". Means that the first stop operation is performed on the right reel 3R.

In addition, "4" to "9" indicate the push order informing each of them, "4" means that the push order is "left, middle, right", and "5" indicates that the push order is "." "6" means that the pressing order is "middle, left, right", and "7" means that the pressing order is "middle, right, left". "8" means that the pressing order is "right, left, middle", and "9" means that the pressing order is "right, middle, left".

In addition, "10" and "11" are for notifying a winning combination, and "10" means a symbol combination "C_BB1" including "white 7-white 7-white 7", and "11". Means a symbol combination "C_BB2" consisting of "blue 7-blue 7-blue 7".

Here, although the numerical values of "1" to "11" notified on the main side uniquely correspond to the contents of the stop operation to be notified, not all players can clearly understand the notification contents. Absent. That is, there is a possibility that the player may not be able to comprehend the content of the notification just by displaying "6" on the instruction monitor on the main side.

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the contents of the stop operation are notified on the sub side in addition to the notification on the main side. Specifically, the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided with the display unit 100 controlled by the sub control board 72, and notifies the information of the stop operation under the control of the sub side. For example, when notifying that the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L, “1” is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side and the left reel 3L of the display unit 100 is displayed on the sub side. "1" is displayed above to inform that the left reel 3L is the target of the first stop operation. Similarly, when notifying the pressing order "middle, left, right", "6" is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and "1" is displayed above the reel 3C in the display unit 100 on the sub side. , "2" above the left reel 3L and "3" above the right reel 3R to notify that the pressing order is "middle, left, right". When "F_BB1" is determined as the internal winning combination, "10" is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and "white 7-white 7-white 7" is displayed on the display unit 100 on the sub side. Is displayed to notify the player of the design to be aimed at.

As shown in FIG. 74(A), during the ART preparation, “bell navigation”, “maintenance lip navigation”, “RT3 transition lip navigation” and “RT4 transition lip navigation” are performed under the control of the main side. "Bernavi" informs the combination "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_3rd" of the pressing order for displaying the combination of the symbols of "bell". Further, the "maintenance lip navigation" informs the combination "F_maintenance lip_1st" to "F_maintenance lip_3rd" of the pressing order for displaying the symbol combination of "replay". Further, the "RT3 transition Lip Navi" notifies the combination "F_RT3 transition Lip_1st" to "F_RT3 transition Lip_3rd" of the pressing order for displaying the combination of the symbols of "RT3 transition Lip". Further, the "RT4 transition Lip Navi" informs the combination "F_RT4 transition Lip_123" to "F_RT4 transition Lip_3rd" of the pressing order for displaying the symbol combination of "RT4 transition Lip".

The timing of notification on the main side may be at least during one game of notification and is arbitrary. For example, the main side may be notified at the timing when the start operation is received, or the main side may be notified when the reels 3L, 3C, 3R start rotating, and the first stop operation to the third stop operation may be performed. The main side may be informed at the timing when either of the above is accepted. On the other hand, it is preferable that the sub-side informs at least before the first stop operation. In this respect, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the notification is given on both the main side and the sub side when the start operation is accepted or when the reels 3L, 3C, 3R start rotating. Thereby, before the player performs the stop operation, the stop operation information is notified on both the main-side instruction monitor and the sub-side display unit 100.

Further, as shown in FIG. 74(B), during the ART game state, "bell navigation", "maintenance lip navigation", "RT3 transition lip navigation" and "RT4 transition lip navigation" are performed under the control of the main side. In addition, during the ART game state (RT4 game state), a flag conversion lottery is performed, and a push for displaying a combination of symbols of "3 consecutive chili lip", "reach eye lip" or "replay" based on the lottery result. The order is notified, but this notification is performed only on the sub side, not on the main side.

As described above, since the combination of the symbols “3 consecutive chili lip” and “reach eye lip” is related to the granting of a special privilege, the presence or absence of the notification may affect the profit (ball payout) of the player. Can also be considered. However, in the pachi-slot machine 1, actually, the special privilege is given based on the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery, and the combination of symbols displayed does not affect the given privilege. In other words, when the flag conversion lottery is won, even if the symbol combination of "Replay" is displayed, a special privilege is given, and conversely, the flag conversion lottery is not won. In this case, even if the combination of the symbols "three consecutive chili lip" and "reach eye lip" can be displayed, no special privilege is given.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, if the symbol combination displayed in this way does not affect the player's profit (ball payout), the sub monitor is not notified on the main instruction monitor. The display unit 100 gives notification only on the side.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 74(C) and (D), during the RT5 game state (state between flags), notification is made to aim at a combination of symbols according to a winning combination carried over as an internal winning combination. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 74(C), when the hand “F_BB1” is carried over, “white 7 navigation” is performed, and as shown in FIG. 74(D), the hand “F_BB2” is carried over. If so, perform “Blue 7 Navi”. "White 7 Navi" informs the winning combination "F_BB1" of information on the stop operation for displaying the combination of symbols "C_BB1", and "Blue 7 Navi" tells the winning combination "F_BB2". Information of the stop operation for displaying the combination of the symbols "C_BB2" is notified.

Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 48, in the inter-flag state, the winning combination related to the bonus and one of the “off”, “F_special 1”, “F_special 2”, and “F_special 3” is determined as the internal winning combination. If the winning combination is determined to be an internal winning combination along with the winning combination, it is not possible to display the winning combination of the BB symbols. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 74(C) and (D), when the main control board 71 performs control on the main side, it is different from the bonus-related bonuses carried over, “F_special winning combination 1” and “F_special winning combination”. Only when either “2” or “F_special combination 3” is determined as the internal winning combination, “white 7 navigation” or “blue 7 navigation” is performed. As a result, the navigation on the main side can be performed at an appropriate timing when the winning combination of the bonus can be won.

The main control board 71 may perform “white 7 navigation” or “blue 7 navigation” only after notifying that the winning combination has been determined as an internal winning combination (bonus notification). Here, the bonus notification is performed, for example, by displaying a bonus confirmation screen or lighting a bonus confirmation lamp.

As an example, when a combination related to a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination, an effect (so-called continuous effect) that is performed over several games can be performed, and a bonus confirmation screen can be displayed according to the result of this continuous effect. It is generally done. If "white 7 navi" is performed on the main side during this continuous production, the result of the continuous production may be understood on the way, which may be less interesting. Therefore, the main control board 71 of the pachi-slot machine 1 performs “white 7 navigation” or “blue 7 navigation” only after the bonus notification is given. It should be noted that any method can be used to allow the main side to grasp the timing at which the bonus notification is made.

As one method, when the bonus winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the main control board 71 determines the number of games required until the bonus is announced, and after the number of games is exhausted, “white 7 navigation” or “blue 7 A method of performing "navi" can be considered. More specifically, the main control board 71, when determining the number of games required for the bonus notification, notifies the sub control board 72 of the number of games. The sub-control board 72 controls the effect according to the number of games and displays the bonus confirmation screen at the timing when the number of games is exhausted, so that the timing at which the bonus notification is made on the main side can be grasped. That is, the main control board 71 counts the number of unit games after determining the bonus winning combination as an internal winning combination in a state where the bonus winning combination is not carried over, and after the counting result reaches a predetermined number of times. "White 7 Navi" or "Blue 7 Navi" when the winning combination is determined to be an internal winning combination of any one of the "missing", "F_special winning combination 1", "F_special winning combination 2" and "F_special winning combination 3" I do.

As another method, a method of controlling the bonus notification on the main side rather than the sub side can be considered. More specifically, when the main control board 71 determines a bonus winning combination as an internal winning combination in a state where the bonus winning combination is not carried over, the main control board 71 gives an effect (at least the number of games required for the effect) to be executed by the display unit 100. It is determined and the sub-control board 72 is notified. The sub control board 72 executes the notified effect and displays the bonus confirmation screen, so that the timing at which the bonus notification is made on the main side can be grasped.

Of course, the timing at which the bonus notification is made may be made to be comprehensible on the main side by another method. In this case, since the main control board 71 cannot receive a signal from the sub control board 72 or the like, it is necessary to grasp the timing of bonus notification based on the signal that the main control board 71 can receive. .. For example, a signal accompanying a stop operation can be received by the main control board 71, and thus a predetermined stop operation (for example, other than the normal push) is performed in a state where the bonus winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination. In case of failure, a bonus notification may be given. Specifically, the sub control board 72 obtains the information about the internal winning combination and the information about the stop operation from the main control board 71, and the combination of these information is a predetermined combination (the internal winning combination “the winning combination”). , If the stop operation is “other than pressing forward”), a bonus notification is given. Since such a bonus notification can be grasped by the main control board 71 as well, it is possible to grasp the timing at which the bonus notification is made on the main side.

[Explanation of operation of main control board]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 31 of the main control board 71 using programs will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 91.

<Main operation process of pachi-slot controlled by main CPU>
First, the procedure of the main operation process (process after power-on) of the pachi-slot machine 1 under the control of the main CPU 31 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 75 (hereinafter referred to as the main flow).

First, when the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned on, the main CPU 31 performs initialization processing when the power is turned on (S1). In this process, it is determined whether the backup was performed normally or the setting was changed appropriately, and the initialization corresponding to the determination result is performed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs initialization processing at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization processing, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 33 is cleared. The designated storage area here is, for example, a storage area such as an internal winning combination storage area or a display combination storage area in which data needs to be erased for each unit game (game).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs medal acceptance/start check processing (S3). In this processing, the input of the medal sensor 42S and the start switch 6S is checked.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs an internal lottery process (S4). In this process, the main CPU 31 refers to the internal lottery table (FIG. 39, FIG. 40) corresponding to the current game state, and randomly selects a winning combination to be determined as an internal winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the winning combination “F_BB1” or “F_BB2” has been determined as an internal winning combination in the internal lottery process of S4 (S5). When the winning combination “F_BB1” or “F_BB2” is determined as an internal winning combination (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently turns on the RT5 gaming state flag and sets the gaming state to the inter-flag gaming state (S6).

Following the processing of S6, or if it is determined in S5 that the winning combination "F_BB1" or "F_BB2" has not been determined as an internal winning combination (NO), the main CPU 31 continues by the state A game control process is performed (S7).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs main-side navigation control processing (S8). In this process, the main CPU 31 sets navigation data according to the current gaming state and internal winning combination based on the correspondence shown in FIG. The set navigation data is stored in the start command and notified to the sub control board 72. Further, the notification according to the set navigation data is performed at an arbitrary timing.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 executes reel stop initialization processing which will be described later with reference to FIG. 86 (S9). In this process, reel stop control information used for stop control is determined according to the internal winning combination determined in S5 and the current game state. The determined reel stop control information is stored in the main RAM 33 and used in the reel stop control process of S12.

Then, the main CPU 31 performs a start command transmission process (S10). In this process, the main CPU 31 generates start command data and sends it to the sub control board 72. It should be noted that the start command data includes various kinds of information necessary for rendering such as an internal winning combination.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a reel rotation start process after performing a wait process (S11). In this process, the main CPU 31 requests rotation start of all reels. When the rotation start of all reels is requested, each reel is subjected to acceleration control until the rotation speed reaches a constant speed by an interrupt process executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec), and thereafter, Controlled to maintain a constant speed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 executes reel stop control processing described later with reference to FIG. 87 (S12). In this process, the reel stop control information determined in S9 is used to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the timing of pressing the left stop button 7L, the middle stop button 7C, and the right stop button 7R, respectively. It

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a prize determination medal payout process (S13). In this winning determination medal payout process, as a result of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R being stopped, based on the combination of the symbols displayed along the activated line, depending on the combination of the symbols such as the payout of medals and the operation of re-playing. Give profit. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a winning operation command transmission process (S14). In this process, the main CPU 31 generates winning operation command data and transmits it to the sub control board 72. The winning operation command data includes various information such as a combination of symbols displayed along the activated line.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a BB check process described later with reference to FIG. 88 (S15). In this process, the main CPU 31 controls the operation and the end of the bonus state. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs RT check processing described later with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90 (S16). In this process, the main CPU 31 controls to shift the RT game state based on the combination of the symbols displayed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 executes a CZ/ART end time process, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 91 (S17). In this processing, the main CPU 31 carries out the CZ pull-back lottery. When the CZ/ART end time process is performed, the main CPU 31 returns the process to S2 assuming that one game (unit game) is completed.

<Control processing by state>
Next, the control processing for each state will be described with reference to FIG. In the state-based control process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the RT4 gaming state (S31). If it is in the RT4 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently carries out a flag conversion process described later with reference to FIG. 77 (S32).

Subsequent to the processing of S32, or when it is determined in S31 that the RT4 gaming state is not in progress (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the normal gaming state (S33). ). If the game is in the normal game state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a normal start time process, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 78 (S34), and ends the state-based control process.

On the other hand, if the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether the current gaming state is CZ (S35). If it is in CZ (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a CZ start time process described later in FIG. 79 (S36), and ends the state-based control process.

On the other hand, when the current game state is not CZ (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether the current game state is the normal ART (S37). When it is in the normal ART (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a normal ART start process (to be described later with reference to FIG. 83) (S38), and ends the state-based control process.

On the other hand, when the current game state is not the normal ART (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether the current game state is CT (S39). If the CT is in progress (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs the in-CT start process described later with reference to FIG. 84 (S40), and ends the state-based control process.

On the other hand, when the current game state is not CT (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether the current game state is the bonus state (S41). If it is in the bonus state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a during-BB start process described later with reference to FIG. 85 (S42), and ends the state-based control process.

On the other hand, when the current game state is not the bonus state (NO), the main CPU 31 performs other processing (S43) and ends the state-based control processing. For example, when the ART CPU is preparing, the main CPU 31 performs a process according to the preparation.

<Flag conversion process>
Next, the flag conversion process will be described with reference to FIG. In the flag conversion process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is CT start time (S50). When it is the time to start CT (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently refers to the in-CT flag conversion table lottery table (FIG. 64 ), and randomly selects and sets the table number used in the flag conversion lottery in CT. Yes (S51).

Following the processing of S51, or when it is not the time to start CT in S50 (NO), the main CPU 31 sets the flag conversion lottery table according to the current state (S52). For example, when the current state is the RT4 gaming state during non-ART, the non-ART flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 73) is set, and when the current state is the RT4 gaming state during normal ART. , The ART flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 58) is set, and if the current state is the RT4 gaming state in CT, the CT flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 65) is set.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 carries out a flag conversion lottery based on the internal winning combination (S53), and subsequently determines whether or not the winning has been won (S54). When the flag conversion lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a flag conversion process (S55). In this processing, for example, when the winning combination "F_1 probable Chilelip" is determined as an internal winning combination, the winning combination "F_1 probable Chilelip" is treated as a winning combination "three consecutive Chilelips".

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is non-ART (S56). That is, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the transition to the RT4 gaming state is accidentally performed in response to the player's stop operation in a state where the general gaming state (non-ART) is not notified. judge. When the current game state is not in ART (YES), the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the number of ART sets (S57), subsequently sets ART preparation in the next game (S58), and sets the flag. The conversion process ends. On the other hand, when the current game state is not in non-ART (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the flag conversion process.

If the flag conversion lottery is not won in S54 (NO), the main CPU 31 executes the flag maintaining process (S59), and ends the flag conversion process. In the flag maintaining process, for example, when the winning combination "F_1 definite relipping" is determined as an internal winning combination, the winning combination "F_1 definite relipping" is treated as a winning combination "replay".

<Normal start processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the normal start processing will be described. In the normal start process, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 52A, and performs the CZ lottery based on the current lottery state of CZ and the internal winning combination (S61).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ lottery is won (S62). When the CZ lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 sets the type of CZ that is won for the next game (S63), and subsequently sets a value corresponding to the CZ of the type of winning in the CZ game number counter. Yes (S64). The CZ game number counter is a counter for counting the duration of CZ. When the CZ1 is won, the first game number (for example, 12) is set in the CZ game number counter (first half), If CZ2 is won, the second game number (for example, 15) is set to the CZ game number counter (first half), and if CZ3 is won, the CZ game number counter is set to the fourth game number. (For example, 17) is set.

Following the processing of S64, or if the CZ lottery has not been won in S62 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently refers to the normal medium-high probability random determination table of FIG. The lottery state of the CZ lottery is selected based on the winning combination (S65), the lottery state of the CZ is updated based on the result of the transition lottery (S66), and the normal start process is terminated.

<Processing during CZ start>
Next, referring to FIG. 79, the CZ start processing will be described. In the CZ start process, the main CPU 31 first determines whether or not the current gaming state is CZ1 (S71). If it is in CZ1 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a CZ1 (CZ2) in-process described later with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 (S72), and ends the CZ-in-start process.

On the other hand, when it is not in CZ1 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the current gaming state is in CZ2 (S73). If it is in CZ2 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a CZ1 (CZ2) in-process described later with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 (S74), and ends the CZ-in-start process. In this embodiment, CZ1 and CZ2 differ only in rank (mode or point) with different expectation of winning the ART lottery, and the basic processing is the same. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the processing in CZ1 and CZ2 will be described as one processing in CZ1 (CZ2) with one processing.

On the other hand, when it is not in the CZ2 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a CZ3 in-process described later with reference to FIG. 82 (S75), and ends the CZ-in-start process.

<Treatment during CZ1 (CZ2)>
Next, the CZ1 (CZ2) intermediate processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81. In the CZ1 (CZ2) intermediate processing, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is the first half of CZ1 or CZ2 (S81). The main CPU 31 shifts the processing to S82 if it is the first half (YES), and shifts the processing to S91 of FIG. 81 if it is not the first half (the second half) (NO).

In the case of the first half of CZ1, the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ1 middle mode up lottery table (FIG. 53) and performs the mode up lottery based on the internal winning combination (S82). Similarly, in the case of the first half of CZ2, the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ2 middle point lottery table (FIG. 54), and performs the point-up lottery based on the internal winning combination (S82). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 updates the mode (or points) based on the lottery result of S82 (S83).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not a freeze is won in the lottery in S82 (S84). If the player has won the freeze (YES), the main CPU 31 performs freeze processing for temporarily stopping the progress of the game, and adds 1 to the ART set number and the CT set number (S85). In this processing, the main CPU 31 further determines and sets the ART level by referring to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59(A)). When the freeze occurs, "ART level 2" is determined as the ART level. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 finishes CZ, sets ART preparation in the next game (S86), and finishes processing during CZ1 (CZ2).

On the other hand, when the freeze is not won in S84 (NO), the main CPU 31 subtracts 1 from the CZ game number counter (first half) (S87). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ game number counter (first half) is 0 (S88). When the CZ game number counter (first half) is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the CZ1 (CZ2) intermediate processing.

On the other hand, when the CZ game number counter (first half) is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the second half of CZ1 or CZ2 to the next game (S89), and ends the CZ1 (CZ2) mid-process. To do.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 81, in the case of the latter half of CZ1 or CZ2, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is the first game of the latter half (S91). If it is the first game in the second half, the ART lottery table during CZ (FIGS. 55(A) and (B)) is referred to, and the ART lottery is performed based on the mode or points in the first half (S92). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the ART lottery is won (S93).

When winning the ART lottery (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of ART sets, and randomly draws the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59(A)). , And set (S94). Following the processing of S94, or if the ART lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 31 sets a predetermined value in the CZ game number counter (second half) (S95). For example, the main CPU 31 sets the CZ game number counter (second half) to “4” when the ART lottery is won, and sets the CZ game number counter (second half) to “3” when the ART lottery is not won. ”Is set.

Following the processing of S95, or if it is not the one game in the latter half of the game in S91 (NO), the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ mid ART lottery table (FIG. 55(C)), and makes an internal winning combination. Based on the ART lottery (S96), it is determined whether or not the ART lottery is won (S97). If this ART lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of ART sets, and lottery the ART level by referring to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59(A)). And set (S98).

Following the processing of S98, or if the ART lottery has not been won in S97 (NO), the main CPU 31 decrements the CZ game number counter (latter half) by 1 (S99). Then, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ game number counter (second half) is 0 (S100). When the CZ game number counter (second half) is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the CZ1 (CZ2) mid-process.

On the other hand, when the CZ game number counter (second half) is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the ART set number is 1 or more (S101). When the number of ART sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently finishes CZ, sets ART preparation in the next game (S102), and finishes processing during CZ1 (CZ2). .. On the other hand, when the number of ART sets is not 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets a CZ failure time (S103), and ends the CZ1 (CZ2) intermediate processing.

<Treatment during CZ3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the CZ3 middle processing will be described. In the CZ3 mid-process, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ during-arts lottery table (FIG. 56(D)), performs the ART lottery based on the internal winning combination (S121), and wins this ART lottery? It is determined whether or not (S122).

When winning the ART lottery (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of ART sets and the number of CT sets (S123). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the freeze is won in the ART lottery in S121 (S124). If the player has won the freeze (YES), the main CPU 31 executes a freeze process for temporarily stopping the progress of the game (S125).

Subsequent to the processing in S125, or if the freeze is not won in S124 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently refers to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59(A)) to randomly draw the ART level. And set (S126). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 finishes CZ, sets ART preparation in the next game (S127), and finishes processing during CZ3.

On the other hand, when the ART lottery is not won in S122 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently decrements the CZ game number counter by 1 (S128). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ game number counter is 0 (S129). If the CZ game number counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the CZ3 mid-process.

On the other hand, when the CZ game number counter is 0, the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the ART set number, and randomly selects and sets the ART level by referring to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59(A)). (S130). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 ends CZ, sets ART preparation in the next game (S131), and ends CZ3 processing.

<Normal start process during ART>
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the processing at the start during the normal ART will be described. In the normal ART start time process, the main CPU 31 first increments the ART continuous game number counter by 1 (S141). The ART continuous game number counter is a counter that counts the number of games in which the normal ART has continued. In the present embodiment, in addition to the ART continuing game number counter, an ART ending game number counter for counting the number of games in which the normal ART can be continued is provided. Then, the pachi-slot machine 1 compares the value of the ART continuing game number counter with the value of the ART ending game number counter, and when the value of the ART continuing game number counter reaches the value of the ART ending game number counter, sets the ART playing state. finish.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the CT lottery table during ART (FIG. 61), performs the CT lottery based on the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination (S142), and determines whether or not this CT lottery is won. Is determined (S143). If the CT lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the CT set number and sets 8 to the CT game number counter (S144), and subsequently, the type of the next game won. CT is set (S145).

Following the processing of S145, or if the CT lottery has not been won in S143 (NO), the main CPU 31 refers to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59(B)), and refers to the ART continuous game number counter. Based on the value of, the ART level is randomly selected and set (S146). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the normal ART medium/high probability random determination table (FIG. 60), and randomly determines and sets the transfer destination CT random determination state based on the current CT random determination state and the internal winning combination (S147). ..

Next, the main CPU 31 refers to the normal lottery lottery table during ART (FIG. 62), performs the lottery lot of the ART game based on the internal winning combination (S148), and determines whether or not this lottery lottery has been won. The determination is made (S149). When the additional lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds the winning result to the ART game number counter for ending ART (S150).

Following the processing of S150, or in the case where the additional lottery has not been won in S149 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently causes the value of the ART continuous game number counter to reach the value of the ART ending game number counter. It is determined whether or not (S151). When the value of the ART continued game number counter has not reached the value of the ART finished game number counter (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the normal ART start time process.

On the other hand, when the value of the ART continuing game number counter reaches the value of the ART ending game number counter (YES), the main CPU 31 subtracts 1 from the number of ART sets (S152), and then, when the ART ends. The process is set (S153), and the process at the start during normal ART is completed.

<Processing at the start during CT>
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the processing at the start during CT will be described. In the start process during CT, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the additional lottery table during CT (FIG. 66), performs additional lottery on the number of ART games based on the internal winning combination (S161), and adds to this additional lottery. It is determined whether or not the winning is won (S162).

When the additional lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds the winning result to the ART number game for ending ART (S163). As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the number of times the winning combination “three consecutive chili lip” is won during the same CT is increased, the additional amount per one time is increased.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is the winning combination “three consecutive Chilelip” (that is, whether the winning combination is converted into the winning combination “three consecutive Chilelip” in the flag conversion process of FIG. 77) (S164). ). When the internal winning combination is the combination “three consecutive chiririp” (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently resets the CT game number counter to 8 (S165), and ends the CT start process. In addition, when the internal winning combination is not the combination “three consecutive chiripuripu” (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the processing at the start during CT.

In S162, when the additional lottery is not won (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently refers to the CT number of sets extra lottery table (FIG. 67), and determines the number of CT sets based on the internal winning combination. The additional lottery is performed (S166), and it is determined whether or not the additional lottery of this CT set number has been won (S167). When the additional lottery for the number of CT sets has been won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of CT sets (S168), and finishes the process during start during CT.

On the other hand, when the additional lottery of the CT set number has not been won (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently subtracts 1 from the CT game number counter (S169), and subsequently, as a result of the subtraction, the CT game number counter. Is determined to be 0 (S170). When the CT game number counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the CT start process.

When the CT game number counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently subtracts 1 from the CT set number (S171). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CT set number is 1 or more (S172). When the CT set number is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the CT game number counter to 8 (S173), and ends the CT start process. On the other hand, if the number of CT sets is not 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 31 ends CT, sets normal ART in the next game (S174), and ends the start processing during CT.

<Processing during BB start>
Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the processing during the BB start will be described. In the BB start processing, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the bonus ART number-of-addition lottery table (FIG. 70) and performs the addition lottery of the ART game based on the internal winning combination (S181). It is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won (S182). When the additional lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the BB start process.

On the other hand, if the additional lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds the winning result to the ART game for ending ART (S183). Then, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the number of ART sets is 0 (S184). If the number of ART sets is not 0, the main CPU 31 ends the BB start processing. On the other hand, if the number of ART sets is 0, the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the number of ART sets (S185), and ends the BB start processing.

<Reel stop initial setting processing>
Next, the reel stop initialization process will be described with reference to FIG. In the reel stop initialization process, first, the main CPU 31 refers to a spinner stop initialization table (not shown), and obtains a spinner stop number based on an internal winning combination or the like (S191). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the turning cylinder stop initial setting table, and acquires each information based on the turning cylinder stop number (S192). In this process, the main CPU 31 acquires, for example, various kinds of information associated with the number for turning cylinder stop, such as the determination data by pressing order.

Then, the main CPU 31 stores the rotating identifier in the symbol code storage area (not shown) (S193). That is, the main CPU 31 sets the bits of all symbol code storage areas (excluding unused areas) to "1". Subsequently, the main CPU 31 stores 3 in the stop button non-operation counter (S194), and ends the reel stop initialization process. The stop button non-operation counter is used to determine the number of stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R that are not stopped by the player, and is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 33.

<Reel stop control processing>
Subsequently, the reel stop control process will be described with reference to FIG. In the reel stop control process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S201). This process is a process of determining whether or not a signal is output from the stop switch 7S. When determining that the valid stop button is not pressed (NO), the main CPU 31 repeatedly executes the process of step S201.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 31 determines that a valid stop button has been pressed (YES), the main CPU 31 stores a pressing order storage area (not shown) and an operation stop button storage area (Fig. (Not shown) and (S202). That is, the main CPU 31 manages the type of the pressed stop button by updating the operation stop button storage area, and updates the pressed order storage area based on the type and order of the pressed stop button. Manages the stop operation sequence (push order).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 subtracts 1 from the stop button non-operation counter (S203), determines the search target reel from the operation stop button (S204), and stores the stop start position in the main RAM 33 based on the symbol counter (( S205). The stop start position is a symbol position corresponding to the symbol counter of the corresponding reel when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 7S.

Next, the main CPU 31 executes a sliding piece number determination process (S206). In this sliding frame number determination process, the number of sliding frames defined at the stop start position is determined based on reel stop control information (stop table group) selected from the spinning cylinder stop initialization table based on the internal winning combination. Processing.

Next, the main CPU 31 generates reel stop command data to be transmitted from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72, and stores the generated reel stop command data in the communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 33. Generation processing is executed (S167). The reel stop command data represents the type of reel to be stopped, the stop start position, the number of sliding pieces (or the planned stop position), and the like.

Next, the main CPU 31 determines the scheduled stop position based on the stop start position and the sliding piece number determination data, and stores it in the main RAM 33 (S208). The planned stop position is a symbol position in which one of the predetermined numerical values “0” to “4” defined as the number of sliding pieces is added to the stop start position, and the symbol position where the rotation of the reel stops Is.

Next, the main CPU 31 sets the scheduled stop position as the search symbol position (S209). Next, the main CPU 31 executes a symbol code storage process (S210). This symbol code storage process acquires the symbol code of the symbol position data for checking for checking the symbol position of the spinning reel.

Next, the main CPU 31 updates the symbol code storage area from the symbol code acquired in the symbol code storage process (S211). Next, the main CPU 31 performs control change processing (S212). In this control change process, the stop information group used to stop the reels is updated when the reel is at a specific stop position.

Next, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the pressed stop button is released (S213). This process is a process of determining whether or not the signal is no longer output from the stop switch 7S.

When determining that the pressed stop button has not been released (NO), the main CPU 31 repeatedly executes the process of step S213. On the other hand, when determining that the pressed stop button has been released (YES), the main CPU 31 transmits a reel stop command (S214).

Next, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (S215). If it is determined that the stop button non-operation counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 executes the pull-in priority storage process (S216), and the process of step S201. In this attraction-in priority storage processing, the attraction-in priority of all the symbols of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R that are rotating is determined. On the other hand, when determining that the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 ends the reel stop control process.

<BB check process>
Subsequently, the BB check process will be described with reference to FIG. 88. In the BB check process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is in the bonus state (S221). When in the bonus state (YES), the main CPU 31 continues from the BB middle payout number counter that counts the number of medals that can be paid out in the bonus state, from the winning determination medal payout process (S13 in FIG. 75). The payout number of medals paid out in step S222 is subtracted (S222).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the BB medium payout number counter has become less than 0 (S223). When the BB medium payout number counter is not less than 0 (NO), the BB check process is ended, while when the BB medium payout number counter is less than 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 continues, Processing at the end of the bonus is performed (S224). In this process, the main CPU 31 clears various information in the bonus state and sets the RT1 game state flag to ON.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the CT lottery table at the end of bonus (FIG. 71), performs the CT lottery at the time of bonus end (S225), and determines whether or not the CT lottery is won (S226). In the case of winning the CT lottery, the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the CT set number (S227). If the CT lottery is won when the number of ART sets is 0, one is added to the number of CT sets and one is also added to the number of ART sets in S227.

Following the processing of S227 or when the CT lottery has not been won in S226 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the number of ART sets or the number of CT sets is 1 or more ( S228). When the number of ART sets or the number of CT sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 then ends the bonus state and sets the next game to the state of ART preparation (S229), and performs the BB check process. finish.

On the other hand, when neither the number of ART sets nor the number of CT sets is 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently ends the bonus state and sets the normal game state to the next game (S230). Next, the main CPU 31 refers to the normal medium/high probability random determination table (FIG. 51(B)) to randomly determine and set the random determination state of CZ (S231), and ends the BB check process.

If the bonus state is not in effect in S221 (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the combination of symbols BB (C_BB1, 2,) is displayed (S232). When the combination of the symbols of BB is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the BB check process.

On the other hand, when the combination of symbols BB is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently refers to the bonus type random determination table (FIG. 69), and randomly selects and sets the bonus type (S233). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 sets a predetermined value (for example, 216) in the BB payout number counter (S234), performs bonus start time processing (S235), and ends the BB check processing. In the bonus start process, the main CPU 31 performs various processes such as starting a bonus operation and setting a bonus state in the next game.

<RT check processing>
Subsequently, the RT check processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90. In the RT check process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is in the RT5 gaming state (S241). When the RT5 gaming state is in effect (YES), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check processing, while when the RT5 gaming state is not in operation (NO), the main CPU 31 continues in the RT0 gaming state. It is determined whether or not (S242).

When it is in the RT0 gaming state in S242 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not a combination of symbols of "bell crevice" is displayed (S243). When the "bell sloping eye" is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while when the "bell spilling eye" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 Then, the RT2 gaming state flag is set to ON, the RT0 gaming state is shifted to the RT2 gaming state (S244), and the RT check process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is not in the RT0 gaming state in S242 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the RT1 gaming state (S245). When in the RT1 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not a combination of symbols of "bell spilled eyes" is displayed (S246). When the "bell spill" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the RT2 gaming state flag to ON and turns off the RT1 gaming state flag, and shifts from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. Then, the RT check process is terminated (S247).

On the other hand, when the "bell spilled eyes" is not displayed in S246 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not 20 games in the RT1 gaming state have elapsed (S248). When 20 games have not passed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check processing, while when 20 games have passed (YES), the main CPU 31 turns off the RT1 game state flag and RT1 The game state is shifted to the RT0 game state (S249), and the RT check process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is not in the RT1 gaming state in S245 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the RT2 gaming state (S250). When the RT2 gaming state is in progress (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not a symbol combination of "RT3 shift rep" is displayed (S251). When "RT3 shift rep" is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while when "RT3 shift rep" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 determines Then, the RT3 gaming state flag is set to ON and the RT2 gaming state flag is turned off, the RT2 gaming state is shifted to the RT3 gaming state (S252), and the RT check process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is not in the RT2 gaming state in S250 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the RT3 gaming state (S261). When in the RT3 gaming state (YES), the main CPU31 determines whether or not the combination of the symbols "bell spilled eyes" or "RT2 shift lip" is displayed (S262). When the "bell spill" or "RT2 transition lip" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 sets the RT2 game state flag to ON and turns off the RT3 game state flag, and the RT3 game state is changed to the RT2 game state. The state is shifted to (S263), and the RT check process ends.

On the other hand, if neither "bell spilled eyes" nor "RT2 transition lip" is displayed in S262, the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not a combination of symbols "RT4 transition lip" is displayed. Yes (S264). When "RT4 transition rep" is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check processing, while when "RT4 transition rep" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 determines that Then, the RT4 gaming state flag is set to ON and the RT3 gaming state flag is turned OFF, and the RT3 gaming state is shifted to the RT4 gaming state (S265).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not ART preparation is set (S266). If the ART preparation is not set (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check processing, while if the ART preparation is set (YES), the main CPU 31 determines the CT set number. Is determined to be 1 or more (S267).

When the number of CT sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 sets CT in the next game, sets 8 in the CT game number counter (S268), and ends the RT check process. On the other hand, if the CT set number is not 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 31 sets the normal game to the next game, sets the ART end game number counter to a predetermined value (S269), and ends the RT check process. To do.

On the other hand, if it is not in the RT3 gaming state in S261 (NO), it is in the RT4 gaming state, so the main CPU 31 subsequently displays a combination of symbols of "bell spilled eyes" or "RT2 transition lip". It is determined whether or not (S270). When neither "bell spilled eyes" nor "RT2 transition lip" is displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 terminates the RT check process, while "bell spilled eye" or "RT2 transition lip" is displayed. When displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 sets the RT2 gaming state flag to ON and turns off the RT4 gaming state flag, shifts from the RT4 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state (S271), and performs RT check processing. finish.

<Processing at the end of CZ/ART>
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the CZ/ART end processing will be described. In the CZ/ART end time process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is a CZ failure or an ART end time (S281). If neither CZ failure nor ART termination (NO), the main CPU 31 terminates the CZ/ART termination processing, while CZ failure or ART termination (YES), Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ lottery table (FIG. 52(B)), and performs the CZ pull-back lottery (S282), and determines whether or not the pull-back lottery is won (S283).

When the draw-back lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the type of CZ that was won in the next game (S284), and sets a value corresponding to the type of CZ that was won in the CZ game number counter. (S285), the CZ/ART end processing is ended.

On the other hand, if the draw-back lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the normal game state to the next game (S286). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the normal medium/high probability random determination table (FIG. 51(B)), and randomly determines and sets the random determination state of CZ (S287), and ends the CZ/ART end processing.

[Explanation of operation of sub-control board]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 81 of the sub control board 72 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94.

<Sub navigation control processing>
First, the sub-side navigation control processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the sub-side navigation control processing, first, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not navigation data has been acquired (S301). The sub CPU 81 acquires navigation data determined by the main control board 71 from the start command data received from the main control board 71. In the process of S301, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not navigation data is included in the received start command data.

When the navigation data is acquired (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently sets the sub-side navigation data according to the navigation data (S302). Referring to FIG. 74, for example, when the sub CPU 81 acquires navigation data “4”, it sets navigation data for informing the sub-side navigation data of the pressing order “left, middle, right”. To do. Thereby, the content of the stop operation can be notified on both the main side and the sub side.

On the other hand, when the navigation data is not acquired (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not navigation (notification of stop operation) is necessary (S303). In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 81 needs to navigate when, for example, the flag conversion lottery is performed in the main control board 71, or when a predetermined winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the main control board 71. To determine. The result of the flag conversion lottery and the type of the internal winning combination are included in the start command data, and the sub CPU 81 can determine from the various information included in the start command data whether or not navigation is necessary. ..

When it is determined that the navigation is not necessary (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the sub navigation control process. On the other hand, if it is determined that navigation is required (YES), the sub CPU 81 sets sub navigation data according to various lottery results (S304), and ends the sub navigation control process. For example, when the winning combination “F_Sure Chiririp” is determined as the internal winning combination and the flag conversion lottery is won, the sub CPU 81 displays the navigation data for displaying the symbol combination of “3 consecutive chilirips”. (For example, the navigation data that makes you push the Chile pattern to aim) is set, and the winning combination "F_Sure Chile Lip" has been determined as the internal winning combination, and if you do not win the flag conversion lottery, the "Replay" symbol The navigation data for displaying the combination (for example, the navigation data indicating the pressing order other than the normal pressing) is set. Accordingly, even when the main side does not notify the content of the stop operation, the sub side can notify the content of the stop operation independently.

<Player registration processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the player registration processing will be described. In the player registration process, first, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a registration operation has been accepted (S311). For example, when a predetermined operation is accepted on the registration screen displayed when the operation of the registration button 212b is accepted on the menu screen 212 (see FIG. 29) of the first sub display device 201, the sub CPU 81 determines that the registration operation is accepted. To do.

When the registration operation is accepted (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently sets the player registration state (S312). As will be described later, when the player registration state is set, the sub CPU 81 enables the first sub display device 201 to display the game information screens 213, 214, 215 (see FIG. 29). The display screen of 201 is controlled.

On the other hand, when the registration operation has not been accepted (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the registration deletion operation has been accepted (S313). For example, when a specific operation is accepted on the registration screen of the first sub display device 201, the sub CPU 81 determines that a registration deletion operation has been accepted. When the registration deletion operation has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the player registration process.

On the other hand, when the registration deletion operation is received (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently clears the player registration state. As will be described later, in a situation where the player registration state is cleared, the sub CPU 81 cannot display the game information screens 213, 214, 215 (see FIG. 29) on the first sub display device 201, and the first sub display is disabled. Control the display screen of the device 201.

<History management processing>
Next, the history management process will be described with reference to FIG. In the history management process, first, the sub CPU 81 acquires a game result from various command data received from the main control board 71 (S321). Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 updates the game history (S322), and ends the history management process. The sub CPU 81 can grasp, for example, the type of winning combination determined as the internal winning combination from the start command data, and the combination of the symbols displayed from the winning operation command data (that is, the internal winning combination is determined). It is possible to understand whether or not there is a winning of a role. Further, the sub CPU 81 can grasp the current game state and the transition state of the game state from the start command data, for example. From these game results acquired from various command data, the sub CPU 81 changes various values such as bonus count, ART count, game count (game count), CZ count, CZ success count, winning count and winning probability of each winning combination. It is possible to manage various game histories.

[Switching the display screen of the first sub display device]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, a method of switching the display screen of the first sub-display device 201 in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 95(A) is a transition example of the display screen of the first sub-display device 201 in the situation where the player registration state is not set, and FIG. 95(B) is the player registration state is set. It is a transition example of the display screen of the first sub display device 201 in the situation.

As shown in FIG. 95(A), when the player registration state is not set, the sub control board 72 (sub CPU 81) displays the display screen displayed on the first sub display device 201 on the top screen 211 and the menu. The screen 212 and the menu screen 212 are controlled to be transitable only between various display screens that are transitable. Specifically, the sub-control board 72, based on a touch operation (for example, a tap operation on a predetermined button or a swipe operation on the display screen) acquired via the touch sensor 201a, the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212. Switch the display screen between. On the other hand, when the player registration state is not set, the sub control board 72 controls the display of the game information screens 213, 214, 215 to be impossible. That is, in a situation where the player registration state is not set, the player cannot display the game information screens 213, 214, 215 on the first sub display device 201.

Further, as shown in FIG. 95(B), when the player registration state is set, the sub control board 72 displays the display screen displayed on the first sub display device 201 on the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212. And, in addition to the various display screens that can be transited from the menu screen 212, control is also possible to transit between the game information screens 213, 214, and 215. That is, the sub control board 72 controls so that not only the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212 but also the game information screens 213, 214, 215 can be displayed based on the touch operation acquired via the touch sensor 201a. Thereby, in the situation where the player registration state is set, the player can display the game information screens 213, 214, 215 on the first sub display device 201.

As shown in FIG. 95(B), the order of transition of the display screen among the top screen 211, the menu screen 212, and the game information screens 213, 214, 215 is arbitrary. For example, the top screen 211 may be directly transitionable to the game information screens 213, 214, 215, or the top screen 211 may be transitionable to the game information screens 213, 214, 215 only via the menu screen 212. Good.

In this respect, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the top screen 211 cannot directly transit to the game information screens 213, 214, 215, and the game information screens 213, 214, 215 only through the menu screen 212. It is possible to transition to. More specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by performing a swipe operation on the menu screen 212, it is possible to transit to the game information screens 213, 214, 215.

Here, the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are not display screens provided with buttons corresponding to the menu screen 212, but display screens provided completely independently of the menu screen 212. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the information indicating the result of the game that the player has a strong interest during the game, which is the game history, is calculated from the related information that is not related to the result of the game such as the payout arrangement and the volume adjustment. Display independently. Then, in the pachi-slot machine 1, in the situation where the player registration state is set, it is possible to transit to the game information screens 213, 214, 215 without requiring a menu selection operation on the menu screen 212. As a result, in the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to facilitate access to information (game history) that the player desires to confirm in the situation where the player registration state is set.

On the other hand, the menu selection operation on the menu screen 212 does not allow the transition to the game information screens 213, 214, 215, and the swipe operation which is not in the menu display does not allow the transition to the game information screens 213, 214, 215. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation for transition to the game information screens 213, 214, 215 can be treated as a hidden command in the situation where the player registration state is set. For a player, the player's own knowledge of the pachi-slot machine 1 allows him to see a more detailed game history that cannot be seen by other players with less knowledge, so he can play the game more advantageously than the other player. As a result, it can be expected that the game will be actively played.

(Display of the top screen from the game information screen)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, the game information screens 213, 214, 215 transit to the top screen 211 manually or automatically by the player. Specifically, when the return button is operated on the game information screens 213, 214, 215, the display screen is transited from the game information screens 213, 214, 215 to the top screen 211 (manual transition). When a predetermined condition is satisfied while the game information screens 213, 214, 215 are displayed, the game screen automatically shifts to the top screen 211 regardless of the player's operation (automatic transition).

More specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1, in a state where the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are displayed, an insertion operation (an operation of the MAX bet button 11, an operation of the 1 bet button, and a medal insertion slot 22 with a medal). When the input operation is performed, the screen automatically changes to the top screen 211. It should be noted that, in a state in which the probability of a winning combination relating to a replay performing a replay operation being determined as an internal winning combination such as the ART game state (high-rep state) is high, a medal is automatically generated by the replay operation associated with the replay winning. As a result, the chances of displaying the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 may be limited in the high-rip state. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when a medal is automatically inserted by the operation of the replay, when the start operation is performed instead of inserting the medal, the top screen is automatically displayed from the game information screens 213, 214, 215. Transition to 211.

That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the re-play operation is performed, when the start operation is performed, the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 automatically transit to the top screen 211, and the re-play operation is performed. If is not performed, when the insertion operation is performed, the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are automatically changed to the top screen 211.

(Display the top screen (or menu screen) from the display screen according to the menu)
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, from the various display screens (registration screen, explanation screen, array payout screen, reach screen, WEB introduction screen, and volume adjustment screen) that can be transitioned by the menu selection operation on the menu screen 212, The screen transitions to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) manually or automatically. Specifically, when a predetermined button (for example, a top button) is operated on various display screens, the display screen is changed from the various display screens to the top screen 211, and a specific button (for example, top button) is displayed on the various display screens. , A return button), the display screen is transited from the various display screens to the menu screen 212 (manual transition). In addition, when a predetermined time elapses while displaying various display screens, the screen automatically shifts to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) regardless of the player's operation.

Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the time to transit to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) is changed according to the type of the display screen currently displayed. For example, if the volume adjustment screen for adjusting the volume output from the pachi-slot machine 1 is displayed for a long time, the volume may be adjusted to an unintended volume by an erroneous operation, and the erroneous operation makes other players uncomfortable. Since there is a possibility that it will end up, the screen transitions to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) in a shorter time than other display screens. On the other hand, the registration screen transitions to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) in a longer time than other display screens in order to facilitate the registration of the player.

That is, the time to transition to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) is set on each display screen, the time that is shorter than the other display screens is set on the volume adjustment screen, and The registration screen is set to have a longer time than other display screens.

(Function to select whether to operate the menu)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, the player transits from the menu screen 212 to the registration screen, the explanation screen, the array payout screen, the reach screen, the WEB introduction screen, and the volume adjustment screen, so that various types of display screens are displayed. You can perform operations and check various information. Here, the functions selectable by the player may be restricted according to the settings on the game store side.

For example, the game shop can disable the volume control by the player by restricting the transition from the menu screen 212 to the volume control screen (eg, not displaying the volume button 212g on the menu screen 212). ..

[Modification of First Embodiment]
The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment has been described above. Next, a modified example of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described.

<CT precursor game and alert lottery during normal ART>
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, in order to facilitate understanding, when an advantageous state (for example, CT) is won, it is decided to immediately shift from the next game to the advantageous state. In a pachi-slot machine, when performing advantageous control for a player, the advantageous control may not be performed immediately, but the advantageous control may be performed after a predetermined number of games have been played. This predetermined number of games is called a so-called aura game. In this modified example, for example, when the lottery for CT is won during the normal ART, the pachi-slot machine 1 that sandwiches the predictive game a predetermined number of times rather than performing CT immediately will be described.

As shown in FIG. 96(A), during the normal ART, the CT lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination by using the CT lottery table during ART (FIG. 61). If this CT lottery is won, a lot of lottery for the CT lottery is performed on the main side (main control board 71) until the player wins CT, which is an advantageous state for the player. .. Specifically, the main control board 71 performs an internal lottery to determine an internal winning combination, and also serves as an internal winning combination "F_ sure chililip" "F_1 sure chililip" "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip." When any of "D" is determined, the flag conversion lottery is performed using the ART flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 58).

On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this modified example, during the sign of CT after winning the CT lottery, the CT based on the winning combination after the flag conversion lottery (that is, the winning combination “three consecutive chiripuripu” and the winning combination “reach eye lip”). It is assumed that the lottery or other lottery will not be performed so as to give a privilege to the player. During the CT sign, the flag conversion lottery is performed on the sub side (sub control board 72), and the notification content performed on the sub side is controlled based on the result of the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side. For example, in the case of winning the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side, the information for displaying the combination of the symbols of "reach eye lip" is displayed on the display unit 100, and in the case of not winning the flag conversion lottery, , Information for displaying the combination of the symbols of "Replay" is displayed on the display unit 100.

As described above, in the recent pachi-slot machines, it is required that the lottery that influences the player's profit (ball payout) is performed on the main side. However, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this modification, the lottery for the flag conversion lottery is performed. A period during which the result does not have any effect on the player's profit is set (during the sign of CT), and the flag conversion lottery is performed on the sub side only during this period. Thereby, for example, in a situation where the award of CT sign is decided to be granted, it is possible to increase the chances of displaying a special symbol combination of "reach eye lip", and the variation of the symbol combination is increased. Therefore, improvement in playability can be expected.

Note that FIG. 96B is a flag conversion lottery table in the CT sign used for the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side, and is stored in the ROM cartridge board 82. The flag conversion lottery table in the sign of CT defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side in association with the internal winning combination. Referring to the flag conversion lottery table in the CT sign, during the CT sign, the role “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” is converted to the role “reach eye lip” with a very high probability. I understand. As a result, when the winning combination “F_reach-eyes lip A” to “F_reach-eyes lip D” is determined as an internal winning combination in the CT sign, a combination of symbols of “reach-eyes lip” is displayed with high probability. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that he is in the omen. It should be noted that, again, when winning the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side, although the notification for displaying the symbol combination of the “reach eye lip” is displayed, no benefit is given.

Of course, the flag conversion lottery during the sign of CT may be performed on the main side, but the lottery on the main side is performed by performing the lottery during the period that does not affect the profit of the player as in this modification. This is preferable because the data capacity and the processing load can be reduced.

<Another example of the pressing sequence for displaying 3 consecutive chili lip>
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the above-described first embodiment, when the winning combination “F_Sure Chillirip” and “F_1 Sure Chillirip” is determined as the internal winning combination, when the correct answer is given in the order of pressing, the combination of the symbols “3 consecutive Chillirip” is displayed. If the answer is incorrect in the order of pressing, the combination of symbols "Replay" is displayed (Fig. 47). In addition, it is assumed that the correct pressing order for the winning combination “F_certain Chilelip” and “F_1 certain Chilelip” is “forward pressing”.

In this regard, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present modification, when the winning combination “F_Sure Chile Lip” or “F_1 Sure Chile Lip” is determined as the internal winning combination, the number of combinations of symbols displayed when the answer is incorrect is increased. , The order of pressing the correct answer is different for each of the roles of "F_ sure chillip" and "F_1 sure chillip".

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 97(A), in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present modified example, the combination “F_certain Chilelip” has the correct pressing order “forward pressing (the first stop operation is the left reel. 3L)”, and the wrong pressing order is “middle pressing (first reel operation is middle reel 3C)” and “reverse pressing (first stop operation is right reel 3R)”. And, in the case of the combination "F_Sure Chiriripu", the combination of the symbols of "3 consecutive chiriripu" is displayed when it is pressed forward, the combination of the symbols of "Replay" is displayed when it is "middle pressed", and the "reverse press" In the case of "", a combination of symbols of "2 consecutive chiririp" is displayed.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present modified example, in the case of the role “F_1 definite Chilelip”, the correct pressing order is “reverse pressing”, and the incorrect pressing order is “forward pressing” and “middle pressing”. And And, the combination of symbols of "3 consecutive chili lip" is displayed when the hand "F_1 probability chili lip" is pressed backward, and the combination of symbols of "replay" is displayed when it is "middle pressed", and "forward press" In the case of "", a combination of symbols of "2 consecutive chiririp" is displayed.

That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present modified example, when one of the winning combinations “F_probable chilirip” and “F_1 promising chililip” is determined as the internal winning combination, the type of winning combination is determined by “forward pressing”. Depending on the type of winning combination, "3 consecutive chili lip" or "2 consecutive chili lip" will be displayed depending on the type of winning combination. .. On the other hand, when one of the winning combinations "F_Sure Chiririp" or "F_1 Sure Chiririp" is decided as the internal winning combination, a combination of the symbols of "Replay" will be applied regardless of the type of the winning combination when "Internal press" Is displayed.

By doing so, for example, when the winning combination “F_probable chiririp” and “F_1 promising chililip” are determined as the internal winning combination, various navigations (notifications) that make the Chile symbol possible are possible. Specifically, it is possible to perform both "navigation to push Chile pattern by pushing forward" and "navigation to push Chile pattern by pressing backward". In addition, when the winning combination "F_Sure Chiririp" is determined as the internal winning combination, "Navigating the Chile pattern by pushing forward" is the navigation for displaying "3 consecutive chilirips" and "Reverse pressing". The "navigation aiming at Chile pattern" is a navigation for not displaying "three consecutive Chilelips" (two consecutive Chilelips are displayed). On the other hand, when the winning combination "F_1 Sure Chiririp" is determined as the internal winning combination, "Navigating the Chile pattern by pushing forward" is a navigation for not displaying "3 consecutive chilirips". The "navigation that aims at Chile pattern by pressing" is a navigation for displaying "three consecutive Chilelips" (two consecutive Chilelilips are displayed).

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of this modified example, whether or not to perform these navigations is managed by the flag conversion lottery performed on the main side, and the navigation is performed under the control of the sub side based on the result of the flag conversion lottery on the main side. Is executed.

FIG. 97(B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the flag conversion lottery on the main side during normal ART and the navigation on the sub side. During the normal ART, when the winning combination “F_probable chiririp” or “F_1 probable chiririp” is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 performs a two-step flag conversion lottery (see FIG. 58). On the sub side, the result of the two-step flag conversion lottery is acquired from the start command data, and the navigation performed by the display unit 100 is determined based on the result of the two-step flag conversion lottery.

Specifically, in the case of non-winning at the time of the flag conversion lottery in the first stage of the two-stage flag conversion lottery, the sub control board 72 performs “replay navigation”. In this "replay navigation", the sub control board 72 notifies the player to press the middle button. As shown in FIG. 97(A), a combination of symbols "Replay" will be displayed when the player presses the middle button regardless of whether the winning combination is "F_certain Chilelip" or "F_1 certain Chilelip".

Further, when the first-stage flag conversion lottery is won in the two-stage flag conversion lottery and the second-stage flag conversion lottery is not won, the sub control board 72 performs the “Chillip Lip Navi”. In this "Chililip fanning navigation", the sub-control board 72, when the winning combination "F_ Sure Chilirip" is an internal winning combination, the player is instructed to press the Chile pattern by pressing it backwards, and the winning part "F_1 Sure Chilirip" is inside. If it is a winning combination, the player will be notified to press the Chile pattern by pushing the button forward. As shown in FIG. 97(A), the combination of the symbols of "two consecutive chili lip" is displayed when the combination "F_certain chili lip" is pushed backwards and when the combination "F_1 sure chili lip" is pushed forward. Will be.

Further, when both of the flag conversion lottery in the first stage and the flag conversion lottery in the second stage of the two-stage flag conversion lottery are won, the sub-control board 72 carries out “nullilip complete navigation”. In this "Chililip complete navigation", the sub-control board 72, if the role "F_ Sure Chilirip" is an internal winning combination, the sub-control board 72 informs the player to press the Chile symbol by pressing the button "F_1 Sure Chililip" internally. If it is a winning combination, it will notify you so that you can aim for the Chile pattern by pressing it backwards. As shown in FIG. 97(A), the combination of symbols of "three consecutive chili lip" is displayed in any case when the hand "F_certain chili lip" is pushed forward and when the hand "F_1 sure chili lip" is pushed backward. Will be.

As described above, the notification based on the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery does not affect the profit (the flag conversion lottery itself affects the profit, but the combination of the symbols displayed as a result affects the profit. The notification based on the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery is not performed on the main side (instruction monitor) but is performed only on the sub side (display unit 100). In this regard, as in this modified example, not only the “Chililip complete navigation” but also the “Chililip incentive navigation” are also performed, so that navigation that does not affect profits can be performed in various ways on the sub side. Is improved.

[Effect of pachi-slot machine]
The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present invention has been described above. According to such a pachi-slot machine 1, the following effects can be expected.

(Management of duration during CT)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, a CT is provided as an extra chance zone for extending the duration of the normal ART, and the number of ART games is increased based on the internal winning combination in the CT. CT is performed by a set of 8 games, but if the number of ART games can be added during CT, the number of games is not subtracted, and only when the number of games cannot be added, the number of games is subtracted. .. The player does not know how long the CT will last, and since the CT will not end as long as the addition is performed, the interest in the game during the CT can be enhanced.

At this time, in the pachi-slot machine 1, if an addition is made in response to the combination “three consecutive chirips” during CT, one set of eight games is reset. As a result, even if the CT is about to end, the CT will be restarted from the beginning by the addition according to the role “three consecutive chillips”, so there is a strong interest in the game during the CT. It is possible to continue playing the game without being bored because of being held, and to enhance the interest of the game during CT.

In addition, since the addition according to the winning combination "three consecutive chilirips" is performed only when the winning combination "F_probable chiririp" and "F_1 promising chililip" is determined as the internal winning combination, the player will win the flag conversion lottery. It is possible to prevent an excessive profit from being given to the player, and it is possible to balance the profit of the player and the game shop. In the pachi-slot machine 1 described above, during CT, the flag conversion lottery for the winning combination “F_probable chilirip” and “F_1 probable chililip” is always won (see FIG. 65), but the winning probability is merely an example. It does not prevent appropriate adjustment depending on the balance of profits of the player and the game shop.

(Number of additional games based on the role "3 consecutive chiririp" in CT)
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the number of additions based on the combination “three consecutive chilirips” during CT exceeds a certain number, the number of games to be added per one time is increased. As described above, as long as the number of ART games is added, the CT will not end, and if the winning combination "3 consecutive chilirip" is won, the CT will be reset. The more you continue to have, the more you can expect to increase the amount of addition per time, and the interest during CT will improve. In addition, the number of times that increases the amount of addition per time is more than the number of games (8 times) for one set of CT (9 times or more), so an excessive profit is given to the player. This can be prevented from being given, and the profit of the player and the game store can be balanced.

(Bonus notification on the main side)
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the information of the stop operation for displaying the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination “10” (or “11”) is uniquely corresponded to on the instruction monitor of the information display device 14. By displaying, bonus notification is given on the main side. Here, in the pachi-slot machine, the priority of symbols to be drawn is usually set, and when the winning combination and the other winning combinations are overlapped and determined as the internal winning combination, the winning combination according to the priority order. There are some cases where you can draw in a combination of symbols depending on, and there are times when you cannot draw in.

In this regard, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, either the bonus winning combination, or the "missing" "F_special winning combination 1" "F_special winning combination 2" or "F_special winning combination 3". In the case, it is possible to pull in a combination of symbols according to the winning combination, but if another winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, pull in a combination of symbols according to the winning combination. I can't. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, an instruction is given only when a bonus winning combination and any one of the “outgoing”, “F_special winning combination 1”, “F_special winning combination 2” and “F_special winning combination 3” is determined as an internal winning combination. The display of "10" (or "11") is displayed on the monitor. As a result, the navigation on the main side can be performed at an appropriate timing when the winning combination of the bonus can be won.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, even if the winning combination is determined to be an internal winning combination, the winning combination and any one of the “missing”, “F_special winning combination 1”, “F_special winning combination 2” and “F_special winning combination 3” are determined. The instruction monitor does not display "10" (or "11") until the predetermined number of games have passed since the winning combination was first won, and the instruction monitor is provided on the condition that the predetermined number of games have passed. "10" (or "11") is displayed.

For example, there is a case where an effect (so-called continuous effect) that is performed over a plurality of games is triggered by winning a winning combination, but during the continuous effect, "10" (or "" is displayed on the instruction monitor. If it is displayed as "11"), the meaning of the continuous production may be diminished and the interest may be spoiled. In this respect, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display on the instruction monitor is not performed until the predetermined number of games have passed, and the display on the instruction monitor is performed after the predetermined number of games have passed, so that the effect effect is obtained. The bonus notification can be given on the main side without damaging it.

(Notification by main/sub side and notification by sub side alone)
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, a plurality of types of winning combinations having different combinations of symbols to be displayed according to the mode of stop operation (pushing order) are provided (see FIG. 47), and the symbols to be displayed are included in these multiple types of winning combinations. The combination includes a combination that gives different benefits and a combination that gives the same benefit even if the combination of symbols displayed is different.

For example, the number of medals to be paid out is different depending on whether the combination of symbols "Bell" is displayed or the combination of symbols "Bell Kobo" is displayed, and the combination of symbols "Replay" is displayed. Since it is different whether or not the transition of the RT game state is performed in addition to the operation of the re-play depending on whether the combination of the symbols of "RT2 transition lip" is displayed or not, the role "F_3 choice bell_1st" or The role “F_maintenance lip_1st” is a role that gives different benefits depending on the combination of the symbols displayed. On the other hand, in the case where the symbol combination of "3 consecutive chili lip" is displayed and the case where the symbol combination of "replay" is displayed, both of them only perform the re-game operation, and thus the role "F_ The "probable chili lip" is a combination that gives the same privilege even if the combination of symbols displayed is different (note that in the case of the "F_certain chili lip", the privilege to be awarded differs depending on the result of the flag conversion lottery. , The combination of symbols displayed does not affect the benefits to be given).

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, both the main side and the sub side perform the notification about the combination of the symbols to be displayed, which gives different benefits, while the combination of the symbols to be displayed is the same. The role of giving the privilege is not notified by the instruction monitor on the main side, but is notified only by the display unit 100 on the sub side. As a result, the notification that affects the privilege can be appropriately performed on the instruction monitor on the main side that manages the privilege, while the notification that does not affect the privilege can be performed by the display unit 100 on the sub side with a variety of navigation operations. ..

(Notification lottery on the sub side)
In addition, since the notification on the sub side at the time of winning the combination “F_Sure Chiririp” is performed based on the result of the flag conversion lottery performed on the main side, the lottery (notification lottery) whether or not to notify is performed on the main side. It is managed by. That is, at the time of winning the winning combination “F_Sure Chiririp”, the privilege to be given is different according to the result of the flag conversion lottery, and therefore the flag conversion lottery is a lottery that influences the privilege and is strictly managed on the main side.

On the other hand, the pachi-slot machine 1 may give a notification as a complete effect without affecting the award to be given, and in such a case, the notification lottery itself as to whether or not to give a notification. On the sub side. For example, in the sign of CT, the privilege of CT has already been determined, and it is possible to increase the chances of displaying a special symbol combination of "reach eye lip" (on the contrary, the privilege is not granted. If it is displayed, it will give the player a feeling of dissatisfaction and cannot be displayed).

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, if the winning combination “F_reach eye lip AD” is won during the CT sign, the sub side performs the flag conversion lottery, and based on this lottery result, the combination of the “reach eye lip” symbols is selected. Notify to display. As a result, in the situation where the award of CT sign has been decided to be given, the variation in the way the symbols are displayed is increased, so that it is possible to expect an improvement in playability. In addition, it is preferable that the notification side lottery (flag conversion lottery) is performed on the sub side in a period that does not affect the privilege at all, because the data capacity and the processing load on the main side can be reduced.

(How to display game history)
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, a first sub-display device 201 is provided separately from the display unit 100, and various information useful for the player is displayed on the first sub-display device 201. For example, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a top screen 211 showing an outline game history on the first sub-display device 201, a menu screen 212 that allows various operations on the pachi-slot machine 1, and game information screens 213, 214 showing a detailed game history. , 215 is displayed. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 registers a player who plays a game and provides a unique service to the player. For example, when the registration of the player is not accepted, although the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 showing the detailed game history cannot be displayed on the first sub display device 201, the registration of the player is accepted. In this case, the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 showing the detailed game history are controlled to be displayable on the first sub display device 201. Since it is possible to improve the convenience of the player by confirming a more detailed game history, the pachi-slot machine 1 can improve the convenience when registration of the player is accepted.

Here, the first sub-display device 201 is provided separately from the display unit 100 that performs the effect, and the sub-control board 72 includes the first sub-display device 201 (and the sub-control substrate 72 via a liquid crystal relay circuit (not shown)). Since the second sub display device 202) is controlled and the display unit 100 is controlled via the accessory relay board (not shown), the first sub display device 201 can be controlled separately from the display unit 100. .. Specifically, the display of the first sub display device 201 can be switched even during a game (that is, an effect is being executed on the display unit 100). For the player, by switching the display of the first sub-display device 201 during the game, various information can be acquired without disturbing the effect being executed on the display unit 100, which is preferable.

In particular, like the display unit 100 in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by switching a plurality of screen mechanisms that cause an image to be displayed by the irradiation of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B, a presentation using a planar image display is performed. When performing an effect using an image display with a sense of depth (stereoscopic effect) and an effect using a curved image display, although the effect effect can be remarkably enhanced, an effect such as a game history is produced during the effect. Is not suitable for displaying irrelevant information. In this regard, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since information unrelated to these effects is displayed on the first sub-display device 201 provided separately from the display unit 100, without impairing the effect, At the same time, various information such as the game history can be displayed appropriately.

By the way, in general, in a pachi-slot machine, a medal slot is provided on the right side of the pedestal when viewed from the player, and a bet button or start lever is provided on the left side when viewed from the player. In this case, the player operates the right side or the left side (side) of the pedestal portion.

In this regard, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the first sub-display device 201 is provided on the side (right side or left side) of the surface that stands upright substantially vertically from the pedestal portion 10, and the first sub-display device 201 displays the first sub-display device 201 on the screen. A touch sensor 201a for switching the display of the sub display device 201 is provided. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the first sub-display device 201 and the input device (touch sensor 201a) for controlling the display thereof are provided at the place where the player's hand is located during the game, and the operability of the player is provided. Is improved. In particular, since the first sub-display device 201 with the touch sensor 201a is provided on the surface of the pedestal portion 10 standing upright from the horizontal plane, the player can place his or her hand on the pedestal portion 10 while displaying the first sub-display. It is possible to operate the device 201, which not only improves operability but also reduces fatigue associated with the operation, so that an improvement in operating rate can be expected.

[Second Embodiment]
Subsequently, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 to 109. Note that detailed description of the same configuration and control as the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment will be omitted.

[Game Flow of Pachi-Slot Machine of Second Embodiment]
First, with reference to FIG. 98, a game flow of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 98 is a game state transition flow regarding presence or absence of notification of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment. Comparing the transition flow of the game state of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 98 with the transition flow of the game state of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 33, basically, the first embodiment and the second embodiment Games are played in the same flow, but during the ART game state, games are played in different flows. That is, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment and the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment differ greatly in CT control during the ART gaming state.

Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the CT lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination during the normal ART, and the gaming state is changed to CT when the CT lottery is won. On the other hand, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment is different from the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment in that CT is set between the MB flags in the ART gaming state. Note that the MB (role “F_MB”) is a continuous differential device related to a so-called second-class special role, and in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the main control board 71 uses the MB as an internal winning combination. When determined, a combination of corresponding symbols (combination “C_MB”) is carried over as an internal winning combination over a plurality of games until it is displayed along the activated line.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 98, between the MB non-flags in the ART gaming state is a normal ART, and CT is performed between the MB flags in the ART gaming state. That is, in the second embodiment, the main control board 71 shifts the game state between MB flags when MB is determined as an internal winning combination during (H) normal ART. Between the MB flags in the ART gaming state, the game is played so that the symbol combination related to the MB is not displayed, and the main control board 71 performs CT during this period. Note that a method of playing a game so that a symbol combination corresponding to MB is not displayed between MB flags is already known, and for example, a symbol whose symbol combination corresponding to MB is not displayed is aimed at. This can be realized by notifying, or notifying the push order in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the MB is not displayed.

On the other hand, when the CT ends, the winning of the MB is prompted (notified), and (I) When the symbol combination corresponding to the MB is displayed, the gaming state shifts from between the MB flags to the MB gaming state. After that, when the end condition of the (J)MB gaming state is satisfied, the gaming state shifts from the MB gaming state to the MB non-flag, and the normal ART is performed.

<Characteristics of CT performed during MB flag>
Since MB is carried over as an internal winning combination during the MB flag, stop control different from that during the MB non-flag can be performed. For example, when the predetermined winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination between the MB flag and the MB non-flag, the internal winning combination is “MB+predetermined small” because the MB is carried over during the MB flag. However, since the MB is not carried over during the non-MB flag, the internal winning combination is only the “predetermined small winning combination”. In the pachi-slot machine, the stop control is performed based on the internal winning combination. Therefore, even if the same predetermined small winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination between the MB flags and the MB non-flags, different stop control is performed. The stop control can be performed based on the information, and as a result, the combination of symbols that can be displayed for a predetermined small winning combination can be different between the MB flags and the MB non-flags.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, by making the stop control different during MB flag and during MB non-flag, it is difficult (or impossible) to display during normal ART (during MB non-flag). By displaying the combination of symbols during CT (between MB flags), various game characteristics are realized. Hereinafter, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment will be specifically described while focusing on the difference from the first embodiment.

[Correspondence between winning combination and stop symbol]
Next, with reference to FIG. 99 and FIG. 100, the relationship between the internal winning combination and the combination of symbols displayed in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. Since the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment and the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment differ in the types of winning combinations and the types of symbol combinations, this point will be described first.

(Type of winning combination used in the second embodiment)
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the roles “F_chiririp”, “F_certain chiriplip”, “F_1 sure chililip”, “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” are used. On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the roles “R_single chililip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chililip 4” are used instead of these winning combinations.

In addition, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the roles “F_3 choice bell_1st” to “F_3 choice bell_3rd” are used. On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the winning combinations “F_pressing order bell 1” to “F_pressing order bell 6” are used instead of these winning combinations. In the following, the combinations “F_push order bell 1” to “F_push order bell 6” may be simply referred to as “push order bell”. In addition, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment uses a winning combination (role “F_MB”) related to an MB that the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment does not have. Note that other roles may be common to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, or may be different from each other, and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

(Type of symbol combination used in the second embodiment)
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, as a combination of symbols corresponding to the combination “F_3 choice bell_1st” to “F_3 choice bell_3rd”, a combination of symbols of “bell”, “bell spilled eyes”, and “one sheet appearance” is used. Was used. On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, as a combination of symbols corresponding to the combination “F_push order bell 1” to “F_push order bell 6”, in addition to these symbol combinations, “MB "A combination of symbols of "cactus" is used. The combination of the symbols "MB" may be arbitrary. The combination of the symbols of “cactus” may be the same as that of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, but the number of medals paid out when displayed is the same as the combination of the symbols of “bell” (9 Sheet).

<Correspondence between winning symbol and stop symbol during MB non-flag>
FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a relationship between an internal winning combination during the MB non-flag and a combination of symbols displayed. As shown in FIG. 99, during the MB non-flag period, the combinations “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 series chililip 4” have different combinations of symbols to be displayed depending on the pressing order, and the pressing order is “. In the case of “press forward”, the symbol combination of “replay” is displayed along the activated line. On the other hand, if the pressing order is other than "Forward pressing", the combination of symbols of "Cililip" in the correct pressing order is displayed along the activated line, and the combination of symbols of "Replay" in the incorrect pressing order is Is displayed.

More specifically, in the case of the combination “F_single chililip 1” to “F_single chililip 4”, in the case of the correct pressing order for each combination, a combination of symbols of the “single chililip” is displayed, and In the case of an incorrect answer pushing order for each combination, a combination of symbols of "replay" is displayed. In addition, in the case of the combination “F_2 consecutive Chilelip 1” to “F_2 consecutive Chilelip 4”, in the case of the correct pressing order for each combination, a combination of symbols of “two consecutive Chilelip” is displayed, and for each combination. In the case of an incorrect answer pushing order, a combination of symbols of "replay" is displayed. In addition, in the case of the combination “F_3 series Chilelip 1” to “F_3 series Chilelip 4”, in the case of the correct pressing order for each combination, a combination of symbols of “3 series series Chilelip” is displayed, and for each combination In the case of an incorrect answer pushing order, a combination of symbols of "replay" is displayed.

In addition, during the MB non-flag, the combination of the symbols “F_pressing order bell 1” to “F_pressing order bell 6” is different depending on the pressing order, and the correct answer is given for each combination. In the case of pressing order, the combination of symbols of "bell" is displayed, and in the case of the pressing order of incorrect answer for each combination, the combination of symbols of "bell spilled" or "first appearance" is displayed. Is displayed.

<Correspondence between the winning combination and the stop symbol during the MB flag>
FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a relationship between an internal winning combination in the MB flags and a combination of symbols displayed. As shown in FIG. 100, during the MB flags, the combination of symbols “F_single lip 1” to “F_3 continuous lip lip 4” is displayed along the activated line regardless of the pressing order. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the winning combination “F_MB” and any of the winning combinations “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chililip 4” are determined as the internal winning combinations, the “chirilip” is always displayed. The combination of symbols is displayed along the activated line.

More specifically, in the combination “F_single chililip 1” to “F_single chililip 4”, the combination of symbols of “single chililip” is displayed along the activated line regardless of the pressing order, and the combination “F_2 double chililip 1” is displayed. ~ In "F_2 consecutive chililip 4", the combination of symbols of "2 consecutive chililip" is displayed along the activated line regardless of the pressing order, and in the part "F_3 consecutive chililip 4" to "F_3 consecutive chililip 4", it does not matter in the pressing order. Instead, a combination of symbols of "three consecutive chilirips" is displayed along the activated line.

Comparing FIG. 99 and FIG. 100, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the combination “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chililip 4” is a pattern that is displayed according to the pressing order during the MB non-flag. While the combination is different, the pressing order is not affected during the MB flag for the combination of symbols displayed.

Further, during the MB flags, the combinations “F_pressing order bell 1” to “F_pressing order bell 6” have different combinations of symbols to be displayed according to the pressing order, and are defined for each combination. A combination of symbols of "bell", "bell spilled or first sheet", "cactus", and "MB" is displayed according to the pressing order. Comparing FIG. 99 and FIG. 100, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, during the MB flag, more combinations of symbols are displayed during the winning of the combination “push order bell” than during the non-MB flag. be able to. Specifically, during the MB non-flag, the combination of symbols “bell” and “bell spilled or first sheet” is displayed according to the pressing order, while during the MB flag, according to the pressing order. A combination of symbols such as "bell", "cactus", "MB", "bell spilled or first sheet" is displayed.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the combinations “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chililip 4” and the combinations “F_push order bell 1” to “F_push order bell 6” in the MB flags. , And the stop control for the combinations “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chililip 4” and the combinations “F_push order bell 1” to “F_push order bell 6” are different.

[Normal game flow during ART]
Next, the flow of the game during the normal ART of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the combinations of the symbols “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 chililip 4” that are displayed differ depending on the pressing order. In the pachi-slot machine 1, when the combination “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chililip 4” is determined as the internal winning combination during the normal ART, the flag conversion lottery is carried out, and if the flag conversion lottery is won, “chililip” The notification for displaying the combination of symbols is given, and the number of ART games is added. On the contrary, if the flag conversion lottery is not won, the notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of "replay" is given without adding the number of ART games.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 determines the additional amount of the ART game when the flag conversion lottery is won, based on the type of the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination. Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the internal winning combination when the flag conversion lottery is won is the combination “F_single Chilelip 1” to “F_single Chilelip 4”, the smallest addition amount is determined, If "F_2 consecutive Chilelip 1" to "F_2 consecutive Chilelip 4", the next smaller amount of addition is determined, and if the role "F_3 consecutive Chilelip 1" to "F_3 consecutive Chilelip 4" is determined, the maximum amount of addition is determined. To do. As described above, when the lottery for flag conversion is won, the notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of “Chililip” is performed. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the player, the more Chile symbols are displayed, the more the amount of addition is. Become.

[Data table during normal ART]
Next, a data table used during normal ART will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 and 102. The data tables shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 are stored in the main ROM 32 of the main control board 71.

<ART flag conversion lottery table>
101 is an ART flag conversion lottery table used for the flag conversion lottery performed during the normal ART of the second embodiment. The in-art flag conversion lottery table defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination, the ART level, and the lottery state. The ART level is information controlled in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and the lottery state is information controlled in the same manner as the CT lottery state in the first embodiment.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, whether the main control board 71 uses the ART flag conversion lottery table to convert the winning combination “F_single Chilelip 1” to “F_3 consecutive Chilelip 4” into the winning combination “Chillilip”. Whether or not it is randomly determined (flag conversion lottery). When the flag conversion lottery is won, the sub control board 72 notifies the correct pressing order for each winning combination through the display unit 100, and when the flag conversion lottery is not won, The sub-control board 72 notifies the incorrect pressing order for each winning combination via the display unit 100.

<Addition lottery table during normal ART>
Subsequently, FIG. 102 is a normal ART mid-duration lottery table used for extra lottery to add the number of ART games performed during the normal ART of the second embodiment. In the normal ART, the additional lottery table defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the additional lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, when the main control board 71 wins the flag conversion lottery, the main control board 71 performs the additional lottery by using the additional lottery table during the normal ART, and when the additional lottery is won, the main control board 71 responds. The number of games to be added is added (added to the ART number of finished games counter). Note that the lottery value information associated with the winning combination “single chili lip” in the figure is the role “F_single chililip 1” to “F_single chililip 4” in which the internal winning combination when winning the flag conversion lottery. The information of the lottery value which is referred to in this case and is associated with the winning combination "two consecutive chilirips" is the "F_2 consecutive chililip 1" to "F_2 consecutive chililip 4" when the internal winning combination when winning the flag conversion lottery The information of the lottery value which is referred to in a certain case and is associated with the winning combination “three consecutive chilirips” is the information of the internal winning combination when the flag conversion lottery is won, “F_3 consecutive chililip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chililip 4”. Is referred to.

[Game flow during CT]
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, a game flow during CT of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. The pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment is significantly different from the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment in the method of managing the duration of CT. As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the main control board 71 manages the duration of CT by a set of eight games, but in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, The control board 71 determines the duration of CT based on the number of medals paid out during CT (more specifically, the so-called "difference" obtained by subtracting "the number of medals used in the game" from "the number of medals paid out"). Manage.

Specifically, the main control board 71 ends the CT when the difference number in the CT reaches the end number (50 sheets) (for example, performs a notification for winning the MB at the time of winning the combination “push order bell”). ). Here, when the combination of symbols “Bell” and “Cactus” is displayed, nine medals are paid out. Therefore, when the combination of symbols “Bell” is displayed during CT (more specifically, CT If the flag conversion lottery is not won in the middle), the difference number (6) in which the duration of CT is increased is consumed. On the other hand, when a combination of symbols of "cactus" is displayed during CT (more specifically, when the flag conversion lottery is won during CT), in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, Maintain CT duration.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 103(A), the main control board 71 performs flag conversion lottery when the winning combination “push order bell” is determined as an internal winning combination during CT. In the case where the flag conversion lottery is won, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 change the pressing order in which the combination of the symbols of “cactus” is displayed for each winning combination through the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. When notifying and not winning the flag conversion lottery, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 display a combination of symbols of “bell” for each winning combination through the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. Notify the pressing order.

Then, the main control board 71 increases the difference number by 6 when the combination of the symbols of “bell” or “cactus” is displayed, and consumes the duration of CT, but wins the flag conversion lottery. If so, the main control board 71 adds 6 not only to the difference count but also to the CT end count. As a result, although the difference number in CT is increased by 6 due to the display of the combination of the symbols of "Cactus", the number of the end of CT is also increased by 6, so when the flag conversion lottery is won, Will be maintained.

The flag conversion lottery is carried out based on the value of the CT meter. That is, as shown in FIG. 103A, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment is provided with a plurality of stages of CT meters from "1" to "MAX", and the lower the CT meter, the more the flag conversion lottery is won. The probability is lowered, and the higher the CT meter, the higher the probability of winning the flag conversion lottery.

This CT meter is promoted or demoted based on the result of the game during CT. That is, the main control board 71 promotes the CT meter with a predetermined probability when the winning combination “F_single Chilelip 1” to “F_3 consecutive Chilelip 4” is determined as an internal winning combination. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the main control board 71 has the lowest winning combination “F_single chililip 1” to “F_single chililip 4” during the CT. There is a probability that the CT meter will be promoted, and the role "F_2 consecutive Chilelip 1" to "F_2 consecutive Chilelip 4" will be promoted during the CT. When "F_3 consecutive Chilelip 1" to "F_3 consecutive Chilelip 4" are determined as the internal winning combination, the CT meter is promoted with the highest probability.

Further, when the main control board 71 does not win the flag conversion lottery at the time of winning the winning combination “push order bell” during CT, it demotes the CT meter. The main control board 71 may demote the CT meter with a predetermined probability when the flag conversion lottery is non-winning, or may necessarily demote the CT meter.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the winning combination “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chililip 4” is determined as an internal winning combination, the number of ART games is added. The amount of addition of the number of ART games varies depending on the number of Chile symbols displayed, and specifically, as shown in FIG. 103(C), the main control board 71 plays the role of “F_Single Chile Lip 1 during CT”. ~ "F_ Single Chile Lip 4" is determined as the internal winning combination, the smallest additional amount is determined, and the role "F_2 consecutive Chile Lip 1" to "F_2 consecutive Chile Lip 4" is determined as the internal winning combination. Then, the next smallest additional amount is determined, and when the winning combination “F_3 consecutive Chilelip 1” to “F_3 consecutive Chilelip 4” is determined as an internal winning combination, the largest additional amount is determined.

[Data table during CT]
Subsequently, a data table used during CT will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 106. The data tables shown in FIGS. 104 to 106 are stored in the main ROM 32 of the main control board 71.

<CT flag conversion lottery table during CT>
FIG. 104 is an in-CT flag conversion lottery table used in the flag conversion lottery performed during the CT of the second embodiment. The flag conversion lottery table during CT defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination and the CT meter.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the main control board 71 converts the winning combination “F_push order bell 1” to “F_push order bell 6” into “cactus” by using the ART flag conversion lottery table. Whether or not is randomly determined (flag conversion lottery). When the flag conversion lottery is won, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 display a combination of symbols of “cactus” for each winning combination through the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. When the press order is notified and the flag conversion lottery is not won, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 combine the symbols of “bell” for each winning combination through the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. Notify the pressing order for displaying.

Here, referring to FIG. 104, it is understood that the flag conversion lottery during CT is easier to win as the value of the CT meter is higher, and when the CT meter is “MAX”, the flag conversion lottery is surely won. I understand. When the flag conversion lottery is won, the continuation period of CT is maintained. Therefore, when the CT meter is “MAX”, CT continues without being terminated. Since the profit given to the player becomes excessive if the CT is not finished, the CT meter may be demoted at a predetermined timing when the CT meter becomes "MAX", and the upper limit of the number of finished sheets is also acceptable. May be provided, and both the demotion of the CT meter and the upper limit of the number of finished sheets may be applied.

When demoting the CT meter, if it is demoted immediately after being promoted to "MAX", the player's interest will be spoiled. Therefore, the CT meter may be demoted at a predetermined timing after the CT meter becomes "MAX". Here, since the CT meter is provided in eight stages of "1" to "MAX", for example, it is assumed that the CT meter is demoted after eight games have been played since the CT meter became "MAX". Alternatively, the CT meter may be demoted after the flag conversion lottery has been performed 8 times after the CT meter becomes “MAX”. Further, the value of the CT meter after the demotion is arbitrary, and for example, the CT meter may be downgraded to “1” or the CT meter may be downgraded to “7”. The value of the demotion destination may be determined by lottery from "" to "7".

<CT meter promotion lottery table during CT>
FIG. 105 is a CT meter promotion lottery table during CT used for CT meter promotion lottery performed during CT of the second embodiment. The CT meter promotion lottery table during CT defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the promotion lottery of the CT meter in association with the current value of the CT meter and the internal winning combination.

Referring to FIG. 105, the probability of winning the lottery for promotion of the CT meter is lowest in the role “F_single chililip 1” to “F_single chililip 4”, and the role “F_2 double chililip 1” to “F_2 double chililip 4”. It is understood that the second lowest, the combination “F_3 consecutive Chilelip 1” to “F_3 consecutive Chilelip 4” is the highest. In addition, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the CT meter is promoted one step at a time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of steps may be promoted at one time.

<Addition lottery table during CT>
Subsequently, FIG. 106 is a CT additional lottery table used for additional lottery to add the number of ART games performed during CT according to the second embodiment. The additional lottery table during CT defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the additional lottery in association with the internal winning combination. In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the main control board 71 performs the additional lottery using the additional lottery table during CT, and when the additional lottery is won, the corresponding additional number of additional games is added (ART end). Add to the game counter).

Referring to FIG. 106, as for the amount of addition of the ART game during CT, the combination “F_single Chilelip 1” to “F_single Chilelip 4” is the smallest, and the combination “F_2 consecutive Chilelip 1” to “F_2 consecutive Chilelip 4”. Next, it can be seen that the roles are “F_3 consecutive Chilelip 1” to “F_3 consecutive Chilelip 4”, which are the largest. More specifically, in the roles “F_single chililip 1” to “F_single chililip 4” in which one Chile symbol is displayed, the number of ART games of 10 or more games is added, and two Chile symbols are displayed. In "F_2 consecutive Chilelip 1" to "F_2 consecutive Chilelip 4", the number of ART games of 20 games or more is added and three Chile symbols are displayed. In "F_3 consecutive Chilelip 4", "F_3 consecutive Chilelip 4", More than 30 ART games will be added. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the number of ART games is added according to the number of Chile symbols displayed during CT.

[Flow of games during CZ]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 107, a flow of the game during CZ of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. The pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment has CZs 1, 2, and 3 as CZs, like the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the game flow of the CZ3 is the same as the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, but the game flow of the CZ1, 2 is the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment. different.

Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the CZ1 and CZ2 are divided into the first half and the second half, and ranks (modes and points) with different expectation in winning the ART lottery in the first half are promoted, In the latter half, the lottery result of the ART lottery based on the rank is notified by the battle effect (see FIG. 50). As shown in FIG. 107, the basic flow in the CZ1 and CZ2 is the same in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment.

On the other hand, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment is significantly different from the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment in the termination condition of the first half. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the first half of the CZ1 and CZ2 are terminated based on the number of continuous games. However, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the CZ1 is the first half of the game based on the number of continuous games. CZ2 ends the first half based on the result of the end lottery. In addition, both CZ1 and CZ2 perform lock lottery in the first half, and even when the lock lottery is won, the first half of CZ1 and 2 is ended.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 107(A), in the first half of CZ1, the main control board 71 performs rank-up lottery for each game. This rank-up lottery is the same as that of the first embodiment (see FIG. 53), and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the first half of CZ1, the main control board 71 performs lock lottery for each game. This lock lottery is a process of lottery as to whether or not a game lock is to be performed based on an internal winning combination. When the main control board 71 wins the lock lottery, the main control board 71 ends the first half of the CZ1 and locks the game (for example, delays the start of rotation at the start of reel rotation). On the other hand, when the lock lottery is not won, the main control board 71 continues the first half of CZ1 without ending the first half of CZ1 until the first half of CZ1 has passed 15 games.

Then, the main control board 71 ends the first half of CZ1 and shifts to the second half when the first half of CZ1 has passed 15 games or when the lottery is won. In the latter half of CZ1, the main control board 71 performs ART lottery based on the rank obtained as a result of the rank-up lottery in the first half. This ART lottery is also the same as that of the first embodiment (see FIGS. 55(A) and (C)), so a detailed description thereof will be omitted. However, when the main control board 71 wins the lock lottery, Be sure to win the ART lottery. The main control board 71 shifts the gaming state to the normal gaming state if the ART lottery is not won, and shifts the gaming state to the ART gaming state via ART preparation in the case of winning the ART lottery. ..

On the other hand, in the first half of CZ2, as shown in FIG. 107(B), the main control board 71 performs rank-up lottery for each game. This rank-up lottery is the same as that in the first embodiment (see FIG. 54), and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, the main control board 71 performs the end lottery in each game in the first half of CZ1, and when the end lottery is won, the first half of CZ1 is ended and the latter half is moved to the end lottery. In the case of winning, the first half of CZ1 is continued.

In the first half of CZ2, the main control board 71 performs lock lottery for each game. When the main lottery board 71 wins the lock lottery, it terminates the first half of the CZ2 and locks the game. On the other hand, when the lock lottery is non-winning, the main control board 71 does not end the first half of CZ2 but continues the first half of CZ2 until the end lottery is won.

When the final lottery or the lock lottery is won, the main control board 71 ends the first half of CZ2 and shifts to the second half. In the second half of CZ2, the main control board 71 performs ART lottery based on the rank obtained as a result of the rank-up lottery in the first half. This ART lottery is also the same as in the first embodiment (see FIGS. 55(B) and (C)), and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. However, when the main control board 71 wins the lock lottery, Be sure to win the ART lottery. The main control board 71 shifts the gaming state to the normal gaming state if the ART lottery is not won, and shifts the gaming state to the ART gaming state via ART preparation in the case of winning the ART lottery. ..

As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment is different from the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment in that the lock lottery is performed every game in the first half of the CZ1 and CZ2. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment is different from the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment in that the ending condition of the first half of the CZ 2 is to win the end lottery instead of the number of continuous games.

[Data table in CZ]
Next, the data table used during CZ will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109. The data tables shown in FIGS. 108 and 109 are stored in the main ROM 32 of the main control board 71.

<CZ2 end lottery table>
FIG. 108 is a CZ2 end lottery table used for end lottery performed in the first half of CZ2 of the second embodiment. The CZ2 end lottery table defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the end lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

Referring to FIG. 108, in the first half of CZ2 of the second embodiment, when the combination “Replay” is determined as the internal winning combination, the end lottery is performed, and this end lottery can be won with a high probability. I understand. Since CZ2 is basically performed during the RT0 to RT3 game state, the winning combination “replay” is one of winning combinations “F_maintenance rep A” to “F_RT4 rep_3rd”. In the pachi-slot machine, the replay is determined as an internal winning combination with a probability of at least a predetermined value (about 1/7.3) or more. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the first half of the CZ2 ends. It turns out that it occurs relatively often.

<Lock lottery table>
Next, FIG. 109 is a lock lottery table used for lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ1 and CZ2 of the second embodiment, and FIG. 109(A) is a lock lottery table used for lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ1. 109B is a lock lottery table used for lock lottery performed in the first half of the CZ2. The lock lottery table defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the lock lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

Comparing FIGS. 109(A) and (B), it can be seen that the lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ2 has a higher probability than the lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ1.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the first half of CZ1 ends when the predetermined number of games (15 games) have passed, while the first half of CZ2 ends when the final lottery is won. Further, the rank-up lottery is performed in the first half of the CZ1 and CZ2, and when the first half of the CZ1 and CZ2 is finished, the ART lottery is performed based on the result of the rank-up lottery. Therefore, it can be said that CZ1 is a chance zone in which the ART lottery timing is fixed, and CZ2 is a chance zone in which the ART lottery timing is indefinite.

Also, the end lottery performed in the first half of CZ2 is performed when the winning combination "Replay" is determined as an internal winning combination with a relatively high probability. Therefore, during CZ2, the rank-up lottery is performed compared to during CZ1. The chances of receiving it tend to decrease. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, lock lottery is performed in the first half of CZ1 and CZ2, and the probability of winning the lock lottery is higher in CZ2 than in CZ1. As a result, even in the case of the CZ2, which is less likely to receive the rank-up lottery, it is possible to expect the transition to the ART.

[Modification of Second Embodiment]
The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment has been described above. Next, a modified example of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described.

<CT sign game and notification lottery>
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the above-described second embodiment, in order to facilitate understanding, if the transition between MB flags during normal ART is made, the next game immediately shifts to CT, but transitions between MB flags. It is also possible to insert a predictive game a predetermined number of times after playing.

As shown in FIG. 110(A), when MB is determined as an internal winning combination during the normal ART, the main control board 71 shifts the game state between MB non-flag and MB flag. During normal ART (between MB non-flags), if the winning of the flag conversion lottery when winning the combination “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chililip 4” is won, the number of ART games is added (see FIG. 102). The flag conversion lottery until the transition between the MB flags affects the privilege given to the player, and therefore is performed on the main side (main control board 71).

Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the combination of symbols "Cililip" is always displayed regardless of the order of pressing when it is between the MB flags, so if the omen game is performed during the MB flags, From the stop control (combination of displayed symbols), the player may find that the aura game is in progress. For example, as shown in FIG. 99, during the MB non-flag period, the combination of the symbols “Chillip” is not displayed when the winning combination “F_single chillilip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chillilip 4” is won. If the combination of symbols “Cililip” is displayed by pressing the forward button, the player will know that it is during the MB flag (in the precursor game).

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present modification, when the winning combination “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chililip 4” is determined as the internal winning combination, the push order is intentionally notified. As described above, when the combination “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 chililip 4” is determined as the internal winning combination during the MB flag, the combination of symbols of “chililip” is displayed regardless of the pressing order. However, when informing the push order, the player recognizes that the combination of symbols “Cililip” is displayed according to the informed push order, and indicates that the player is in between the MB flags. It can be difficult to grasp.

Since such notification of the pressing order does not affect the profit of the player at all, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present modification, the lottery (notification of whether or not to notify the pressing order during the MB flag). The lottery is performed on the sub (sub control board 72) side. Of course, the notification lottery during the MB flag may be performed on the main side, but by performing the lottery that does not affect the profit of the player at all on the sub side as in this modification, the data capacity on the main side is increased. It is preferable because the processing load can be reduced.

FIG. 110(B) is a notification lottery table during the sign of CT used for notification lottery performed on the sub side, and is stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 82. The notification lottery table in the sign of CT defines the information of the lottery value about the lottery result of the notification lottery performed on the sub side in association with the internal winning combination.

When the notification lottery using the notification lottery table in the CT sign is won, the sub control board 72 notifies any pressing order other than the normal pressing through the display unit 100.

<Navigation order when pressing the bell between MB flags>
In addition, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment described above, when the combination “push order bell” is won during the MB flag, more combinations of symbols are displayed than during the MB non-flag. Specifically, during the MB non-flag, the combination of the symbols "bell" and "bell spilled or first sheet" is displayed according to the pressing order, while during the MB flag, "combination" is displayed according to the pressing order. A combination of symbols such as "bell", "cactus", "MB", "bell spilled or first sheet" is displayed. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the pressing order necessary for displaying the combination of the symbols of "cactus" which can be displayed only during the MB flag is notified during the CT during the MB flag. ..

In this regard, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present modification, when the winning combination “push order bell” is won during the MB flag, the content of the notification is changed according to the state until the MB starts.

Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the MB is determined as the internal winning combination during the normal ART, the gaming state shifts between the MB flags, and then the CT is performed. In this case, in the pachi-slot machine 1 that sandwiches the predictive game a predetermined number of times after shifting between the MB flags, the state during the MB flag is divided into a “predictive game” state, a “CT” state, and an “MB waiting” state. be able to.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 111, when the MB is won during the normal ART, the "predicament game" state during the MB flag is set, and after that, the predecessor game is performed a predetermined number of times and the CT starts, The state becomes the "CT" state during the MB flag, and then, when the CT ends, the state becomes the "MB waiting state" until the MB wins.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present modified example, the content of the notification at the time of winning the winning combination “push order bell” is changed according to the state during these MB flags. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111, in the “predicament game” state, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 display a combination of “bell” symbols via the instruction monitor and display unit 100. Notify the pressing order. Further, in the “CT” state, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 notify via the instruction monitor and display unit 100 the pushing order in which the combination of symbols “bell” or “cactus” is displayed. That is, in the “CT” state, the pressing order corresponding to either “bell” or “cactus” is notified based on the result of the flag conversion lottery based on the CT meter as described above.

In the “MB standby” state after CT is completed, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 may notify any combination of symbols via the instruction monitor and display unit 100. For example, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 may notify the pressing order in which the combination of the symbols “bell” is displayed, and the pressing order in which the combination of the symbols “cactus” is displayed. The notification may be given, or the pressing order in which the combination of symbols “MB” is displayed may be given.

On the other hand, during the normal ART, the combination of symbols of "cactus" cannot be displayed, so the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 notify the pushing order in which the combination of symbols of "bell" is displayed.

[Effect of Pachi-slot Machine of Second Embodiment]
The second embodiment of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present invention has been described above. According to such a pachi-slot machine 1, the following effects can be expected.

(Combination of symbols that can be displayed between MB flags)
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, more combinations of symbols can be displayed during the MB flag than during the MB non-flag during winning the combination "push order bell". Specifically, during the MB non-flag, the combination of symbols “bell” and “bell spilled or first sheet” is displayed according to the pressing order, while during the MB flag, according to the pressing order. A combination of symbols such as "bell", "cactus", "MB", "bell spilled or first sheet" is displayed.

As a result, it is possible to increase the types of symbol combinations displayed during the MB flags without increasing the types of winning combinations, and it is possible to give variety to the games during the MB flags. Specifically, it becomes possible to display a combination of symbols of "cactus" corresponding to a so-called rare combination between the MB flags, and the appearance frequency of the rare combination without changing the type of the winning combination and the winning probability. Can be increased. In particular, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, since the combination of symbols displayed when the winning combination “push order bell” is won is changed, it is possible to increase the frequency of appearance of rare winning combinations with payouts of medals.

In addition, when the combination of the symbols of “cactus” is continuously displayed during the MB flag, it is known that the MB flag is in the middle. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the combination of symbols of “cactus” is notified only when the flag conversion lottery is won, and the combination of symbols of “bell” is notified in the case of non-win. This is preferable because it makes it difficult for the player to understand the current state. Further, by controlling the content of the notification by the flag conversion lottery, it is possible to adjust the frequency of the symbol combination (rare part) of the "cactus" among the MB flags, and to diversify the game characteristics among the MB flags. You can

(Game during CT)
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, CT, which is an additional chance zone in which the number of ART games is added, is performed between the MB flags. Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, CT is continued during the MB flag until the difference number reaches the end number (50). During this CT, if the flag conversion lottery is not won at the time of winning the combination "push order bell", the difference number is increased and the duration of the CT is exhausted, while if the flag conversion lottery is won, the difference number is increased and the number of finished sheets is increased. Is increased and the duration of CT is maintained. Thereby, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, while the stop control is changed during the MB flag, the continuation of CT is performed according to the combination of symbols displayed (specifically, according to the result of the flag conversion lottery). Since it is possible to control the period, it is possible to diversify the playability among the MB flags.

At this time, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, since the probability of winning the flag conversion lottery is controlled based on the value of the CT meter, the duration of CT should be adjusted based on the value of the CT meter. You can In addition, this CT meter is promoted when the winning combination “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chililip 4” is determined as an internal winning combination, and is demoted if the winning between flags is not won during CT. The player has a strong interest in the result of the game during CT, and can diversify the playability between MB flags.

In particular, if the CT meter can be promoted to "MAX", you will have to win the flag conversion lottery for a certain period of time, so you can have expectations for the subsequent games, and the interest in the game will increase. Is improved.

(Combination of symbols that can be displayed during MB flag and MB non-flag)
In addition, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, not only the combination of symbols displayed at the time of winning the combination “push order bell” is different between the MB flag and the non-MB flag, but also the combination “F_single chili lip”. The combination of the symbols displayed at the time of winning "1" to "F_3 consecutive chiririp" is also different. That is, while the MB non-flag is displayed, the combination of symbols "Replay" or "Chililip" is displayed according to the pressing order, while during the MB flag, the combination of symbols "Replay" is displayed. Only the combination of symbols of "Cililip" is displayed.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the flag conversion lottery is performed both during the MB flag and during the MB non-flag. In the flag conversion lottery during the MB flag, the target to be notified when the winning combination "push order bell" is won is randomly selected from among the combinations of the symbols of "bell" or "cactus", and between the MB non-flags. In the flag conversion lottery, the target to be notified at the time of winning the winning combination “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 chililip” is drawn from a combination of symbols of “replay” or “chililip”. In this way, by performing the flag conversion lottery both during the MB flag and during the MB non-flag, it is possible to control the combination of symbols displayed in both the MB flag and the MB non-flag, It is possible to enhance the playability between both flags and between non-flags.

At this time, the winning probability of the flag conversion lottery during the MB flag is adjusted based on the value of the CT meter, and the winning probability of the flag conversion lottery during the MB non-flag is adjusted based on the ART level and the lottery state. It As a result, each lottery can be managed in its own mode, and the playability based on the flag conversion lottery is improved.

(Notification lottery on the sub side)
Since the stop control is different between the MB flag and the MB non-flag, it may be known from the combination of the symbols displayed that the MB flag is being reached. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the push order that is originally unnecessary is informed during the MB flag, and it is difficult to grasp that the MB flag is in progress. Then, by controlling the notification of the pushing order on the sub side, it is possible to reduce the data capacity and the processing load on the main side.

[Modification]
The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment has been described above, but the present invention is not limited to this.

(Bernavi between flag and non-flag between)
For example, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first and second embodiments, the main monitor is informed by displaying a numerical value uniquely corresponding to the stop operation information on the instruction monitor. Note that the notification mode on the main side is basically the same in the first and second embodiments, so an example thereof is shown in FIG. 74 of the first embodiment. Here, in FIG. 74, while "white 7 navi" and "blue 7 navi" are performed during the inter-flag state, "bell navigation" and the like are not performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. “Bernavi” or the like may be performed during the state.

In this case, the numerical value displayed on the instruction monitor may be different between the inter-flag state and the non-flag state. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 74(A) and (B), when performing "bell navigation" in the non-flag state, the instruction monitor displays a numerical value of "1" to "3" (push forward combination second instruction information). ) Is displayed, as shown in FIG. 112, when performing "Bell Navi" in the inter-flag state, display a numerical value of "12" to "14" (push order first instruction information) on the instruction monitor. May be Note that the navigation on the sub side via the display unit 100 may be common in both the inter-flag state and the non-flag state. The same applies to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, and the numerical value when performing "Bernavi" during MB non-flag and the numerical value when performing "Bernavi" during MB flag are different. May be

In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, whether or not to grant the privilege is controlled based on the result of the flag conversion lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the content of the notification is controlled based on the result of the flag conversion lottery, and as a result, the combination of symbols displayed when the notification follow stop operation is performed. It will be different. Therefore, the main control board 71 may give the privilege based on the combination of the symbols actually displayed.

In this case, the main control board 71 grants a privilege based on the combination of symbols displayed based on the notification performed according to the result of the flag conversion lottery, and based on the combination of the symbols displayed without following the notification. However, the privilege may not be granted. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, since the combination of the symbols displayed is different depending on the pressing order, when the player ignores the notification and performs the stop operation, There is a possibility that a special combination of symbols such as “three consecutive chirip” will be displayed. However, even if a special symbol combination is displayed as a result of ignoring the notification, the privilege is given only when the special symbol combination is displayed as a result of the notification without giving the privilege. It may be that.

(Control of notification that does not affect profit (privilege))
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the notification that affects profits is performed by performing notification lottery (flag conversion lottery) on the main side and controlling whether the notification is performed on the main side. For the notification that does not affect the profit, the sub-side performs the notification lottery and controls whether or not the sub-side performs the notification. Then, as an example of the notification that does not affect the profit, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the notification of the "reach eye lip" during the omen game is shown, and in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, It shows the notification of "Chillip" during the MB flag. In this respect, the notification that does not affect the profit is not limited to these.

In recent years, pachi-slot machines may make a transition to a state where it is easy (difficult) to perform game lock depending on the order of stop operations. For example, transition to a state where it is easy to lock the game when the pressing order is "left, middle, right", and transition to a state where it is difficult to lock the game when the pressing order is "right, middle, left". There is. In such a pachi-slot machine, by informing the pressing order, it will be transitioned to a state where it is easy (difficult) to lock the game, but when whether or not to lock the game affects profits, While the notification needs to be controlled on the main side, if the game lock is not effected on the profit, the notification may be controlled on the sub side.

It should be noted that the case where whether or not to perform the game lock has an effect on the profit is, for example, a case where the game is locked as in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, and the ART lottery is won. Yes (see FIG. 107). On the other hand, the case where whether or not to perform the game lock does not affect the profit is a case where the game lock is performed as an effect, for example, during a sign game in which a profit (privilege) is given. By frequently performing the game lock, it is an demonstrative indication that a profit will be given in the subsequent game.

FIG. 113A is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence relationship between the pressing order and the locked state. In the example shown in FIG. 113(A), when the stop operation is performed in the pushing order of "left, middle, right" when the winning combination "F_maintenance rep A" is won, the lock state changes from "0" to "1". When the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing ", left, right, middle", "middle, left, right", "middle, right, left", the current locked state is maintained, and "right, left, middle" "right" When the stop operation is performed in the pushing order of ", middle, left", the lock state changes from "1" to "0". Similarly, when the winning combination "F_maintenance rep B" is won, the lock state changes from "0" to "1" when the stop operation is performed in the first pressing order, and in the second pressing order. When the stop operation is performed, the lock state is maintained, and when the stop operation is performed in the third pressing order, the lock state transitions from “1” to “0”.

In the example shown in FIG. 113(A), in order to simplify the description, the lock state “0” is set to a state in which it is difficult to lock the game, and the lock state “1” is set to a state in which it is easy to lock the game. Of course, the lock state is not limited to two stages, and the number of stages may be three or more. Also, in the case of three or more stages, it is not necessary to transition one stage at a time, but multiple stages may be transitioned at once.

Then, as shown in FIG. 113(B), when the game lock influences the profit, the notification lottery as to whether or not to notify is performed on the main (main control board 71) side, and the lottery result is displayed. Based on this, both the main side and the sub side notify the predetermined pressing order. On the other hand, when the game lock does not affect the profit, the notification lottery of whether or not to notify is performed on the sub (sub-control board 72) side, and based on the result of the lottery, a predetermined pushing order on the sub side. To inform.

Depending on the pachi-slot machine, there are pachi-slot machines in which the game lock affects profits over the entire period of the game, and there are pachi-slot machines in which the game lock does not affect profits over the entire period of the game. While there is a pachi-slot machine in which the game lock affects the profit in a predetermined period, the game lock does not affect the profit in a specific period of the game. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, during the period in which the game lock affects profit, the notification lottery as to whether or not to notify is performed on the main side, and based on the result of the lottery, a predetermined push is performed on both the main side and the sub side. While the order is informed, during the period when the game lock affects the profit, the sub-side performs the lottery for notifying whether or not to inform, and the sub-side notifies the predetermined pushing order based on the lottery result. May be

Since the game lock is usually performed by the main control board 71, the main control board 71 has a function of shifting the lock state according to the pressing order shown in FIG. 113(A). That is, the main control board 71 randomly determines whether or not to lock the game with a probability according to the lock state setting means for setting the lock state based on the detected stop operation sequence and the lock state set by the lock state setting means. When the game lock determination means and the game lock determination means determined by means of performing the game lock, it functions as a lock execution means for temporarily stopping the progress of the game. Then, the main control board 71 or the sub-control board 72, the information lottery means for performing the information lottery whether or not to notify the push order in which the lock state setting means sets the lock state in which the game lock is easy (difficult) , And the notification lottery means, which functions as an informing means for informing a predetermined pushing order based on the lottery result.

(Normal ART and CT termination conditions)
The termination conditions for normal ART and CT are not limited to those described above, and any termination conditions can be adopted. For example, the number of medals awarded during the normal ART or CT, the number of unit games during the normal ART or CT, the number of times information is given that is advantageous to the player during the normal ART or CT, a predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games). ) Is set as one set, an arbitrary end condition such as the number of sets and a continuation rate at the end of one set can be adopted.

Further, as the number of medals given during normal ART or CT, for example, use the difference number (net increase number) obtained by subtracting the number of medals used in the game from the number of medals paid out in the same game. May be Further, the number of medals given during the normal ART or CT may be calculated based on the actually increased medals (calculation based on the actual value), and the notification is given regardless of whether or not the actual medals have actually increased. It may be calculated based on the number of medals to be increased in accordance with the above (calculation based on an ideal value). Further, the number of awarded medals may not be increased depending on the type of internal winning combination. For example, with respect to some winning combinations that are unlikely to be determined as internal winning combinations, or for winning and losing combinations of symbols depending on the timing of the stop operation, the winning combinations have been determined as internal winning combinations. However, the number of awarded medals may not be increased or decreased.

(Type of notification (pushing order, timing))
In addition, the content of the notification normally performed during ART or CT is also arbitrary, and the order of the stop operation (pushing order) in which a combination of symbols that is advantageous to the player is displayed may be notified, and the combination of the symbols. The timing of the stop operation (a symbol to be aimed at) necessary for displaying may be notified.

(Other)
In addition, as an advantageous state, the winning probability of the internal winning combination relating to the re-play is not changed (or changed within a range that does not affect the playability), and the state of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified. It is also possible to use a so-called "AT", and to activate a re-play high probability state (replay time) in which the winning probability of the internal winning combination relating to the re-play becomes high, and to perform a stop operation advantageous for the player. It is also possible to use a so-called “ART” that notifies the mode.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 described above, various display screens are displayed on the first sub-display device 201 provided on the left side of the pedestal portion 10 (on the MAX bet button 11 and the start lever 6 side). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various display screens may be displayed on the second sub display device 202 provided on the right side (the medal slot 22 side) of the pedestal portion 10. Similarly, a touch sensor may be provided on the display surface of the second sub display device 202, and the display screen of the second sub display device 202 may be switched based on the touch input information output from the touch sensor.

(White 7 (blue 7) Navi and Bell Navi between flags)
In the above-described embodiment, during the inter-flag state, one of the winning combination (“F_BB1”, “F_BB2”) and “out”, “F_special1”, “F_special2”, and “F_special3” is used as an internal winning combination. When it is determined, BB (“C_BB1” and “C_BB2”) is controlled to be displayable, and when the bonus winning combination and the other combinations such as the push order combination are determined as the internal winning combination, The BB is controlled so that it cannot be displayed (see FIG. 48). Such control is performed based on the pull-in priority order of a plurality of winning combinations, and in the above-described embodiment, the pull-in priority order is higher than the push-order winning combination and the like in relation to the bonus-related winning combination. Such stop control is performed.

By the way, depending on the pachi-slot machine, it may be possible to perform a stop control to prioritize the winning combination related to the bonus combination rather than the winning combination related to the payout of medals such as the push order combination. is there. Therefore, with reference to FIGS. 114 and 115, a white 7 or blue 7 navigation and a bell navigation in a pachi-slot machine that draws in a bonus winning combination with a higher priority than a winning combination winning combination (for example, pushing forward winning combination). The relationship with is explained.

In the following description, the white 7 navigation will be described as an example, and the description of the blue 7 navigation will be omitted. However, the blue 7 navigation has the same relationship as the white 7 navigation. Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the push forward combination, a 3-fold push forward combination (such as “F — 3 choice bell — 1st”) is used, but in the following example, in order to make the description clearer, there are 6 choices. It is assumed that the pushing forward combination (“F_6 selection bell_123”) is used. In this case, as described above, the end of the name of the winning combination in the 6-choice pressing order combination means the correct pressing order.

FIG. 114(A) is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between a winning combination in a state between flags and a combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed (some winning combinations are omitted), and corresponds to FIG. 48 of the above embodiment. FIG. FIG. 114A particularly shows whether or not BB (“C_BB1”) can be displayed during the inter-flag state. In the example shown in FIG. 114(A), during the inter-flag state, not only when the combination relating to the bonus and the “out” are determined as the internal winning combination, but also the combination relating to the bonus and the push order combination (“F_6 BB can be displayed even when the selected bell_123” to “F_6 selected bell_321”) are determined as the internal winning combination.

Subsequently, FIG. 114(B) is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship (a part of the combinations is omitted) between the winning combination in the inter-flag state and the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the stop control differs depending on the timing of the stop operation (so-called “push”) and the order of the stop operation (so-called “push order”). When preferentially drawing in the winning combination, the symbol combination shown in FIG. 114(B) is displayed.

Specifically, when the combination of the bonus (“F_BB1”) and the normal pressing combination (“F_6 selection bell_123” to “F_6 selection bell_321”) are determined as the internal winning combination, the push is accurate. In some cases, the winning combination is drawn with priority over the winning combination, so that BB can be displayed regardless of the pressing order. On the other hand, when the press is not accurate, the combination of symbols displayed differs depending on the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, the design of the bell (“C_9 sheets A_01” to “C_9 sheets H_04”) Is displayed, and when the pressing order is incorrect, the combination of symbols of the bell spill (“R_RT transition eye A_01” to “R_RT transition eye B_02”) or the first sheet (“C_1st_A_01” to A combination of symbols "C_2nd_B_04") is displayed.

By the way, in the case where the bonus combination is preferentially drawn in rather than the push order combination, depending on the result of the stop operation, it may not be possible to display any combination of the symbols of BB, bell, bell spilled eye, and the first one. For example, when the first and second stop operations are accurately pressed, the combination of symbols stopped and displayed in association with the first and second stop operations can display BB, but the bell and bell spill The combination of the pattern of the eye and the pattern of the first sheet may not be displayed. In such a case, if the pressing of the third stop operation is inaccurate, both the bonus winning combination and the push order combination will be missed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 114(B), when the pressing is not correct, a combination of outlying symbols may be displayed regardless of whether the pressing order is correct or incorrect.

Here, in the game in which the winning combination and the bonus winning combination are determined as the internal winning combination, the combination of the symbols that are out of sync is displayed, and if any of the winning combinations is missed, the player feels a loss. Will be remembered and you will be dissatisfied. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present modification, the following notification (navigation) is performed during the inter-flag state. FIG. 114C is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between notification (navigation) performed on the main side and notification (navigation) performed on the sub side.

As shown in FIG. 114(C), in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present modification, in addition to the "white 7 navigation" described above, "white 7 navigation_123" "white 7 navigation_132" "white 7 navigation_213" "white 7" Navigation_231”, “white 7 navigation_312” and “white 7 navigation_321” are performed. "White 7 Navi_123" is performed when the combination "F_BB1" and the combination "F_6 Option Bell_123" are determined as internal winning combinations, and "White 7 Navi_132" is the combination "F_BB1" and the combination "F_6". Option Bell_132” is performed when the internal winning combination is determined, and “White 7 Navi_213” is performed when the combination “F_BB1” and the role “F_6 Selection Bell_213” are determined as the internal winning combination. The "White 7 Navi_231" is performed when the winning combination "F_BB1" and the winning combination "F_6 Choice Bell_231" are determined as internal winning combinations, and the "White 7 Navi_312" is winning the winning combination "F_BB1". This is performed when "F_6 option bell_312" is determined as the internal winning combination, and "White 7 Navi_321" is determined when the combination "F_BB1" and the role "F_6 option bell_321" are determined as the internal winning combination. To be done.

When performing "white 7 navi_123", the main control board 71 displays a numerical value of "12" on the instruction monitor, and when performing "white 7 navi_132", the main control board 71 indicates "13" on the instruction monitor. When displaying the numerical value of “white 7 navi — 213”, the main control board 71 displays the numerical value of “14” on the instruction monitor, and when performing “white 7 navi — 231”, the main control board 71 When the numerical value of “15” is displayed on the instruction monitor and “white 7 navi_312” is performed, the main control board 71 displays the numerical value of “16” on the instruction monitor and when “white 7 navi_321” is performed, The main control board 71 displays a numerical value of “17” on the instruction monitor.

On the other hand, when performing “white 7 navi_123” to “white 7 navi_321”, the sub control board 72 performs the special navi illustrated in FIG. 115. In addition, in FIG. 115, an example of the special navigation corresponding to “white 7 navi_123” is shown, but regarding “white 7 navi_213” to “white 7 navi_321”, only the pressing order of notification is different. Basically, it is the same as the "white 7 navi_123" shown in FIG.

When performing "white 7 navi_123", the sub-control board 72, as shown in FIG. 115(A), during the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, the push order combination determined as the internal winning combination. The pressing order of correct answers to “F_6 selection bell_123” is displayed on the display unit 100. In the example illustrated in FIG. 115A, the display unit 100 displays the pressing order of “left, middle, right”, which is the correct pressing order for the pressing order combination “F_6 selection bell_123”.

As in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present modification, when the winning combination is preferentially drawn in rather than the pressing combination, even if the stop operation is performed according to the notified pressing order, the bonus winning combination is determined. Stop control will be performed so as to draw in the symbol as much as possible. As a result, at the timing when the first reel is stopped due to the first stop operation, the symbol corresponding to the winning combination (1) is displayed, and the symbol corresponding to the push order winning combination is not displayed. (2) The bonus The symbol corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed, and the symbol corresponding to the winning combination is displayed. (3) Both the symbol corresponding to the winning combination and the symbol corresponding to the winning combination are displayed. Three patterns of stop modes are possible.

In the case of performing “White 7 Navi — 123”, the symbol corresponding to the bonus combination (specific symbol composition symbol) is the symbol “White 7” that constitutes the combination of symbols of the combination name “C_BB1”, The pattern corresponding to the pressing order combination (pressing order combination composition pattern) is a pattern (for example, the pattern "hat") that forms the combination names "C_9 sheets combination A_01" to "C_9 sheets combination H_04".

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present modified example, the sub-control board 72 switches the content to be notified according to the stop mode of the symbol displayed along with the stop operation, so that “white 7 navi_123” to “white 7 navi_321”. "I do.

Specifically, at the timing when the first reel is stopped, (1) the symbol “white 7” corresponding to the winning combination is displayed, and when the symbol corresponding to the pressing order winning combination is not displayed, FIG. 115(B) is displayed. As shown, the sub-control board 72 stops the notification of the pressing order of the correct answer which has been performed during the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and aims at the symbol "white 7" for the reel which is still rotating. Navi. In the stopped first reel, since the symbols corresponding to the pressing order combination are not displayed, the player cannot obtain the profit according to the pressing order combination, so that the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present modification is a navigation device. To prompt the player to win a BB prize. As a result, it is possible to avoid displaying a combination of outlying symbols in the game this time.

Further, when the symbol corresponding to the winning combination (2) is not displayed at the timing when the first reel is stopped and the symbol corresponding to the pressing order winning combination is displayed, as shown in FIG. The control board 72 continues to notify the correct pressing order during the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. In the stopped first reel, since the symbols corresponding to the bonus winning combination are not displayed, the symbols corresponding to the push order combination are drawn in when the remaining reels are stopped, so the pachi-slot machine according to the present modification example In 1, the notification of the correct pushing order is continued for the pushing order combination. As a result, as shown in FIG. 115(D), in this game, a combination of bell symbols is displayed, and the player can make a profit (payout of 9 medals) according to the combination of symbols. ) Can be received.

When both the symbol corresponding to the winning combination (3) and the symbol corresponding to the pressing order are displayed at the timing when the first reel is stopped, as shown in FIG. 115(E), the sub-control The board 72 informs that the reel is still spinning while the symbol "white 7" is avoided, and that the stopping operation is performed in the correct pushing order that was being performed while all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R were spinning. In the stopped first reel, when both the symbol corresponding to the combination relating to the bonus and the symbol corresponding to the pressing order combination are displayed, there is a possibility that a combination of symbols of BB and bell is displayed. .. The bonus winning combination is carried over as an internal winning combination until the prize is won, while the push order winning combination (especially, the combination in which a number of medals that exceed the number of inserted coins at the time of winning the prize is paid out) is not carried over and is won only in the game concerned. Therefore, in the game, it is more advantageous for the player to realize the winning of the push-winning combination.

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present modified example, when both the symbol corresponding to the winning combination and the symbol corresponding to the pressing order combination are displayed when the reels are stopped, the notification of the pressing order is continued. , Prompt to avoid the symbol "White 7". As a result, as shown in FIG. 115(F), in this game, a combination of bell symbols is displayed, and the player can make a profit according to the combination of symbols (payout of 9 medals). ) Can be received.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present modification, by switching the content to be notified according to the progress of the game, the player can perform the notification without loss, and as a result, the player can play the game with peace of mind. be able to.

In the example shown in FIG. 115, only the first stop is described, but the content to be notified can be similarly switched during the second stop.
Further, such "white 7 navi_123" to "white 7 navi_321" are performed only during the gaming state (ART gaming state) informing the player of the advantageous stop operation mode, and during the general gaming state. It is also possible to simply perform “white 7 navigation”. That is, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72, when the winning combination "F_BB1" and the winning combination "F_6 selection bell_123" are determined as the internal winning combination, execute "white 7 navigation_123". When the winning combination “F_BB1” and the winning combination “F_6 selection bell_123” are determined as internal winning combinations during the normal gaming state, the “white 7 navigation” may be simply executed.

Further, the management of the duration of the ART gaming state when executing "White 7 Navi_123" or the like during the ART gaming state can be arbitrarily performed. That is, since the mode of stop operation (pushing order) advantageous to the player is notified even during the inter-flag state, for example, when the duration of the ART gaming state is managed by the number of games, the flag is The number of games in the inter-state may be counted as the number of games in the ART gaming state (added to the ART continuous game number counter), and, for example, when the duration of the ART gaming state is managed by the number of navigations. May count the number of times such as "white 7 navi_123" performed during the state between flags as the number of times of navigation in the ART gaming state. Further, for example, the duration of the ART gaming state is in the ART gaming state. When the number of medals paid out and the number of medals paid out are managed, the number of medals paid out in accordance with "White 7 Navi_123" is also counted as the number of medals paid out during the ART gaming state. It may be that.

Of course, on the contrary, during the state between the flags, it may be managed as having no influence on the duration of the ART gaming state. In addition, the duration of the ART gaming state may be managed based on the result of the game in which “white 7 navi — 123” or the like is performed. For example, if a profit (payout of 9 medals) according to the push order is given according to "White 7 Navi_123" or the like, the game in which "White 7 Navi_123" or the like is performed is ART. Assuming that the game is in the gaming state, the duration of the ART gaming state is managed, and if the profit according to the push order is not given according to "White 7 Navi_123" etc., the game is in the ART gaming state. As long as it is not the middle game, the duration of the ART game state may be managed.

By not displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination, it is possible to extend the notification section in the inter-flag state. Therefore, once, a notification based on the main-side navigation "10" (for example, "white 7 navigation" in the game of the internal winning combination "outside") is executed, and a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is displayed in the game. If it is not possible, the sub control board 72 then selects "white 7 navi" instead of "white 7 navi_123" to "white 7 navi_321" for the main navigations "12" to "17". It may be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent capture by stretching. In the game in which the notification based on the main-side navigation “12” to “17” is executed, if the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination cannot be displayed, the sub-control board 72 does not correspond to the capture by the extension. Performs "white 7 navi_123" to "white 7 navi_321" for subsequent main side navigations "12" to "17".

In addition, a part of the push order bell may be controlled in the same state as the push order unquestioned bell during the flag state to reduce the frequency of the player's eye-catching, and in this case, the unit game in which the push order unhandled bell is established Then, if neither the push order navi nor the white 7 navi is displayed and the fact that a small winning combination can be obtained regardless of the push order is given, the player does not need to make unnecessary eye-catching.

[Third Embodiment]
Subsequently, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 146. Note that detailed description of the same configuration and control as the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first or second embodiment will be omitted. Further, the features of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the third embodiment described below can be similarly applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment.

<Control system of pachi-slot machine>
A control system included in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 is a circuit block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the third embodiment.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a main control board 71 provided inside the housing 60 and a sub-control board 72 provided on the upper door 62a. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a reel relay terminal plate 410, a ratio display device 420, a setting key type switch 430, a cabinet side relay substrate 440, and a power supply device 450, which are connected to the main control substrate 71. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has an external centralized terminal board 73, a hopper device 40, a medal auxiliary storage switch 441 and a reset switch 442 which are connected to the main control board 71 via a cabinet side relay board 440.
The configurations of the external centralized terminal plate 73 and the hopper device 40 have been described above, and therefore their description will be omitted here.

The reel relay terminal plate 410 is arranged inside the reel body of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal plate 410 is electrically connected to a stepping motor (not shown) of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R and relays a signal output from the main control board 71 to the stepping motor.

The ratio display device 420 has a ratio display board 421 connected to the main control board 71, a ratio display 422 and a changeover switch 423 connected to the ratio display board 421. The ratio display board 421 controls the display of the ratio display 422 based on the signal output from the main control board 71. The ratio indicator 422 displays various ratios such as the specific section ratio and the accessory ratio. The changeover switch 423 switches the display of the ratio indicator 422.
The configuration of the ratio indicator 422 and the details of various ratios displayed on the ratio indicator 422 will be described later with reference to FIG. 118.

The setting key type switch 430 is set when setting any one of a plurality of setting values provided for setting the amount of profit given to the player, or set in the pachi-slot machine 1. It is used when confirming the set value. When the main control board 71 receives an operation using the setting key type switch 430, the main control board 71 sets a set value according to the content of the operation from among a plurality of set values.

The cabinet side relay board 440 is a relay board for electrically connecting the main control board 71, the external centralized terminal board 73, the hopper device 40, the medal auxiliary storage switch 441 and the reset switch 442. The medal auxiliary storage switch 441 detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage (not shown) is full of medals. The reset switch 442 is used when resetting (initializing) various data of the pachi-slot machine 1.

The power supply device 450 has a power supply board 451 connected to the main control board 71, and a power supply switch 452 connected to the power supply board 451. The power switch 452 is pressed when supplying the necessary power to the pachi-slot machine 1.

In addition, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a door relay terminal board 460, and a selector 461, a door opening/closing monitor switch 462, a BET switch 11S, and a settlement switch 13S connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 460. , A start switch 6S, a stop switch board 463, a game operation display board 470, and a sub relay board 75. The BET switch 11S, the settlement switch 13S, the start switch 6S, and the sub relay board 75 have been described above, and therefore their description is omitted here.

The selector 461 is a device for selecting whether or not the material and shape of the medal are appropriate, and guides the appropriate medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 22 to the hopper device 40. Although not shown, a medal sensor (insertion operation detection means) for detecting that a proper medal has passed is provided on the path of the medal in the selector 461.

The door opening/closing monitor switch 462 outputs a security signal for notifying the opening/closing of the upper door 62a and the lower door 62b to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1. The stop switch board 463 (stop operation detection means) includes a circuit for stopping the spinning reel, and a circuit for displaying the reel that can be stopped by an LED or the like. A stop switch is provided on the stop switch board 463. The stop switch detects that the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R have been pressed by the player (stop operation).

The game operation display board 470 is connected to the information display device 14, and is inserted when accepting the insertion of medals, when the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotatable, and when replaying. This is a substrate for displaying the number of medals on the information display 14. Further, the game operation display board 470 is connected with the LED group 471, and the LED group 471 is, for example, based on a signal input from the game operation display board 470, a mark for displaying a game start, a mark for performing a replay, and the like. Light up.

The sub control board 72 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 460 and the sub relay board 75. The pachi-slot machine 1 also includes speakers 9L and 9R, various LEDs 101, a touch sensor 201a, and a display unit 110, which are connected to the sub control board 72 via the sub relay board 75.

The pachi-slot machine 1 also includes a ROM cartridge substrate 82 and a liquid crystal relay substrate 480 connected to the sub-control substrate 72. The ROM cartridge substrate 82 and the liquid crystal relay substrate 480 are housed in the sub control substrate case together with the sub control substrate 72.

The ROM cartridge board 82 is a board for managing performance images (video), sound, light, and communication data. The liquid crystal relay board 480 is a board that relays connection wiring between the sub-control board 72 and the display unit 100.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the main control circuit mounted on the main control board 71 will be described with reference to FIG. 117. The configuration of the sub control circuit mounted on the sub control board 72 is the same as that shown in FIG. FIG. 117 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a main control circuit of the pachi-slot machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 117A, the main control circuit is mainly configured by the microcomputer 30 mounted on the main control board 71. The microcomputer 30 includes a main CPU 31, a main ROM 32, and a main RAM 33.

The main ROM 32 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 31, a data table, data for transmitting various control commands to the sub control circuit mounted on the sub control board 72, and the like. Further, the main ROM 32 stores a plurality of minimum game times related to a unit game.

The main RAM 33 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing the control program.

A clock pulse generation circuit 34, a frequency divider 35, a random number generator 36, and a sampling circuit 37 are connected to the main CPU 31. The clock pulse generation circuit 34 and the frequency divider 35 generate clock pulses. The main CPU 31 executes the control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 36 generates a random number within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 37 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

<Ratio display>
Next, the configuration of the ratio indicator 422 will be described with reference to FIG. 118. As described above with reference to FIG. 116, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has the ratio indicator 422 that displays various ratios. FIG. 118(A) shows an attachment example of the ratio display 422, and FIG. 118(B) shows the contents displayed on the ratio display 422.

(Structure of ratio display)
As shown in FIG. 118, the ratio indicator 422 is configured by a 4-digit 7-segment LED. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 118(B), the upper 2 digits indicate the kind of ratio to be displayed, and the lower 2 digits. Indicates the value of the ratio. The ratio indicator 422 is provided inside the housing 60 of the pachi-slot machine 1 because it is used by an administrator (a clerk at a game store, etc.) to check whether the pachi-slot machine 1 is tampered with. At this time, in order to prevent fraud with respect to the ratio indicator 422 itself, it is preferable that the ratio indicator 422 is provided inside the main control board case that covers the main control board 71.

As a specific mounting example, as shown in FIG. 118(A-1), the ratio indicator 422 may be mounted on the main control board 71, and as shown in FIG. 118(A-2). Thus, it may be mounted on another board (ratio display board) connected to the main control board 71, and as shown in FIG. The LED unit may be attached by connecting it to the main control board. In any case, as shown in FIG. 118(A), it is preferable to be provided inside the main control board case together with the main control board 71.

A sealing sticker is usually attached to the main control board case, but when the proportion indicator 422 is provided in the main control board case, the sealing sticker may impair the visibility of the proportion indicator 422. It is preferable to attach a sealing sticker so as not to exist. Further, a caulking recording sticker is also attached to the main control board case. The caulking recording sticker is a sticker on which a person in charge of caulking unsealing recording and a date entry field, a serial number of the main control board, and a two-dimensional code for identification used during manufacturing are described. Depending on the model, a two-dimensional code sticker used at the time of manufacture may be additionally attached to the main control board case. It is preferable that the sticking member such as a seal does not impair the visibility of the ratio indicator.
The front door (upper door 62a or the lower door 62a or the lower door) may also be formed by a caulking member or harness assembled to the main control board, or another board having a board configuration in which a plurality of boards are arranged in a superposed manner, or other members in the housing. It is preferable that the design is such that the visibility of the ratio indicator is not impaired when the door 62b) is opened, and by doing so, the efficiency of the operator in checking the ratio indicator is improved.

(Display contents of ratio display)
Next, a display example of the ratio indicator 422 will be described. As shown in FIG. 118(B), the ratio display unit 422 displays the cumulative specific section ratio, the continuous character ratio and the character ratio in the last 6000 games, and the cumulative continuous character ratio and the character ratio. , Is displayed. When displaying the cumulative specific section ratio on the ratio display 422, "AU" is displayed in the upper two digits of the four-digit 7-segment LED, and when the continuous character ratio for the last 6000 games is displayed. , The upper 2 digits are displayed as “=r”, and when the role ratio of the last 6000 games is displayed, the upper 2 digits are displayed as “=b” and the cumulative continuous role ratio is displayed. In the case of doing, the upper two digits are displayed as “Ar”, and in the case of displaying the cumulative accessory ratio, the upper two digits are displayed as “Ab”. In addition, in the lower two digits of the four-digit 7-segment LED, the corresponding proportion is displayed in percentage.

Here, the “specific section ratio” refers to a ratio of the number of games in the gaming state advantageous to the player to the number of games in all the gaming states (that is, the total number of games). In this case, the gaming state that is advantageous to the player may include, for example, the bonus state during the bonus operation and the ART gaming state, as well as CZ having a high degree of expectation of transition to the ART gaming state (see FIG. 33). ).

The main control board 71 counts, in a predetermined counter provided in the main RAM 33, the total number of games that indicates the number of games in all game states and the number of specific games that indicates the number of games in a game state that is advantageous to the player. The specific section ratio is calculated by the formula shown below.
Specific section ratio = number of specific games/total number of games x 100

Further, the "proportion of continuous bonuses" refers to the first-class special bonuses or the first-class special bonuses with respect to the total number of medals paid out in all game states (that is, the total number of paid-out medals). Percentage of the total number of medals paid out while the accessory continuous operation device is in operation.

The main control board 71, in a predetermined counter provided in the main RAM 33, the total payout number indicating the total number of medals paid out in all the gaming states, and the first-class special character or the first-class special character. The number of coins paid out during the first specific game, which indicates the total number of medals paid out during the operation of the winning character continuous operation device, is counted, and the continuous winning character ratio is calculated by the following formula.
Percentage of consecutive winnings = number of payouts during the first specific game / total number of payouts × 100

In addition, the "proportion of winning character" is the total number of medals paid out while one of the winning characters is operating, with respect to the total number of medals paid out in all game states (that is, the total payout number). It refers to the ratio. It should be noted that any of the accessories is a first-class special accessory, a continuous-working apparatus for a first-class special accessory, a second-class special accessory, a second-class special accessory A device or an ordinary accessory. Further, since it is a state advantageous to the player even during the ART game state or during the CZ, it may be included in the state in which any of the accessory works.

The main control board 71, in a predetermined counter provided in the main RAM 33, the total payout number indicating the total number of medals paid out in all the gaming states, and the medals paid out during the operation of any accessory. The second specific game payout number indicating the total number is counted, and the character ratio is calculated by the following formula.
Role ratio = number of payouts during the second specific game / total number of payouts × 100

Further, the "total" refers to the entire period from the installation of the pachi-slot machine 1 to the present, and the "last 6000 games" refers to the period from the game before 6000 games to the present. When calculating the “cumulative” ratio, the main control board 71 may calculate the ratio using the counting results that have been counted in the entire period, and when calculating the “latest 6000 games” ratio, The main control board 71 may calculate the ratio using the counting result that has been counted in the period from the game before 6000 games to the present.

The pachi-slot machine 1 is configured so that none of the count items in the counter provided in the main RAM 33 is erased by the power interruption. Specifically, when the power is cut off, the data is saved in the backup area provided in the main RAM 33, and when the data is restored, the data is read from the backup area and reset. As a result, even when the power is turned off after the store is closed and the power is turned on before the store is opened, the data can be continuously accumulated from the time of installation.

Further, the right to replay upon winning a replay can be considered as payout of the same number of medals as used in the game, or as payout of zero medals. In the above-described calculation of the ratio, the calculation result A may be different between the calculation method A in which the replay right is considered as payout of medals and the calculation method B in which the replay right is not considered as payout of medals. For example, in the calculation of the ratio to the total number of medals paid out in all game states (total payout number), such as the ratio of consecutive characters or the ratio of characters, a re-playing right is considered as a medal payout A Then, the total payout number is increased by the number of times the replay is won, and as a result, the ratio is reduced. On the contrary, in the calculation method B in which the right to replay is not considered as payout of medals, the winning of replay does not affect the total payout number, and as a result, the ratio becomes high. The difference between the calculation method A and the calculation method B increases as the number of times a replay is won increases, and thus increases as the number of games increases.

Therefore, the ratio display 422 may switchably display the calculation result of the calculation method A and the calculation result of the calculation method B. In this case, the upper 2 digit identifier when displaying the calculation result by the calculation method A and the upper 2 digit identifier when displaying the calculation result by the calculation method B should be different. If the size of the board on which the ratio indicator 422 is provided has a margin, a 7-segment unit of the ratio indicator 422 may be added to display both simultaneously.
In addition, even when the continuous character ratio or the character ratio is displayed on the setting screen (so-called hall menu) that can be displayed by the store manager, similarly, it is possible to display the results calculated by a plurality of calculation methods. Good.

(Display contents of ratio display (switch display))
The ratio indicator 422 switches and displays various ratios calculated by the main control board 71. The method of switching the content displayed on the ratio display 422 is arbitrary, and for example, various ratios may be automatically switched at a predetermined interval, and according to the operation of the changeover switch 423 (see FIG. 116). Alternatively, various ratios may be manually switched, or various ratios may be switched by combining automatic switching and manual switching.

(Display contents of ratio display (at the time of error))
In the pachi-slot machine, rules are made in the industry so as not to increase the gambling property, for example, the ratio of the game state advantageous for the player to all the games does not become too high, and Lowering the base (so-called coin holding) during normal operation by paying out medals more than a predetermined amount not only during the advantageous game operation state but also in the normal game operation state so that the player can play the game in peace in the normal game operation state. There are regulations that must not be exceeded. The above-mentioned various ratios displayed on the ratio indicator 422 make it possible to confirm whether or not these regulations are satisfied. Although it may temporarily exceed the regulated value due to accidental succession of bonuses, from a statistical point of view, the value of the percentage displayed on the display as the number of games increases is in line with the regulation. It converges as it approaches the created design value. Therefore, when the number of trials is large, such as the number of games played 100,000, and when a value that deviates from the design value is still displayed, it can be inferred that an illegal act has been performed. Also, when a value that greatly deviates from the design value is frequently displayed only on a specific table, the administrator can infer that an illegal act has been performed on the specific table, such as hanging an unauthorized board. In this way, whether or not the value displayed on the ratio display 422 exceeds the specified value serves as a clue for the administrator to detect fraudulent activity.

Therefore, when the various ratios displayed on the ratio display 422 exceed the specified values, it is preferable that the administrator can appropriately grasp the fact. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the above-mentioned various ratios (specific section ratio, continuous character ratio, character ratio) calculated by the main control board 71 are equal to or more than the specified value set for the ratio. The display mode of the ratio on the ratio display 422 is made different depending on whether the ratio is less than the specified value set for the ratio. For example, the ratio indicator 422 blinks the ratio when the ratio is equal to or higher than the specified value, and lights the ratio when the ratio is less than the specified value. With this, the administrator can grasp at a glance whether or not various ratios satisfy the specified values.

In addition, if there is a ratio that is equal to or greater than the specified value, it may be notified to an external device (for example, a hall computer) (for example, notification that the specific section ratio exceeds the specified value). Good. Specifically, the main control board 71 notifies the external device of that fact via the external centralized terminal board 73 when the calculated ratio includes a ratio equal to or higher than the specified value. If the output pins from the external centralized terminal board 73 are limited, the output pin currently used as the error output is used to notify the external device (that is, the error output). Good.

It should be noted that just because there is a ratio that is greater than or equal to the specified value does not mean that it is an improper act immediately. Therefore, in the case of a model equipped with a first error output that is output when an abnormality that is strongly suspected of cheating is detected and a second error output that is output when an abnormality that occurs in a normal game is detected, The error based on exceeding the value is preferably the second error output. Here, the abnormalities that are highly likely to be fraudulent acts include, for example, RAM clear detection, RAM read/write failure, RAM software abnormality, magnetic detection, radio wave detection, communication abnormality, internal voltage abnormality, and internal winning. There are cases such as a winning abnormality in which the symbol related to is displayed on the activated line, a payout at a timing when the payout cannot be originally made, or a case where the set value indicates a value other than 6 levels. Further, the abnormalities that occur in the normal game include, for example, a hopper empty in which the medals of the hopper device 40 are bottomed out, a clogging of medals in the payout opening of the hopper device 40, a medal overflow in which the medal auxiliary storage is full, and medals. A door caused by opening the front door (upper door 62a or lower door 62b) by a hall clerk when detecting clogging or backward flow of medals during insertion, or when an abnormal number of inserted medals is detected such as four. For example, when an opening error or disconnection of the wiring of the hopper is detected at the time of supplying medals, etc.

By thus giving a predetermined notification to the external device when there is a ratio that is equal to or greater than the specified value, the administrator can perform various types of monitoring without looking at the ratio display 422 provided inside the housing 60. Since it is possible to grasp whether or not the ratio satisfies the specified value, it is possible to reduce the burden on the administrator.

(Display contents of ratio display (immediately after installation))
Until the total number of games reaches a predetermined number, such as immediately after the installation of the pachi-slot machine 1, various ratios have a large blur width and move up and down. Therefore, the display mode of various ratios may be different until the total number of games reaches a predetermined number. At this time, the predetermined number of times may be different depending on the type of the calculated ratio. For example, regarding the ratio of the cumulative total, it is displayed in a manner different from usual (for example, displayed in yellow) until the total number of games reaches “17500”, and after the total number of games reaches “17500”, While displaying in a normal mode (for example, displayed in red), the ratio between the last 6000 games is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode until the total number of games reaches “6000”, and the total number of games is After reaching "6000 times", it may be displayed in a normal manner.

Also, regarding the output to the external device, it may not be performed until the total number of games reaches a predetermined number, even if various ratios are equal to or more than a specified value. Also in this case, the predetermined number of times may be different depending on the type of the calculated ratio.

(Modification of ratio display)
By the way, since the existing pachi-slot machine does not have a rate display, it is necessary to make a major modification to the existing pachi-slot machine in the mounting example of the rate display shown in FIG. 118(A). Therefore, the display device provided in the existing pachi-slot machine may be used as a ratio display device that displays various ratios. Specifically, in the existing pachi-slot machine, a display device (information display device 14) that displays the number of stored medals (the number of credits) and the number of medals paid out in this game (payout number). Is provided. Therefore, when a special operation is performed on the pachi-slot machine, a display unit that displays the number of credits (a credit lamp 145 described later) displays the type of ratio and a display unit that displays the number of payouts (described later) The display of the display may be switchable so that the payout number lamp 146) of FIG.

The special operation is optional, but it is preferable to use a switch provided inside the housing 60. This prevents the player from accidentally performing a special operation.

<Information display>
Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the configuration of the information display device 14 including the instruction monitor for informing the information of the stop operation by the main control board 71 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 119, the information display 14 includes an insert lamp 141, a start lamp 142, a replay lamp 143, a bet number lamp 144, a credit lamp 145, a payout number lamp 146, and an instruction monitor 147. And a limit lamp 148.

The insert lamp 141 lights up (or blinks (hereinafter omitted)) to inform the player that a medal can be inserted, and the start lamp 142 lights up to play the game along with the operation of the start lever 6. The replay lamp 143 lights up to inform the player that the medals have been automatically inserted by the operation of the replay. Further, the bet number lamp 144 lights up to inform the player of the number of medals bet, and the credit lamp 145 lights up to indicate the number of medals stored in the pachi-slot machine 1 (credit number). When the payout number lamp 146 is turned on, the payout number lamp 146 notifies the player of the number of medals paid out according to the result of the game (payout number).

The instruction monitor 147 is configured to include a notification lamp 147a and a status indicator 147b (AT lamp). The notification lamp 147a is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and lights up in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information on the stop operation to be notified, thereby reporting the necessary stop operation information to the player. In addition, the status indicator 147b lights up to inform the player that the current game state is a game state (for example, an ART game state) that informs the player of an advantageous stop operation mode. ..
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the notification lamp 147a is provided separately from the credit lamp 145 and the payout number lamp 146, but either the credit lamp 145 or the payout number lamp 146 may be provided without providing the notification lamp 147a. May be used to notify the information of the stop operation.

Further, the limit lamp 148 is lit when the gaming state advantageous to the player continues for a long period of time. If the gaming state that is advantageous to the player continues for a long period of time, there is a possibility that the gambling will be overwhelmed. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming state advantageous to the player continues for a long period of time, the ART gaming state is forcibly ended even before the duration of the ART gaming state expires. (Limit processing). The limit lamp 148 lights up when the ART gaming state is finished by this limit processing, and informs the player that the limit processing has been performed. Further, the limit lamp 148 may be blinked when the limit process is about to be activated, and may be turned on when the limit process is actually performed.
The details of the limit process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 126 and 127.

The insert lamp 141 to the limit lamp 148 are turned on, blinked, and turned off by an LED (not shown) provided on the back surface. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 controls lighting, blinking, and extinguishing of the LED to notify the player of various information regarding the game.

<Status display>
Next, with reference to FIG. 120, the status indicator 147b provided in the information indicator 14 will be described. FIG. 120 is a diagram showing a pattern example of the lighting timing of the status indicator 147b.
In FIG. 120, timing T1 is the start of the game, timing T2 is the start of reel rotation of the game, timing T3 is the first stop operation of the game, and timing T4 is the second stop of the game. At the time of operation, timing T5 is at the time of the third stop operation of the game, timing T6 is at the time of stopping all reels of the game, timing T7 is at the end of the game, and timing T8 is the start of the next game. It's time.

In the example shown in FIG. 120, at a timing T1 (that is, at the time of starting a game), a lottery for transition to a specific section (for example, an ART game state) is won. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the lottery for the transition to the specific section is won, the status indicator 147b is turned on during the winning game. For example, in the lighting pattern example 1, the state indicator 147b is turned on at the start of the game that is won in the lottery for transition to the specific section (timing T1). In the lighting pattern example 2, the status indicator 147b is turned on at the start of reel rotation of the game that has been won in the lottery for moving to the specific section (timing T2), and in the lighting pattern example 3, the lottery for moving to the specific section is won. The state indicator 147b is turned on during the first stop operation of the game (timing T3), and in the lighting pattern example 4, the state indicator is displayed when all reels of the game won in the selection lottery to the specific section are stopped (timing T6). 147b is turned on, and in the lighting pattern example 5, the state indicator 147b is turned on at the end of the game that is won in the lottery for transition to the specific section (timing T7).

It should be noted that the lighting pattern example shown in FIG. 120 is merely an example, and in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the status indicator 147b may be turned on during a game in which a lottery for transition to a specific section is won, and the timing thereof. Is optional.

In this way, by turning on the status indicator 147b during the game in which the selection lottery to the specific section is won, the player can know that the selection lottery to the specific section has been won, so that the player can play the subsequent game. It is suitable because it can have expectations.

(Improvement of notification by status indicator)
By the way, the presence or absence of the winning is notified only by turning on/off one lamp. Although the presence/absence of the winning can be immediately known, it makes the player feel that it is enough to turn on the lamp. There is a risk that it will be interesting, and as a result, interest in other effects in the liquid crystal display device or the like may be lost. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the fact that the lottery for the transition to the specific section is won by the method described below is notified during the game without becoming monotonous.

(Device 1 for status indicators)
119(B) and 119(C) show another configuration example of the status indicator 147b. A status indicator 147b shown in FIG. 119(B) has a plurality of lamps "a" to "i" that are turned on, blinked, and turned off, respectively, and is based on the lighting, blinking, and extinguishing patterns of these lamps. , Inform you that you have won the lottery to move to a specific section.

As an example, when the lottery for the transition to the specific section is won, a plurality of lamps are lit in a specific pattern (for example, “a”, “c”, “d”, “h”, and “i” are lit), When not winning, a plurality of lamps are lit up in a pattern other than this specific pattern. The specific pattern is not limited to one and may have a plurality of patterns. With this, it becomes possible to give a deeper notification than in the case of reporting the winning when one lamp is simply lit, for example, as the lighting pattern at the time of winning is remembered by repeating the game, the detection of the winning becomes faster. It is possible to realize such game playability.

Note that the presence/absence of the winning of the transition lottery may be reported based on the number of lit lamps instead of reporting based on the lighting pattern. For example, when the lottery for the transition is won, a certain number of lamps among the plurality of lamps are lit, and when the lottery for the transition is not won, the number of lamps other than the specific number among the plurality of lamps is increased. The lamp may be turned on. In addition, for example, when the lottery for the transition is won, a certain number or more (or a certain number or less) of the plurality of lamps are lit, and when the lottery for the transition is not won, a plurality of lamps are selected. The number of lamps of less than (or more than) a certain number of the above-mentioned lamps may be turned on.

Further, by controlling the lighting pattern of a plurality of lamps in accordance with the progress of the game, it is possible to perform an effect that suggests the expected degree of winning of the transition lottery using the plurality of lamps. For example, when the lighting pattern that informs that the player has won the lottery is "all lamps are lit", the progress of the game (start operation, first stop operation, second stop operation, third stop operation) By increasing or decreasing the number of lamps that are turned on according to (when all reels are stopped, etc.), it is possible to suggest the expected degree of winning of the transfer lottery in accordance with the progress of the game.

(Device 2 for status indicators)
The state indicator 147b shown in FIG. 119C is similar to the state indicator 147b in FIG. 119B in that it has a plurality of lamps that are turned on, blinked, and turned off. In the status indicator 147b, a plurality of lamps have no meaning as a whole, whereas the status indicator 147b shown in FIG. 119C is different in that it has a meaning as a whole. That is, in the status indicator 147b shown in FIG. 119(C), for example, the manufacturer name of the pachi-slot machine 1, the model name of the pachi-slot machine 1, the character name used as the motif of the pachi-slot machine 1 or the manufacturer, the shape of the character, etc. Characters and shapes that the player wants to impress are also used as decorations. By using such a decoration for a plurality of lamps, the characters and shapes represented by the decoration can be strongly memorized by the player, leading to an improvement in brand power.

Even in this case, by controlling the lighting pattern and the number of lamps to be lit, it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether or not there is a winning of the transition lottery, and to control the lighting pattern of a plurality of lamps according to the progress of the game. Thus, it is possible to perform an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of winning the transfer lottery.

Depending on the pachi-slot machine, there may be a plurality of types of specific sections having different degrees of advantage for the player as the specific section, and the specific section may be moved to one of the specific sections based on the result of the transfer lottery. For example, in a pachi-slot machine having an ART game state and CZ, a pachi-slot machine that shifts the game state to the ART game state or CZ based on the result of the transfer lottery, and the ART game state and the initial game with an initial game number of 50 games. A pachi-slot machine or the like which has an ART game state in which the number of games is 100 games and which shifts the game state to the ART game state of the initial number of games determined by the transfer lottery is conceivable.

Here, when using a plurality of lamps as in the above-mentioned devises 1 and 2, the plurality of lamps (state indicator 147b) are turned on or off in different combinations of patterns according to the type of the specific section that is won by the transition lottery. It may be done. As an example, when the initial game number of 50 games is won in the ART game state, the state indicator 147b is turned on in the first lighting pattern, and when the initial game number of 100 games is won in the ART game state. , The status indicator 147b may be lit with a second lighting pattern different from the first lighting pattern.

As a result, since the lighting pattern differs depending on the type of the specific section, it is possible to increase the variations of the lighting pattern of the status indicator 147b. For the player, the variation of the lighting pattern increases, and it becomes difficult to accurately grasp the content of each lighting pattern, so that the player does not lose interest in other effects in the liquid crystal display device or the like.

On the contrary, regardless of the type of the specific section won by the transfer lottery, the plurality of lamps (state indicator 147b) may be turned on or off in the same combination pattern. In such control, since the lighting pattern is the same regardless of the type of the winning specific section, the type of the winning specific section cannot be grasped from the lighting pattern. A skilled player may memorize the lighting patterns of a plurality of lamps. Therefore, a specific section that is truly advantageous to the player (for example, a long ART game state of 50 games) and a specific section that is not very advantageous to the player (for example, an ART game state that ends in one game) By providing the same lighting pattern of the status indicator 147b in any of these specific sections, it is possible to prevent the type of the specific section that has been won from being grasped.

As a consideration for beginners, the contents of each lighting pattern may be displayed on the waist panel 25 or the like. For example, a waist panel 25 of a pachi-slot machine that is generally introduced without displaying the content of the lighting pattern is used for a waist panel 25 of a pachi-slot machine that is mainly shipped to many beginner stores such as low ball rental stores. May display the content of the lighting pattern. Further, the purchasing store side may order the waist panel 25 desired by the manufacturer in consideration of the customer base. This makes it possible to report or not report the contents of the lighting pattern depending on the customer base of the game shop.

The design change of the waist panel 25 does not require a test by a test organization, and the burden of manufacturing and development costs is not large, so a pachislot machine with appropriate specifications is provided by simply changing the panel according to the market environment. It is possible and preferable. Instead of changing the design of the waist panel 25 itself, a predetermined seal member may be attached or a replaceable sheet member may be used to switch whether or not to notify the content of the lighting pattern. Further, the place where the content of the lighting pattern is displayed may be a place other than the waist panel 25 as long as it can be recognized by the player during the game. However, it is desirable that the place is easy for the player to see.

(Device 3 for status indicators)
Further, in order to prevent the presence/absence of the winning from being known depending on whether or not one lamp is turned on, the status indicator 147b may be arranged at a position which is difficult for the player to visually recognize. The position that is difficult to visually recognize may be an arbitrary place such as the medal receiving portion 16, the waist panel 25, the side surface of the housing 60, the back of the medal slot 22 or the like. Further, by covering the state indicator 147b with an opaque cover and making the state indicator 147b visible only through the hole (peep hole) formed in this cover, it becomes difficult to see the state indicator 147b. be able to. Further, for example, a bill clip or a clip for a parking lot service ticket may be provided on the pachi-slot machine 1, and the status indicator 147b may be provided behind the clip.

(Device 4 for status indicator)
Further, when the status indicator 147b for notifying the success or failure of the transfer lottery to the specific section is at the same position, it will be immediately known if only the location is looked at. Therefore, the position of the status indicator 147b may be switched. Good. As a concrete method, it is considered that at least a plurality of lamps (LEDs) of the pachi-slot machine 1 have the function of the status indicator 147b, and different lamps are used to notify the success or failure of the transition lottery every time. To be Thereby, for example, at one timing, the lamp at the upper right portion functions as the status indicator 147b, but at another timing, the lamp at the lower left portion can function as the status indicator 147b. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the success or failure of the transition lottery only from the lighting pattern of the status indicator 147b, and it is possible to prevent the interest in other effects on the liquid crystal display device or the like from being lost.

(Ingenuity from playability)
Next, with reference to FIG. 121, an idea from a game aspect regarding a method of making it difficult to understand that the player is randomly drawn in the transition lottery to a specific section will be described. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, “F_3 choice bell_1st”, “F_3 choice bell_2nd”, and “F_3 choice bell_3rd” are provided as the pushing order, and 9 medals are paid out when the pushing order is correct. A combination of symbols is displayed), and 0 or 1 medal is paid out when the pressing order is incorrect (a combination of symbols of the bell spilled or the first one is displayed). Then, in the ART gaming state, when the push winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the correct pushing order according to the pushing winning combination is notified. Therefore, during the ART game state, by playing the game according to the notification, the number of medals (for example, 9) exceeding the number of medals (for example, 3) used for the game is paid out.

As a device from the viewpoint of playability, first, a push order combination is provided in which the number of medals less than or equal to the number of medals used in the game is paid out even when the correct answer is given in the push order. In the example shown in FIG. 121, as shown in FIG. 121(A), there are provided push-order winning combinations such as “F_3 choice 1-card combination_1st”, “F_3 choice 1-card combination_2nd”, and “F_3-choice 1 card combination_3rd”. "F_3 choice 1-card combination_1st" to "F_3 choice 1-card combination 3rd", when the correct answer is given in the pressing order, the combination of the symbols of the first sheet is displayed, and one medal is paid out, and the pressing order is not correct. When the answer is correct, a combination of symbols that are out of order is displayed, and 0 medals are paid out.
It should be noted that the newly provided pushing order combination does not have to increase the number of medals even when the pushing order is correctly answered, and the number of medals (third quantity) equal to or less than the number of medals used in the game when the pushing order is correctly answered is paid out. The number of medals (fourth quantity) smaller than the number (third quantity) is paid out when the pushing order is incorrect, or no medals are paid out (that is, 0).

In addition, in terms of playability, at least two types of ART game states are provided as the ART game states. Specifically, all of the push winning combinations (“F_3 selection 1 copy combination_1st” to “F_3 selection 1 copy combination_3rd” and “F_3 selection bell 1st” to “F_3 selection bell_3rd”) are determined as internal winning combinations. ART game state that informs the pressing order of the correct answer when played, and "F_3 choice 1 piece combination_1st" to "F_3 choice 1 piece combination_3rd" of the pushing order combination of the correct answer when it is determined as an internal winning combination There is provided a single-player ART game state in which the pressing order is notified, and when the "F_3 selection bell_1st" to "F_3 selection bell_3rd" are determined as the internal winning combination, the correct pressing order is not notified.

Then, in terms of playability, the status indicator 147b is turned on regardless of whether the gaming state is the ART gaming state or the single-card winning ART gaming state. The lighting pattern of the status indicator 147b may be different between the ART gaming state and the single-card winning ART gaming state, or may be the same lighting pattern.

With such a device, it is possible to inform the player that the current game state is the game state in which the push forward combination is informed by the state indicator 147b, but it is truly advantageous for the player only from the state indicator 147b. It is possible to make it impossible to know whether it is in the ART game state or in the single-card combination ART game state.

It should be noted that the transition to the ART game state that is truly advantageous to the player is performed by winning the transition lottery to the specific section, but the transition to the single-card ART game state that is not necessarily advantageous to the player Can be done arbitrarily.

In the example shown in FIG. 121(B), all games other than the ART game state are in the single-card ART game state. Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 121(B), in the eleventh game, since the player has won the lottery for transition to a specific section (that is, the lottery for transition to the ART game state), the game after the eleventh game. Is in the ART game state. During this ART game state, a 3-choice 1-card combination ("F_3-choice 1-card combination_1st" to "F_3-choice 1-card combination_3rd") and a 3-choice bell ("F_3-choice bell_1st"-"F_3-choice bell_3rd") Whichever of the above is determined as the internal winning combination, the pressing order of the correct answer is notified.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 121(B), all the games before winning the transition lottery to the ART gaming state are in the single-card ART gaming state. In this 1-card combination ART game state, in a game in which a 3-choice 1-card combination is determined as an internal winning combination (first game), the pressing order of the correct answer is informed while the 3-choice bell is internally winning. In the game determined as the role (second game), the pressing order of correct answers is not notified.

In this way, when all the games other than the ART gaming state are set to the one-part winning ART gaming state, the state indicator 147b is always lit regardless of whether or not the lottery for shifting to the ART gaming state is won. Therefore, the player cannot grasp that the lottery has been won in the transition lottery only by turning on/off the state indicator 147b.

In the example shown in FIG. 121(C), among the games other than the ART game state, only the game in which one of the three winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination is set to the one-card winning ART game state, and the other games are , A state in which neither the ART game state nor the single-card combination ART game state is set (normal). Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 121(C), in the eleventh game, the lottery for the transition to the specific section (that is, the lottery for the transition to the ART gaming state) has been won, so the game after the eleventh game. Is in the ART game state.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 121(C), among the games before winning the transition lottery to the ART gaming state, only one game in which one of the three winning combinations has been determined as the internal winning combination The game state is set, and the other games are set to the normal game state. Specifically, in the first game, since a 3-choice 1-card combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the game state of this first game is set as a 1-card combination ART game state, and a notification of the correct pressing order is given. Is going. On the other hand, in the second game, since the three-choice one-win combination is not determined as the internal winning combination, it is in the normal game state, and the correct pressing order is not notified.

In this way, even when only one game in which one winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination is set as one winning combination ART gaming state among the games other than the ART gaming state, the status indicator 147b has three selections. In a game in which one winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the player lights up regardless of whether or not the player has won the lottery to move to the ART gaming state. Therefore, the player can turn on/off the status indicator 147b. It is not possible to know that the lottery has been won in the transfer lottery alone. Further, even if it is the single-card combination ART gaming state, the mode of the stop operation advantageous for the player is notified, so if the single-card combination ART gaming state is always set as shown in FIG. 121(B), The notification game state in which the push order is notified is continued for a long period of time, and there is a possibility that the gambling property of the game is undesirably enhanced. In this regard, as shown in FIG. 121(C), only one game in which 3 winning combinations are selected as an internal winning combination among the games other than the ART gaming state is set as the 1-card winning ART gaming state, and the notification game is performed. The period of the condition can be limited, and it is possible to prevent the gambling property from unnecessarily increasing.

<Basic game flow>
Subsequently, a basic game flow of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 122 is a game state transition flow regarding presence or absence of notification in the pachi-slot machine 1. Note that, in FIG. 122, only the game state relating to the presence or absence of the notification is shown, and the transition flow of the game state relating to the presence or absence of the bonus operation is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 122, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a normal section in which the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified and a specific section in which the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified. In addition, the normal section corresponds to, for example, a normal game state in the general game state in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, and the specific section is, for example, a general game in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment. The CZ and ART game states in the state correspond (see FIG. 33).

(Transition from normal section to specific section)
The normal section is transferred to the specific section by winning the transfer lottery to the specific section. Here, the lottery for transition to the specific section includes both the lottery for transition to CZ and the lottery for transition to the ART game state. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the lottery for shifting to the specific section is performed based on the information having no difference in the set value. "Information that there is no difference in set value" means a role that is determined as an internal winning combination with the same probability in all the set values in the internal lottery process (setting unquestioned combination), or in all set values when all reels are stopped. It includes at least a combination of symbols that will be displayed with the same probability (a combination of symbols having no setting difference).

That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the setting unquestioned winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the lottery for transitioning to the specific section is performed, and the winning combination having the setting difference (setting winning combination) is determined as the internal winning combination. If it does, the lottery for shifting to the specific section is not performed. Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a combination of symbols having no setting difference is displayed when all reels are stopped, the lottery for moving to a specific section is performed, and a combination of symbols having a setting difference is displayed. In this case, the lottery for shifting to the specific section is not performed.

Further, the lottery for shifting to the specific section is performed based on a perfect probability that is predetermined and does not change at all. The “predetermined complete probability that does not fluctuate at all” means at least a probability that it does not fluctuate based on a set value (that is, a probability that the winning probability is the same regardless of the set value).

In this way, by performing the transition lottery performed based on “information having no difference in setting value” with the same probability of winning regardless of the setting value, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, It is possible to make the degree of expectation regarding the transfer the same for each set value, and it is possible to suppress the difference in payout performance to the winning probability of a set combination having a setting difference.

(Example of lottery table used for transfer lottery)
Here, an example of the lottery table used for the lottery for shifting to the specific section is shown in FIG. FIG. 124(A) is an internal lottery table for determining an internal winning combination, and FIG. 124(B) is a transfer lottery table for performing a transfer lottery to a specific section based on the internal winning combination. In the following, the internal lottery table has a probability denominator of 32768, and the transfer lottery table has a probability denominator of 256.

Like the example shown in FIG. 124(A), the internal lottery table defines information on the lottery value corresponding to each winning combination. Here, the winning combination determined by the lottery using the internal lottery table includes a set winning combination in which the random determination value is different depending on the set value, and a setting unspecified winning combination in which the random determination value is the same regardless of the setting value. In the example shown in FIG. 124(A), the winning combination “F_BB1”, “F_maintaining lip A”, etc. is a setting difference combination in which the lottery value is different depending on the setting value, and the winning combination “F_Sabo 1” “F_Chililip” “F_BB1+F_reach eye lip And the like are setting inquiries having the same lottery value regardless of the setting value. In the pachi-slot machine 1, when the set winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the transition lottery to the specific section is not performed, and when the setting unquestioned combination is determined to be the internal winning combination, the transition lottery to the specific section is performed. be able to. In addition, not performing the transition lottery to the specific section includes not only performing the transition lottery itself but also performing the transition lottery but not necessarily winning the lottery. In addition, the transfer lottery to the specific section does not necessarily have to be performed when any of the set random questions is determined as the internal winning combination, and the setting random question to perform the transition random determination and the setting random to not perform the transition random determination are performed. The role may be provided.

Subsequently, as in the example shown in FIG. 124(B), the transfer lottery table defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the transfer lottery, for each setting undetermined winning combination determined as the internal winning combination. As described above, since the transfer lottery to the specific section is performed based on the complete probability which is set in advance and does not change at all, the lottery value information defined in the transfer lottery table is the same regardless of the set value. It is a value.

The “predetermined complete probability that does not change at all” may further include a probability uniquely determined for “information having no difference in set value”. In recent years, pachi-slot machines may be provided with a state where it is easy to win the transfer lottery and a state where it is difficult to win. In such a case, in the case of performing the transition lottery with "the probability uniquely determined for the information having no difference in the set value", for example, at the time of the winning of the setting unquestioned combination, any gaming state The transfer lottery that wins with the same probability will be performed. On the contrary, in the case of performing the transition lottery with “probability that is not uniquely determined probability for information having no difference in setting value (that is, probability of fluctuating)”, for example, when the winning of setting unquestioned hand is won, A transition lottery that wins with a probability according to the current game state, that is, if the current game state is a high probability state, a transition lottery that wins with a high probability is performed, and the current game state is a low probability state. In this case, the transfer lottery to win the winning with a low probability will be performed.

(Method of realizing CZ in the case of performing transfer lottery with a uniquely determined probability)
By the way, when performing the transfer lottery with the uniquely determined probability as described above, since the transfer lottery that wins with the same probability is performed in any gaming state, like the CZ (chance zone) In order to provide a state in which it is easy to shift to the ART gaming state, it is necessary to take some measures. Next, with reference to FIG. 125, an example of a method for implementing CZ will be described.

FIG. 125(A) is a diagram showing an example of the ART lottery method during CZ. For example, during the CZ, the push order of the correct answer of the push order combination having no setting difference in the probability of being determined as the internal winning combination is notified, and the lottery for transition to the ART gaming state is selected when the push order combination winning with no setting difference occurs. It will be performed based on the combination of the displayed symbols. Specifically, like the transfer lottery table shown in FIG. 125(A), when a combination of bell symbols is displayed when all reels are stopped, the transfer lottery to the ART gaming state is performed and the bell spilled or 1 When the combination of symbols on the page is displayed, the lottery for shifting to the ART game state is not performed.

Comparing the normal zone and the CZ, the winning probability of the push order combination is the same, but since the correct push order is not notified in the normal zone, it is difficult to display the combination of symbols in which the transition lottery will be performed. On the contrary, during CZ, since the pressing order of correct answers is notified, it is easy to display the combination of symbols for which the transfer lottery is performed. As a result, during the CZ, the frequency of the transfer lottery will be higher than that in the normal section, and even if the transfer lottery is performed with a uniquely determined probability, it is easy to transfer to the ART game state (chance). Zone) can be realized.

Further, FIG. 125(B) is a diagram showing another example of the ART lottery method during CZ. In the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to change the winning probability of the combination (replay) related to the replay by shifting the RT game state. Therefore, by making the winning probabilities of some of the roles (replays) related to the re-play that do not have a setting difference different in the RT gaming state, the ART gaming in one RT gaming state and another RT gaming state It is possible to change the frequency of the transition lottery to the state.

Specifically, in the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 125(B), the winning combination “F_Chilliripu” is a setting-independent winning combination with no setting difference, and like the transfer lottery table shown in FIG. When “F_Chiririp” is determined as the internal winning combination, the lottery for shifting to the ART gaming state is performed. Here, referring to the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 125(B), the winning combination “F_Chilirip” has no setting difference, but the winning probability is different according to the RT gaming state, and the RT2 gaming state is more prone than the RT1 gaming state. It is decided with a high probability as an internal winning combination.

Therefore, in the RT2 game state, the frequency of the transition lottery will be higher than that in the RT1 game state, and even if the transition lottery is performed with a uniquely determined probability, it is easy to shift to the ART game state. (Chance zone) can be realized. More specifically, the RT2 game state can be used as CZ.

(Another example of a method of realizing CZ in the case of performing the transfer lottery with a uniquely determined probability)
Subsequently, FIG. 125(C) is a diagram showing another example of the method of realizing CZ. In the method shown in FIG. 125(C), CZ is realized by using MB (an accessory continuous operation device relating to a second type special accessory). The pachi-slot machine 1 according to this method has a single bonus (hereinafter “SB”) and a regular bonus (hereinafter “RB”) as a lottery character that is also drawn in the MB, and the MB end condition is (A). More than the specified number of medals have been paid out, (B) SB is established in MB (determined as an internal winning combination or winning), (C) RB is established in MB (determined as an internal winning combination, Or winning), any one of the three conditions must be met. Then, the pachi-slot machine 1 shifts to the ART game state after the end of MB according to the satisfied end condition. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 125(C), when the MB ends due to the establishment of RB, the MB enters the ART gaming state after the MB ends, and when the MB ends due to other conditions, the MB enters the ART gaming state after the MB ends. Will not move.

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 125(C), if the MB is ended by SB establishment (so-called puncture) or the RB is established before the specified number of medals are paid out, the state is shifted to the ART game state. It will function as a chance zone (CZ) of winning.
As a reel stop control in MB, even in a game in which RB is determined as an internal winning combination, it is possible to preferentially stop a combination of symbols with a payout of medals, and thus payout of medals exceeding a specified number. There is a case where the game that has been present and the game in which the RB is determined as the internal winning combination are the same game. In such a case, it is preferable to shift to the ART gaming state assuming that the ending condition (C) is satisfied.

In the example shown in FIG. 125(C), (1) When the MB wins in the normal section, the gaming state shifts to the CZ MB. Then, (2) when more than the specified number of medals are paid out in the MB, or when the SB is established, the MB which is the CZ ends and the gaming state shifts to the normal section. On the other hand, (3) When the RB is determined as the internal winning combination in the MB, the MB which is the CZ ends, and the gaming state shifts between the RB flags. Then, (4) when the RB wins between the RB flags, the gaming state shifts to RB, and after that (5) when the RB ends, the ART gaming state is started at a high RT that is triggered by the end of the RB. .. When the RB in the MB is determined as an internal winning combination in the game in which the RB wins, the RB starts from the next game in which the MB ends without passing through between the RB flags.

In such a pachi-slot machine 1, the winning probability of MB in the normal section (functioning as CZ) and the winning probability of RB in MB (triggering a transition to the ART gaming state) are common to all set values. However, the winning probability of SB in the MB (which triggers the end of CZ) may be a common probability for all the setting values or a different probability depending on the setting values. For example, when the winning probability of SB in MB is made to differ according to the set value, the higher the setting, the lower the winning probability of SB, so that MB is easy to last for a long time. It is possible to increase the degree of expectation of transition to, and to expand the variety of payout specifications.
Further, the winning probability of the RB that triggers the transition to the ART gaming state can be arbitrarily set depending on the relationship with other ending conditions, but the probability of winning is realistic and the game balance is better. Therefore, it is preferable that the prescribed number is set to a small number such as 10 to 30 and the RB is determined as the internal winning combination in the MB with a relatively high probability.

(Another configuration example of the main control board)
Here, the internal lottery using the internal lottery table and the transfer lottery using the transfer lottery table are executed in the main control board 71. In the main control board 71, since the capacity of the storage means (main ROM) is limited, when the transfer lottery is also performed in addition to the internal lottery, the lottery variation becomes monotonous. Therefore, a method of improving the main control board 71 will be described below.

FIG. 117(B) is a diagram showing another configuration example of the main control board. In FIG. 117(B), the main control circuit is provided with a first main control board 71a and a second main control board 71b. The first main control board 71a and the second main control board 71b are connected so that bidirectional communication is possible by serial communication or the like. Since the configurations of the first main control board 71a and the second main control board 71b are the same as the configurations shown in FIG. 117, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, a plurality of first main control boards 71a and second main control boards 71b are provided as main control boards, and, for example, internal lottery is performed using the internal lottery table in the first main control board 71a, and second main control is performed. By carrying out the transfer lottery using the transfer lottery table on the substrate 71b, it is possible to sufficiently secure the capacity of the storage means used for each lottery, and it is possible to carry out lottery rich in variations.

Although the first main control board 71a and the second main control board 71b are configured to be capable of bidirectional communication in FIG. 117(B), the invention is not limited to this, and the first main control board 71a may be used. The upstream and the second main control board 71b may be downstream and the communication may be possible only in one direction (from the first main control board 71a to the second main control board 71b). By using only one-way communication, it is possible to reduce the communication load as compared with the case of using two-way communication.

When the internal lottery and the transfer lottery are performed on different boards (the first main control board 71a and the second main control board 71b), the order of performing the internal lottery and the transfer lottery is arbitrary. For example, first the transfer lottery may be performed on one substrate, and then the internal lottery may be performed on the other substrate. On the contrary, after the first internal lottery is performed on the one substrate, the transfer lottery is performed on the other substrate. It may be that. In this case, when the transfer lottery is performed first, since the result of the internal lottery (internal winning combination) cannot be grasped at the time of the transfer lottery, the transfer lottery is performed in a form not affected by the result of the internal lottery. For example, regardless of the internal winning combination, such a configuration may be adopted in the case of the specification that the transfer lottery is performed with a predetermined probability for each unit game. As a result, even if a fraudulent act of illegally inputting winning combination information different from the actual internal winning combination is performed, it does not affect the result of the transition lottery, and thus a fraudulent act of generating an advantageous transition lottery result. Can be suppressed. Further, when the transfer lottery is performed first, the lottery based on the information having no difference in the set value can be performed only by performing the lottery without the difference in the set value because the internal winning combination is not relevant.

On the contrary, when the internal lottery is performed first, the internal lottery determined as the result of the internal lottery may be referred to for the transition lottery, and the internal lottery determined as the result of the internal lottery. The transfer lottery may be performed without referring to the winning combination. When performing the transfer lottery with reference to the internal winning combination, the transfer lottery can be performed based on the information having no difference in the setting value by performing the transfer lottery based on the setting unquestioned combination as described above. When the transfer lottery is performed without referring to the winning combination, the lottery can be performed based on the information having no difference in the set value by performing the lottery without the difference in the set value.

Further, FIG. 117C is a diagram showing still another configuration example of the main control board. What is lacking in the main control board 71 is the capacity of the storage means (main ROM). Therefore, in FIG. 117(C), one main control board 71 such as the first main ROM 32a and the second main ROM 32b is shown. A plurality of main ROMs are provided above. In this case, for example, by storing various tables used for internal lottery in the first main ROM 32a and storing various tables used for transfer lottery in the second main ROM 32b, the storage means used for each lottery is stored. A sufficient capacity can be secured and lottery rich in variations can be performed.

(Transition from specific section to normal section)
Subsequently, returning to FIG. 122, the transition from the specific section to the normal section will be described. The specific section is shifted to the normal section when the ending condition of the specific section is satisfied. As the ending condition of the specific section, any condition such as the number of games in the specific section, the number of times of navigation performed in the specific section, the number of medals paid out during the specific section, the difference in number, etc. can be used. .. Further, the ending condition may be different depending on the type of the specific section, and for example, the ending condition may be different between CZ and the ART game state.

As described above, the specific section basically ends when the end condition is satisfied, but in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, exceptionally, when the specific section continues for a long period of time, the end condition is not satisfied. , Even if the transition from the specific section to the normal section (limit processing) is performed and the navigation for the guaranteed number of times is not performed even when the ending condition of the specified section is satisfied, then the guaranteed number of times It continues without ending the specific section until the navigation is performed, and shifts from the specific section to the normal section in response to the guaranteed number of times of navigation (Navi guarantee processing).

(Limit processing)
Here, the limit processing in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 and 127. FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a method of counting the number of limit games in a specific section, and FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a flow of limit processing in the specific section.
In a pachi-slot machine, if a specific section such as a CZ or ART game state is continuously played for a long period of time, a player's profit during the specific section becomes large, and the overall profit is balanced. Therefore, it is necessary to reduce the profits that the player obtains during the normal section, which increases the gambling performance of the game. Therefore, in recent years, it has been required to keep the duration of the advantageous state for the player within a certain period. The limit process is a process of keeping the duration of the specific section, which is advantageous for the player, within a certain period (for example, 1500 games).

(How to count limit games)
First, with reference to FIG. 126, a method of counting the number of limit games in a specific section when performing the limit process will be described. As shown in FIG. 126A, the main control board 71 counts the number of continuous games (the number of limit games) when the specific section continues. For example, when the ART game state is continuing, the main control board 71 counts the number of limit games by adding the number of continuous games by one for each game. Further, for example, when the state moves from the normal section to the CZ and then to the ART game state, the specific section includes at least the CZ and the ART game state as described above, and thus the main control board 71 continues the CZ game. The number and the sum of the number of continuous games in the ART game state that are continuously performed thereafter are counted as the limit number of games.

By the way, depending on the pachi-slot machine, as shown in FIG. 126(B), when transitioning to the ART game state or CZ (specific zone), the standby zone may be sandwiched without immediate transition. For example, in a pachi-slot machine that makes the RT game state different between the normal section and the specific section, it is necessary to start the specific section after transitioning the RT game state, and thus the standby section may be sandwiched once. As a specific case, when the lottery for the transition to the specific section is won, the standby section may be sandwiched during the transition from the normal section to the specific section, and a bonus (feature) may be added during the specific section. When activated, the standby section may be sandwiched when returning to the specific section after the bonus ends.

For such a waiting section, the main control board 71 may or may not count the number of limit games. That is, the main control board 71 may count the number of games “A1” to “An” in FIG. 126(B) as the limit game number, or may not count as the limit game number. Good.

Further, the main control board 71 may differ whether or not to count as the limit game number, depending on the type of the standby section. For example, if you win a lottery to move to a specific section, the specific section sandwiched when moving from the normal section to the specific section is not counted as a limit game number, and a bonus (feature) is activated during the specific section. In this case, the waiting section sandwiched when returning to the specific section after the end of the bonus may be counted as the limit game number, as a series of advantageous states as a whole.

Further, the main control board 71 may change whether or not to count as the limit game number according to the type of notification (navigation) performed during the standby section. When a waiting section is provided for transitioning the RT gaming state, at least during the waiting section, it is necessary to give a notification for transitioning the RT gaming state, but the notification regarding the push forward combination relating to the increase and decrease of medals is not always required. There is no need to do it. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the combination of symbols on the bell spill will cause the RT gaming state to transition, so it is necessary to inform the pusher pusher "pushing bell" relating to the increase and decrease of medals. When the combination of the symbols on the bell spill is set to control not to transition the RT game state, the push order combination “push order bell” related to the increase/decrease of medals does not necessarily have to be notified during the waiting section.

Therefore, the main control board 71 counts the number of limit games as the number of limit games, regarding the standby section in which the notification of the push forward combination relating to the increase and decrease of medals is in an advantageous state for the player, and the push related to the increase and decrease of medals is performed. It is not necessary to count the number of limit games for the standby section in which the notification of the normal combination is not given.

Also, depending on the pachi-slot machine, as shown in FIG. 126(C), when the bonus winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination during the ART gaming state or CZ (specific section), a bonus flag is set during the specific section. The time and the bonus state may be sandwiched. The main control board 71 may count the games between these flags or in the bonus state as the limit game number, or may not count them. That is, the main control board 71 counts the number of games “C1” to “Cn” and the number of games “D1” to “Dn” in FIG. 126C as the limit number of games. Alternatively, the limit game number may not be counted.

In this case, the main control board 71 may count the games during the flags as the limit number of games, while not counting the games during the bonus state as the limit games, or conversely, between the flags. While the middle game is not counted as the limit game number, the game in the bonus state may be counted as the limit game number. Further, both the game during the flag and the game in the bonus state may be counted as the limit game number, or conversely, both may not be counted as the limit game number.

Further, the main control board 71 may differ whether or not to count as the limit game number, depending on the type of notification (navigation) performed during the flag. Specifically, the main control board 71 counts the number of games as a limit game number while determining that the player is in an advantageous state for the duration of the flag during which the notification of the pushing forward combination related to the increase and decrease of medals is made. It is not necessary to count as the limit game number during the period during which the notification of the push combination related to the increase/decrease is not performed.

Further, the main control board 71 may change whether or not to count as the limit game number according to the type of notification (navigation) performed during the bonus state. Depending on the pachi-slot machine, it may be possible to win the push order combination (that is, the combination in which the number of medals to be paid out differs depending on the pressing order) even during the bonus state. In such a pachi-slot machine, the player can obtain more profits by notifying the push forward combination during the bonus state. Therefore, the main control board 71 counts the game in the bonus state as the limit game number when notifying the mode of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player in the bonus state, and is advantageous for the player in the bonus state. If the mode of the stop operation is not notified, the game in the bonus state may not be counted as the limit game number.

(Flow of limit processing)
Subsequently, the flow of the limit process will be described with reference to FIG. 127. As shown in FIG. 127(A), the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from a specific section to a normal section when the limit game number counted according to the above-described counting method reaches a certain number (for example, 1500 games). Let That is, when the number of limit games reaches a certain number, the main control board 71 ends the specific section even if the number of games, the number of times of navigation, etc. still remain (when the ending condition is not satisfied). ..

Then, with the end of the specific section, the main control board 71 performs an initialization process of initializing the values of variables relating to the generation of the notification (navi). In this initialization process, the RT gaming state may be maintained as it is or may be initialized to RT0 which is a low RT state. For example, in the RT game state for the ART game state, without transition to the RT game state due to a combination of symbols such as bell spills and falling replays, the RT game state ends when the specified number of games are exhausted or the bonus is won. In this case, even if the navigation is not generated due to the limit process, the high RT state continues to be advantageous to the player. Therefore, as the latter specification, it is desirable to set the gaming state with a low replay probability. Especially when the RT game state is such that the specified number of games is a large value such as 6000 games and continues substantially until the next bonus, the RT game state is fallen by the limit process, so that the gambling property can be appropriately suppressed. it can.

When performing the limit process in this way, the main control board 71 keeps lighting the state indicator 147b until the number of limit games reaches a certain number, and the number of limit games reaches the certain number of games, ending the specific section. Then, the status indicator 147b is turned off. Further, when the specific section is ended by the limit process, the main control board 71 lights the limit lamp 148 for a predetermined period thereafter. As the predetermined period, when the limit process is performed at the end of the game in which the limit number of games reaches a certain number, the limit process may be, for example, during the next game of the game in which the limit process is performed. Further, as described above, the main control board 71 may blink the limit lamp 148 when the limit process is about to be triggered to notify the player that the limit process is about to be triggered.

Here, for example, when a game in the bonus state is also counted as the limit game number, the limit game number may reach a certain number in the bonus state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 127(B), the main control board 71 may perform limit processing even during the bonus state to shift the game state from the specific section to the normal section. Further, as shown in FIG. 127(C), the main control board 71 may perform the limit process at the timing when the bonus ends without performing the limit process during the bonus state. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 127(B), the game state shifts from the specific section to the normal section at the timing when the number of limit games reaches a certain number, and in the example shown in FIG. 127(C), the limit state is reached. The game state shifts from the specific section to the normal section at the timing when the number of games reaches a certain number and not when the bonus state ends.

Of course, when counting as the limit game number during the game as well during the standby section of the specific section or between the flags of the bonus, the limit number of games reaches a certain number of games during the standby section or between the flags. Then, limit processing may be performed even during the waiting section or between flags, and when the number of limit games reaches a certain number, the timing when the waiting section shifts to a specific section, or the number of limit games is The limit process may be performed at a timing when a certain number of games have been reached and a transition from a flag to a specific section via a bonus state is made.

(Signal output to external device during limit processing)
Further, when the specific section is ended by the limit process, the main control board 71 outputs a predetermined signal to that effect to an external device (data counter or hall computer). By receiving the output of this signal, the hall side can recognize that limit processing has been performed in the pachi-slot machine, and can recognize new information that could not be conventionally grasped.
If the limit game number reaches a certain number during the bonus state, the main control board 71 causes the external device at the timing when the limit game number reaches the certain number (that is, during the bonus state). A predetermined signal may be output to the external device at the timing when the bonus state ends (that is, the main control board 71 determines that the bonus state in the specific section is not reached). Alternatively, when the limit game number reaches a certain number, a predetermined signal may be output to the external device at the end of the bonus state).

Further, the main control board 71 does not only output a signal indicating that the limit process has been performed (limit signal) when the limit process is performed more than the number of times normally assumed in one pachi-slot machine 1. Alternatively, a signal (error signal) indicating that the limit process has been performed more than expected may be output to the external device. Specifically, when the number of times the limit game number reaches a certain number (that is, the number of times the limit process is performed) reaches a predetermined number within a specific period, the main control board 71 makes a specific determination with respect to the outside. Output a signal. As an example, when the limit process is performed more times than expected between the power-on of the pachi-slot machine 1 and the power-off of the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 sends an error signal to the external device together with the limit signal. Output. Thus, for example, when the limit process is performed 10 times a day, which is not normal, the hole side can grasp the fact.

(Navi guarantee processing)
Next, the navigation guarantee processing in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a diagram showing a flow of the navigation guarantee process at the end of the specific section.
In the case of a pachi-slot machine that manages the ending condition of a specific section based on the number of games, if the number of times the winning combination (for example, the pushing bell etc.) that is the target of notification during the specific section is determined as an internal winning combination, There are few medals to be paid out, and the player may feel a sense of loss. Therefore, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment guarantees the minimum number of times of navigating when shifting to a specific section, and continues without ending the specific section until the number of times of navigation is guaranteed.

Here, in FIG. 128, the ending condition of the specific section is managed by the number of games, and in FIGS. 128(A) to (C), the ending condition of the specific section is satisfied at the end of 50 games. Be present. In the example shown in FIG. 128A, when the specific section has continued for 50 games (that is, when the ending condition is satisfied), the number of times of guarantee (navigation) has not been given yet. In such a case, the main control board 71 continues the specific section even if the ending condition is satisfied. In the example shown in FIG. 128(A), after that, the combination of the notification target (for example, the pushing order bell) is determined as the internal winning combination in the 54th game, and the notification of the combination of the notification target is performed. The main control board 71 ends the specific section when the number of times of guarantee is notified in accordance with this notification. On the other hand, the main control board 71 continues without ending the specific section, even if the notification after the end condition of the specific section is satisfied has not yet been notified for the guaranteed number of times.

By the way, in the pachi-slot machine, there are provided a plurality of types of push-in winning combinations in which the number of medals to be paid out at the time of a correct answer in the push-in order is provided as the push-in winning combination. May inform the pushing order of correct answers. As a plurality of types of pushing order, for example, even if the correct answer is given in the pushing order, the number of medals does not increase (that is, the payout number is less than or equal to the inserted number), or the medal increase is extremely small (for example, payout at 3 bets A push order combination in which the number of coins is four) or a push order combination in which the number of medals increases when the answer is correct in the press order (for example, the number of payouts when three bets are nine) is considered. It should be noted that, regardless of which pressing order combination, when the answer is incorrect in the pressing order, the payout number of medals is smaller than when the answer is correct in the pressing order, or the payout number of medals is 0.

From the player's point of view, even if the number of medals that do not increase or the number of medals that do not increase very much is notified at the time of the correct answer, the total number of medals acquired during a specific section does not increase. Does not need to guarantee the number of navigation times during a specific section. On the other hand, with regard to the push order combination, in which medals increase when the answer is correct, it affects the total number of medals acquired during a specific section, so from the player's point of view, the number of navigations is guaranteed during the specific section. It is preferable.

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, among a plurality of types of pushing order combinations in which the number of payouts of medals at the time of pressing order correct answer is different, only for the pushing order combination in which the number of payouts at the time of pressing order correct answer is larger than the number of inserted coins, The number of times of navigation may be guaranteed, and the number of times of navigation may not be guaranteed for a pressing order combination in which the number of payouts at the time of correct answer of the pressing order is equal to or less than the number of input. In addition, among the multiple types of push order combinations with different numbers of medals paid out when the correct push order is answered, the number of navigations is guaranteed only for the push order combination with the largest number of paid out medals when the correct push order is answered, and other push order combinations. For, the number of times of navigation may not be guaranteed.

Specifically, the main control board 71 determines the number of times of navigation when the ending condition of the specific section is satisfied in a situation where the notification of the push forward combination that guarantees the number of times of navigation is performed more than the guaranteed number of times during the specific section. The specific section is ended on condition that the ending condition of the specific section is satisfied irrespective of the number of times of notification to the push forward combination which is not guaranteed. On the other hand, the main control board 71, when the notification of the push forward combination that guarantees the number of times of navigation is not performed more than the guaranteed number of times during the specific section and the ending condition of the specific section is satisfied, Is continued without ending, and then the specific section is ended at the timing when the notification of the push forward combination that guarantees the number of times of navigation is performed for the guaranteed number of times.

By doing so, the number of notifications (navigation) of the push forward combination that affects the total number of medals acquired during the specific section is guaranteed, and thus the loss felt by the player can be reduced. ..

Next, a case where the ending condition of the specific section is satisfied without notifying the guaranteed number of times while sandwiching the bonus state will be described. 128(B) and 128(C) show that when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied (at the end of 50 games), the number of guarantees has not been notified yet, but during the specific section before the end condition is satisfied. An example in which the bonus state is once entered is shown.

Since the bonus state is a gaming state that is basically advantageous to the player, it can be considered that a certain profit is given to the player when the specific section is viewed as a whole. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 128(B), the main control board 71 determines whether or not the number of times of guarantee has not been given when the conditions for ending the specific section are satisfied, even during the specific section. Even if the bonus state is entered even once, the specific section may be ended when the ending condition of the specific section is satisfied.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 128(C), when the main control board 71 satisfies the condition for ending the specific section, if the notification for the guaranteed number of times has not yet been made, the main control board 71 is set during the specific section. Regardless of whether or not the bonus state has been entered, the specific section may be continued until the guaranteed number of times is notified, and then the specific section may be ended at the timing when the guaranteed number of times is notified. Good.

Next, a case will be described in which the number of limit games in a specific section reaches a certain number of games without being notified of the guaranteed number of times. When the specific section continues until the number of limit games reaches a certain number, it can be considered that a certain amount of profit is given to the player. Therefore, the main control board 71 is shown in FIG. As shown in the drawing, when the limit game number in the specific section reaches a certain number, the specific section may be ended even if the guaranteed number of times has not been notified yet. On the contrary, as shown in FIG. 128(E), the main control board 71, even if the limit game number of the specific section has reached a certain number of games, when the notification for the guaranteed number of times has not been performed yet, The specific section may be continued until the guarantee number of times is notified, and then the specific section may be ended at the timing when the guarantee number of times is notified.

In addition, when the specific section is continued until the number of times of guarantee is notified by the navigation guarantee process, it is optional whether or not so-called additional lottery is performed in the specific section after the end condition is satisfied. In other words, the main control board 71 may perform the additional lottery during the specific section until the end condition is satisfied, but may not perform the additional lottery even after the end condition is satisfied even during the specific section. On the contrary, the main control board 71 may perform additional lottery until the guaranteed number of times is notified even after the termination condition is satisfied.

Further, in the case where the specific section is continued until the number of times of guarantee is notified by the navigation guarantee process, on the liquid crystal display device such as the display unit 100, the normal screen is restored at the timing when the ending condition of the specific section is satisfied, and then, When the push order combination to be notified is determined as the internal winning combination, the push order combination may be notified (navigation) on the normal screen. That is, when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied without being informed of the guaranteed number of times, the main control board 71 keeps lighting the status indicator 147b, but the sub control board 72 displays the display screen in the specific section. The display screen is switched from to the display screen during the normal section. Then, after that, when the push order combination to be notified is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 notifies the push order via the notification lamp 147a of the instruction monitor 147, and the sub control board 72 , Informs the pressing order on the normal screen. Then, the main control board 71 may turn off the status indicator 147b when the number of times of guarantee is notified.

<Outline of each game state>
The outline of the game flow of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has been described above. Next, with reference to FIG. 123, an outline of each gaming state of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 123, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when roughly classified, has a normal section, a waiting section, and a specific section. The normal section is a state in which the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, and the specific section is a state in which the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified. In addition, the waiting section is a state after the winning of the lottery for shifting to the specific section and before the shift to the specific section from the normal section.

In the normal section, the waiting section, and the specific section, the bonus winning combination is not determined as an internal winning combination depending on whether the bonus winning combination is won or activated, and the bonus is activated. It is set to the probability that "the bonus is not activated (between non-flags)", the bonus-related role is determined as an internal winning combination, and the "between the flags" that the bonus is not activated is determined as an internal winning combination. A bonus corresponding to a bonus combination having no difference is operating "bonus state (no setting difference)", and a bonus corresponding to a bonus combination having a setting difference in probability of being determined as an internal winning combination is operating " The bonus state (there is a setting difference)" is included.

As shown in FIG. 123, in the normal section "non-bonus operation (between non-flags)" "between flags" "bonus state (no setting difference)" and "bonus state (setting difference)", the main control board 71 In addition, the state indicator 147b is turned off, and when the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, these winning groups are grouped and transmitted to the sub-control board 72. Specifically, when one of the winning combinations “F_3 choice bell_1st”, “F_3 choice bell_2nd”, and “F_3 choice bell_3rd” is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 groups these winning combinations. Information indicating that the winning combination “push order bell” is determined as the internal winning combination is transmitted to the sub control board 72.

Further, in the normal section “non-bonus operation (between non-flags)” and “bonus state (no setting difference)”, the main control board 71 draws a lottery for moving to a specific section based on information having no difference in setting value. On the other hand, in the “between flags” and the “bonus state (with setting difference)” in the normal section, the main control board 71 does not perform the transfer lottery to the specific section. Further, in the normal section “non-bonus operation (between non-flags)”, “between flags”, “bonus state (no setting difference)” and “bonus state (setting difference)”, the main control board 71 continues the specific section. No additional lottery during the period or notification of the winning of the push order win.

In addition, in the "non-bonus operation (between non-flags)", "between flags", "bonus state (no setting difference)" and "bonus state (setting difference)" in the standby section, the main control board 71 displays the state indicator 147b. Light up. The main control board 71 may light the state indicator 147b in different modes during the standby section and the specific section.

Further, in the standby sections “non-bonus operation (between non-flags)”, “between flags”, “bonus state (no setting difference)” and “bonus state (setting difference)”, the main control board 71 pushes the winning combination. The pressing order of the correct answer at the time may be informed or may not be informed. When informing the correct pressing order, the main control board 71 transmits the notification-related hands to the sub control board 72 without grouping them. Specifically, when one of the winning combinations “F_3 choice bell_1st”, “F_3 choice bell_2nd”, and “F_3 choice bell_2rd” is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 actually uses the internal winning combination. The information that can specify the type of winning combination that has been determined as is transmitted to the sub control board 72. On the other hand, when the notification of the correct pressing order is not performed, the main control board 71 groups the notification-related hands and transmits them to the sub control board 72.

Further, in the "non-bonus operation (between non-flags)", "between flags", "bonus state (no setting difference)" and "bonus state (setting difference)" in the standby section, the main control board 71 wins. The lottery for transitioning to a specific section is not performed (however, the transfer lottery may be performed for a specific section that is different from the specific section that is being won). Further, in the "non-bonus operation (between non-flags)", "between flags" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" in the standby section, the main control board 71 does not perform additional lottery during the duration of the specific section. In the “bonus state (with setting difference)” of the standby section, the main control board 71 may perform the additional lottery on the duration of the specific section based on the information having no difference in the set value. It is okay not to.

Also, in the "non-bonus operation (between non-flags)", "between flags", "bonus state (no setting difference)" and "bonus state (setting difference)" of the specific section, the main control board 71 displays the state indicator 147b. Is lit, and the pressing order of the correct answer when the pressing order is won is notified. Therefore, the main control board 71 is in charge of notification in the "non-actuation of bonuses (between non-flags)", "between flags", "bonus state (no setting difference)" and "bonus state (setting difference)" of the specific section. Are transmitted to the sub control board 72 without being grouped.

Further, the main control board 71 wins in the “non-actuation of bonuses (between non-flags)”, “between flags”, “bonus state (no setting difference)” and “bonus state (setting difference)” of the specific section. The lottery for transitioning to a specific section is not performed (however, the transfer lottery may be performed for a specific section that is different from the specific section that is being won). Further, the main control board 71 adds the duration of the specific section based on the information that there is no difference in the set values in the “non-bonus operation (between non-flags)” and the “bonus state (no setting difference)” of the specific section. While lottery is performed, in the “between flags” and “bonus state (with setting difference)” of the specific section, additional lottery is not performed in the duration of the specific section.

In addition, the main control board 71 may perform the lottery for transition to the specific section or the additional lottery for the duration of the specific section only when 3 bets are made, and may not perform the lottery when 1 bet or 2 bets.

<Output of transfer lottery result to external device>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 129 to 131, a flow of outputting the result of the lottery for shifting to the specific section from the pachi-slot machine to an external device such as a data counter or a hall computer will be described.

In a game store, an external device such as a data counter or a hall computer is installed together with a pachi-slot machine.For example, when a bonus state starts on the pachi-slot machine, a signal is output from the pachi-slot machine to the data counter, The counter counts the number of bonuses. In the conventional pachi-slot machine, since the transfer lottery to the specific section is performed on the sub (sub control board 72) side, the main control board 71 recognizes an event (for example, RT state The lottery result was inferred from the transition and the stop operation was performed multiple times in a specific pressing order), and a signal was output to the external device based on the inference. However, in such a conventional method, the timing of outputting the winning in the transition lottery is delayed by a few games from the timing of the actual winning, and a specific pushing order is accidentally repeated by the player's stop operation. In that case, it was assumed that the winning was done even if the winning was not won in the transfer lottery, and as a result, an incorrect signal was output.
Also, in the specification that outputs a signal based on the transition of the RT gaming state, when the bonus is drawn during the ART, the signal is output even when the RT gaming state at the end of the bonus is restored to the RT gaming state for ART after the bonus is exhausted. Was sometimes output. In such a case, the signal is output more than the number of winnings or the number of digesting sets of the accurate ART, and it is difficult for the player to grasp the accurate information when guessing the setting or selecting the machine. Was occurring.

In this regard, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the result of the lottery for transition to the specific section itself is output as it is to the external device, not from the estimation result. Therefore, the result of the transition lottery is accurately output to the external device. Can be output.

FIG. 129 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern of signal output timing to an external device. In FIG. 129, a timing T1 is a start time of a game that is won in a lottery for transition to a specific section (for example, ART game state), a period P1 is a period between one game of the game, and a period P2 is It is a period between one game of the next game.

In the example shown in FIG. 129, at the timing T1 (that is, at the start of the game), the lottery for the transition to the specific section is won. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the transfer lottery to the specific section is performed on the main (main control board 71) side, the main control board 71 can grasp that the transfer lottery has been won from the timing T1. ..

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the result of the transfer lottery is output to the external device at an arbitrary timing during the game period P1 in which the transfer lottery is won. For example, in the output pattern example A, the main control board 71 outputs the result of the transfer lottery to the external device at the start of the game that is won in the transfer lottery to the specific section (that is, when the start lever 6 is operated). doing. Similarly, in the output pattern example B, the main control board 71 outputs the result of the transfer lottery to the external device when the reel rotation of the game starts, and in the output pattern example C, the external when the first stop operation of the game is performed. The result of the transfer lottery is output to the device, and in the output pattern example D, the result of the transfer lottery is output to the external device when all reels of the game are stopped.

Further, as shown in output pattern examples E and F, the main control board 71 can also output the result of the transfer lottery to the external device in the game after the game in which the transfer lottery is won. For example, in the output pattern example E, the main control board 71 outputs the result of the transfer lottery to the external device at the time of inserting the medal for the next game of the game that is won in the transfer lottery. Further, in the output pattern example F, the main control board 71 performs a lottery transfer to an external device during an arbitrary game in which the game is further performed a plurality of times (for example, at the start of the game in which a specific section starts). The result is output.

Note that the output pattern example shown in FIG. 129 is merely an example, and in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the result of the transfer lottery is transferred to the external device at an arbitrary timing after the transfer lottery to the specific section is won. Can be output.

Further, by arbitrarily combining the example of the lighting pattern of the status indicator 147b shown in FIG. 120 and the example of the output pattern of the signal to the external device shown in FIG. 129, it is possible to realize a novel and unprecedented fun. Specifically, a signal indicating that the transfer lottery has been won may be output to the external device prior to the lighting of the status indicator 147b. Conversely, after the status indicator 147b is lit, the external device may be output. A signal indicating that the transfer lottery has been won may be output, or a signal indicating that the transfer lottery has been won may be output to an external device at the same time when the status indicator 147b is turned on. Good.

For example, by outputting the signal to the external device before the status indicator 147b, the counter is updated in the external device (data counter) before the status indicator 147b is turned on. It is possible to detect the transition of the specific section from an external device other than 1. Also, for example, in consideration of the processing time in the external device, by outputting the signal to the external device slightly before the lighting of the status display 147b, the lighting of the status display 147b (notification in the pachi-slot machine 1) It is possible to match the timing with the timing of updating the external device (notifying other than the pachi-slot machine 1) and reducing the player's discomfort.

In addition, for example, when there are many types of bonuses and there is no vacant output pin in the 8-pin signal line for outputting a signal to the external device, when the output pin from the external centralized terminal board 73 is limited, The main control board 71 may not output a signal to the external device even when the transfer lottery is won.

Further, in the above embodiment, the signal is output when the transfer lottery is won, but the signal may be output when a specific section such as ART continues. For example, in the case of a game specification in which the number of sets is managed by setting one set of 30 games in the ART game state, a signal is output when the lottery for transition is won (so-called first win), and two sets are set after 30 games of the first set are exhausted. The external signal may be output at the timing when the eyes start. By outputting the signal in this way, it becomes possible to grasp the accurate number of sets. Further, the initial hit signal and the continuation signal may be different signals so that the initial hit count and the continuation count can be accurately grasped by the data counter. In this case, the accuracy of grasping the game situation can be further improved. ..

In such a gaming machine that manages the number of sets, if a bonus state starts in the middle of the ART gaming state, a pachi-slot machine that restarts the game from the number of games remaining after bonus winning in the set after the bonus ends, , There are pachislot machines that start a new set from the beginning after the bonus ends.
In the former case, for example, when the bonus state is started by winning 25 games out of 30 games in one set in the ART game state and the bonus state is started, the number of remaining games is 5 games after the bonus ends (remaining at the time of bonus winning). The ART game state is restarted from the number of games). In such a case, it is desirable not to output a signal when the ART is restarted, because one set is simply separated. On the other hand, in the latter case, since one set of ART is substantially added as a benefit of winning the bonus during the ART gaming state, it is desirable to output a signal when the ART is restarted. The same signal output process can be applied not only to an ART of a type in which the predetermined number of games is one set, but also to a type of managing the number of ART sets by the number of differences or the number of navigations.

A pachi-slot machine having both a pattern in which the game is restarted from the number of games remaining after the bonus is won in the set after the bonus ends and a pattern in which a new set is started from the beginning after the bonus ends is also conceivable. For example, if the bonus game is won when the number of remaining games in the ART game state is less than the predetermined value, one set is added as a relief measure, and if the bonus game is won when the number of remaining games is equal to or more than the predetermined value, it remains after the bonus ends. It is conceivable that the game can be restarted from the number of games.

In such a pachi-slot machine, the main control board 71 controls the signal output according to whether or not the ART is added when the bonus is won. That is, when the addition of ART is generated at the time of bonus winning, the main control board 71 outputs a signal when the ART gaming state is restarted after the bonus is ended, and when the addition of ART is not generated at the time of bonus winning. In addition, the main control board 71 does not output a signal when the ART gaming state is restarted after the bonus ends. More specifically, when the bonus is won when the number of remaining games in the ART gaming state is less than a predetermined value, the main control board 71 determines that an ART addition has occurred and outputs a signal when the ART is restarted after the bonus ends. If the bonus game is won when the number of remaining games is equal to or more than the predetermined value, it is determined that the addition of the ART has not occurred, and no signal is output when the ART is restarted after the bonus ends.
In other words, if the bonus is won when the number of remaining games in the ART gaming state is less than the predetermined value, the main control board 71 is in an ART gaming state of a set different from the set executed at the time of bonus winning after the bonus ends. And the signal is output to the outside. On the other hand, if the bonus is won when the number of remaining games in the ART gaming state is equal to or more than a predetermined value, the main control board 71 restarts the ART gaming state of the same set as the set executed at the time of bonus winning after the bonus ends. At the same time, no signal is output to the outside.

Further, the presence/absence of the signal output may be determined not only according to the presence/absence of the addition of the ART when the bonus is won, but also according to the presence/absence of the ART addition from the bonus winning to the start of the ART.

In addition, the signal output explained so far is a signal such that the value of the data counter is incremented by one by one output, but when starting an ART game state of great value, the data counter is increased according to the value. The value of may be increased by a plurality of values. For example, when a long ART consisting of 90 games in one set is started in premium, etc., which is usually an ART of 30 games in one set, a signal may be output so that the value of the data counter increases by 3. ..
Normally, one set of 30 games has an ART, but when the ART that continues until the next bonus is started, a signal is output so that the value of the data counter increases according to the average number of games until the bonus is won. Good. For example, when the winning probability of the bonus is 1/150, the average number of continuous games is 150, which corresponds to 5 sets, and therefore a signal for increasing the value of the data counter by 5 is output. In this case, if there is a setting difference in the winning probability of the bonus, the average number of consecutive games determined from the bonus probability of a specific setting value (for example, setting 6) in any setting so that the setting is not specified. The signal corresponding to is output. By doing so, even with a pachi-slot machine having a plurality of ART game states having different values at the time of starting, it becomes easy to subsequently determine how much profit is obtained from the data counter or the like. It should be noted that the signal in which the value of the data counter is increased by multiple values may be a signal that increases the value by 1 multiple times at intervals so that an external device can identify it, or is a dedicated signal for increasing the value by multiple values. May be transmitted in one shot.

(Example of production in cooperation with external equipment)
Next, with reference to FIG. 130 and FIG. 131, an example of an effect performed in cooperation with an external device when a lottery for shifting to a specific section is won will be described. FIG. 130 shows an example of an effect in the case of outputting a signal to an external device during a game in which a lottery to a specific section has been won, and FIG. The example of production when outputting a signal to a device is shown.

(Direction example 1)
In the production example 1 shown in FIG. 130, in the game in which the transfer lottery is won, the main control board 71 reversely rotates the reels 3L, 3C, 3R before starting the reel rotation, and then the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are normally rotated. The game is progressing by making it. In this performance example 1, the timing T1 is the timing at which the reverse rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started, and the timing T2 is the timing at which the forward rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started (that is, at the time of starting the reel rotation). ), and the timing T3 is when all reels of the game are stopped. Further, the main control board 71 turns on the status indicator 147b at the timing of lighting pattern example 4 (when all reels are stopped), and at the timing of output pattern example B (at the start of reel rotation) that the winning of the transition lottery is successful. It is output to the device.

As shown at the timing T1, in the game in which the transfer lottery to the specific section is won, the main control board 71 starts the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R based on the operation of the start lever 6. At this time, the main control board 71 first rotates the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in the opposite direction. Further, the sub-control board 72 controls the display unit 100 to display that the data counter installed at the upper part of the pachi-slot machine 1 is to be noticed, and also displays a 5-second countdown. Here, the reverse rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R means that the reels 3L, 3C, 3R rotate from the bottom to the top. Therefore, for the player, the reverse rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. With this, the line of sight is guided from the bottom to the top. In addition to the guidance of the line of sight by the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, the display unit 100 also draws attention to the data counter, so that the player's interest is strongly attracted to the data counter.

At timing T1 to timing T2, the sub control board 72 controls the display unit 100 to proceed with the countdown. After that, at timing T2, the main control board 71 rotates the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in the forward direction and outputs a signal indicating that the transfer lottery has been won to the data counter. When this signal is received, the data counter updates the counter and also displays "hit" or the like.

As described above, in the production example 1, by utilizing the reverse rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the display by the display unit 100, the line of sight is guided to the data counter, and then the signal is output to the data counter. , The data counter that collects the line of sight of the player is notified that the lottery for moving to the specific section has been won. As a result, not only the pachi-slot machine 1 but also an external device (data counter) can perform an effect.

Further, in the effect example 1, at the timing T3, the main control board 71 turns on the state indicator 147b. The sub-control board 72 displays, on the display unit 100, an image or the like indicating that the specific section has been won in synchronization with the lighting timing of the status indicator 147b. As described above, in the performance example 1, by performing the performance in accordance with the lighting timing of the state indicator 147b and the output timing of the signal to the external device, various performances can be performed in tandem, and the performance effect is enhanced. You can

(Production example 2)
Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the effect example 2 will be described. In a pachi-slot machine that has a specific section such as ART game status, do not start the specific section immediately after winning the transition lottery to the specific section, but start the specific section after a predetermined number of games have passed after winning the transition lottery. In some cases, a so-called precursor effect may be performed during this predetermined number of games. By the way, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control board 71 outputs the result of the transfer lottery performed by itself to the external device as it is. , Even in the game in which the transfer lottery is won, the result of the transfer lottery can be output to the external device. Here, when the result of the transfer lottery is output to the external device in the game in which the transfer lottery is won, the counter is updated on the data counter (external device), so the data is displayed during the omen effect. The effect result (that is, the success or failure of the transfer lottery) is known from the value of the counter, and the interest is lost.

Therefore, in the production example 2 shown in FIG. 131, the main control board 71 outputs the result of the transfer lottery to an external device at an arbitrary timing during the game 32 games after the game that is won in the transfer lottery of the specific section. To do. Then, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72, as shown in the effect example A, perform a precursor effect during the 32 games. As a result, the value of the data counter is not updated during the 32 games in which the aura effect is performed, and the player can be interested in the aura effect.

In addition, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the winning of the transition lottery in the specific section is won, the status indicator 147b is turned on during the game, but the result of the transition lottery from the status indicator 147b is displayed during the indication effect. It is preferable to make it difficult to understand the result of the transfer lottery from the status display 147b, because the interest can be diminished if the information can be grasped. The method for making it difficult to understand the result of the transfer lottery from the status indicator 147b is as described above.

Further, when the registration operation is accepted from the player, the period during which the indication effect is performed may be made customizable. In the example shown in FIG. 131, in the effect example A, the indication effect is performed for 32 games, but in the effect example B, the indication effect is performed for 16 games, and thereafter, the winning of the specific section is confirmed. It is planned to perform the standby production later. The standby effect may be, for example, an introduction of a character appearing on the pachi-slot machine 1, a story introduction, or an effect that suggests a set value. Further, even in the case where the precursory effect period can be customized in this way, the main control board 71 outputs a signal to the external device at the same timing regardless of the presence or absence of customization. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 131, both in the case of performing the effect example A and in the case of performing the effect example B, the main control board 71, after 32 games from the game won in the transition lottery of the specific section. During the game, the result of the transfer lottery is output to the external device.

<How to secure navigation during a specific section>
Next, with reference to FIG. 132, a navigation securing method for securing the number of times of notifying the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player during the specific section will be described. In a pachi-slot machine having a specific section such as an ART gaming state, if navigation is not performed during the specific section, the game in the specific section becomes monotonous, which may obscure the player's interest. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by creating a state in which navigation is easily performed during the specific section, it is possible to prevent the game during the specific section from becoming monotonous.

Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the timing for starting the specific section is set to the start time of the bonus state, and during this bonus state, there is a high probability that the push forward combination (notification target combination) is higher than that during the bonus non-operation. Is determined as the internal winning combination. Then, if a specific section is also started at the start of the bonus state, the push order of the correct answer is informed to the push order combination won in the bonus state, and if the specific section is not started at the start of the bonus state. Does not notify the pressing order during the bonus state. As a result, it is possible to avoid the situation where navigation is not performed during the specific section, and as a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the specific section.

In particular, the timing to start the specific section is set to the start of the bonus state, so it is not possible to enter the bonus state even once during the specific section, that is, when the navigation is easily performed during the specific section (bonus state). It is possible to avoid such a situation that the player does not get lost, and as a result, the player can receive a certain number of times of navigation during a specific section.

(Example of starting a specific section at the start of bonus)
Here, the method of setting the timing of starting the specific section as the start of the bonus state is arbitrary. For example, as shown in FIG. 132(A-1), the main control board 71 responds to the fact that a bonus winning combination, which is a setting indeterminate combination, is determined as an internal winning combination (that is, a bonus winning) during the normal section. Then, the transfer lottery is performed. Then, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is displayed in the state where the transfer lottery is won, the main control board 71 starts a specific section together with the bonus state, and the main control board 71 The 71 and the sub-control board 72 notify the pressing order of correct answers to the pressing order combination determined as the internal winning combination with high probability during the bonus state. On the other hand, the main control board 71 starts the bonus state without starting the specific section when a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is displayed in a state where the transfer lottery is not won. The control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 do not notify the correct pressing order even if the pressing order combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the bonus state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 132(A-2), the main control board 71 does not determine that the bonus-related winning combination is the internal winning combination, but rather determines the bonus-related winning combination that is an unspecified winning combination during the normal section. The transfer lottery may be performed in response to the display of the combination of the corresponding symbols (that is, the bonus winning).

Further, as shown in FIG. 132(A-3), the main control board 71 may perform the transfer lottery during the normal section regardless of the winning combination. Specifically, the main control board 71 performs the lottery for shifting to the specific section based on the information having no difference in the set value during the normal section, and when the lottery is won in the transition lottery, the right to shift to the specific section is obtained. Is given. Then, after that, when a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is displayed, the main control board 71 starts a specific section together with the bonus state when the transfer right is granted, and the main control is performed. The board 71 and the sub-control board 72 notify the correct pressing order to the pressing winning combination determined as an internal winning combination with high probability during the bonus state. On the other hand, when the transfer right is not granted, the main control board 71 starts the bonus state without starting the specific section, and the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 are pushed in the bonus state. Even if is decided as an internal winning combination, the pushing order of correct answers is not notified.

(Example of data)
FIG. 132(B) is an example of a data configuration for realizing the navigation securing method in the specific section. As shown in FIG. 132(B), in the bonus state, there is a higher probability that the push order combination (“F_3 selection_1st”, “F_3 combination_2nd”, “F_3 selection_3rd”) is more likely than in the states other than the bonus state. ) Is determined as the internal winning combination. For example, when the answer is correct in the pushing order, a combination of symbols in which 9 medals are paid out is displayed, and in the case where the answer is incorrect in the pressing order, a combination of symbols in which 5 medals are paid out It is what is displayed. Further, the bonus state ends when, for example, 10 or more medals are paid out.

According to such a data example, when notifying the correct pushing order to the pushing forward combination during the bonus state, the player has 18 (=9×2) medals during the bonus state. On the other hand, if the correct pressing order is not notified to the pressing order combination during the bonus state while the player can receive the payout, the player can play 10 pieces (=5 pieces×2 times) during the bonus state. Sometimes it is not possible to receive or receive a medal.

<Premonition realization method using specific section>
Next, with reference to FIG. 133 and FIG. 134, a method of realizing a precursor effect in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the lottery for the transition to the specific section is won, the status indicator 147b is turned on during the game to notify that the lottery has been won for the transition. Is not suitable for informing the result of the transfer lottery using. Therefore, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment uses a specific section (first specific section) different from the specific section (second specific section) of which the result is to be reported, and gives a sign effect during the first specific section. Are going to do.

(Preliminary method 1 regarding transition to a specific section)
First, with reference to FIG. 133, one technique of the precursor realizing method regarding the transition to the second specific section will be described. In this method, a plurality of specific sections having different durations, that is, a short ART (first specific section) and a long ART (second specific section) are provided, and the game during the short ART is treated as a precursor game related to the transition to the long ART. ..

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 133(A), in the pachi-slot machine 1, a short ART that continues for a first period (for example, three games) and a second period that exceeds the first period (for example, A long ART that continues for 53 games (3+50) is provided, and lottery for transition to short ART or long ART is performed during a normal section. FIG. 133(B) is a diagram showing an example of the transfer lottery table used for the transfer lottery. The main control board 71, based on the information (internal winning combination) having no difference in the set value, performs the lottery for transition to the short ART or the long ART with the probability that the set value does not change.

In this transition lottery, if either the short ART or the long ART is won, the pachi-slot machine 1 gives a precursor effect to notify whether or not the long ART is won during the period in which the short ART continues. More specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the short ART is won, a precursor effect is performed to notify that the long ART has not been won during the first period which is the duration of the short ART. On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the long ART is won, the long ART is won from the start to the first period which is the duration of the short ART in the long ART continuation period. In addition to performing the predictive effect for notifying that, the effect specific to the long ART is performed after this predictive effect.

Note that when performing a precursor effect using the short ART, the main control board 71 lights the status indicator 147b because both the short ART and the long ART are specific sections. That is, as shown in FIG. 133(A), when the main control board 71 wins the short ART in the transition lottery, it lights the status indicator 147b during the first period which is the duration of the short ART. Further, when the long ART is won in the transition lottery, the status indicator 147b is turned on during the second period which is the duration of the long ART. The main control board 71 may light the status indicators 147b in different modes for the short ART and the long ART, or may light the status indicators 147b in the same mode.

In addition, a method of outputting a signal to an external device in the case of performing a precursor effect using the short ART is arbitrary. For example, the main control board 71 does not output a signal to an external device when a short ART is won in the transition lottery, and outputs a signal to an external device only when a long ART is won in the transition lottery. May be output. Further, the main control board 71 may output a signal to an external device both when a short ART is won and when a long ART is won in the transition lottery.

Further, as the ending condition of the short ART and the long ART, an arbitrary condition such as the number of games in the specific section, the number of times of navigation performed in the specific section, the number of medals paid out in the specific section, the number of differences, etc. Can be used. In this case, the end condition used for the short ART and the end condition used for the long ART may be the same type or may be different types. Note that the same type means, for example, when the number of games is used as the ending condition of the short ART, the number of games is also used as the ending condition of the long ART, and the different type is, for example, the end of the short ART. When the number of games is used as the condition, a condition other than the number of games is used as the ending condition of the long ART.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133(C), an example of effects in the case of performing the aura game using the short ART will be described. When the short ART or the long ART is won, the sub-control board 72 produces an effect such as “burst chance rush” on the display unit 100. This "bombing chance" effect is an effect of notifying the winning of the long ART depending on whether or not the bomb can be detonated during the first period which is the duration of the short ART. In the example shown in FIG. 133, the duration of the short ART is assumed to be 3 games.

The sub-control board 72, if the short ART is won in the transition lottery (that is, the long ART is not won), ends the “blast opportunity” effect without being able to explode the bomb, and wins the long ART in the transition lottery. If so, an effect of successfully exploding the bomb is executed in the “bomb chance” effect. It should be noted that the timing at which the bomb is successfully detonated when the player wins the long ART is arbitrary. For example, when the duration of the short ART is three games, the bomb may be successfully detonated in the first game and the second game, the bomb may be successfully defeated in the third game, and You may successfully explode the bomb at the start of the fourth game.

Further, since the short ART and the long ART are specific sections, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 can notify the player of a stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player during the sign presentation. In the example shown in FIG. 133(C), since the push order wins during the “blasting chance” effect, which is a precursor effect of the long ART, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 become the push order effects. On the other hand, the pushing order of the correct answer is notified. As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, since it is possible to inform the player of the stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player during the sign production, the player is given a sense of loss during the sign production, which should enhance the interest of the game. There is no end.

(Preliminary method 2 regarding transition to a specific section)
Next, with reference to FIG. 134, another technique of the precursor realizing method regarding the transition to the second specific section will be described. In the above-mentioned omen method 1, since the result of the transfer lottery has already been determined at the start of the “bombing chance” effect, the result of the omen effect has already been decided at the time of starting the omen game. Another method to be described next is a method of allowing the result of the omen effect to be determined during the omen game. In this method, a plurality of specific sections of CZ (first specific section) and ART game state (second specific section) are provided, and the game in CZ is treated as a precursor game relating to the transition to the ART game state.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 134(A), the pachi-slot machine 1 performs the lottery for transition to CZ during the normal section and the lottery for transition to ART during CZ. FIG. 134(B) is a diagram showing an example of the transfer lottery table used for the transfer lottery. The main control board 71, the lottery for the transition to CZ is performed based on the internal winning combination, and the lottery for the transition to the ART gaming state is performed based on the combination of the symbols. Specifically, the main control board 71, when the combination of the bell spilled pattern or the first one is displayed, does not perform the lottery to shift to the ART gaming state, and the combination of the bell pattern is displayed. , Performs a lottery to shift to the ART gaming state. Then, by notifying the correct pressing order to the pressing order bell during CZ, it is possible to make the state during CZ easy to shift to the ART game state.

In the pachi-slot machine 1, if the CZ is won in the transition lottery performed during the normal section, the “blast opportunity” effect shown in FIG. 134(C) is performed. This "bombing chance" effect is continued for three games, for example, and if the push order bell is determined as an internal winning combination during these three games, the push order of the correct answer is notified, resulting in the transition to the ART gaming state. You can take lottery. Then, the sub-control board 72, if the CZ ends without winning the lottery to move to the ART gaming state, ends the "blast opportunity" effect without being able to explode the bomb, and shifts to the ART gaming state before the end of the CZ. When the lottery is won, an effect of successfully exploding the bomb is executed in the “explosion opportunity” effect.

The main control board 71 lights the status indicator 147b in both the CZ and ART game statuses, but the mode of lighting the status indicator 147b is arbitrary. That is, the main control board 71 may turn on the state indicator 147b in different modes depending on the CZ and ART game states, or may turn on in the same mode.

The method of outputting a signal to an external device is also arbitrary. For example, the main control board 71 does not output a signal to the external device when the CZ is won in the transition lottery, and outputs the signal to the external device only when the ART gaming state is won in the transition lottery. May be output. In addition, the main control board 71 may output a signal to an external device both when winning the CZ in the transfer lottery and when winning the ART gaming state.

Further, the ending conditions for the CZ and ART gaming states are arbitrary, and different types of ending conditions may be used, or the same type of ending conditions may be used.

Further, as a modification of the above-described example, a specification in which a short ART or a long ART is started at the start of the so-called gap MB can be considered.
Here, the gap MB is, for example, a payout of medals whose ending condition of MB exceeds 14, and a combination of symbols in which 14 medals are paid out in the MB or a combination of symbols in which 15 medals are paid out. In the state where the notification is performed in the MB where is displayed, in the first game in the MB, the combination of symbols for which 14 medals are paid out is displayed, and the push order is notified, and in the next game. , 15 medals will be paid out by notifying the pressing order that the combination of symbols that will be paid out will be displayed, but if the notification is not made, 15 medals will be paid out. A combination of symbols to be paid out is often displayed, and refers to an MB that ends after paying out 15 medals.

In the above example, it is necessary to continue waiting until the push winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, but if the short ART is started at the start of such a gap MB, the game is started at the start of the short ART and the next game is pushed. Since the forward navigation occurs, it is not necessary to wait until the push forward combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and the game is not delayed, so that the interest of the game is enhanced. Even if the game is finished with a short ART, the game will not be delayed due to the gap MB, so you can get more medals than you can with the number of Bellnavi times in a normal game, and you can experience a profitable navigation consumption. It is possible to reduce the disappointment caused by the failure to connect to the game and suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

<How to save navigation times>
In the pachi-slot machine of the so-called navigation frequency management, which uses the number of times of navigation performed during the specific section as the ending condition of the continuation period of the specific section, if the combination of the navigation target (the notification target combination) concentrates and wins, The navigation is concentrated, and as a result, the specific section ends immediately. Immediately ending the specific section causes the player to feel dissatisfied, and therefore, a method of saving the number of times of navigation will be described below with reference to FIG. 135.

When the number of times of navigation is used as the ending condition of the continuation period of the specific section, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. A required bonus (MB1) and a bonus (MB2) that does not require notification of the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player during the bonus state are provided. Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 starts the MB1 gaming state when the symbol combination corresponding to MB1 is displayed, and the MB2 gaming state in which the symbol combination corresponding to MB2 is displayed. Start.

As shown in FIG. 135(B), during the MB1 game state, the main control board 71 displays a combination of symbols whose payout numbers are different according to the pressing order "F_Maintain Lip_1st+All Small Wins" "F_Maintain" While "Rip_2nd + All Small Wins" and "F_Maintenance Lip_3rd + All Small Wins" are determined as internal winning combinations, while MB2 is in the game state, only the winning combination in which the number of payouts is the same regardless of the pressing order is displayed. It is decided as a winning combination. Then, during the MB1 game state, since the payout number may be different depending on the pressing order, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72, when these winning combinations are determined as the internal winning combination, the correct pressing order. (The pressing order in which the 9-card combination is displayed) is notified.

By doing this, if the MB1 game state has started during the specific section, the game will be played while consuming the number of times of navigation, but if the MB2 game state can be started during the specific section. Can play a game without consuming the number of times of navigation, and can reduce the consumption speed of the number of times of navigation.

In the MB1 gaming state, the winning combination in which the number of payouts varies depending on the pressing order is determined as an internal winning combination, while during the MB2 gaming state, the payout number is the same regardless of the pressing order. Any method can be used to realize that only the winning combination in which the combination is displayed is determined as the internal winning combination. As an example, the MB1 gaming state is set as a gaming state dedicated to 3 bets, and during the MB1 gaming state, only the winning combination relating to the replay is individually drawn, and all the small winning combinations are individually drawn when determined as internal winning combinations. The stop control is changed according to the type of replay that has been performed. As a result, during the MB1 game state, it is possible to determine a winning combination in which a combination of symbols whose payout numbers are different according to the pressing order is displayed as an internal winning combination. On the other hand, the MB2 gaming state is set to a gaming state dedicated to 2 bets, and the winning combination is such that any two small bets have the same number of paid out medals. As a result, during the MB2 gaming state, it is possible to determine only a winning combination in which a combination of symbols with the same payout number is displayed regardless of the pressing order as an internal winning combination.

<Individual management of Lip Navi and Bernavi>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 141, a method of individually managing the lip navigation and the bell navigation during the specific section will be described. In a conventional pachi-slot machine, it is common to perform both the notification for maintaining the RT gaming state in a high-rip state and the notification for increasing medals during a specific section. By individually managing, it is possible to realize a new game play that has never existed before.

(Game example 1)
First, with reference to FIG. 136 to FIG. 138, a game example 1 in the case of individually managing the lip navigation and the bell navigation will be described. This game example 1 has a plurality of types of specific sections such as Lipnavi AT and Bellnavi AT as specific sections. In Ripnavi AT, the notification for maintaining the RT gaming state in the high-rip state is performed, but the notification for increasing the medals is not performed. Further, in the Bellnavi AT, at least a notification for increasing medals and a notification for maintaining the RT gaming state in a high-rip state are performed as necessary.

FIG. 136(A) is a game flow in the game example 1. As shown in FIG. 136(A), the pachi-slot machine 1 provides, as the RT gaming state, three types of states, RT0 gaming state to RT3 gaming state, in which the type of internal winning combination related to replay and the winning probability thereof are different from each other. .. The RT0 gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability of a winning combination relating to replay being determined as an internal winning combination is low, and is a gaming state in which the player stays after the bonus ends, after the initialization process, and after the setting is changed. The RT1 gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability of a winning combination being determined as an internal winning combination is low, and is a gaming state mainly used in normal gaming. Further, the RT2 gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability of a winning combination relating to replay being determined as an internal winning combination has a high probability, and when transitioning according to the notification, it is treated as a Lipnavi AT and transitioning regardless of the notification. Is a game state that is treated as a normal game. The RT3 gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability of a winning combination being determined as an internal winning combination is high, and is a gaming state mainly used in the Bell Navi AT.

From the RT0 gaming state, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT1 gaming state. Specifically, in the RT0 gaming state, when a combination of symbols on the bell spill is displayed, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT0 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. Here, as shown in the correspondence relationship between the winning symbol and the stopped symbol in FIG. 136(B), the combination of symbols on the bell spill is the symbol “F_3 choice bell_1st” to “F_3 choice bell_3rd” which is the push forward combination. In the game in which "" is determined as an internal winning combination, it is displayed when the answer is incorrect in the pressing order. In the game in which the winning combination "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_1st" is determined as the internal winning combination, when the correct answer is made in the order of pushing, the combination of bell symbols is displayed and 9 medals are paid out.

Also, from the RT1 gaming state, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT2 gaming state. Specifically, in the RT1 gaming state, when the combination of symbols of the RT2 transition lip is displayed, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. Here, as shown in the internal lottery table of FIG. 136(B), in the RT1 gaming state, the winning combination “F_RT2 transition lip_123” to “F_RT2 transition lip_321” is determined as an internal lottery with a predetermined probability. decide. Then, as shown in the correspondence relationship between the winning combination and the stop symbol in FIG. 136(B), in the game in which the combinations “F_RT2 transition lip_123” to “F_RT2 transition lip_321” are determined as internal winning combinations, the correct answer is given in the order of pressing. In the case of, the combination of the symbols of the RT2 transition rip is displayed, and in the case of an incorrect answer in the pressing order, the combination of the symbols of the replay is displayed.

Also, from the RT2 gaming state, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT1 gaming state or the RT3 gaming state. Specifically, in the RT2 gaming state, when the combination of the symbols of the bell spill or the RT1 transition lip is displayed, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. Here, as shown in the internal lottery table of FIG. 136(B), in the RT2 gaming state, the winning combinations “F_Maintain Lip_123” to “F_Maintain Lip_321” are selected as internal winning combinations with a predetermined probability. decide. Then, as shown in the correspondence relationship between the winning combination and the stop symbol in FIG. 136(B), in the game in which the combination “F_maintain rep_123” to “F_maintain rep_321” is determined as the internal winning combination, the correct answer is given in the order of pressing. In the case of, the combination of the symbols of the replay is displayed, and in the case of an incorrect answer in the pressing order, the combination of the symbols of the RT1 transition rep is displayed. The main control board 71, when the combination of the replay symbols is displayed by the correct pushing order, the game state is maintained as the RT2 gaming state, and the combination of the symbols of the RT1 transition rep is displayed by the incorrect pushing order. In this case, the gaming state is changed from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state.

In addition, in the RT2 gaming state, when the combination of symbols of the RT3 transition lip is displayed, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state. Here, as shown in the internal lottery table of FIG. 136(B), in the RT2 game state, the winning combination “F_RT3 transition lip_123” to “F_RT3 transition lip_321” is determined as an internal lottery with a predetermined probability. decide. Then, as shown in the correspondence relationship between the winning combination and the stop symbol in FIG. 136(B), in the game in which the combination “F_RT3 transition lip_123” to “F_RT3 transition lip_321” are determined as the internal winning combination, the correct answer is given in the order of pressing. In the case of, the combination of the symbols of the RT3 transition rip is displayed, and in the case of an incorrect answer in the pressing order, the combination of the symbols of the replay is displayed. The main control board 71, when the combination of the symbols of the RT3 transition rip is displayed by the correct pushing order, the game state is shifted from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state, and the combination of the replay symbols is caused by the incorrect pushing order. When displayed, the gaming state is maintained as the RT2 gaming state.

Also, from the RT3 gaming state, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT1 gaming state. Specifically, in the RT3 gaming state, when a combination of bell spilled or RT1 transition lip symbols is displayed, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT3 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. That is, in the game in which the winning combination "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_3rd" is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 displays a combination of bell symbols by the correct push order, While paying out 9 medals, keep the game state in the RT3 game state, and if a combination of symbols on the bell spill is displayed due to incorrect pressing order, a number less than 9 (or 0) While paying out the medals, the game state is shifted from the RT3 game state to the RT1 game state.

Further, as shown in the transfer lottery table of FIG. 137(C), in the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 performs the transfer lottery to the Lipnavi AT based on the internal winning combination. It should be noted that this transfer lottery table shows that the transfer lottery to the Lipnavi AT is carried out based on the internal winning combination, and the types of the winning combinations that perform the transfer lottery are merely examples.

Further, as shown in the transfer lottery table of FIG. 137(C), in the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 performs the transfer lottery to the Bellnavi AT based on the combination of the displayed symbols. In this game example 1, the main control board 71, when only the combination of the symbols of the RT3 transition rep is displayed, performs the lottery for migrating to the Bernavi AT, and when the combination of the symbols of the RT3 transition rep is displayed. Be sure to win the Bernavi AT.

In the example shown in the drawing, the lottery for transition to the Bellnavi AT is displayed as a combination of symbols of the RT3 transition lip, that is, the combination “F_RT3 transition lip_123” to “F_RT3 transition lip_321” is determined as an internal winning combination. It is supposed to be performed on the condition that the correct answer is made in the pushing order in the played game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main control board 71 simply has the roles “F_RT3 transition lip_123” to “F_RT3 transition lip_321” inside. When the winning combination is determined, a lottery for shifting to the Bernavi AT may be performed.

Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 determines the winning combination "F_RT3 transition rep_123" to "F_RT3 transition rep_321" as an internal winning combination during the RT2 gaming state, and the winning combination "" during the other RT gaming states. "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" are not determined as internal winning combinations, or have a lower probability than the RT2 gaming state during other RT gaming states. Is determined as an internal winning combination. Therefore, the RT2 gaming state has a higher frequency of performing a lottery to shift to the Bellnavi AT than the other RT gaming states, and the main control board 71 has other RT gaming states (particularly, the RT1 gaming state during the RT2 gaming state). The transfer lottery to the Bernavi AT is performed at a higher frequency.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 (main control board 71 and sub-control board 72), when neither the Lipnavi AT nor the Bellnavi AT is won, the player is informed of the mode of the stop operation (the correct pressing order) that is advantageous to the player. do not do. On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the Lipnavi AT is won, a notification associated with the Lipnavi AT is issued, and when the Bellnavi AT is won, the alert associated with the Bellnavi AT is issued.

Specifically, when the player wins the Lipnavi AT, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 have the combination “F_RT2 transition lip_123” to “F_RT2 transition lip_321”, the combination “F_RT3 transition lip_123” to When one of the “F_RT3 transition lip_321” and the winning combination “F_maintaining lip_123” is determined as the internal winning combination, the pressing order of correct answers is notified. On the other hand, even when the player wins the Lipnavi AT, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 determine one of the winning combinations “F_3 choice bell_1st” to “F_3 choice bell_3rd” as an internal winning combination. Even if done, the pushing order of the correct answer is not notified.

Further, in the case of winning the Bell Navi AT, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 determine that one of the winning combinations “F_3 choice bell_1st” to “F_3 choice bell_3rd” is determined as the internal winning combination. , Informs the pushing order of the correct answer. In addition, when winning the Bernavi AT, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72, the combination "F_RT2 transition Lip_123" ~ "F_RT2 transition Lip_321", the combination "F_RT3 transition Lip_123" ~ "F_RT3 transition. When either the Lip_321” or the winning combination “F_Maintaining Lip_123” is determined as the internal winning combination, the pressing order of the correct answer may be notified or may not be notified.

By doing this, the Lip Navi AT can be treated as a specific section that gives a notification for maintaining the RT2 gaming state in which the frequency of the lottery for shifting to the Bell Navi AT is high, and the Bell Navi AT can be used for a medal. It can be treated as a specific section that gives notification to increase the number. As described above, in the game example 1, since the Ripnavi AT and the Bellnavi AT have specific sections having different roles, the meaning of the notification differs for the player depending on the type of the specific section. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest without making the notification monotonous.

Further, during the Lip Navi AT, since the notification for increasing the number of medals is not given, the increase of medals can be suppressed. With pachi-slot machines, it is necessary to balance the profits between the player and the game store, but if the period for which medals increase is long, the profits that the player gets will become excessive, making it difficult to move to a specific section. There is a need to balance profits in other areas. In this regard, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the game example 1, in addition to the Bellnavi AT which gives the notification for increasing the medals, there is a specific section called the Lipnavi AT which does not give the notification for increasing the medals. It is possible to balance the profits of the player and the game store while realizing the game playability that is easy to shift to.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the transfer lottery performed based on the information having no difference in the set value is set to have the same degree of expectation regarding the transfer to the specific section for each set value. .. In this regard, the transfer lottery itself may be performed based on the information having no difference in the set value, but the expectation regarding the transfer to the specific section may be made different for each set value. The specific method is shown below.

In the above-mentioned game example 1, in response to the combination “F_RT3 transition lip_123” to “F_RT3 transition lip_321” being determined as the internal winning combination (more specifically, when the internal winning combination is determined, the correct answer is given). In accordance with the stop operation in the push order), the lottery for shifting to the Bernavi AT is performed. Since the transfer lottery is performed based on the information having no difference in the set value, the combination “F_RT3 transfer lip_123” to “F_RT3 transfer lip_321” has an internal winning combination with a probability according to the current game state regardless of the set value. Need to be decided as. Specifically, the main control board 71 determines the winning combination “F_RT3 transition Lip_123” to “F_RT3 shifting Lip_321” as an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability regardless of the set value during the RT2 game state. As described above, the roles “F_RT3 transition lip_123” to “F_RT3 transition lip_321” may be determined as internal winning combinations even in the RT gaming states other than the RT2 gaming state, and in this case, the main control The board 71 has a probability lower than a predetermined probability regardless of the set value during the RT game state other than the RT2 game state (for example, the RT1 game state), and the roles “F_RT3 shift lip_123” to “F_RT3 shift lip_321”. Is determined as the internal winning combination.

In addition, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the lottery for shifting to the specific section is performed with the same probability of winning regardless of the set value, the combination “F_RT3 shift lip_123” to “F_RT3 shift lip_321” is internally performed. In response to being determined as a winning combination (more specifically, in the case of being determined as an internal winning combination, in response to a stop operation in the correct push order), the winning probability is the same regardless of the set value. It is necessary to carry out the transfer lottery. Therefore, when performing the lottery to shift to the Bellnavi AT, the main control board 71 performs the lottery so that the lottery is won with the same probability regardless of the set value.

By doing so, the winning combination “F_RT3 transition Lip_123” to “F_RT3 transition Lip_321” that triggers the transition lottery to the Bernavi AT are determined as internal winning combinations with the same probability regardless of the set values. Further, the lottery for shifting to the Bernavi AT will be won with the same probability regardless of the set value. Therefore, at first glance, the degree of expectation regarding the transition to the Bell Navi AT is the same for each set value, but in the present method, there is a setting difference regarding the transition of the RT gaming state, and thus regarding the transition to the Bell Navi AT. Different expectations are set for each set value.

Specifically, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state with a probability according to the set value that has been set. As described above, during the RT2 game state, since the transition lottery to the Bernavi AT is performed at a higher frequency than the other RT game states, this RT2 game does not have a setting difference in the trigger of the transition lottery or the winning probability. By providing the setting difference regarding the transition to the state, as a result, the degree of expectation regarding the transition to the Bernavi AT can be made different for each set value. More specifically, in the internal lottery table for RT1 shown in FIG. 136(B), the probability (information on the lottery value) of determining the winning combination “F_RT2 transition lip_123” to “F_RT2 transition lip_321” as an internal winning combination. By setting different values for each set value, it is possible to provide a set difference regarding the transition to the RT2 gaming state. As a result, a set value that has a high probability of determining the winning combination “F_RT2 transition rep_123” to “F_RT2 transition rep_321” as an internal winning combination facilitates the transition to the RT2 gaming state, and as a result, the degree of expectation regarding the transition to the Bernavi AT. Therefore, the characteristics for each set value can be obtained regarding the shift to the Bell Navi AT.

(Example of production in game example 1)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 138, an example of effect in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the game example 1 will be described. FIG. 138(A) is a diagram showing an example of the flow of a game when the effect is performed.

As shown in FIG. 138(A), the first game is in the RT1 game state and is a game in which neither the Lipnavi AT nor the Bellnavi AT is won. In the first game, since neither the Lipnavi AT nor the Bellnavi AT has been won, the status indicator 147b is turned off, and both the number of Lipnavi and the number of Bellnavi remain zero. It should be noted that the number of lip navigations is any one of the roles “F_RT2 transition lip_123” to “F_RT2 transition lip_321”, the role “F_RT3 transition lip_123” to “F_RT3 transition lip_321”, and the role “F_maintenance lip_123”. This is the number of times the correct push order is notified when the winning combination is determined, and the number of bell navigations is any of the winning combinations "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice_3rd" that is determined as the internal winning combination. In this case, it is the number of times the pressing order of correct answers is notified.

Subsequently, in the second game, a lottery for transition to Lipnavi AT is won. Therefore, the status indicator 147b is turned on in the lighting pattern 1, and 5 times is given as the number of Lipnavi. At this time, the sub control board 72 performs the effect illustrated in FIG. 138(B)(a) in the display unit 100. That is, the sub-control board 72 displays on the display unit 100 that the number of lip navigations has been given, and also indicates that the “search challenge” effect starts. Note that the "search challenge" effect is an effect of searching for a treasure that is performed during the Lip Navi AT, and if the treasure can be found while the number of Lip Navi times remains, it is a success (Bernavi AT) effect. Is.

Subsequently, in the third game, one of the winning combinations "F_RT2 transition rep_123" to "F_RT2 transition rep_321" is determined as the internal winning combination. Since the Lipnavi AT is in progress, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 notify the correct pressing order and prompt the transition to the RT2 gaming state. Along with this notification, the number of Lip Navi is reduced from 5 to 4 in the third game. At this time, the sub control board 72 performs the effect illustrated in FIG. 138(B)(b) in the display unit 100. That is, the sub-control board 72 displays on the display unit 100 the pushing order for shifting from the standby state (RT1 gaming state) to the treasure zone (RT2 gaming state). When the player performs a stop operation according to this notification, the combination of symbols of the RT2 transition lip is displayed, and thereafter, as shown in (b) of FIG. 138(B), the sub-control board 72 is displayed on the display unit 100. A display indicating that the treasure has arrived during the waiting period is displayed.

Subsequently, in the fourth game, since the transition to the RT2 game state was made in the third game, the state indicator 147b is lit up in the lighting pattern 2. In the fourth game, one of the winning combinations “F_Maintenance Lip_123” to “F_Maintenance Lip_321” is determined as the internal winning combination. Since the fourth game is in the Lip Navi AT, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 inform the pressing order of the correct answer, and urge the player to maintain the RT2 game state. Along with this notification, the number of times of Lip Navi is reduced from 4 to 3 in the fourth game. At this time, the sub control board 72 performs the effect illustrated in (c) of FIG. 138(B) in the display unit 100. That is, the sub-control board 72 displays the push order for maintaining the RT2 gaming state on the display unit 100. When the player performs a stop operation according to this notification, the RT2 game state is maintained, and the search between treasures is continued.

Subsequently, in the fifth game, one of the winning combinations "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_3rd" is determined as the internal winning combination, but since the Lipnavi AT is in progress, the main control board 71 and the sub The control board 72 does not notify the correct pressing order. Therefore, as shown in (d) of FIG. 138(B), the sub-control board 72 performs a display indicating that the pressing order is unknown in the display unit 100. Here, in the example shown in FIG. 138, since it is assumed that the pressing order is incorrect, a combination of symbols on the bell spilled pattern is displayed. The main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state in accordance with the display of the combination of the symbols on the bell spill. The sub-control board 72 also displays on the display unit 100 that the treasure has fallen from the treasure (RT2 gaming state) to the standby (RT1 gaming state).

Subsequently, in the sixth game, the transition to the RT1 game state was made in the fifth game, so the state indicator 147b is lit in the lighting pattern 1. In the sixth game, one of the winning combinations “F_RT2 transition lip_123” to “F_RT2 transition lip_321” is determined as the internal winning combination. Since the Lipnavi AT is in progress, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 notify the correct pressing order and prompt the transition to the RT2 gaming state. With this notification, in the sixth game, the number of lip navigations is reduced from three to two. In addition, as shown in (e) of FIG. 138, the sub control board 72 displays the pressing order for shifting from the standby state (RT1 gaming state) to the treasure zone (RT2 gaming state) on the display unit 100. After that, when the combination of the symbols of the RT2 transition lip is displayed, a display indicating that the treasure has arrived from the standby unit is displayed on the display unit 100.

Subsequently, in the seventh game, the transition to the RT2 game state was made in the sixth game, so the state indicator 147b is lit in the lighting pattern 2. In the seventh game, any of the winning combinations “F_RT3 transition rep_123” to “F_RT3 transition rep_321” is determined as the internal winning combination. Since the seventh game is in Lip Navi AT, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 notify the pressing order of correct answers. Along with this notification, the number of lip navigations has been reduced from 2 to 1 in the seventh game. At this time, the sub-control board 72 performs the effect illustrated in (f) of FIG. 138(B) in the display unit 100. That is, the sub-control board 72 displays the correct pressing order on the display unit 100.

Here, if one of the winning combinations “F_RT3 transition lip_123” to “F_RT3 transition lip_321” is determined as an internal winning combination, and if the correct answer is given in the order of pushing, a transition lottery to the Bernavi AT is performed and the Bernavi AT is won. Therefore, the sub control board 72 displays on the display unit 100 that the winning of the Bernavi AT has been won. In addition, an initial value (10) is added to each of the number of lip navigations and the number of bell navigations according to the winning of the bell navigation AT. It should be noted that the number of lip navigations at the time of winning the Bernavi AT is 11, because the number of lip navigations at the time of winning the Bernavi AT remains 1.

After that, the game state becomes the Bellnavi AT from the eighth game, and the main control board 71 lights the state indicator 147b in the lighting pattern 3. In this Bell Navi AT, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72, as long as the number of Lipnavi is left, the combination “F_RT2 transition Lip_123” to “F_RT2 transition Lip_321”, the combination “F_RT3 Transition Lip_123” to “F_RT3 transition”. The correct press order is notified to Lip_321” and the combination “F_Maintain Lip_123”, and the correct answer is pressed to the combination “F_3 choice Bell_1st” to “F_3 choice_3rd” as long as the number of Bellnavi remains. Inform the order.

(Game example 2)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 139 to 141, a game example 2 in the case of individually managing the lip navigation and the bell navigation will be described. In this game example 2, both lip navigation and bell navigation are performed during the specific section, but the number of times of notification of both is individually managed. That is, in this game example 2, the number of times of both the lip navigation and the bell navigation is used as the ending condition of the specific section. It should be noted that the lip navigation refers to a notification for maintaining the RT gaming state in a high lip state, and the bell navigation refers to a notification for increasing medals.

FIG. 139(A) is a game flow in the game example 2. As shown in FIG. 139(A), in the game example 2, there is a normal section and a specific section, and during the specific section, a high probability of a lip having a high probability that a combination relating to replay is determined as an internal winning combination. (For example, the RT2 gaming state and the RT3 gaming state in the game example 1) and the low rep probability (the RT1 gaming state in the gaming example 1) in which the probability of a winning combination being determined as an internal winning combination is low.

In the game example 2, the main control board 71 conducts a lottery to the specific section during the normal section, and when the transition lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the game state from the normal section to the specific section. .. In the game example 2, the lottery for shifting to the specific section may be performed by an arbitrary method.

Further, when both the number of times of lip navigation and the number of times of bell navigation become 0 during the specific section, the main control board 71 shifts the game state from the specific section to the normal section. That is, in the game example 2, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 give notifications for maintaining the RT game state in a high-lip state for the number of times indicated by the number of times of nip navigation, and generate medals for the number of times indicated by the number of times of navi navigation. Notify to increase. Then, the main control board 71 ends the specific section and shifts the game state from the specific section to the normal section when both the number of times of lip navigation and the number of times of bell navigation become zero.

Further, when the combination of symbols of the falling replay is displayed in the specific section, the main control board 71 shifts the RT game state from the high lip state to the low lip state, and the combination of the symbols of the promotion replay is displayed. , The main control board 71 shifts the RT game state from the low rep state to the high rep state. It should be noted that the combination of the symbols of the falling replay and the promotion replay is arbitrary, but in accordance with the expression of the game example 1, for example, the combination of the symbols of the RT1 transition lip corresponds to the combination of the symbols of the fall replay, and also the RT2 transition. The combination of symbols on the Lip and the RT3 transition Lip corresponds to the combination of symbols on the promotion replay.

The combination of the symbols of the RT1 transition lip is displayed at the time of an incorrect pushing order when the winning combination “F_maintenance lip_123” to “F_maintenance lip_321” is determined as an internal winning combination, and also the RT2 transition lip or RT3. The combination of symbols of the transition lip is the correct push order when the combination “F_RT2 transition lip_123” to “F_RT2 transition lip_321” and the role “F_RT3 transition lip_123” to “F_RT3 transition lip_321” are determined as the internal winning combination. Will be displayed at times. Therefore, with Lip Navi in the game example 2, when the combination “F_Maintenance Lip_123” to “F_Maintenance Lip_321” is determined as the internal winning combination, the push order of correct answers is notified, and the combination of the symbols of the fall replay is displayed. To avoid being displayed, and when the combination “F_RT2 transition lip_123” to “F_RT2 transition lip_321”, the combination “F_RT3 transition lip_123” to “F_RT3 transition lip_321” is determined as the internal winning combination. This includes notifying the pushing order of correct answers and prompting the display of the combination of the symbols of the promotion replay.

If the combination “F_Maintenance Lip_123” to “F_Maintenance Lip_321” is determined as the internal winning combination, and the stop operation is performed in the correct push order, the combination of the replay symbols is displayed and the RT game state. Is maintained in the current RT gaming state. That is, the main control board 71, when the combination "F_maintenance lip_123" to "F_maintenance lip_321" is determined as the internal winning combination during the high lip state, when the combination of replay symbols is displayed (press Correct answer), while keeping the RT gaming state in the high-rep state, while the combination of symbols of the fall replay is displayed (incorrect answer in the pushing order), the RT gaming state is shifted from the high-rep state to the low-rep state ..

Subsequently, FIG. 139(B) is a diagram showing characteristics of a specific section of the game example 2. As shown in FIG. 139(B), in the game example 2, the specific section has a plurality of states of the normal ART and the special state. Comparing the normal ART with the special state, the normal ART is in a state in which the consumption speed of the number of Bell navigation is faster than that in the special state. In addition, in the game example 2, when the number of times of lip navigation and the number of times of bell navigation are added during a specific section, comparing the normal ART and the special state, the amount of addition of the number of bell navigations is reduced during the special state compared to the normal ART. On the other hand, increase the amount of Lip Navi times added. That is, during the special state in which the consumption speed of the number of Bell navigation is suppressed, the number of Lip navigation is given priority over the number of Bell navigation.

(How to achieve a special state)
Next, with reference to FIG. 140, a method of realizing a special state in which the consumption speed of the number of Bell navigations can be suppressed will be described. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the roles that are targets of the bell navigation are the roles “F_3 choice bell A_1st”, “F_3 choice bell A_2nd”, “F_3 choice bell A_3rd”, and the roles “F_3 choice bell B_12t” “F_3 choice bell B_2nd” “F_3 choice. Bell B — 3rd”. In the following, the roles “F_3 choice bell A_1st” to “F_3 choice bell A_3rd” are simply referred to as the roles “F_3 choice bell A_”, and the roles “F_3 choice bell B_1st” to “F_3 choice bell B_3rd” are simply played the role “F_3. It may be referred to as "option bell B".

As shown in FIG. 140(A), when the bonus is not won, that is, when the winning combination is not carried over as an internal winning combination, one of the winning combination “F_3 choice bell A” and the winning combination “F_3 choice bell B” Also, different combinations of symbols are displayed depending on the pressing order. Specifically, for both the winning combination “F_3 choice bell A” and the winning combination “F_3 choice bell B”, when the answer is correct, the combination of bell symbols will be displayed, and 9 medals will be paid out. At the time of correct answer, the combination of the symbols of the bell spill is displayed, and the number of medals less than 9 (or 0) is paid out.

Therefore, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72, when one of the winning combination “F_3 selection bell A” and the winning combination “F_3 selection bell B” is determined as an internal winning combination, during the specific section when the bonus is not won, Performs the Bell Navi (notification of the correct answer push order) for the number of times of the Bernavi In other words, during the specific section when the bonus is not won, the number of bell navigations is reduced regardless of whether the winning combination “F_3 choice bell A” or the winning combination “F_3 choice bell B” is determined as the internal winning combination. Become.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 140(B), in the middle of the flags, that is, in the state where the bonus winning combination is carried over as an internal winning combination, the winning combination “F_3 choice bell B” is displayed according to the pressing order. Although the combination of symbols is different, the combination of symbols displayed in the combination "F_3 choice bell A" is the same regardless of the order of pressing. Specifically, the combination "F_3 choice bell B" displays the combination of bell symbols when the answer is correct in the pushing order, and 9 medals are paid out. When the answer is incorrect in the pushing order, the combination of symbols in the bell spilled pattern is displayed. Is displayed and the number of medals less than 9 (or 0) is paid out. On the other hand, in the combination “F_3 choice bell A”, the combination of bell symbols is displayed regardless of the pressing order, and 9 medals are paid out.

Therefore, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72, when the winning combination “F_3 option bell A” is determined as the internal winning combination during the specific section between the flags, do not notify the pressing order and move between the flags. When the winning combination "F_3 choice bell B" is determined as the internal winning combination during the specific section of, the number of times of Bell navigation (the notification of the correct pressing order) is performed. In other words, during the specific section between the flags, even if the winning combination “F_3 choice bell A” is determined as the internal winning combination, the number of times of Bellavi is not reduced, and the winning combination “F_3 choice bell B” is determined as the internal winning combination. Therefore, the number of bernavis will be reduced.

In this way, by distinguishing the normal ART from the special state according to whether or not the bonus winning combination is carried over as an internal winning combination, a special state capable of suppressing the consumption speed of the Bellnavi number is realized. can do. That is, in the case of the above example, the special section during bonus non-win is set as the normal ART, and the special section between the flags is set as the special state to realize the special state in which the consumption speed of the number of times of the bell navigation can be suppressed. can do.

(Addition example)
Next, with reference to FIG. 141, a method of adding the number of lip navigations and the number of bell navigations will be described. The additional lottery table of FIG. 141(A) defines, for each internal winning combination and game state, information on the lottery value with respect to the additional amount of the number of Bell navigations and the number of Lip navigations. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 refers to the add-on lottery table shown in FIG. 141(A) to add the number of bell navigations and the number of lip navigations. In addition, FIG. 141(B) is a diagram showing an overview of the expectation degree of addition according to the addition lottery table of FIG. 141(A).

Referring to FIGS. 141(A) and 141(B), it can be seen that the expectation for adding the number of Bell navigations and the expectation for adding the number of Lip navigations are different between the normal ART and the special state. Specifically, in the addition based on the cactus and the weak cherry, the number of bell navigations is more likely to be added during the normal ART, while the number of lip navigations is more likely to be added during the special state. More specifically, during the special state, the number of additions to the number of bell navigations is smaller than that during normal ART, and conversely, the amount of additions to the number of lip navigations is larger.
Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 141, the addition expectation based on the strong cherry is the same in the normal ART and in the special state.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the game example 2 as described above, the lip navigation and the bell navigation are managed separately during the specific section, the lip navigation is performed by the number of times of the lip navigation, and the bell navigation is performed by the number of times of the bell navigation. As a result, even if either the winning combination of Lip Navi or the winning combination of Bell Navi is concentrated during the specific section and is determined as the internal winning combination, only one of the navigation times is consumed. Since the number of times of navigation on the other side is not consumed, the consumption speed of the number of times of navigation can be reduced.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the game example 2, a normal ART and a special state are provided as the specific section, and the degree of expectation of the addition is varied according to the current state. Specifically, during normal ART where the consumption speed of the number of times of navigation is fast, it is easy to increase the number of times of navigation, and conversely, in a special state where the speed of consumption of the number of times of navigation is suppressed, the amount of addition of the number of times of navigation is reduced. , Increase the amount of Lip Navi addition. As a result, the consumption speed of the number of times of navigation can be reduced, and as a result, the interest in the specific section is not spoiled.

<CZ selection method with different end period>
Next, with reference to FIG. 142, a method of selecting CZs having different end periods will be described. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the specific section continues for a long period of time, the specific section does not satisfy the ending condition, and the specific section shifts to the normal section (limit processing). In addition, since CZ is included in the specific section in addition to the ART game state, when the limit process is performed, the ART game state continuously performed from CZ has a game period of the number of times the CZ has continued. It gets shorter. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player can select a CZ to be executed from among CZs having different end periods, and at the time of selection, a CZ that is considered to be preferable to the player can be easily selected. There is.

As shown in FIG. 142, the pachi-slot machine 1 of this embodiment has a plurality of CZs having different end periods. Specifically, the CZ “short-term game” shown in FIG. 142(A) is a CZ with an ending period of 0 game, and the CZ “game” shown in FIG. 142(B) is a CZ with an ending period of 1 game. 142C, the CZ “stable” shown in FIG. 142C is the CZ of 10 games in the end period, and the CZ “disturbance” shown in FIG. 142D is the CZ of the 10 games in the end period. The CZ “long-term battle” shown in (E) is a CZ with an end period of 30 games. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 ends the CZ and shifts the gaming state to the normal section when the duration of the CZ exceeds the end period of the type of CZ to be executed. On the other hand, if the main control board 71 wins the transition lottery to the ART gaming state before the duration of the CZ exceeds the ending period of the type of CZ to be executed, the CZ is terminated and the gaming state is changed to the ART gaming state. Transition.

Here, a method of selecting CZ will be described. 142(A) to (E) are selection screens for selecting CZ. A selection cursor for selecting CZ is provided on this selection screen. In FIG. 142, the selection cursor points to CZ “short-term battle” in FIG. 142(A), to CZ “game” in FIG. 142(B), and to CZ “stable” in FIG. 142(C). In FIG. 142(D), the CZ “turbulence” is indicated, and in FIG. 142(E), the CZ “long-term battle” is indicated. This selection cursor switches the CZ to be selected with the passage of time, for example.

In the selection screen, the player's operation on the chance button (not shown) is accepted, and the main control board 71 executes the operation assuming that the CZ pointed by the selection cursor is selected at the timing when the chance button is operated. The selection of the CZ is accepted, and then the selected CZ is started. That is, when the chance button is operated at the timing of FIG. 142(A), the main control board 71 accepts the selection from the player as if to select the CZ "short term", and then the CZ "short term". The battle begins. Although the method of identifying the CZ pointed by the selection cursor by the main control board 71 is arbitrary, for example, the main control board 71 also counts the interval at which the CZ pointed by the selection cursor is switched, so that the main control The CZ pointed by the selection cursor on the board 71 can be specified.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the initial state, the selection cursor points to the CZ “short-term battle” with the shortest end period, and then points to another CZ in order of shorter end period with the passage of time. .. For example, as time passes, the selection cursor points to CZ in the order of CZ “short-term battle”, CZ “game”, CZ “stable”, CZ “disturbance”, and CZ “long-term battle”.

Here, when the limit process is performed as described above, the CZ "short-term game" in which the end period is the shortest is the game because the game period in the ART game state is shortened by the number of times the CZ has continued the game. It is considered to be preferable to the person. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the CZ is selected based on the CZ pointed to by the selection cursor. However, as the initial state of the selection cursor, the CZ "short-term game" is pointed out, and thus the CZ that is kind to the player is selected. A selection method can be realized.

Also, depending on the player, the game may proceed without making any selection on the selection screen. For example, when the game is started by operating the start lever 6 without accepting an operation for the chance button on the selection screen (that is, when a predetermined operation is performed), the player has not made a selection. become. In this way, when the game is started without accepting the selection of CZ, the main control board 71 starts the CZ having the shortest end period among the plurality of CZ having different end periods. That is, when the player starts the game without selecting the CZ, the main control board 71 executes the CZ "short-term game" with the shortest end period regardless of the position of the selection cursor at the timing when the game is started. Automatically select and then start CZ "Short term". This makes it possible to realize a CZ selection method that is friendly to the player.

Note that such a selection screen is displayed, for example, at the start of CZ, in other words, in a state where the right to shift to CZ is granted. That is, the main control board 71 grants the right to move to the CZ that performs the lottery for deciding whether or not to shift to the ART game state, and in the state where the right to move to this CZ is given, a plurality of types of CZs. The selection of one CZ from among the above is accepted.

<Reel control at the start of a specific section>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145, reel control when starting the specific section will be described. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the specific section is started, the reel stop control is enabled so that a specific symbol combination such as "7-7-7" (hereinafter referred to as "AT start result") can be displayed. I do. Specifically, the main control board 71 grants the right to move to the specific section when the lottery for moving to the specific section is won. The right to shift to the specific section is carried over until the game state shifts to the specific section, and is cleared (deprived) when the game state shifts to the specific section. That is, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state to the specific section and satisfies the shift right when the shift condition to the specific section (for example, the AT start result is displayed) is satisfied while the shift right is granted. clear. Then, the main control board 71 stops the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in different modes depending on whether the transfer right is granted or not, that is, the reel stop control. Different).

143 and 144 are diagrams showing an example of the spinning cylinder stop initial setting table used for reel stop control, and are used in the above-described steps S9 and S12 of FIG. 75. This spinning cylinder stop initialization table is referred to when determining reel stop control information for stopping the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The spinning reel stop initialization table is used when the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, in association with the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination, the current gaming state, and the presence or absence of the right to move to the specific section. Specifies reel stop control information. The main control board 71 refers to the spinning reel stop initialization table to obtain reel stop control information corresponding to the internal winning combination, the game state, and the presence or absence of the transfer right, and uses the reel stop control information to reel 3L, Stop 3C and 3R.

The reel stop control information associated with the winning combination, the gaming state, and the presence or absence of the transition right is a spinning reel stop number, determination data by pressing order (pull-in priority table number, pull-in priority selection table number), table number selection Value (change status, table data for stop), table change data for first cylinder first stop, first cylinder stop data table selection data (stop table for left first cylinder stop), first cylinder first stop This is information including the table change initial data selection value (change status, table number) and the search order data table number.

The “pressing order-specific determination data” includes a pull-in priority table number and a pull-in priority selection table number. The "pull-in priority table number" is a number for selecting a pull-in priority table (not shown). The "pull-in priority selection table number" is a number for selecting a pull-in priority selection table (not shown).

The “table number selection data” is a value that is referred to when all the reels are stopped when the first stop reel is other than the left reel 3L, and includes the change status and the stop table data.

The "stop table number" is a number for selecting a stop table to be referred to when stopping all reels when the first stop reel is other than the left reel 3L. The “change status” is data for changing the line status for each game that represents the line referred to in the stop table selected based on the stop table data, and is the initial line status in the present embodiment. The state is the A line. Here, when the change status is “0”, the line status is not changed, and when the change status is “2”, if the line status is the A line, the line status is changed to the B line.

The first stop reel first stop reel table change data, the first reel stop data table selection data, and the first reel first stop table change initial data selection value are the first reel reel That is, the data is referred to when the left reel 3L.

The "first time cylinder first stop table change data" indicates whether the same left first post-stop table is used after the second stop when the first stop reel is the left reel 3L. Is data indicating. When there is a value (a value other than 0) in the table change data for the first trunk first stop, the change data search table is selected based on the planned stop position, the data is searched, and the second stop and thereafter. Select the stop table for.

“First-time cylinder stop data table selection data” is a number for selecting a first-time cylinder stop data table (not shown) that is referred to when stopping the first-time cylinder.

The “first cylinder first stop table change initial data selection value” is data that is referred to when the second and third cylinders are stopped, and includes a table number and a line status. The "table number" is a number for selecting the stop data table after the first stop and the first stop, which is referred to when stopping the second and third stop reels. The “change status” is data for changing the line status for each game, which represents the line referred to in the stop data table after the first cylinder first stop, which is selected based on the table number. When the change status is “0”, the line status is not changed. When the change status is “2”, the line status is changed to the B line if the line status is the A line, and if the line status is “3”, the line status is changed to the B line. If the line status is A line or B line, it is changed to C line.

The "search order table number" is a number for selecting a search order table (not shown) for determining the number of sliding pieces.

As shown in FIGS. 143(A) and 143(B), the pachi-slot machine 1 uses different reel stop control information depending on whether or not the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Specifically, in the spinning reel stop initialization table of FIG. 143(A), which is referred to when the winning combination relating to the bonus is non-winning, the spinning reel stopping number “17” for the winning combination “F_3 selection bell_1st”. 143(B), which is referred to when the combination relating to the bonus is won, the reel stop control initial setting table of FIG. 143(B) corresponds to the same combination “F_3 selection bell_1st”. The reel stop control information of the rotating cylinder stop number "31" is defined. As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the reel stop control information is made different depending on whether or not the winning combination of the bonus is won, so that the reel stopping control is different when the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. It can be done.

Similarly, as shown in FIGS. 143(A) and 144(C), the pachi-slot machine 1 uses different reel stop control information depending on whether or not the right to shift is granted. Specifically, in the rotating cylinder stop initial setting table of FIG. 143(A) which is referred to when the transfer right is not granted, the rotating cylinder stop number "17" is assigned to the combination "F_3 option bell_1st". In the spinning reel stop initialization table of FIG. 144C, which is referred to when the reel stop control information is defined and the transfer right is granted, the spinning reel for the same combination “F_3 selection bell_1st” The reel stop control information of the stop number "41" is defined. As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, by changing the reel stop control information depending on the presence or absence of the shift right, the reel stop control can be changed when the shift lottery to the specific section is won.

Subsequently, FIG. 145 shows the correspondence relationship between the winning combination and the stop symbol when the reel stop control is performed using the spinning cylinder stop initialization table shown in FIGS. 143 and 144. As shown in FIG. 145, in the normal section in which the right to shift to the specific section is not given, when the internal winning combination is “out”, the combination of the symbols “out” is displayed, and the internal winning combination is also displayed. If the role is "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_1rd", the correct combination of bells is displayed if the answer is correct in the pressing order, and the bell spilled pattern or the first pattern is shown if the answer is incorrect in the pressing order. The combination is displayed.

On the other hand, in the standby section of the specific section to which the right to shift to the specific section is granted, when the internal winning combination is “out”, the combination of the symbols of the AT start-up if the pushing operation is accurate Is displayed, and if the pressing operation is inaccurate, a combination of symbols “out” is displayed. Further, when the internal winning combination is a combination of “F_3 choice bell_1st” to “F_3 choice bell_3rd”, if the eye-pushing operation is accurate, a combination of symbols of the AT start appearance is displayed, and the eye-pushing operation is not performed. If it is correct, a combination of bell, bell spilled pattern or the first pattern is displayed.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, since the reel stop control is changed depending on the presence or absence of the right to shift to the specific section, the combination of the symbols of the AT start appearance is combined according to the stop operation of the player at the start of the specific section. The rotation of the reel can be stopped as indicated.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the reel stop control may be changed according to the type of the specific section of the transfer destination. That is, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of specific sections with different degrees of advantage for the player, and the main control board 71 has a right to shift to one specific section and the one specific section. The stop control of the reels may be different when the right to shift to another specific section different from is given. Specifically, when the same winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination when the right to shift to one specific section is granted and when the right to transition to another specific section is granted. The spinning cylinder stop initialization table may be provided so that the reel stop control information used is different.

As a result, the reel stop control can be made different depending on the type of the specific section of the transfer destination, and for example, the case of moving to the specific section more advantageous to the player and the case of moving to the other specific section. Thus, the combination of symbols displayed at the start of the specific section can be different. For the player, since the degree of advantage of subsequent games will differ depending on the combination of the symbols displayed at the start of the specific section, the player will have a strong interest in the stop operation at the start of the specific section, The interest of the game is improved.
In the pachi-slot machine 1, the winning probability of the internal winning combination is different depending on the bonus state or the RT gaming state, but the winning probability of the internal winning combination is not different depending on the type of the specific section.

Here, in recent years, a pachi-slot machine in which another reel (hereinafter, "second main reel") is provided in addition to the reel (hereinafter, "first main reel") controlled according to the result of the internal lottery is also known. ing. For example, a pachi-slot machine having three reels 3L, 3C, 3R described above as the first main reel, and a reel provided in only one row to the right of the reel 3R as the second main reel is known. .. The reel whose stop control is changed depending on the result of the transfer lottery may be the first main reel or the second main reel.

When the stop control of the second main reel is changed in accordance with the result of the transfer lottery, the main control board 71 is the first main reel in response to the operation of the start lever 6 in the game in which the transfer lottery to the specific section is performed. The rotation of the second main reel is started before the rotation of the second main reel is started. Then, when the stop button 7R is operated, the main control board 71 stops the rotation of the second main reel according to the result of the lottery for shifting to the specific section. Specifically, when the lottery for the transition to the specific section is won, the rotation of the second main reel is stopped so that a symbol that is not displayed when the lottery is not won can be displayed. In this way, when the rotation of the second main reel is stopped according to the result of the lottery for shifting to the specific section, the main control board 71 then starts the rotation of the first main reel.

In the above example, the second main reel is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 7R, but a stop button dedicated to the second main reel may be provided in addition to the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R. Good. Also, the second main reel may be provided in plural instead of one.
By thus separating the stop operation for the result of the transfer lottery in the specific section and the stop operation for the result of the internal lottery, it is possible to enjoy both pushes and it becomes easier for the player to grasp the game.

<Control when changing settings>
Subsequently, the control at the time of changing the setting will be described with reference to FIG. 146. FIG. 146 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between control contents when the setting is changed and when the main RAM 33 is cleared. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control board 71, when a new setting value is set (when the setting is changed), is related to a bonus that is carried over as an internal winning combination even during the period between the flags. Is maintained without clearing, the specific section is maintained even during the specific section, and the result of the transfer lottery is maintained even during the waiting section where the transfer lottery of the specific section is won. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1, even when a new set value is set during the flag, in the specific section, or in the standby section, the game state before the new set value is set is maintained as it is. ..
In addition, when a new setting value is set (when the setting is changed) is not limited to a case where the setting value is changed to a different setting value such as setting 1 to setting 6, and the same setting such as setting 1 to setting 1 is set. The case of resetting the value (so-called resetting to the same setting) is also included.

On the other hand, when the main RAM 33 is cleared (when RAM is cleared), the main control board 71 clears all game states. That is, the main control board 71 clears the winning combination relating to the carried-over bonus when the RAM is cleared during the flag, and ends the specific section when the RAM is cleared during the specific section. Then, the game state is transferred to the normal section, and when the RAM is cleared during the standby section, the result of the transfer lottery is cleared.

As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 clears the specific section when the RAM is cleared during the specific section, but maintains the specific section when the setting is changed during the specific section. From the amusement store side, it is possible to select whether to maintain/clear the specific section while changing the setting value, and thus it is possible to give the amusement store side various options regarding the operation of the pachi-slot machine.

The setting change operation can be performed, for example, via the setting key type switch 430 (see FIG. 116), and the RAM clear operation can be performed, for example, via the reset switch 442 (see FIG. 116). It can be carried out.

[Various functions of the main control board and the sub control board]
The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present invention has been described above. Next, various functions of the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described.

The main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1. Therefore, the start operation detection means, the symbol variation means, the internal winning combination determination means (role determination means), and the stop It functions as operation detection means, reel stop control means (stop control means), winning determination means, game medium giving means (game value giving means), and profit giving means.

Further, the main control board 71, when the winning combination “F_probable chiririp” or “F_1 probable chiririp” is determined as an internal winning combination, performs flag conversion lottery, and results of this flag conversion lottery and other internal winnings. When the winning of the CT lottery based on the winning combination is won, the CT for extending the duration of the normal ART is started, and therefore, it functions as a conversion lottery means and an addition game starting means.

Further, the main control board 71 adds (extends) the number of ART games showing the duration period of the normal ART according to the internal winning combination during CT. Specifically, the number of normal ART ART games is increased by a predetermined amount according to the role “cactus”, “weak cherry”, and “strong cherry”, and the number of normal ART ART games is determined by a specific amount according to the role “three consecutive chilirips”. Add on.
At this time, when the number of times of addition of the ART games based on the combination “three consecutive chiririp” is more than 9 times, which is more than 8 times corresponding to one set of CT, the main control board 71 makes one Functions as an add-on control means to increase the add-on amount

Further, the main control board 71 counts the number of games in which the number of ART games is not added during CT by using the CT game number counter, and when the CT game number counter counts 8, the CT is ended. At this time, the main control board 71, when the winning combination "three consecutive chilirip" is won (that is, the flag conversion lottery is won), the game is set again eight times per set (the value of the CT game number counter is set to the initial value). It returns), and functions as a counting means and an addition game ending means.

Further, when the winning combination (F_BB1,2) is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state to the inter-flag state, and the bonus is activated in the inter-flag state (to the bonus. Until the relevant winning combination wins the bonus-related winning combination as an internal winning combination (when the specific symbol combination is not derived in the unit game where the derivation of the specific symbol combination is allowed, the specific symbol combination is derived) In order to carry over the permissible conditions to be carried over), it functions as a bonus carry-over means (carry-over means). Further, the main control board 71 activates the bonus when a winning combination is won in the inter-flag state, and shifts the game state to the bonus state (when a specific symbol combination is derived as a result display of the stop control). In order to start the bonus state), it functions as a bonus starting means. Further, the main control board 71 ends the bonus state when the number of medals paid out during the bonus state exceeds a predetermined number, and thus functions as a bonus ending means.

As shown in FIG. 48, in the inter-flag state, the main control board 71 provides a bonus when a winning combination and a predetermined winning combination (offset, F_special 1 to 3) are determined as internal winning combinations. When a combination of symbols (C_BB1, 2) corresponding to the winning combination is displayed, stop control is performed, and when a winning winning combination and a winning combination other than the predetermined winning combination are determined as internal winning combinations, depending on the winning combination. The stop control is performed so that the combination of the symbols that are displayed cannot be displayed.
Then, the main control board 71 controls the instruction monitor of the information display 14 so as to win the winning combination when the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination can be displayed during the inter-flag state. The display of "10" and "11" (bonus instruction information) uniquely indicating the mode of the stop operation is notified, and "10" and "11" are displayed when the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination cannot be displayed. Since no notification is given, the instruction monitor of the main control board 71 and the information display 14 functions as an instruction information notifying unit.

At this time, the main control board 71 informs "10" and "11" via the instruction monitor only after the bonus notification. Specifically, when the main control board 71 decides the bonus winning combination as an internal winning combination in a state where the bonus winning combination is not carried over, the number of subsequent games is counted and the count result becomes a predetermined number. When the winning combination and the predetermined winning combination (disappearance, F_special 1 to 3) are determined as internal winning combinations after the winning, the main control board 71 notifies "10" and "11" through the instruction monitor. , Which functions as counting means for counting the number of unit games after the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination.

Further, the sub control board 72 manages the game history based on various command data received from the main control board 71, and when the registration operation is received from the player, the sub control board 72 receives the registration of the player who performs the game, so the history management It functions as a means and a registration receiving means.
Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present invention, a plurality of display units 100 that perform an effect according to the progress of a game and a display unit 100 are provided separately and include a top screen 211 and game information screens 213, 214, 215. The sub-control board 72 includes a display unit 100 and a first sub-display device 201 that has a first sub-display device 201 that displays the display screen of FIG. Control 201. Specifically, when the registration of the player is accepted, the sub-control board 72 controls the first sub-display device 201 so that the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 can be displayed to register the player. If not accepted, the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 cannot be displayed on the first sub-display device 201, so the sub-control board 72 functions as control means.

In addition, the main control board 71 functions as a privilege granting means for granting various benefits in accordance with the result of the game. Specifically, the main control board 71 gives a privilege according to the combination of the symbols displayed along the activated line, and in the game in which the winning combination “F_3 choice bell_1st” is determined as the internal winning combination, When the combination of symbols "" is displayed, 9 medals are given, and when the combination of symbols "Bell's eyes" is displayed, 0 medals are given. Further, the main control board 71, when the combination of the symbols "3 consecutive chiririp" or "replay" is displayed in the game in which the winning combination "F_Sure Chiriripu" has been determined as the internal winning combination, the operation of the re-play is the same. Grant the benefits of.
Further, the main control board 71 gives a privilege based on the result of the flag conversion lottery instead of the combination of the symbols displayed along the activated line. For example, the main control board 71 performs a flag conversion lottery when the winning combination “F_Sure Chile Lip” is determined as an internal winning combination, and when winning the flag conversion lottery, gives a benefit such as winning the CT lottery.

Further, since the sub control board 72 executes the effect according to the mode of the stop operation via the display unit 100, the sub control board 72 and the display unit 100 function as an effect execution means.
Here, the main control board 71, when the privilege to be awarded is different depending on the combination of the symbols displayed along the activated line, information uniquely showing the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player via the instruction monitor. Is notified, and when the privilege given by the combination of the symbols displayed along the activated line is the same, the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified. On the other hand, the sub-control board 72 executes an effect indicating the order of the stop operation, regardless of whether the benefits given by the combination of the displayed symbols are the same or different.

Further, the main control board 71 performs the CT lottery whether or not to start the CT, so that it functions as an advantageous state lottery means, and when the CT lottery is won, a predetermined number of predictive games are performed after the lottery is won. Since the CT is started after being broken, it also functions as an advantageous state starting means.
Then, the sub-control board 72 performs a flag conversion lottery on the sub side when the winning combination “F_Sure Chile Lip” or “F_1 Sure Chile Lip” is determined as an internal winning combination during this CT sign, and thus functions as a notification lottery means. To do.

When the MB is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 carries over the MB as the internal winning combination until it is determined that the MB has won, so that the main control board 71 functions as a predetermined winning combination carry-over means.

Further, the main control board 71 performs a flag conversion lottery when the winning combination “push order bell” is determined as an internal winning combination among MB flags in which MB is carried over as an internal winning combination, and therefore, as a conversion lottery means. Also works.
Then, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72, when winning the flag conversion lottery, press order in which a combination of symbols of "cactus" is displayed for each winning combination through the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. When the winning combination is not won in the flag conversion lottery, the pushing order in which the combination of the symbols “Bell” is displayed for each winning combination is informed through the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. Therefore, the main control board 71, the sub-control board 72, the instruction monitor and the display unit 100 function as an informing means.

Further, the main control board 71 starts the normal ART when the ART lottery is won, ends the normal ART when the duration of the normal ART ends, and when the MB is carried over as the internal winning combination during the normal ART, the CT is set. To start, it functions as first advantageous state control means and second control means. Since the duration of the normal ART is not consumed during CT, the main control board 71 interrupts the normal ART and starts CT when MB is carried over as an internal winning combination during the normal ART. ..

Further, the main control board 71 counts the difference number during CT, and ends CT when the difference number reaches the end number. Here, the main control board 71 performs a flag conversion lottery when the winning combination “F_push order bell” is determined as an internal winning combination during CT, and when the winning combination is won, the main control board 71 counts the difference number. On the other hand, “6” is added and “6” is added to the number of finished sheets to maintain the CT continuation period. On the contrary, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, “6” is added to the difference number to be counted, and the duration of CT is consumed. Therefore, the main control board 71 functions as a counting unit, a second advantageous state ending unit, and a conversion lottery unit.

Further, the main control board 71, when the winning combination “F_single Chilelip 1” to “F_3 consecutive Chilelip 4” is determined as the internal winning combination, the value of the CT meter that defines the probability of winning the flag conversion lottery. , While updating to a value that makes it easier to win the flag conversion lottery than the currently set CT meter value, if the flag conversion lottery is not won during CT, the flag conversion will be performed more than the currently set CT meter value. It functions as a lottery stage setting means (first lottery stage setting means) in order to update the value so that it is difficult to win the lottery.

Further, the main control board 71 performs the flag conversion lottery based on the value of the CT meter at the time of winning the combination “F_push order bell” during the MB flag (CT) in the ART gaming state, and the MB non-MB in the ART gaming state. Between the flags (normal ART), since the flag conversion lottery is performed based on the ART level and the lottery state when the winning combination “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chililip 4” is won, the first conversion lottery means and the second conversion lottery means. Function as.

Then, based on the result of the flag conversion lottery, the main control board 71 gives a privilege, and the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the pushing order through the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. The main control board 71 functions as a privilege granting means, and the main control board 71, the sub control board 72, the instruction monitor and the display unit 100 function as an informing means.
Note that the main control board 71 gives a privilege of maintaining (that is, extending the continuation period) without consuming the CT continuation period when the flag conversion lottery during the CT is won (“cactus”). When the flag conversion lottery during the normal ART is won (“Chiririp”), the privilege of adding the number of ART games is given.

Further, the main control board 71, when MB is determined as an internal winning combination during the normal ART during the MB non-flag, and then the predictive game is performed a predetermined number of times without winning the MB, the normal ART addition chance zone In order to start CT which is, it functions as an additional game state starting means.

Further, the main control board 71, when the winning combination “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chililip 4” is determined as an internal winning combination, the main control board 71 extends the duration of the normal ART and also serves during the CT. If the flag conversion lottery when the “push order bell” is won is won, it functions as the first addition control means and the second addition control means in order to extend the duration of CT.

Further, when the combination “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chililip 4” is determined as the internal winning combination during the normal ART during the MB non-flag, the main control board 71 performs the flag conversion lottery, and this flag Based on the result of the conversion lottery, it functions as a first notification lottery means to determine whether or not to perform the notification for displaying the combination of the symbols “Cililip”.
On the other hand, during the sign of CT, when the combination “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chililip 4” is determined as the internal winning combination, the sub control board 72 determines whether or not to notify the pushing order. The sub control board 72 functions as a second notification lottery means.

Further, the main control board 71 starts CT when the predictive game is performed a predetermined number of times during the MB flag (when a predetermined condition is satisfied), and when the hand “push order bell” is won during the period of this CT. Since the flag conversion lottery is performed, it functions as a lottery state start means.
Then, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 display the combination of symbols of "bell" during winning the combination "push order bell" during the sign game between the MB flags (until a predetermined condition is satisfied). The necessary push order is notified via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100, and during CT (lottery state) between MB flags, "bell" or "bell" or "bell" based on the result of the flag conversion lottery when the hand "push order bell" is won. The main control board 71, the sub-control board 72, the instruction monitor and display unit 100 informs the pressing order necessary for displaying the combination of the symbols of "cactus" via the instruction monitor and display unit 100. Functions as a means.

The display unit 100 includes an irradiation light device B that emits irradiation light, a screen device C that displays an image according to a performance by irradiation of the irradiation light device B, and irradiation light from the irradiation light device B. The front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 that switch between the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 for the screen device that causes the image corresponding to the effect to appear by the irradiation of. Therefore, the irradiation light device B functions as an irradiation light device that irradiates the irradiation light, and the screen device C functions as a movable screen that causes an image corresponding to the effect to appear by irradiation of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device. Further, the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 function as a drive device that drives the movable screen so that the position where the movable screen is arranged can be adjusted.

Further, the main control board 71 has a first main control board 71a and a second main control board 71b, and performs an internal lottery process for determining an internal winning combination in the first main control board 71a, and a second main control board The main control board 71 and the first main control board 71a are provided with a main control section, a first main control section, and a second main control, respectively, in order to carry out a transfer lottery on the control board 71b to transfer the game state to a specific section. Function as a department.
The second main control board 71b, when the setting indeterminate winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, performs the transfer lottery so as to win with the same probability regardless of the setting value. Since the main control board 71 is set in accordance with the operation using the key type switch 430, the setting key type switch 430 and the main control board 71 function as setting means.

Further, the main control board 71 carries out a transition lottery as to whether or not to shift the game state, and if this transition lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the game state from the normal section to the specific section. It functions as a means, a game state control means, and a notification game start means. In addition, when the main control board 71 wins the transfer lottery, the main control board 71 notifies the external device such as the data counter or the hall computer of the winning information indicating that the transfer lottery is won through the external centralized terminal board 73. 71 and the external centralized terminal board 73 function as an output means.
Then, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 use the instruction monitor and display unit 100 to notify the correct pressing order, which is a mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player during the specific section. 71, the sub-control board 72, the instruction monitor and the display unit 100 function as a notification means.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the status monitor 147b (AT lamp) is provided on the instruction monitor 147, and the lottery for the transition to the specific section is won, the main control board 71 turns on the status indicator 147b to win the transition lottery. Report what you have done. The status indicator 147b has a plurality of lamps "a" to "i" which are turned on, blinked, and turned off, respectively, and based on the lighting, blinking, and extinguishing patterns of the plurality of lamps, transition to a specific section is performed. The main control board 71 and the status display 147b function as a notification means in order to inform that the lottery has been won.

Further, the main control board 71, when the combination "F_maintenance rep_123" to "F_maintenance rep_321" is determined as the internal winning combination during the high rip state, the combination of replay symbols is displayed in accordance with the correct pressing order. When the high-rep state is maintained, the combination of the symbols of the falling replay is displayed due to the incorrect pressing order. In order to shift the game state from the high-rep state to the low-rep state, the main control board 71 plays the game. Functions as state control means.
Then, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72, using the instruction monitor and display unit 100, when the combination "F_3 option bell A" is determined as the internal winning combination during the specific section, the medals are given for the number of times of the bell navigation. When notification (Bernavi) for increasing is performed and "F_maintenance rep_123" to "F_maintenance rep_321" are determined as internal winning combinations during the specific section, the RT gaming state is maintained in the high rep state. The main control board 71, the sub-control board 72, the instruction monitor, and the display unit 100 function as a notification unit to perform notification (lip navigation).

Further, when the bonus winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 carries over the bonus winning combination as an internal winning combination until a combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus winning combination is displayed. Therefore, the main control board 71 functions as a carry-over means and a predetermined role carry-over means. At this time, the main control board 71 changes the stop control depending on whether or not the bonus-related hand is carried over, and if the bonus-related hand is not carried over, the main "F_3 option bell A" bell is awarded at the time of winning. Or, the combination of symbols on the bell spill is controlled to be displayable, and when the combination relating to the bonus is carried over, only the combination of symbols on the bell is controlled to be displayable when the combination “F_3 choice bell A” is won. The main control board 71 functions as reel stop control means.

In addition, the main control board 71 increases the number of bell navigations and the number of lip navigations, and when the bonus winning combination is carried over as an internal winning combination, the amount of addition of the bell navigation is reduced as compared to the case where it is not carried over. However, in order to increase the addition amount of the Lipnavi count, the main control board 71 functions as a first addition unit and a second addition unit.

Further, the main control board 71 starts the MB1 gaming state when a combination of symbols corresponding to the combination of MB1 is displayed when all reels are stopped, and a combination of symbols according to the combination of MB2 when all reels are stopped. Since the MB2 game state is started when is displayed, the main control board 71 functions as a specific game starting means.
The main control board 71 may determine the winning combination to be notified as an internal winning combination during the MB1 gaming state, while the internal winning combination is determined to be the notification target during the MB2 gaming state. Therefore, the main control board 71 functions as an internal winning combination determining means.

Further, when the specific section continues for a long period of time, the main control board 71 ends the specific section even if the ending condition is not satisfied. Therefore, the main control board 71 functions as a notification game ending means. At this time, the main control board 71 counts the duration of the specific section, in particular, the period of the MB1 gaming state performed during the specific section as the duration of the specific section, and the MB2 gaming state performed during the specific section. The main control board 71 functions as a counting unit because the period of is not counted as the duration of the specific section.

Further, the main control board 71 grants the right to move to the specific section when the lottery to move to the specific section is won. In order to clear and start the specific section, the main control board 71 functions as a right granting means and a notification game starting means.
At this time, since the main control board 71 stops the rotation of the reel in different modes depending on whether the transfer right is granted or not, the main control board 71 functions as reel stop control means. To do.

In addition, the main control board 71, during the ART game state, all the push forward combination ("F_3 selection bell 1st" ~ "F_3 selection 1 piece combination_3rd" and "F_3 selection bell_1st" ~ "F_3 selection bell_3rd" )), the correct pressing order is notified, and during the single-card combination ART game state, the pressing order of the correct answer is not notified for “F_3 selection bell_1st” to “F_3 selection bell_3rd” of the pressing order combination. , "F_3-choice 1-sheet combination_1st" to "F_3-choice 1-sheet combination_3rd", the main control board 71 functions as a first notification game control means and a second notification game control means in order to notify the correct pressing order. ..
Then, the main control board 71 lights up the status indicator 147b regardless of whether the gaming status is the ART gaming status or the single-card winning ART gaming status. Therefore, the main control board 71 and the status indicator 147b are notified. Functions as a means.

Further, when the main control board 71 wins the transition lottery to the short ART, the main control board 71 performs the short ART for the first period, and when the lottery to transition to the long ART is won, the main control substrate 71 receives the long period for the second period exceeding the first period. In order to perform ART, the main control board 71 functions as a first notification game control means and a second notification game control means.
At this time, in the sub control board 72, using the display unit 100, during the first period in which the durations of the short ART and the long ART overlap, it is notified whether or not the lottery for transition to the long ART has been won. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 and the display unit 100 function as an effect execution means.

Further, when the transfer lottery is won, the main control board 71 starts the specific section at the start of the bonus state. Then, since the main control board 71 determines the winning combination to be notified as an internal winning combination during the bonus state with a higher probability than in the states other than the bonus state, the main control board 71 starts the specific game. It functions as a means, a transfer lottery means, a notification game starting means, and an internal winning combination determining means.
Then, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 use the instruction monitor and display unit 100, and when the combination to be notified is determined as the internal winning combination during the specific section, a mode of the stop operation advantageous for the player. The main control board 71, the sub-control board 72, the instruction monitor, and the display unit 100 function as a notification unit to notify the correct pushing order.

In addition, when the subordinate control board 72 uses the display unit 100 to determine the internal winning combination as the internal winning combination in addition to the combination related to the bonus during the flag, for example, the effect of “white 7 navi_123” is produced. In order to perform, the sub-control board 72 and the display unit 100 function as an effect execution means.

Further, the main control board 71, in the RT2 gaming state, when the combination of symbols of the replay is displayed, the gaming state is maintained as the RT2 gaming state, while the combination of symbols of the RT1 transition rep is displayed, the game is played. In order to shift the state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state, the main control board 71 functions as a gaming state control means.
Further, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the main control board 71 does not give a notification for increasing medals during the RT2 gaming state, but only gives a notification for keeping the RT gaming state in a high-rep state. When the AT is performed and the transfer lottery is won, the main control board 71 functions as the first notification state control means and the second notification state control means in order to perform the Bellnavi AT for giving the notification for increasing the medals. At this time, the main control board 71 performs the lottery for transition to the Bellnavi AT during the RT2 gaming state more frequently than during the RT1 gaming state, so the main control board 71 functions as a transition lottery means.

Further, the main control board 71 is provided with a predetermined counter in the main RAM 33, the number of games in all game states, the number of games in a game state that is advantageous to the player, the number of medals awarded in all game states, and for the player. In order to count the number of medals paid out in an advantageous game state and calculate the specific section ratio and the accessory ratio from these count results, the main control board 71 uses the first counter, the second counter, It functions as a third counter, a fourth counter, and a calculation unit.

Further, the main control board 71 notifies the external device such as the data counter or the hall computer via the external centralized terminal board 73 when the specific section ratio or the accessory ratio is equal to or higher than the predetermined ratio. The main control board 71 and the external centralized terminal board 73 function as notification means.
Further, since the main control board 71 displays the specific section ratio and the accessory ratio on the ratio indicator 422 provided inside the housing 60, the main control board 71 and the ratio indicator 422 function as a display means. ..

Further, when the specific section is managed by the number of games, the main control board 71 counts the number of continuations indicating the number of unit games from the start of the specific section. Function as. At this time, the main control board 71, even if the counted number of continuations has reached the predetermined number, if the number of times of guarantee has not been notified yet, then performs the number of times of guarantee. Until the specific section is continued, the main control board 71 functions as a notification game ending means.

Further, if the main control board 71 wins the transition lottery to the ART game state before the end period of the CZ is reached, the game state is shifted from the CZ to the ART game state, and the end period of the CZ without winning the transition lottery. When it exceeds, the main control board 71 functions as a game state control means because the CZ is ended and the game state is shifted to the normal section. In addition, when the ART game state is continuously performed from CZ, the main control board 71 counts the number of advantageous intervals, which is the sum of the number of unit games in the CZ and the number of unit games in the ART game state, When the number of advantageous intervals reaches a predetermined number (1500 times), the ART game state is ended (limit processing) even before the end condition is satisfied, so the main control board 71 functions as a counting means and a notification game end means. To do.

In addition, the main control board 71 conducts a lottery for shifting to CZ during the normal section, and if the lottery is won, the right to shift to CZ is given. In order to accept the selection of one CZ from among the CZs, the main control board 71 functions as a right granting means and a selection receiving means.
At this time, the main control board 71 starts the selected one CZ when one CZ is selected, and when the game is started without selecting the CZ, the end period is Since the shortest CZ is started, the main control board 71 functions as a lottery state start means.

In addition, when the setting is changed during the specific section, the main control board 71 does not end the specific section and maintains the specific section after the setting is changed. When the (ization operation) is performed, the specific section is ended, so that the main control board 71 functions as a game control means.

Further, the specific section is a game state in which the unit specific section of one set of 30 games is played for the number of sets (that is, for one or a plurality of sets), and the main control board 71 permits execution of the unit specific section of the next set. If so, the unit specific section of the next set is started after the end of one unit specific section. In addition, when the bonus state is started during the specific section, the main control board 71 restarts the specific section after the bonus state ends, and particularly when the bonus state starts during the specific section, a predetermined condition (for example, If the number of remaining games in the set is less than a predetermined value), the unit identification of another set different from the unit identification section set that was executed when the bonus state was started due to the end of the bonus state When the section is restarted and the predetermined condition is not satisfied at the start of the bonus state in the specific section, the same unit specific section that was executed when the bonus state was started due to the end of the bonus state In order to restart the unit specific section of the set, the main control board 71 functions as a game state control means.
In addition, the main control board 71 outputs a signal indicating that the transfer lottery has been won at the time of the first hit in the transfer lottery to the outside, and when the unit specific section of the next set is started, a new unit specific section is set. A signal indicating that it has been passed is output to the outside. In particular, the main control board 71 outputs a signal indicating that a new unit specific section has been inserted to the outside when the unit specific section of another set is restarted after the end of the bonus state, while the bonus state is started. When restarting the unit specific section of the same set as the unit specific section that was being executed at the time, the main control board 71 functions as an output unit because the signal is not output to the outside.

[Appendix 1]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 1 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given according to the above, is known.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

In addition, a gaming machine having a replay time (RT) that enables a game while reducing the amount of medals used for the game by increasing the winning probability of the replay is widely known. For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-223289 proposes a gaming machine that activates a replay time when a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination. Such a replay time is also called an inter-flag RT, and a game can be played with a high probability of winning the replay until a bonus determined (carried over) as an internal winning combination is won.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
By the way, some pachi-slot machines having RT between flags like Patent Document 1 have been known so far, but if the winning probability of replay is simply increased until a bonus is won, the gaming property is poor and further gaming is performed. There is a demand for a gaming machine having the characteristics.

The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine which is rich in playability between flags.

[Means for solving the problem]

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are displayed (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R), and a symbol display means for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels (for example, , The display window 4), the start operation detecting means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71), and the reel is rotated based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the pattern changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) for changing the above-mentioned symbols and the start operation detected by the start operation detecting means, the stop operation is performed when the internal winning combination is determined. A combination of a plurality of symbols including a first symbol combination (for example, a bell) or a second symbol combination (for example, a cactus) can be stop-displayed according to the order of. The internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of winning combinations including 6), and the reels provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and stopping each reel. The stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means (for example, the stop switch 7S, the main control board 71) for detecting a stop operation for causing the internal winning combination and the stop operation detecting means to determine the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means. And reel stop control means (for example, a motor drive circuit 39, a main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the timing of When the variation of the symbols is stopped by the reel stop control means, whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means is won based on the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol displaying means When a predetermined winning combination (for example, MB) is determined as an internal winning combination by the winning determination means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining whether or not the predetermined winning combination is determined by the winning determination means. A predetermined winning combination carry-over means (for example, a main control board 71) that carries the predetermined winning combination as an internal winning combination until it is determined that the winning combination has been won. When a push forward combination is determined as an internal winning combination in a game that is not carried over as an internal winning combination (for example, between MB non-flags), the symbol display unit can display the first symbol combination. While stopping the fluctuation, stop the fluctuation of the symbol such that the second symbol combination cannot be displayed, and When a predetermined winning combination is carried over as an internal winning combination by the predetermined winning combination carry-over means (for example, between MB flags), when the push winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the symbols are determined according to the order of the stop operation. It is characterized in that the variation of symbols is stopped so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination can be displayed on the display means.

According to such a gaming machine, the predetermined winning combination carry-over means carries over the predetermined winning combination until a prize is won when the predetermined winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, so that it has a so-called gaming state between flags. Here, the pachi-slot machine performs reel stop control according to the internal winning combination, but since the predetermined winning combination is carried over as the internal winning combination between the flags, other winning combinations overlap with the predetermined winning combination. Therefore, even if the same winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop control different from that between non-flags can be performed.

In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the first symbol combination is displayed between the non-flags (the game in which the predetermined winning combination is not carried over as the internal winning combination). The stop control is performed so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination is displayed between the flags (the game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination) according to the order of the stop operation. Take control. Thereby, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to display different stop controls between flags and non-flags, that is, different symbol combinations between flags and non-flags while using the same winning combination. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of symbol combinations displayed between the flags without increasing the types of winning combinations, and it is possible to give variety to the game during the flags. Specifically, by setting the second symbol combination to a symbol combination corresponding to a so-called rare combination such as cherry, it becomes possible to win the rare combination by winning the push combination during the flags. , It is possible to increase the frequency of appearance of rare roles without changing the type of winning combination and the winning probability.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the notifying means (for example, the information display 14, the display unit 100, the main control board 71, the sub-control board 72) for notifying the order of the stop operation, and the predetermined role carry-over means are provided. When a predetermined condition is fulfilled in a game in which a predetermined winning combination is carried over as an internal winning combination (for example, a predetermined number of predictive games are finished), a predetermined lottery is drawn for a predetermined period (for example, a cactus is displayed when F_push order bell is won) The lottery state starting means (for example, the main control board 71) for starting the lottery state (for example, CT) for performing the flag conversion lottery of whether or not to carry out, and the push forward combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the lottery state. Then, further comprising a conversion lottery means for performing the predetermined lottery, the notification means, the predetermined combination carry-over means until the predetermined condition is satisfied, the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination In (e.g., CT sign game), when the press winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the order of the stop operation required to display the first symbol combination on the symbol display means is notified, In the lottery state, when the predetermined lottery of the conversion lottery means is won, the order of the stop operation necessary for displaying the second symbol combination on the symbol display means is notified, while the conversion is performed. In the case where the predetermined lottery of the lottery means is non-winning, the order of the stop operation required to display the first symbol combination on the symbol display means is informed.

According to such a gaming machine, a lottery state in which a predetermined lottery is performed is provided between the flags, and the state before the lottery state during the flag is started and the lottery state during the flag is notified of the stop operation. Different content. Specifically, before the lottery state starts, the notification for always displaying the first symbol combination is performed, and during the lottery state, when the lottery is won, the second symbol that is not displayed between non-flags The notification for displaying the combination is performed. On the contrary, when the lottery is not won, the notification for displaying the first symbol combination is performed. When the second symbol combination (rare combination) is continuous, the player will know that it is between the flags, so even if it is between the flags, by intentionally informing the first symbol combination, the game is played. This is preferable because it makes it difficult for the person to understand the current state. Further, by controlling the content of the notification by a predetermined lottery, the frequency of the second symbol combination (rare combination) among the flags can be adjusted according to the lottery probability of the predetermined lottery. It is possible to provide a period having a predetermined game property, and it is possible to diversify the game property between the flags.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the predetermined lottery of the conversion lottery means is won, or when the second symbol combination is displayed on the symbol display means based on the notification of the notification means, a privilege The present invention is characterized by further including a privilege giving unit (for example, a main control board 71) for giving a privilege (for example, a privilege of maintaining the duration of CT).

When a lottery is won in a predetermined lottery, the notification for displaying the second symbol combination is performed. Therefore, according to such a gaming machine, the second symbol combination (rare part) is displayed, and the privilege is awarded. Will be done. Thereby, during the flag, not only the frequency of the second symbol combination (rare combination) but also the privilege to be given can be adjusted in accordance with the lottery probability of the predetermined lottery. Can be diversified.

[Appendix 2]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 2 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given according to the above, is known.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

In addition, a gaming machine having a replay time (RT) that enables a game while reducing the amount of medals used for the game by increasing the winning probability of the replay is widely known. For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-223289 proposes a gaming machine that activates a replay time when a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination. Such a replay time is also called an inter-flag RT, and a game can be played with a high probability of winning the replay until a bonus determined (carried over) as an internal winning combination is won.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
By the way, some pachi-slot machines having RT between flags like Patent Document 1 have been known so far, but if the winning probability of replay is simply increased until a bonus is won, the gaming property is poor and further gaming is performed. There is a demand for a gaming machine having the characteristics.

The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine which is rich in playability between flags.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are displayed (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R), and a symbol display means for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels (for example, , The display window 4), the start operation detecting means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71), and the reel is rotated based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the pattern changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) for changing the above-mentioned symbols and the start operation detected by the start operation detecting means, the stop operation is performed when the internal winning combination is determined. Depending on the order of the first symbol combination (for example, bell) or the second symbol combination (for example, cactus), a combination of a plurality of symbols can be stopped and displayed. The internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of winning combinations including 6), and the reels provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and stopping each reel. The stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means (for example, the stop switch 7S, the main control board 71) for detecting a stop operation for causing the internal winning combination and the stop operation detecting means to determine the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means. And reel stop control means (for example, a motor drive circuit 39, a main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the timing of When the variation of the symbols is stopped by the reel stop control means, whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means is won based on the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol displaying means When a predetermined winning combination (for example, MB) is determined as an internal winning combination by the winning determination means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining whether or not the predetermined winning combination is determined by the winning determination means. A predetermined winning combination carry-over means (for example, the main control board 71) that carries the predetermined winning combination as an internal winning combination until the winning is determined, and the predetermined winning combination carry-over means carries the predetermined winning combination as an internal winning combination. A specific state starting unit (for example, the main control board 71) for starting a state (for example, CT) and numerical information (for example, the number of difference during CT) indicating the duration of the specific state in the specific state are counted. The counting means (for example, the main control board 71) and the specific state when the counting result of the counting means reaches a predetermined threshold value. When a specific state ending means for ending the state (for example, the main control board 71) and the first winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination during the specific state, a predetermined lottery (for example, F_push order bell wins cactus). One of a plurality of lottery stages having different probabilities of winning the predetermined lottery performed by the conversion lottery means (for example, the main control board 71) and the conversion lottery means for performing flag conversion lottery). Lottery stage setting means (for example, a main control board 71) for setting the lottery stage (for example, a CT meter), and notifying means (for example, the information display 14, the display unit 100, the main control board) for notifying information of the stop operation. 71, a sub-control board 72), and the reel stop control means, in the game (for example, between MB non-flags) in which the predetermined winning combination has not been carried over as the internal winning combination by the predetermined winning combination carrying-out means. When the winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the variation of the symbol is stopped so that the first symbol combination can be displayed on the symbol display means, while the variation of the symbol is disabled so that the second symbol combination cannot be displayed. If the first winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination in a game (for example, between MB flags) in which the predetermined winning combination is carried over as the internal winning combination by the predetermined winning combination carry-over means, the order of the stop operation is stopped. When the symbol display means can display the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination according to the above, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and the counting means wins the predetermined lottery of the conversion lottery means. In addition, a predetermined value is added to the predetermined numerical value information and the predetermined value is added to the predetermined threshold value, in the case of the predetermined non-winning of the conversion lottery means, the self counting A predetermined value is added to the numerical information, and the lottery stage setting means causes the second winning combination (for example, F_single chililip 1 to F_3 consecutive chililip 4) to be an internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means in the specific state. In response to being determined, the currently set lottery stage is updated to a lottery stage that is easier to win in the predetermined lottery than the lottery stage, and the notification means is the predetermined lottery of the conversion lottery means. In the case of winning, while notifying the order of the stop operation necessary to display the second symbol combination on the symbol display means, while the predetermined lottery of the conversion lottery means is non-winning, It is characterized by notifying the order of the stop operation necessary for displaying the first symbol combination on the symbol display means.

According to such a gaming machine, the predetermined winning combination carry-over means carries over the predetermined winning combination until a prize is won when the predetermined winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, so that it has a so-called gaming state between flags. Here, the pachi-slot machine performs reel stop control according to the internal winning combination, but since the predetermined winning combination is carried over as the internal winning combination between the flags, other winning combinations overlap with the predetermined winning combination. Therefore, even if the same winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop control different from that between non-flags can be performed.

In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the first symbol combination is displayed between the non-flags (the game in which the predetermined winning combination is not carried over as the internal winning combination). The stop control is performed so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination is displayed between the flags (the game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination) according to the order of the stop operation. Take control. Thereby, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to display different stop controls between flags and non-flags, that is, different symbol combinations between flags and non-flags while using the same winning combination. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of symbol combinations displayed between the flags without increasing the types of winning combinations, and it is possible to give variety to the game during the flags. Specifically, by setting the second symbol combination to a symbol combination corresponding to a so-called rare combination such as cherry, it becomes possible to win the rare combination by winning the first combination during the flags. , It is possible to increase the frequency of appearance of rare roles without changing the type of winning combination and the winning probability.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the gaming state is treated as a specific state for a predetermined period during the flags, and a predetermined lottery is performed when the first winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination during this specific status. The content of the stop operation to be notified based on the result of the lottery is changed. Specifically, when the lottery is won, the notification for displaying the second symbol combination that is not displayed between the non-flags is performed. On the contrary, when the lottery is not won, the first symbol combination is displayed. Is displayed. From the player's point of view, the second symbol combination can be displayed between the flags (specific state) by performing the stop operation according to the notification.

Further, the specific state ends when the numerical value information counted by the counting means reaches the threshold value, but the threshold value is increased when the predetermined lottery result performed when the first winning combination is won is won, and the numerical value information is increased when it is not won. Since the predetermined lottery is related to the above notification, when the second symbol combination is displayed (the predetermined lottery is won), the duration of the specific state is extended, and the first When the symbol combination is displayed (a predetermined lottery is not won), the duration of the specific state is consumed.

In this way, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, while changing the stop control during the flags, the duration of the specific state is controlled according to the combination of the symbols displayed (specifically, according to the predetermined lottery result). Therefore, it is possible to diversify the game play between the flags (specific state).

At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the probability of winning a predetermined lottery is controlled based on the lottery stage set by the lottery stage setting means, the second symbol combination in the specific state (rare combination) The frequency of can be adjusted according to the lottery probability (lottery stage) of a predetermined lottery. In addition, the lottery stage is updated (promoted) to a lottery stage in which it is easy to win a predetermined lottery when the second winning combination is won during the specific state. As a result, the player has a strong interest in the winning combination in the specific state (that is, a lot of the second winning combinations make it easier to win a predetermined lottery, and as a result, the specific state is It will continue for a long time), and it is possible to diversify the game play between the flags.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, in addition to a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and the specific state (for example, CT) as a state in which a game is to be played, by notifying information of a stop operation, the normal state is obtained. In comparison, when the player further has an advantageous state (eg, normal ART) advantageous to the player, and when the second winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determination means in the specific state, the advantageous state is continued. It is characterized in that it further comprises additional control means (for example, a main control board 71) for extending the period.

According to such a gaming machine, the winning of the second role in the specific state leads not only to promotion of the lottery stage but also extension of the duration of the advantageous state. The player is more interested in the winning combination in the specific state, so that the game characteristics can be diversified between the flags.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the second role is the number of specific symbols (for example, Chile symbols) displayed on the symbol display unit when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control unit. It includes a plurality of different second roles (for example, F_ single chililip 1-4 and F_2 double chililip 1-4 and triple chililip 1-4), the addition control means is configured to stop the fluctuation of the symbol. The second role having a larger number of specific symbols displayed on the symbol display means is characterized in that the duration of the advantageous state is extended longer.

According to such a gaming machine, the additional amount of the duration of the advantageous state varies depending on the number of the specific symbols displayed when the second winning combination is won, so that the gaming characteristics among the flags can be diversified. ..

[Appendix 3]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 3 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given according to the above, is known.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

In addition, a gaming machine having a replay time (RT) that enables a game while reducing the amount of medals used for the game by increasing the winning probability of the replay is widely known. For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-223289 proposes a gaming machine that activates a replay time when a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination. Such a replay time is also called an inter-flag RT, and a game can be played with a high probability of winning the replay until a bonus determined (carried over) as an internal winning combination is won.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
By the way, some pachi-slot machines having RT between flags like Patent Document 1 have been known so far, but if the winning probability of replay is simply increased until a bonus is won, the gaming property is poor and further gaming is performed. There is a demand for a gaming machine having the characteristics.

The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine which is rich in playability between flags.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are displayed (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R), and a symbol display means for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels (for example, , The display window 4), the start operation detecting means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71), and the reel is rotated based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the pattern changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) for changing the above-mentioned symbols and the start operation detected by the start operation detecting means, the stop operation is performed when the internal winning combination is determined. Depending on the order of the first symbol combination (for example, bell) or the second symbol combination (for example, cactus), a combination of a plurality of symbols can be stopped and displayed. The internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of winning combinations including 6), and the reels provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and stopping each reel. The stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means (for example, the stop switch 7S, the main control board 71) for detecting a stop operation for causing the internal winning combination and the stop operation detecting means to determine the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means. And reel stop control means (for example, a motor drive circuit 39, a main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the timing of When the variation of the symbols is stopped by the reel stop control means, whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means is won based on the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol displaying means When a predetermined winning combination (for example, MB) is determined as an internal winning combination by the winning determination means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining whether or not the predetermined winning combination is determined by the winning determination means. A predetermined winning combination carry-over means (for example, the main control board 71) that carries the predetermined winning combination as an internal winning combination until it is determined that a prize has been won, and the predetermined winning combination is carried over as an internal winning combination by the predetermined winning combination carry-over means. A specific state starting means (for example, the main control board 71) for starting the specific state, and a counting means (for example, a difference number in CT) indicating the duration of the specific state in the specific state (for example, a difference number) , The main control board 71) and when the counting result of the counting means reaches a predetermined threshold value, the specific state is ended. When a specific state ending means (for example, the main control board 71) and the first winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination during the specific state, whether to display a cactus at a predetermined lottery (for example, F_push order bell winning) A conversion lottery means (for example, the main control board 71) that performs a flag conversion lottery) and a lottery step from among a plurality of lottery steps that have different probabilities of winning the predetermined lottery performed by the conversion lottery means ( For example, a lottery stage setting means (for example, a main control board 71) for setting a CT meter and an informing means (for example, an information display 14, a display unit 100, a main control board 71, a sub-control) for notifying information of a stop operation. Board 72), and the reel stop control means, in the game (for example, between MB non-flag) the predetermined combination is not carried over as the internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carry-over means, the first winning is the internal winning. When it is determined as a role, while stopping the fluctuation of the symbol so that the first symbol combination can be displayed on the symbol display means, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped so that the second symbol combination cannot be displayed, and When the first winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination in a game (for example, between MB flags) in which the predetermined winning combination is carried over as an internal winning combination by the predetermined winning combination carry-over means, the above-mentioned operations are performed according to the order of stop operations. The variation of the symbols is stopped so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination can be displayed on the symbol display means, and the counting means, when the predetermined lottery of the conversion lottery means is won, A predetermined value is added to the numerical value information to be counted, a predetermined value is added to the predetermined threshold value, and in the case of the predetermined non-winning of the conversion lottery means, to the numerical value information to be counted by itself. A predetermined value is added to the notification means, and when the notification means wins the predetermined lottery of the conversion lottery means, the order of the stop operation necessary for displaying the second symbol combination on the symbol display means. On the other hand, while notifying the predetermined lottery of the conversion lottery means, in the case of non-winning, the order of the stop operation necessary for displaying the first symbol combination on the symbol display means is informed, and the conversion is performed. When the lottery step setting means sets a specific lottery step (for example, CT meter “MAX”), the lottery means always causes the predetermined lottery to be won during a predetermined number of unit games, and the lottery step setting means Is set to a predetermined lottery stage, the predetermined lottery is won with a predetermined probability.

According to such a gaming machine, the predetermined winning combination carry-over means carries over the predetermined winning combination until a prize is won when the predetermined winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, so that it has a so-called gaming state between flags. Here, the pachi-slot machine performs reel stop control according to the internal winning combination, but since the predetermined winning combination is carried over as the internal winning combination between the flags, other winning combinations overlap with the predetermined winning combination. Therefore, even if the same winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop control different from that between non-flags can be performed.

In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the first symbol combination is displayed between the non-flags (the game in which the predetermined winning combination is not carried over as the internal winning combination). The stop control is performed so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination is displayed between the flags (the game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination) according to the order of the stop operation. Take control. Thereby, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to display different stop controls between flags and non-flags, that is, different symbol combinations between flags and non-flags while using the same winning combination. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of symbol combinations displayed between the flags without increasing the types of winning combinations, and it is possible to give variety to the game during the flags. Specifically, by setting the second symbol combination to a symbol combination corresponding to a so-called rare combination such as cherry, it becomes possible to win the rare combination by winning the first combination during the flags. , It is possible to increase the frequency of appearance of rare roles without changing the type of winning combination and the winning probability.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the gaming state is treated as a specific state for a predetermined period during the flags, and a predetermined lottery is performed when the first winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination during this specific status. The content of the stop operation to be notified based on the result of the lottery is changed. Specifically, when the lottery is won, the notification for displaying the second symbol combination that is not displayed between the non-flags is performed. On the contrary, when the lottery is not won, the first symbol combination is displayed. Is displayed. From the player's point of view, the second symbol combination can be displayed between the flags (specific state) by performing the stop operation according to the notification.

Further, the specific state ends when the numerical value information counted by the counting means reaches the threshold value, but the threshold value is increased when the predetermined lottery result performed when the first winning combination is won is won, and the numerical value information is increased when it is not won. Since the predetermined lottery is related to the above notification, when the second symbol combination is displayed (the predetermined lottery is won), the duration of the specific state is extended, and the first When the symbol combination is displayed (a predetermined lottery is not won), the duration of the specific state is consumed.

In this way, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, while changing the stop control during the flags, the duration of the specific state is controlled according to the combination of the symbols displayed (specifically, according to the predetermined lottery result). Therefore, it is possible to diversify the game play between the flags (specific state).

At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the probability of winning a predetermined lottery is controlled based on the lottery stage set by the lottery stage setting means, the second symbol combination in the flags (rare combination) The frequency of can be adjusted according to the lottery probability (lottery stage) of a predetermined lottery. In particular, if a specific lottery stage is set as the lottery stage, during a predetermined number of unit games, the predetermined lottery will be won without fail, so you can have expectations for subsequent games, The interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the second winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination in the specific state, the lottery step setting means has a probability according to the currently selected lottery step. It is characterized in that the stage is updated to a lottery stage in which it is easier to win the predetermined lottery than the lottery stage.

According to such a gaming machine, promotion of the lottery stage based on the second role will be performed with a probability according to the currently-selected lottery stage, so that there is a new game property for promotion of the lottery stage. The interest in the game is improved.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the second role is the number of specific symbols (for example, Chile symbols) displayed on the symbol display unit when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control unit. A plurality of different types of second winning combinations (for example, F_single chililip 1-4 and F_2 double chililip 1-4 and triple chililip 1-4) are included, and the lottery stage setting means is used when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped. It is possible to update the lottery stage that is currently set with a higher probability as the number of the specific symbols displayed on the symbol display means is larger, to a lottery stage that is easier to win the predetermined lottery than the lottery stage. Characterize.

According to such a gaming machine, since the probability of promoting the lottery stage varies depending on the number of the specific symbols displayed when the second combination is won, it is possible to diversify the game characteristics among the flags.

[Appendix 4]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 4 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given according to the above, is known.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, as disclosed in Patent Document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057732), information for establishing an internal winning combination is provided to a player so that the winning combination determined as an internal winning combination is not lost in recent years. 2. Description of the Related Art There are known gaming machines that notify a player of advantageous information. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time), and the AT function is provided. Gaming machines are called AT machines and ART machines.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
Conventionally, in AT machines and ART machines, navigation is performed under the control of the sub (sub-control) side. However, in recent years, the presence or absence of navigation affects the player's profit (so-called ball output). It is required that navigation be performed on the main (main control) side that manages the profit of the player. Here, when navigating on the main side, the navi has a strong implication of guaranteeing that profits are strictly managed, and it is required to strictly represent the current gaming situation.

However, in such a navigation, there is a problem that the mode of navigation becomes monotonous and the variety of games is impaired.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing various types of navigation while appropriately performing navigation that affects profits on the main side.

[Means for solving the problem]
A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state and an advantageous state (for example, CT) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state in which a game is played, and a plurality of symbols are displayed. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R), a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the symbols displayed on the reels, and a main for controlling the progress of the game A control unit (for example, a main control board 71) and a sub-control unit (for example, a sub-control board 72) that controls effects related to the game are provided, and the main control unit detects a start operation by the player. Based on the detection means (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71) and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, the symbol changing means for changing the symbol by rotating the reel (for example, a motor drive circuit). 39, the main control board 71), based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, the first symbol combination (eg, replay) or the first symbol combination according to the order of the stop operation when the internal winning combination is determined. A combination of a plurality of symbols including the symbol combination of 2 (for example, reach eye lip) can be stopped and displayed with a predetermined probability from among a plurality of hands including a push forward combination (for example, F_reach eye lip A to D). An internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining a winning combination, and a stop operation detecting means (corresponding to the plurality of reels) for detecting a stopping operation for stopping each reel (for example, The rotation of the reel is stopped based on the stop switch 7S, the main control board 71), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. By the reel stop control means (for example, the main control board 71) that stops the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means, the symbol Based on the combination of symbols displayed on the display means, a winning determination means (for example, main control board 71) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means has won, and the advantageous state. If the winning in the first lottery performed by the advantageous state lottery means (for example, the main control board 71) and the advantageous state lottery means that performs the first lottery (for example, the CT lottery) whether or not to start, the winning is performed. From the advantageous state starting means (for example, the main control board 71) that starts the advantageous state after a unit game is played a predetermined number of times If the winning combination is determined, the special lottery is performed when the conversion lottery means (for example, the main control board 71) that performs the second lottery (for example, the flag conversion lottery) and the second lottery that the conversion lottery means performs. (Eg, CT winning), and a privilege giving means (for example, a main control board 71), and the reel stop control means, when the push forward combination is determined as an internal winning combination, a stop operation. The variation of symbols is stopped so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination can be displayed on the symbol display means according to the order, and the sub-control unit executes the effect according to the mode of the stop operation. In the unit game of a predetermined number of times from winning the first lottery performed by the effect state lottery means to the effect state execution means (for example, the display unit 100, the sub-control board 72) and starting the advantageous state, the push And a notification lottery means (for example, a sub-control board 72) that performs a third lottery (for example, a navigation lottery during the CT sign) when the winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, When the production execution means wins the second lottery performed by the conversion lottery means of the main control unit or the third lottery performed by the notification lottery means of the sub-control unit, the second symbol is displayed on the symbol display means. It is characterized in that effects are executed according to the order of stop operations for displaying the symbol combination.

In such a gaming machine, when the second lottery performed on the main (main control unit) side is won, a special privilege is given and the second symbol is produced by the sub (sub-control unit) side performance executing means. Notification is given to display the combination. Since the second symbol combination is displayed by performing the stop operation according to this notification, from the player's point of view, the second symbol combination means a symbol combination (for example, reach) to which a special privilege is given. It will be. Therefore, even if the second symbol combination is displayed, if no privilege is given, the player feels a great dissatisfaction and loses interest. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the main side determines whether or not to grant the privilege, and the second symbol combination is notified according to this determination, so that the notification that affects the privilege (profit) is given. It can be properly managed on the main side.

By the way, in a pachi-slot machine, when performing an advantageous control for a player, not performing the advantageous control immediately, but performing the advantageous control after playing a predetermined number of times, for example, ART If such a prize has been won, the ART may actually be started after several predictive games. During such a sign game, since it has already been decided to give a privilege (profit) to the player, even if the second symbol combination is displayed and the privilege accompanying this display is not given. Players will not be dissatisfied. That is, since the advantageous control is performed when the aura game is repeated several times, the player feels that the second symbol combination displayed during the aura game has provided a privilege, which is of interest. There is no loss. On the other hand, increasing the opportunity to display the second symbol combination (for example, reach eye) that is displayed when a special privilege is given increases the variation in the way the symbol combination is shown and improves the game playability. To do.

Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the notification lottery means on the sub (sub-control unit) side is in the sign game (a predetermined number of unit games from winning the first lottery to starting the advantageous state). 3 lottery is performed, and the effect execution means notifies the second symbol combination based on the lottery result. Although this notification is not related to the grant of the privilege as described above, by performing the stop operation according to the notification, the second symbol combination displayed when the special privilege is granted can be displayed, and the game can be played. The property is improved. As described above, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, the notifications that affect the profit (privilege) are managed on the main side, while the notifications that do not affect the profit have a variety of appearances on the sub side. A certain notification can be given.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the privilege granting means grants a privilege to win the first lottery performed by the advantageous state lottery means when the second lottery is won.

Since the advantageous state starts when the first lottery is won, when such a gaming machine wins the second lottery (as a result, the second symbol combination is displayed), the advantageous state starts. Even in this case, the second symbol combination is notified along with the third lottery during the predictive game until the advantageous state starts. From the player's point of view, whether the display of the second symbol combination is displayed because it is in the aura game (that is, is it displayed as a result of the third lottery), or the aura game is accompanied by this display. Since it is not known whether it has been performed (that is, whether it is displayed as a result of the second lottery), the player has a strong interest in the flow of the game so far, and the interest is improved.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the privilege granting means does not grant the special privilege when the third lottery performed by the notification lottery means of the sub-control part is won, and the main control part The special privilege is given when the second lottery performed by the conversion lottery means is won.

According to such a gaming machine, of the second lottery and the third lottery that are conditions for informing the second symbol combination, a special privilege is given only when the second lottery performed on the main side is won, If the third lottery performed on the sub side is won, no special privilege is given. As a result, the main side manages notifications that affect profits (privileges), while the sub-sides can perform notifications that have a variety of presentation effects on the sub side.

[Appendix 5]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 5 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given according to the above, is known.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

In addition, a gaming machine having a replay time (RT) that enables a game while reducing the amount of medals used for the game by increasing the winning probability of the replay is widely known. For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-223289 proposes a gaming machine that activates a replay time when a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination. Such a replay time is also called an inter-flag RT, and a game can be played with a high probability of winning the replay until a bonus determined (carried over) as an internal winning combination is won.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
By the way, some pachi-slot machines having RT between flags like Patent Document 1 have been known so far, but if the winning probability of replay is simply increased until a bonus is won, the gaming property is poor and further gaming is performed. There is a demand for a gaming machine having the characteristics.

The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine which is rich in playability between flags.

[Means for solving the problem]
A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state and an advantageous state (for example, ART) that is advantageous to a player as compared with the normal state by notifying information of a normal state and a stop operation as a state in which a game is played. Therefore, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And, based on the start operation detection means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71) and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, by rotating the reel, the symbol Based on the detection of the start operation by the pattern changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the start operation detecting means for changing the number, depending on the order of the stop operation when the internal winning combination is determined. A combination of a plurality of symbols including a first symbol combination (for example, bell) or a second symbol combination (for example, cactus) can be stopped and displayed as a first combination (for example, F_push order bells 1 to 6), and stop. A second combination (for example, F_single chirp 1 to 1) that can stop and display a combination of a plurality of symbols including a third symbol combination (for example, replay) or a fourth symbol combination (for example, chililip) according to the order of operations. 4, F_2 consecutive Chilelips 1 to 4, F_3 consecutive Chilelips 1 to 4), and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of winning combinations. It is determined by stop operation detection means (for example, stop switch 7S, main control board 71) provided corresponding to a plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and the internal winning combination determination means. Reel stop control means for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. (For example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and, when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means, based on the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means, the internal winning The winning determination means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means is won, and the predetermined winning (for example, MB) is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determination means. When the winning combination is determined, the predetermined winning combination is regarded as an internal winning combination until it is determined that the predetermined winning combination has won. The predetermined role carry-over means (for example, the main control board 71) to carry over, the notification means (for example, the information display 14, the display unit 100, the main control board 71, the sub-control board 72) for notifying the information of the stop operation, and the advantages In the state, and when the first winning combination is carried over as the internal winning combination by the predetermined winning combination carry-over means, if the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the first lottery (for example, F_push order bell winning) The first conversion lottery means (for example, the main control board 71) that performs a flag conversion lottery whether or not to display the cactus at the time, and the predetermined combination as the internal winning combination by the advantageous state and the predetermined combination carryover means. If the second winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination when not carried over, a flag conversion of whether or not to display the second lottery (eg, F_single chililip, F_2 consecutive chililip, F_3 consecutive chililip win) A second conversion lottery means (for example, a main control board 71) for performing a lottery), and the reel stop control means is a game in which the predetermined winning combination is not carried over as an internal winning combination by the predetermined winning combination carry-over means (for example, , MB non-flag) is determined as the internal winning combination, the first symbol combination can be displayed on the symbol display means to stop the fluctuation of symbols, while the second symbol In the game (for example, between MB flags) in which the predetermined winning combination carry-over means carries the predetermined winning combination as an internal winning combination, the first winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination. Then, the variation of the symbols is stopped so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination can be displayed on the symbol display means in accordance with the order of the stop operation, and the predetermined combination carry-over means allows the predetermined combination. When the second winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination in a game in which a winning combination is not carried over as an internal winning combination, the third symbol combination or the fourth symbol is displayed on the symbol display means according to the order of the stop operation. While stopping the variation of the symbols so that the combination can be displayed, when the second winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the game in which the predetermined winning combination is carried over as the internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carrying-over means, the symbol While stopping the fluctuation of the symbol so that the fourth symbol combination can be displayed on the display means, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped so that the third symbol combination cannot be displayed, and the notification means causes the first conversion lottery. When the first lottery of the means is won, the order of the stop operation required for displaying the second symbol combination on the symbol display means is notified. On the other hand, in the case of non-winning the first lottery of the first conversion lottery means, informing the order of the stop operation necessary to display the first symbol combination on the symbol display means, When the second lottery of the second conversion lottery means is won, the order of the stop operation necessary for displaying the fourth symbol combination on the symbol display means is notified, while the second conversion lottery is given. When the second lottery of the means is non-winning, the order of the stop operation necessary for displaying the third symbol combination on the symbol display means is informed.

According to such a gaming machine, the predetermined winning combination carry-over means carries over the predetermined winning combination until a prize is won when the predetermined winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, so that it has a so-called gaming state between flags. Here, the pachi-slot machine performs reel stop control according to the internal winning combination, but since the predetermined winning combination is carried over as the internal winning combination between the flags, other winning combinations overlap with the predetermined winning combination. Therefore, even if the same winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop control different from that between non-flags can be performed.

In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the first symbol combination is displayed between the non-flags (the game in which the predetermined winning combination is not carried over as the internal winning combination). The stop control is performed so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination is displayed between the flags (the game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination) according to the order of the stop operation. Take control. Further, when the second winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, stop control is performed so that the third symbol combination or the fourth symbol combination is displayed between the non-flags in accordance with the order of the stop operation, and between the flags. Then, stop control is performed so that the fourth symbol combination is displayed. Thereby, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to display different stop controls between flags and non-flags, that is, different symbol combinations between flags and non-flags while using the same winning combination. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of symbol combinations displayed between the flags without increasing the types of winning combinations, and it is possible to give variety to the game during the flags. Specifically, by making the second symbol combination and the fourth symbol combination a symbol combination corresponding to a so-called rare combination such as cherry, a rare combination is won by winning the first combination during the flags. In addition to being able to do that, the rare part will always win in the second winning part, and the appearance frequency of the rare part can be increased without changing the type of the winning part and the winning probability.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the flag, the first lottery is performed, and the second winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the non-flag. The second lottery is performed, and the content of the stop operation to be notified based on the result of these lottery is changed. Specifically, when the first lottery is won, the notification for displaying the second symbol combination which is not displayed between the non-flags is performed, and conversely, when the first lottery is not won, Notification for displaying the symbol combination 1 is performed. In addition, when the second lottery is won, the notification for displaying the fourth symbol combination is given. On the contrary, when the second lottery is not won, the third symbol combination is displayed. Make a notification.

Thus, between the flags, the combination of symbols to be notified based on the first lottery is determined, and between the non-flags, by determining the combination of symbols to be notified based on the second lottery, between the flags and between the non-flags. In both, it is possible to control the combination of symbols to be displayed, and it is possible to enhance the playability between both flags and between non-flags.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first lottery of the first conversion lottery means is won, or when the second lottery of the second conversion lottery means is won, a privilege (for example, first lottery) A privilege granting means (for example, the main control board 71) for granting a privilege to maintain the difference in the number of ending CTs in the case of winning a prize, and a privilege granting to increase the number of ART games in the case of winning a second lottery). It is characterized by further comprising.

When the first lottery is won, the second symbol combination is displayed by following the notification, and when the second lottery is won, the fourth symbol combination is displayed by following the notification. According to the gaming machine, the appearance frequency of the symbol combination (rare combination) to which the privilege is given can be controlled between the flags and between the non-flags, and the gaming property between the flags and between the non-flags is enhanced. be able to.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first conversion lottery means performs the first lottery so as to win the probability with a set first lottery stage (for example, a CT meter), When the second winning combination is decided as the internal winning combination in the game in which the predetermined winning combination is carried over as the internal winning combination by the predetermined winning combination carrying-out means, the currently set first lottery step is changed from the first lottery step. The first lottery step setting means (for example, the main control board 71) for updating the first lottery step having a high probability of winning the first lottery.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, when the second winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the flags, the first lottery step is updated (promoted to the first lottery step having a higher probability of winning the first lottery). ) Will be done. As a result, the player has a strong interest in the winning combination between the flags, and the game characteristics can be diversified during the flags. Further, when the second winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the flags, the fourth symbol combination is always displayed. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the third symbol combination is displayed, This is preferable because it is possible to know that the first lottery stage has been promoted.

[Appendix 6]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 6 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given according to the above, is known.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

In addition, a gaming machine having a replay time (RT) that enables a game while reducing the amount of medals used for the game by increasing the winning probability of the replay is widely known. For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-223289 proposes a gaming machine that activates a replay time when a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination. Such a replay time is also called an inter-flag RT, and a game can be played with a high probability of winning the replay until a bonus determined (carried over) as an internal winning combination is won.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
By the way, some pachi-slot machines having RT between flags like Patent Document 1 have been known so far, but if the winning probability of replay is simply increased until a bonus is won, the gaming property is poor and further gaming is performed. There is a demand for a gaming machine having the characteristics.

The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine which is rich in playability between flags.

[Means for solving the problem]
A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state and an advantageous state (for example, ART) that is advantageous to a player as compared with the normal state by notifying information of a normal state and a stop operation as a state in which a game is played. Therefore, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And, based on the start operation detection means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71) and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, by rotating the reel, the symbol Based on the detection of the start operation by the pattern changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the start operation detecting means for changing the number, depending on the order of the stop operation when the internal winning combination is determined. A combination of a plurality of symbols including a first symbol combination (for example, bell) or a second symbol combination (for example, cactus) can be stopped and displayed as a first combination (for example, F_push order bells 1 to 6), and stop. A second combination (for example, F_single chirp 1 to 1) that can stop and display a combination of a plurality of symbols including a third symbol combination (for example, replay) or a fourth symbol combination (for example, chililip) according to the order of operations. 4, F_2 consecutive Chilelips 1 to 4, F_3 consecutive Chilelips 1 to 4), and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of winning combinations. It is determined by stop operation detection means (for example, stop switch 7S, main control board 71) provided corresponding to a plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and the internal winning combination determination means. Reel stop control means for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. (For example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and, when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means, based on the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means, the internal winning The winning determination means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means is won, and the predetermined winning (for example, MB) is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determination means. When the winning combination is determined, the predetermined winning combination is regarded as an internal winning combination until it is determined that the predetermined winning combination has won. The predetermined winning combination carry-over means (for example, the main control board 71) to be carried over, and the internal winning combination determination in a state where the predetermined winning combination carry-over means in the advantageous state has not carried over the predetermined winning combination (for example, between non-flags of normal ART). After the means determines the predetermined winning combination as an internal winning combination, and the predetermined number of unit games are played without winning the predetermined winning combination (for example, when the precursor is exhausted), the duration of the advantageous state is extended. The additional game starting means (for example, the main control board 71) for starting the additional game state (for example, CT), and the second winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determination means during the additional game state. And, the first winning combination control means (for example, the main control board 71) that extends the duration of the advantageous state, and the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means during the additional playing state. Then, the conversion lottery means (for example, the main control board 71) for performing a predetermined lottery (for example, a flag conversion lottery for displaying or not displaying the cactus at the time of F_push order bell winning) and the predetermined lottery performed by the conversion lottery means. When the lottery is won, the second addition control means (for example, the main control board 71) that extends the duration of the addition game state, and the notification means (for example, the information display 14, the display unit) that notifies the stop operation information. 100, a main control board 71, a sub-control board 72), the reel stop control means, the predetermined winning combination carry-over means, the predetermined winning combination is not carried over as an internal winning combination (for example, between MB non-flag) ), when the first winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the first symbol combination can be displayed on the symbol displaying means to stop the fluctuation of the symbols, but the second symbol combination cannot be displayed. Stop the fluctuation of the symbol, and when the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the game (for example, between MB flags) in which the predetermined winning combination is carried over as the internal winning combination by the predetermined winning combination carry-over means, it is stopped. The variation of symbols is stopped so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination can be displayed on the symbol display means according to the order of operation, and the predetermined symbol carry-over means causes the predetermined symbol combination to be an internal winning combination. As the second winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination in the game that is not carried over as, it is possible to display the third symbol combination or the fourth symbol combination on the symbol display means in accordance with the order of the stop operation. While stopping the fluctuation of the symbol, the second in the game in which the predetermined winning combination is carried over as the internal winning combination by the predetermined winning combination carry-over means. When the winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the variation of the symbol is stopped so that the fourth symbol combination can be displayed on the symbol display means, while the variation of the symbol is disabled so that the third symbol combination cannot be displayed. When the second winning combination is stopped as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means in a state where the predetermined winning combination carry-over means in the advantageous state does not carry over the predetermined winning combination, the symbol is given by the notifying means. A first notification lottery that determines whether or not to notify the order of the stop operation for displaying the fourth symbol combination on the display means (for example, F_single chililip, F_2 twin chililip, F_3 chililip display chililip at the time of winning) The first notification lottery means (for example, the main control board 71) that performs a flag conversion lottery of whether or not to carry out, and the internal winning combination in a state where the predetermined combination carry-over means in the advantageous state does not carry over the predetermined combination. During the predetermined number of unit games (for example, during the CT precursor game) after the determination means determines the predetermined winning combination as an internal winning combination and before the additional game starting means starts the additional playing state. When the second winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, the second notification lottery means for performing the second notification lottery for deciding whether or not to notify the order of the stop operation by the notifying means ( For example, the sub-control board 72), further, the notification means, based on the lottery result of the first notification random determination of the first notification random determination means, and the second notification random determination of the second notification random determination means, It is characterized by notifying the information of the stop operation.

According to such a gaming machine, the predetermined winning combination carry-over means carries over the predetermined winning combination until a prize is won when the predetermined winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, so that it has a so-called gaming state between flags. Here, the pachi-slot machine performs reel stop control according to the internal winning combination, but since the predetermined winning combination is carried over as the internal winning combination between the flags, other winning combinations overlap with the predetermined winning combination. Therefore, even if the same winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop control different from that between non-flags can be performed.

In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the first symbol combination is displayed between the non-flags (the game in which the predetermined winning combination is not carried over as the internal winning combination). The stop control is performed so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination is displayed between the flags (the game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination) according to the order of the stop operation. Take control. Further, when the second winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, stop control is performed so that the third symbol combination or the fourth symbol combination is displayed between the non-flags in accordance with the order of the stop operation, and between the flags. Then, stop control is performed so that the fourth symbol combination is displayed. Thereby, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to display different stop controls between flags and non-flags, that is, different symbol combinations between flags and non-flags while using the same winning combination. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of symbol combinations displayed between the flags without increasing the types of winning combinations, and it is possible to give variety to the game during the flags. Specifically, by making the second symbol combination and the fourth symbol combination a symbol combination corresponding to a so-called rare combination such as cherry, a rare combination is won by winning the first combination during the flags. In addition to being able to do that, the rare part will always win in the second winning part, and the appearance frequency of the rare part can be increased without changing the type of the winning part and the winning probability.

By the way, in a pachi-slot machine, when performing advantageous control for a player, not performing the advantageous control immediately, but performing the advantageous control after performing a predetermined number of games (precursor game). There is. In the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is in the advantageous state and the predetermined winning combination is carried over as the internal winning combination, that is, when the flag is reached during the advantageous state, the additional gaming state is started, and this additional gaming state Before the start of, the predictive game a predetermined number of times.

Since the stop control is different between the non-flags between the flags as described above, when the sign game is performed during the flags like the gaming machine of the present invention, the stop control (combination of the symbols displayed) Therefore, the player may know that the omen game is in progress. For example, during the flag, the fourth symbol combination is always displayed in the winning of the second combination, and the third symbol combination is not displayed. On the other hand, during the non-flag, according to the pushing order of the second winning combination. Since the third symbol combination or the fourth symbol combination is displayed, if the fourth symbol combination is frequently displayed regardless of the pressing order, the player is in the middle of the flag (during a sign game). You will understand.

Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the second winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the flag (during the precursor game), the pushing order (the order of the stop operation) is intentionally notified. At the time of winning the second combination during the flags, since the fourth symbol combination is displayed regardless of the pressing order, it is not necessary to notify the pressing order as it is, but when the pressing order is notified, The player recognizes that the fourth symbol combination has been displayed according to the informed pressing order (note that between the non-flags, the fourth symbol combination is displayed depending on the pressing order, so the fourth in the informed game) When the symbol combination is displayed, the player can easily recognize that it is in the non-flag state, and it is difficult for the player to grasp that it is in the flag state (during a sign game). As a result, it is possible to prevent the game in the middle of the flag (during the precursor game) from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to improve the playability in the middle of the flag.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a main control unit (for example, a main control board 71) for controlling the progress of the game and a sub-control unit (for example, a sub-control board 72) for controlling the effects regarding the game are provided, The second notification lottery means is included in the sub-control unit.

In recent years, it has been required that the main profit (main control unit) be properly managed by the player, and the notification of the stop operation affects the profit. Therefore, the notification of the stop operation affecting the profit is Must be controlled by the side. In this respect, the notification of the pushing order when the second winning combination is won during the flags does not affect the profit (that is, the fourth symbol combination is always displayed during the flags). In this gaming machine, the notification is controlled by the sub (sub control unit) side. Since the main control unit has a larger capacity limit than the sub-control unit, by controlling the notification on the sub side when it does not affect profits, it is possible to reduce the capacity and processing load of the main control unit. It is suitable.

[Appendix 7]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 7 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given according to the above, is known.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

In recent years, a gaming machine is known that informs the player of information advantageous for the player such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to drop the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time). In addition, a game machine that performs AT in a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is high is also referred to as an ART machine or the like.

According to the gaming machine equipped with such AT function and ART function, the number of gaming media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform the navigation, so that the player can perform AT or ART. You will want to have a long period of time.

Therefore, in recent years, ingenuity for increasing the period of AT or ART has been made from various viewpoints. For example, in Patent Document (JP 2010-057732A), it is possible to specify watermelon, cherry, etc. as an internal winning combination. A gaming machine that increases the number of AT games when the winning combination is determined is disclosed. According to this gaming machine, since the number of AT games increases in accordance with the internal winning combination, the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination to play the game, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
However, in the gaming machine of the patent document, since the AT game number is simply increased based on the internal winning combination, the playability tends to be monotonous, and a new mechanism for increasing the AT game number has been demanded.

The present invention has been made in view of such demands, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that enhances interest in adding an advantageous state and allows a player to continue playing without getting bored.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that has a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state, as a state for playing a game. Therefore, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And, based on the start operation detection means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71) and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, by rotating the reel, the symbol Based on the detection of the start operation by the pattern changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) that changes the start operation detecting means, the internal winning combination is determined with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) and a stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch 7S, a main switch) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. Based on the control board 71), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, the symbol display is achieved by stopping the rotation of the reel. The reel stop control means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the means, and when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means, the symbol Based on the combination of symbols displayed on the display means, a winning determination means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won, and a predetermined condition. When the above is satisfied, the additional game starting means (for example, the main control board 71) for starting the additional game state (for example, CT) that extends the duration of the advantageous state, and the internal winning combination determination in the additional game state Depending on the internal winning combination determined by the means, the addition control means (for example, the main control board 71) for extending the duration of the advantageous state (for example, adding the number of ART games), and the addition game state, Counting means (eg, CT game number counter, main control board 71) that counts the number of unit games in which the duration is not extended by the addition control means, and the counting result of the counting means reaches a predetermined number (eg, 8 times). When the game is reached, the game is finished and the game is finished. (For example, a main control board 71).

In such a gaming machine, when shifting to the additional game state, the duration of the advantageous state is extended (addition is performed) until the counting means counts a predetermined number of times. Here, the counting means counts the number of unit games in which the duration is not extended (addition is not performed) during the addition game state, that is, when the addition is performed during the addition game state, the unit game Since the number of times is not counted, the additional game state continues for a long time as the additional game is performed. For the player, it does not know how long the add-on gaming state will continue, and since the add-on gaming state does not end as long as the add-on gaming state is being added, so for the game in the add-on gaming state It is possible to continue to play the game without getting bored because of a strong interest, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game while the player is in the additional playing state.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first winning combination (for example, F_probable chilirip, F_1 probable chililip) is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determination means, a conversion lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery. (For example, the main control board 71), the addition control means, if the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, if the predetermined lottery is won, the continuation period is set. When the second winning combination (for example, cactus, weak cherry, strong cherry) is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, the continuation period is extended by the second additional charging amount. The counting means returns the counting result to an initial value when the continuation period is extended in response to the first winning combination being determined as an internal winning combination.

In such a gaming machine, when the first winning combination or the second winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the additional playing state, the additional winning is performed, and the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. When the addition is performed in accordance with, the counting result of the counting means returns to the initial value. As a result, even if the additional game state is about to end (the counting result is close to the predetermined number of times), the additional game state is restarted from the beginning by performing the additional game according to the first role. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the additional game state.

In addition, the addition based on the first winning combination (returning the counting result to the initial value) is performed only when the first winning combination is won in a predetermined lottery when the first winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination. It is possible to prevent an excessive profit from being given to the player, and it is possible to balance the profit of the player and the game store.

[Appendix 8]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 8 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given according to the above, is known.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

In recent years, a gaming machine is known that informs the player of information advantageous for the player such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to drop the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time). In addition, a game machine that performs AT in a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is high is also referred to as an ART machine or the like.

According to the gaming machine equipped with such AT function and ART function, the number of gaming media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform the navigation, so that the player can perform AT or ART. You will want to have a long period of time.

Therefore, in recent years, ingenuity for increasing the period of AT or ART has been made from various viewpoints. For example, in Patent Document (JP 2010-057732A), it is possible to specify watermelon, cherry, etc. as an internal winning combination. A gaming machine that increases the number of AT games when the winning combination is determined is disclosed. According to this gaming machine, since the number of AT games increases in accordance with the internal winning combination, the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination to play the game, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
However, in the gaming machine of the patent document, since the AT game number is simply increased based on the internal winning combination, the playability tends to be monotonous, and a new mechanism for increasing the AT game number has been demanded.

The present invention has been made in view of such demands, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that enhances interest in adding an advantageous state and allows a player to continue playing without getting bored.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state, as a state in which a game is played. Therefore, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And, based on the start operation detection means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71) and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, by rotating the reel, the symbol Based on the detection of the start operation by the pattern changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the start operation detecting means for changing the internal winning combination is determined with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) and a stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch 7S, a main switch) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. Based on the control board 71), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, the symbol display is achieved by stopping the rotation of the reel. The reel stop control means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the means, and when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means, the symbol Based on the combination of symbols displayed on the display means, a winning determination means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won, and a predetermined condition. When satisfied, the additional game starting means (for example, the main control board 71) for starting the additional game state (for example, CT) for extending the duration of the advantageous state, and the internal winning combination determination in the additional game state When a predetermined winning combination (for example, triple chillilip) is determined as an internal winning combination by the means, an addition control means (for example, a main control board 71) that extends the duration of the advantageous state, and the addition game state. In the above, counting means (for example, CT game number counter, main control board 71) for counting the number of unit games in which the duration is not extended by the addition control means, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 times) by the counting means. When the unit game is counted, the additional game state ends. And the additional game ending means (for example, the main control board 71), and the additional control means, when the number of times of extension of the continuation period during the additional game state is a specific number of times or less, the predetermined role Is determined as an internal winning combination, the continuation period is extended by a first additional amount (for example, 10 games), and when the number of extensions exceeds the specific number of times, the predetermined winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination. In response to the execution, the continuation period is extended by a second additional amount (for example, 20 games) larger than the first additional amount.

In such a gaming machine, when shifting to the additional game state, the duration of the advantageous state is extended (addition is performed) until the counting means counts a predetermined number of times. Here, the counting means counts the number of unit games in which the duration is not extended (addition is not performed) during the addition game state, that is, when the addition is performed during the addition game state, the unit game Since the number of times is not counted, the additional game state continues for a long time as the additional game is performed. For the player, it does not know how long the add-on gaming state will continue, and since the add-on gaming state does not end as long as the add-on gaming state is being added, so for the game in the add-on gaming state It is possible to continue to play the game without getting bored because of a strong interest, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game while the player is in the additional playing state.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the number of additions (triggered by the extension of the continuation period) triggered by a predetermined combination exceeds a specific number, the amount to be added per time is changed from the first addition amount. Increase to the second additional amount. As described above, since the counting is not performed by the addition, and the addition game state continues, the player can increase the addition amount per time as the addition game state continues. You can have an expectation about, and you can increase the interest of the game in the add-on game state.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the counting means returns the counting result to an initial value when the continuation period is extended in response to the predetermined winning combination being determined as an internal winning combination. And

According to such a gaming machine, the counting result of the counting means returns to the initial value when the addition is performed triggered by the predetermined combination. As a result, for example, even when the additional game state is about to end (the count result is close to the predetermined number of times), the additional game is triggered by the predetermined combination, and the additional game state is restarted from the beginning. Therefore, it is possible to have an expectation that the additional amount per time will increase. Here, in order not to restart the addition game state, in order to have the game property of increasing the addition amount per time, the winning probability of the predetermined combination must be a certain probability or more, and the game balance is lost. Although there is a possibility that it will end up, by restarting the addition game state, even if the winning probability of the predetermined combination is suppressed, it is possible to have a game property of increasing the amount of addition per time, and the game balance It is possible to give a high playability while aiming.

[Appendix 9]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 9 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given according to the above, is known.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, as disclosed in Patent Document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057732), information for establishing an internal winning combination is provided to a player so that the winning combination determined as an internal winning combination is not lost in recent years. 2. Description of the Related Art There are known gaming machines that notify a player of advantageous information. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time), and the AT function is provided. Gaming machines are called AT machines and ART machines.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
Conventionally, in AT machines and ART machines, navigation is performed under the control of the sub (sub-control) side. However, in recent years, the presence or absence of navigation affects the player's profit (so-called ball output). It is required that navigation be performed on the main (main control) side that manages the profit of the player. As an example of such a navigation, a navigation for winning the bonus combination when the bonus combination is won can be considered.

By the way, when navigating under the control of the sub side as in the past, navi has a meaning as an effect, and in order to realize various game play, navigating such as an effect suggesting the game situation is required. Since it is possible, for example, even at a timing when the bonus combination cannot be won, it is possible to aim at the bonus symbol. On the other hand, when navigating on the main side that manages profits, there is a strong implication that the navi is guaranteed to be strictly managed, and it is required that the current gaming situation be strictly represented. However, for example, it is not possible to perform the navigation for winning the bonus role at the timing when the bonus role cannot be won.

Here, in the pachi-slot machine, when a bonus combination and another combination are won in a redundant manner, the bonus combination may be preferentially drawn in over the bonus combination, so the bonus combination is won. This does not necessarily mean that the bonus role will be won, but it is required to perform navigation at an appropriate timing.

The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object thereof is to perform a navigation for winning a bonus combination at an appropriate timing on the main side.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and a bonus state (for example, a bonus state) that is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state, as a state in which a game is played. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. , A main control unit (for example, a main control board 71) that controls the progress of the game, and a sub-control unit (for example, a sub-control board 72) that controls the effect on the game, the main control unit, the player Based on the start operation detection means (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71) for detecting the start operation by the start operation detection means, and the start operation detection means detects the start operation, the symbol that changes the symbol by rotating the reel. An internal winning combination determination that determines an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability based on the variation means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means. Means (for example, main control board 71) and stop operation detection means (for example, stop switch 7S, main control board 71) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, it is displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel. A combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means when the variation of the symbols is stopped by the reel stop control means (for example, the main control board 71) for stopping the variation of the symbols being displayed and the reel stop control means. Based on the internal winning combination determining means, the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means determines whether or not the internal winning combination has won, and the internal winning combination determining means determines the internal winning combination. When the winning combination is determined, the bonus carry-over means (for example, the main control board 71) that carries the bonus winning combination as an internal winning combination until the winning determination means determines that the bonus winning combination has been won, and the winning determination means. When it is determined that the bonus combination is won, the bonus start means (for example, the main control board 71) for starting the bonus state, and the instruction information notifying means for notifying the instruction information uniquely indicating the mode of the stop operation. (For example, the information display 14 and the main control board 71) In the game in which the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the information notifying means determines that the first combination (for example, F_special combinations 1 to 3) is determined as the internal winning combination in addition to the bonus combination. While the bonus instruction information indicating the mode of the stop operation for winning the bonus combination is notified, the second combination (for example, F_maintenance rep A) is determined as the internal winning combination in addition to the bonus combination. In this case, the reel stop control means does not notify the bonus instruction information, and when the bonus combination and the first combination are determined as an internal winning combination, a combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus combination is described. While stopping the fluctuation of the symbols so that they can be displayed on the symbol display means, when the bonus combination and the second combination are determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol combination according to the bonus combination is the symbol display means. It is characterized by stopping the fluctuation of the design so that it cannot be displayed.

In such a gaming machine, the instruction information notifying means included in the main control section notifies the bonus instruction information uniquely indicating the mode of the stop operation for winning the bonus combination, and therefore, under the control of the main side. It is possible to perform navigation to win a bonus role. Here, the bonus instruction information is notified when the first winning combination that can display the symbol combination according to the bonus winning combination on the symbol display means is winning together with the bonus winning combination, and the symbol combination indicating the bonus winning combination is displayed. If the second winning combination that cannot be displayed on the means is won together with the bonus winning combination, no notification is given. Therefore, according to the navigation by the main control unit of the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to perform the navigation for winning the bonus combination at an appropriate timing.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the main control unit, after the internal winning combination determination means determines the bonus combination as an internal winning combination in a state where the bonus carryover means does not carry over the bonus combination, Counting means for counting the number of unit games (for example, the main control board 71), and the internal winning combination determining means determines the bonus combination as an internal winning combination in a state where the bonus carryover means does not carry over the bonus combination. Further, a predictive game number determining means (for example, a main control board 71) for determining a predictive game number indicating the number of unit games until the bonus notification for notifying that the bonus combination is carried over is further provided. The instruction information notifying unit does not notify the bonus instruction information until the counting unit counts the unit games for the number of precursor games, and the counting unit does the unit game for the number of precursor games. When the first winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination in addition to the bonus winning combination after counting, the bonus instruction information is notified.

When the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the bonus combination may be notified after the player has played a predetermined number of times after winning the bonus combination. For example, it is generally performed to enhance the effect by performing an effect that is performed over a plurality of games (so-called continuous effect) and notifying whether or not a bonus combination is won according to the result of the continuous effect. There is. In this case, if the main side notifies the bonus instruction information during the continuous effect, the meaning of the continuous effect may be diminished and the interest may be spoiled. Here, since the main control unit has a limited capacity, it is preferable to control the effect on the sub (sub-control unit) side in order to perform various effects with high effect, while managing the profit. The main control unit that does not accept signals from the outside is required to be devised so as to be able to appropriately grasp the timing when the continuous production controlled by the sub side ends.

In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the main side determines the number of predictive games until the bonus notification, and the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Count the number of times. When the result of this counting reaches the number of precursor games, the bonus instruction information is notified. Since a signal can be notified from the main side to the sub side, by controlling the effect according to the number of games that will inform the bonus instruction information on the sub side, for example, the bonus on the main side during continuous effect. The instruction information will not be reported. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to perform the navigation for winning the bonus combination at an appropriate timing on the main side while ensuring the variety of effects.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a gaming state in which a gaming state has a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and a bonus state (for example, a bonus state) which is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state. And, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. ), a main control unit (for example, a main control board 71) that controls the progress of the game, and a sub-control unit (for example, a sub-control board 72) that controls the effects related to the game, and the main control unit is Based on the start operation detecting means (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71) for detecting the start operation by the player, and the start operation detecting means detecting the start operation, the reel is rotated to change the symbol. Based on the pattern changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) to be caused and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means, the first operation according to the order of the stop operation when the internal winning combination is determined. Of a plurality of combinations including a push combination (for example, F_3 selection bell_1st) capable of stopping and displaying a combination of a plurality of symbols including the symbol combination (for example, bell) or the second symbol combination (for example, a bell-shaped eye) An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from inside, and a stop operation provided to correspond to the plurality of reels and for stopping each reel is detected. Based on the stop operation detecting means (for example, the stop switch 7S, the main control board 71), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stopping operation detecting means, The reel stop control means (for example, the main control board 71) that stops the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel, and the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means. At the time of winning, based on the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means, the winning determination means for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won (for example, the main control board 71), and the bonus winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, the bonus winning combination is carried over as the internal winning combination until the winning determining means determines that the bonus winning combination is won. With the carry-over means (for example, the main control board 71) and the winning determination means, When it is determined that a prize has been won, a bonus starting means (for example, the main control board 71) for starting the bonus state, and an instruction information notifying means (for example, information display) for notifying instruction information uniquely indicating the mode of the stop operation. In the game in which the bonus combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the instruction information notifying unit has a predetermined combination (for example, F_special combination). 1 to 3) is determined as an internal winning combination, while the bonus instruction information indicating the mode of the stop operation for winning the bonus combination is notified, the push order combination is added in addition to the bonus combination. When it is determined as an internal winning combination, the push order combination first instruction information indicating the mode of the stop operation for displaying the first symbol combination on the symbol display means without notifying the bonus instruction information. In the game in which the bonus combination is not determined as the internal winning combination, the stop for displaying the first symbol combination on the symbol display means when the pushing forward combination is determined as the internal winning combination. The second push-combination instruction information different from the first push-combination combination first instruction information indicating the mode of operation is notified, and the reel stop control means determines that the bonus combination and the predetermined combination are internal winning combinations. If the combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the symbol display means to stop the fluctuation of the symbols, and if the bonus combination and the pushing forward combination are determined as the internal winning combination. It is characterized in that the symbol variation is stopped so that the symbol display means cannot display the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination.

According to such a gaming machine, when the push winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the instruction information notified by the instruction information notifying means is such that the bonus winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination along with the pushing winning combination. Is the first pressing order combination instruction information, and is the second pressing order combination instruction information when the bonus combination is not determined as the internal winning combination together with the pressing order combination. Since both the first pressing order combination instruction information and the second pressing order combination instruction information indicate the mode of the stop operation for displaying the first symbol combination, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, the instruction information notification is given. It is possible to grasp whether or not the bonus winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination in addition to the pushing normal winning combination, from the type of notification of the pressing forward combination by the means.

[Appendix 10]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 10 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given according to the above, is known.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, in recent years, as shown in Patent Document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-075305), a gaming machine that cooperates with a mobile phone or a smartphone owned by the player is also known. In such a gaming machine, by registering a player in cooperation with a mobile phone or the like, it is possible to manage a player's unique game history and the like, and to provide individual services that have never existed before. ..

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
However, it cannot be said that the player registration type conventional gaming machine is necessarily convenient for the player, and a device for further enhancing the convenience for the player has been demanded.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object thereof is to improve the convenience of a player registration type gaming machine.

[Means for solving the problem]
A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that advances a game by variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns in accordance with the result of internal lottery, and an irradiation light device (for example, irradiation An optical device B), a movable screen (for example, a screen device C) that causes an image corresponding to the effect to appear by the irradiation of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device, and the position at which the movable screen is arranged is adjustable. A drive device that drives the movable screen (eg, front screen drive mechanism E2 and reel screen drive mechanism F2), history management means (eg, sub-control board 72) that manages the game history indicating the result of the game, and the history management. A top screen (for example, a top screen 211) that displays a summary game history that is a part of the game history managed by the means, and a detailed game including the summary game history of the game history managed by the history management means. A display device (for example, a first sub display device 201) separate from the movable screen, which displays a plurality of display screens including a game information screen (for example, game information screens 213, 214, 215) for displaying a history. An input receiving unit (for example, a touch sensor 201a) that receives input information for controlling display of the display device, and a control unit that controls the display device based on the input information received by the input receiving unit ( For example, the sub-control board 72) and a registration receiving unit (for example, the sub-control board 72) that receives the registration of the player who plays the game are provided, and the control unit does not receive the registration by the registration receiving unit. In this case, it is impossible to display the game information screen based on the input information, and when the registration receiving means accepts the registration, the display device is capable of displaying the game information screen based on the input information. It is characterized by switching the display of.

According to such a gaming machine, if the registration of the player is not accepted, the game information screen displaying the detailed game history cannot be displayed on the display device, but if the registration of the player is accepted, The game information screen can be displayed on the display device. Since it is possible to improve the convenience of the player by confirming a more detailed game history, the gaming machine according to the present invention can improve the convenience of the player registration type gaming machine.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the display device for displaying the game information screen or the like is provided separately from the movable screen for displaying the video according to the effect. For example, a game machine that displays a game information screen or the like on a movable screen is also conceivable, but with such a game machine, it is difficult to display the game history during the performance, and in the conventional game machine, Only when not playing a game, various display screens could be displayed on the movable screen. However, the player may want to confirm information other than the performance during the game, and the conventional game machine that can display the display screen only when the game is not performed is inconvenient. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the display device is provided separately from the movable screen, various display screens can be displayed even while performing the effect on the movable screen, and convenience is improved. To do.

Further, like the gaming machine according to the present invention, when an image corresponding to the effect is displayed on the movable screen in which the position where it is arranged operates, various information other than the effect cannot be displayed correctly while the movable screen is operating. There is a risk. In this respect, by displaying various display screens on a display device provided separately from the movable screen, the movable screen is activated, and various information other than the effects is displayed even when the effect with high effect is being executed. It can be displayed properly and convenience is improved.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the input receiving means is a touch sensor provided on a display unit of the display device.

According to such a gaming machine, the player can perform input through the touch sensor, so that the display on the display device can be controlled by an intuitive operation.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a pedestal portion (for example, the pedestal portion 10) having a substantially horizontal plane, and an insertion port provided on a side of the substantially horizontal plane of the pedestal portion for inserting a game medium for playing a game. (For example, a medal slot 22 provided on the right side of the pedestal portion 10) and a bet button (for example, a MAX bet button 11 provided on the left side of the pedestal portion 10) are further provided, and the display device is provided from the pedestal portion. It is characterized in that it is provided in the vicinity of the insertion port and/or the bet button on a surface which stands substantially vertically.

Generally, in a gaming machine, a medal slot is provided on the right side of the pedestal when viewed from the player, and a bet button or start lever is provided on the left side of the player, so when proceeding with the game The player operates the right side or the left side of the pedestal. In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the display device is provided on the side (right side or left side) of the surface that stands substantially vertically from the pedestal portion, and the display of the display device is controlled based on the touch input detected by the touch sensor. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the display device and the input device (touch sensor) for controlling the display are provided in the place where the player's hand is located during the game, and the operability of the player is improved. .. In particular, since the display device with the touch sensor is provided on the surface standing from the pedestal portion (horizontal surface), the player can operate the display device while placing his or her hand on the pedestal portion. As a result, not only the operability is improved, but also the fatigue associated with the operation can be reduced, so that an improvement in the operating rate can be expected.

[Appendix 11]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 11 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given according to the above, is known.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, as disclosed in Patent Document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057732), information for establishing an internal winning combination is provided to a player so that the winning combination determined as an internal winning combination is not lost in recent years. 2. Description of the Related Art There are known gaming machines that notify a player of advantageous information. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time), and the AT function is provided. Gaming machines are called AT machines and ART machines.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
Conventionally, in AT machines and ART machines, navigation is performed under the control of the sub (sub-control) side. However, in recent years, the presence or absence of navigation affects the player's profit (so-called ball output). It is required that navigation be performed on the main (main control) side that manages the profit of the player. Here, when navigating on the main side, the navi has a strong implication of guaranteeing that profits are strictly managed, and it is required to strictly represent the current gaming situation.

However, in such a navigation, there is a problem that the mode of navigation becomes monotonous and the variety of games is impaired.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing various types of navigation while appropriately performing navigation that affects profits on the main side.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are displayed (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R), and a symbol display means for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels (for example, , A display window 4), a main control unit (for example, a main control board 71) that controls the progress of the game, and a sub-control unit (for example, a sub-control board 72) that controls the effects related to the game. The control section rotates the reel based on the start operation detecting means (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71) for detecting the start operation by the player and the start operation detected by the start operation detecting means. Based on the detection of the start operation by the pattern changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the start operation detecting means for changing the design, the order of the stop operation is determined when the internal winning combination is determined. Accordingly, the first symbol combination (for example, bell) or the second symbol combination (for example, Bell spill) can be stopped and displayed as the first combination (for example, F_3 selection bell 1st), and the internal winning combination has been determined. At this time, depending on the order of the stop operation, a third symbol combination (for example, three consecutive Chilelips) or a fourth symbol combination (for example, Replay) includes a second winning combination (for example, F_certain Chilelip) that can be stopped and displayed. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) for determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations with a predetermined probability, and a stop provided to correspond to the plurality of reels and for stopping each reel. Stop operation detection means (for example, stop switch 7S, main control board 71) for detecting an operation, an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means, and a timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detection means. Based on the reel stop control means (for example, the main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel, and a privilege depending on the result of the game. Grant (for example, granting the privilege of paying out medals or shifting the RT gaming state according to the combination of displayed symbols, and granting rights to CZ, ART, and CT according to the lottery based on the internal winning combination. A privilege giving means (for example, the main control board 71) and an instruction information notifying means (for example, the information display 14 and the main control board 71) for giving the instruction information uniquely indicating the mode of the stop operation. And the sub-control unit performs an effect according to the mode of the stop operation (for example, the display unit 100, the sub-control board 72). ), the privilege granting means, when the first symbol combination is displayed in the symbol display means in the game in which the first winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and the second symbol combination is Different bonuses are given depending on the displayed case, and the third symbol combination is displayed on the symbol display means in the game in which the second winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and the fourth combination. When the symbol combination is displayed, the same privilege is given, and when the first winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the instruction information notifying means causes the symbol displaying means to display the first winning combination. While notifying instruction information that unequivocally indicates the order of the stop operation for displaying, the effect execution means is an effect indicating the order of the stop operation for displaying the first symbol combination on the symbol display means. When the second winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the instruction information notifying means does not notify the instruction information, and the effect executing means causes the symbol displaying means to display the third symbol combination. Alternatively, it is characterized in that an effect indicating the order of the stop operation for displaying the fourth symbol combination is executed.

In such a gaming machine, the navigation that affects the profit (privilege) is managed by the main (main control unit) side, while the navigation that does not affect the profit is managed by the sub (sub control unit) side. Specifically, the first winning combination that gives different benefits when the displayed symbol combinations are different (that is, the first winning combination is displayed when the first symbol combination is displayed and when the second symbol combination is displayed). The navigation is performed with both the instruction information notification means controlled on the main side and the effect execution means controlled on the sub side, and the same benefit is given even if the combination of the symbols displayed is different. The navigation of the second combination to be given (that is, the second combination is given the same privilege when the third symbol combination is displayed and when the fourth symbol combination is displayed) is on the main side. No instruction information notifying means, but only the sub-direction effect executing means. Here, the navigation controlled by the sub side has a meaning as an effect, and it is possible to navigate in a variety of modes, and various game characteristics can be realized. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the navigation that influences the profit is appropriately performed on the main side that manages the profit, while the navigation that does not affect the profit is performed on the sub side with various navigation. You can

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the fourth symbol combination is all on a predetermined line formed by connecting unit symbol display areas for displaying one symbol of each reel in the symbol display means. It is a combination of symbols in which a specific symbol is displayed in the unit symbol display area, and the privilege granting unit grants a privilege with a predetermined probability when the second winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and the effect executing unit. Shows the order of the stop operation for displaying the fourth symbol combination on the symbol display unit when the privilege granting unit grants a privilege in the game in which the second winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. While performing the effect, when the privilege granting means does not grant the privilege in the game in which the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the effect is not executed.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the second winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination and it is decided that a privilege is to be awarded, a navigation for aiming for a fourth symbol combination in which specific symbols are aligned on the line ( On the other hand, if the second winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, but it is decided not to grant the privilege, the navigation is not performed. Here, since whether or not to give a privilege is decided before the symbol combination is displayed, the profit obtained by the player is not changed by the symbol combination displayed. By controlling such a navigation on the sub side, for example, an effect such as “aim for a specific symbol” can be executed according to the type of privilege to be granted, and a variety of games can be secured. As a result, the navigation that affects the profit can be appropriately performed on the main side that manages the profit, while the navigation that does not affect the profit can be performed on the sub side with a variety of operations.

[Appendix 12]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 12 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given according to the above, is known.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057732, information such as information for establishing an internal winning combination is provided so that the winning combination determined as an internal winning combination is not lost in recent years. There is known a gaming machine that informs a player of advantageous information for the player. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time), and the AT function is provided. Gaming machines are called AT machines and ART machines.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
By the way, in an AT machine or an ART machine, it has been possible to perform lottery whether or not to execute AT on the sub control circuit side (sub side) according to the internal winning combination determined on the main control circuit side (main side). It was common. In the AT machine (ART machine), the payout rate of medals varies depending on whether the AT is activated or not. Therefore, in the conventional gaming machine in which the AT lottery is performed on the sub side, the medal payout rate is set only on the main side. Instead, it was supposed to be managed on the sub side.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachi-slot machine, since it is required to appropriately manage the payout rate of medals, it is not preferable to manage the payout rate of medals on the sub side, and in recent years, AT has been executed. It is required that the main side also manage whether or not to do it. However, since the capacity of the storage means (ROM) of the main control circuit is limited, only a limited amount can be allocated to AT management. On the other hand, if the capacity is suppressed and the AT management is monotonous, the game becomes monotonous and the interest of the game is spoiled.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of securing a sufficient capacity on the main side while performing AT management on the main side.

[Means for solving the problem]
In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when a notification target combination (for example, a push order combination) that is a notification target combination is determined as a winning combination, a mode of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player (for example, a correct press order). ) Is a notification game state (for example, a specific section) and a normal game state (for example, a normal section) that does not notify the advantageous stop operation mode, and controls the progress of the game. A main controller (for example, a main control board 71) and a sub-control section (for example, a sub-control board 72) that performs control related to the effect, and the main controller is a first main that is communicably connected to each other. It has a control part (for example, the 1st main control board 71a) and a 2nd main control part (for example, the 2nd main control board 71b), and the 1st main control part has a plurality of the information target combination. The winning combination is determined from among the winning combinations, and the second main control unit carries out a transfer lottery as to whether or not to transfer the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the notification gaming state.

In such a gaming machine, the main control unit has a plurality of control units, that is, a first main control unit and a second main control unit that are communicatively connected, and the first main control unit determines a winning combination. The lottery (internal lottery) is performed, and the transfer lottery is performed in the second main control unit to determine whether or not to shift to the notification game state (AT). As a result, in the main control unit (main side) that controls the progress of the game, it is possible to perform both the lottery of the winning combination and the lottery for shifting to the informing game state, and the lottery that influences the payout rate of medals. Can be properly managed on the main side. At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the lottery is performed by each of the first main control unit and the second main control unit. Therefore, when the lottery is performed by only one control unit as in the conventional case. In comparison, a lottery capacity can be sufficiently secured, and as a result, lottery variations are increased, a monotonous game can be prevented, and the interest of the game is not spoiled.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a setting means (for example, a setting key type switch 430, the main control board 71) for setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player. ), depending on the setting value set by the setting means, among the plurality of winning combinations, a setting indeterminate combination determined as a winning combination with the same probability regardless of the setting value set by the setting means. And a setting winning combination that is determined as a winning combination with a probability that the second main control unit performs the transfer lottery in response to the setting undetermined winning combination being determined as a winning combination, while setting the setting. It is characterized in that the transfer lottery is not performed in response to the combination combination being determined as the winning combination, and the transfer lottery is performed with the same probability regardless of the setting value set by the setting means.

According to such a gaming machine, the transition lottery of whether or not to shift to the informing game state is performed with the same probability that the winning probability is the same regardless of the set value, when the setting unquestioned winning combination is determined as the winning combination. .. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the degree of expectation regarding the transition to the informing game state can be made the same for each set value, and the difference in payout performance is the winning probability of the set winning combination having the setting difference. Can be reduced to As a result, the difference in the payout performance for each set value can be given to the determination of the winning combination itself, not to the notification game state, so that the gaming machine having the notification game state has a high gambling performance. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the player can play with peace of mind.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the second main control unit performs the transfer lottery in which the winning combination determined by the first main control unit as the winning combination is won with a uniquely determined probability. Is characterized by.

According to such a gaming machine, the probability of winning the transfer lottery is uniquely determined for the winning combination and does not change. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, even though the same winning combination is a winning combination, it is easy to win the transition lottery (so-called high probability state) or difficult to win the transition lottery (so-called low. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not have a state such as a stochastic state, does not increase the gambling property, and allows the player to play with peace of mind.

[Appendix 13]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 13 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given according to the above, is known.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057732, information such as information for establishing an internal winning combination is provided so that the winning combination determined as an internal winning combination is not lost in recent years. There is known a gaming machine that informs a player of advantageous information for the player. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time), and the AT function is provided. Gaming machines are called AT machines and ART machines.

In addition, in a game store where the game machine is actually installed, it is common to install an external device such as a data counter or a hall computer together with the game machine. For example, the game machine is installed above the game machine. The data counter receives a signal output from the gaming machine and displays the number of games, the number of bonuses, and the like.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
By the way, in an AT machine or an ART machine, it has been possible to perform lottery whether or not to execute AT on the sub control circuit side (sub side) according to the internal winning combination determined on the main control circuit side (main side). It was common. Further, in the gaming machine, the signal output to the external device had to be performed from the main side. And, in the gaming machine, although the signal output from the main side to the sub side is allowed, the signal output from the sub side to the main side is not allowed, so that the sub side like the conventional AT (ART machine) is allowed. In the gaming machine that manages the AT, the lottery result on the sub side is estimated from the event that can be recognized on the main side (for example, the RT state transition or the stop operation was performed multiple times in a specific pushing order), and the lottery is performed. The result was output to an external device.

In such a conventional method, the timing of outputting the fact that the lottery is won to the AT lottery to the external device is delayed by a few games from the timing of actually winning the lottery, and depending on the mode of the stop operation of the player, the AT win The signal was sometimes output. From the game store, the accuracy of grasping the behavior of the game machine with the hall computer is reduced, and from the player's point of view, the game history of the data counter is different from the actual history, so the game machine that performs the game There was a problem that it became difficult to select.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of accurately outputting the result of AT lottery to an external device.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a winning combination determining means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining a winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations, and a transfer lottery for determining whether or not to transfer the gaming state (for example, to a specific section). If the winning of the transfer lottery (for example, the main control board 71) and the transfer lottery that performs the transfer lottery), the game state is transferred from the normal game state (for example, the normal section) to the notification game state (for example, the specific section). It is advantageous for the player when the game state control means (for example, the main control board 71) and the notification target combination (for example, the push forward combination) that is the combination of the notification target during the notification game state are determined as the winning combination. Informing means (e.g., main control board 71, instruction monitor 147, sub-control board 72, display unit 100) for informing a mode of stop operation (e.g., the correct pressing order), and when the transfer lottery is won, the transfer lottery is performed. The output means (for example, the main control board 71 and the external centralized terminal board 73) for outputting a signal indicating that the winning is done to the outside is provided.

In such a gaming machine, when shifting to the informing gaming state, a so-called AT machine or ART machine is realized in order to inform the player of a stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player when the informing target combination is determined as the winning combination. be able to. Here, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the result (winning information) of the transition lottery to the notification game state is output, the output of the winning information is performed on the condition that the winning in the transition lottery is won. Therefore, unlike the conventional gaming machine, without outputting information inferred from other events, it is possible to output the result of the transfer lottery as it is, so that the result of the transfer lottery can be accurately output. ..

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the notification game state is a game state in which one or a plurality of unit notification games each having a predetermined period as one set are performed, and the game state control means is a unit notification of the next set. When the execution of the game is permitted, the unit notification game of the next set is started after the end of one set of unit notification games, and the output means indicates that the transfer lottery is won when the transfer lottery is won. A signal is output to the outside, and when the next set unit notification game is started by the game state control means, a signal indicating that a new unit notification game is started is output to the outside, and the bonus start condition is satisfied. Based on, the bonus starting means (for example, the main control board 71) for starting a bonus state advantageous for the player, and the bonus ending means (for example, the main control board 71) for ending the bonus state based on the establishment of the bonus end condition. ), further, the game state control means, when the bonus state is started during the notification game state, restarts the notification game state after the end of the bonus state, the output means, When the notification game state is restarted with the end of the bonus state, a signal is output to the outside when the first condition is satisfied, and a signal is output to the outside when the first condition is not satisfied. It is characterized by not outputting.

In such a gaming machine, an external signal can be output not only when the transfer lottery is won (so-called first win), but also when the unit notification game of a new set is started, so that an accurate number of sets can be grasped. be able to. Here, depending on the timing of winning the bonus, the bonus state may start in the middle of one set, and when the informing game state is restarted after the end of the bonus, the count of the number of unit informing games is shifted. It may end up. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the output of the signal to the outside is controlled based on the first condition, so that the count of the number of sets when the bonus state is sandwiched can be appropriately managed.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first condition is that the unit notification game in the notification game state that restarts with the end of the bonus state is the unit notification that is being executed when the bonus state is started. The game is a unit notification game of a different set, and the game state control means, if the predetermined condition is satisfied when the bonus state is started during the notification game state, the bonus state If the predetermined condition is not satisfied when the bonus state is started during the notification game state, the bonus is restarted with the end of the bonus state. It is characterized by restarting the unit notification game that was being executed when the state was started.

More specifically, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the unit notification game restarted when the bonus state is sandwiched is a unit notification game of a new set, a signal is output to the outside and set. While counting the number, if the unit notification game that restarts when the bonus state is sandwiched is a unit notification game of the same set as the unit notification game at the time of bonus start, without outputting a signal to the outside , Do not count the number of sets. This makes it possible to properly manage the count of the number of sets when the bonus state is sandwiched.

[Appendix 14]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 14 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given according to the above, is known.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057732, information such as information for establishing an internal winning combination is provided so that the winning combination determined as an internal winning combination is not lost in recent years. There is known a gaming machine that informs a player of advantageous information for the player. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time), and the AT function is provided. Gaming machines are called AT machines and ART machines.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
By the way, in the conventional gaming machines, there is known a gaming machine having a notification lamp for notifying that a bonus or the like is won when the player wins an advantageous state. For the player, it is possible to know that the notification lamp has been turned on/off in an advantageous state, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. In this respect, since the AT is in a state advantageous to the player as well as the bonus, it is required to devise a method of notifying the player of the result of the lottery for shifting to the AT.

However, with a lamp that is simply turned on/off, whether or not there is a winning is immediately recognized, but it makes the player feel that it is enough to turn on the lamp, which is interesting, resulting in a liquid crystal display device. There was a risk that the game would become monotonous because it would lose interest in other productions such as.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine having various variations regarding the notification of the result of the AT lottery.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a winning combination determining means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining a winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations, and a transfer lottery for determining whether or not to transfer the gaming state (for example, to a specific section). If the winning of the transfer lottery (for example, the main control board 71) and the transfer lottery that performs the transfer lottery), the game state is transferred from the normal game state (for example, the normal section) to the notification game state (for example, the specific section). It is advantageous for the player when the game state control means (for example, the main control board 71) and the notification target combination (for example, the push forward combination) that is the combination of the notification target during the notification game state are determined as the winning combination. Informing means (for example, the main control board 71, instruction monitor 147, sub-control board 72, display unit 100) for informing the mode of stop operation (for example, the correct pressing order), and notifying means for notifying the result of the transfer lottery. (For example, a main control board 71 and a status indicator 147b), and the notification means has a plurality of light emitting units that are turned on or off respectively, and a light emitting unit that is turned on among the plurality of light emitting units. It is characterized in that the result of the transfer lottery is notified by a pattern of combination with the light emitting unit which is turned off.

In such a gaming machine, when shifting to the informing gaming state, a so-called AT machine or ART machine is realized in order to inform the player of a stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player when the informing target combination is determined as the winning combination. be able to. Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since it has a notifying means for notifying the result of the lottery transition to the notification gaming state, it is possible to inform the player that the winning is in an advantageous state for the player. it can. At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, in order to inform the player of the result of the transition lottery by the lighting patterns of the plurality of light emitting units, the transition lottery is performed by various variations of the lighting patterns such as the winning pattern and the non-winning pattern. Can report the result of. For the player, when the lighting patterns of the plurality of light emitting units change, it is not possible to immediately recognize that the winning of the transition lottery has occurred, but it is possible to understand that the state is different from the normal one, and as a result, the subsequent game It is possible to have a strong interest in, and to have a deep playability that has never existed before.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the notification game state includes a plurality of types of notification game states having different degrees of advantage for the player, and the notification means sets one notification game state in the transition lottery. It is characterized in that the plurality of light emitting units are turned on or off in a different combination pattern depending on whether the winning is won or a case where the other notification game state is won.

According to such a gaming machine, since the lighting pattern is different depending on the type of the notification game state, it is possible to increase the variation of the lighting pattern. For the player, the variation of the lighting pattern increases, and it becomes difficult to accurately understand the content of each lighting pattern. Therefore, the player has a strong interest in the subsequent game, and the game is deeper. It can have sex.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the notification game state includes a plurality of types of notification game states having different degrees of advantage for the player, and the notification means sets one notification game state in the transition lottery. It is characterized in that the plurality of light emitting units are turned on or off in the same combination pattern depending on whether the winning is won or a case where the other notification game state is won.

According to such a gaming machine, since the lighting pattern is the same regardless of the type of the information game state, it is not possible to grasp the type of the winning information game state from the lighting pattern. Although a skilled player may memorize an advantageous lighting pattern among the lighting patterns of the plurality of light emitting units, a notification gaming state that is truly advantageous to the player (for example, a long AT such as 50 games). ) And the lighting pattern of the notification game state (for example, a short AT for one game) that is not very advantageous to the player are made to be the same, thereby making it impossible to grasp the type of the winning notification game state. It is possible to further deepen the game playability.

[Appendix 15]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 15 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given according to the above, is known.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057732, information such as information for establishing an internal winning combination is provided so that the winning combination determined as an internal winning combination is not lost in recent years. There is known a gaming machine that informs a player of advantageous information for the player. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time), and the AT function is provided. Gaming machines are called AT machines and ART machines.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
In such a gaming machine, an AT machine for managing the number of games, which manages the duration of AT by the number of games, and an AT machine for managing the so-called navigation frequency, which manages by the number of times information that is advantageous to the player, are known. Has been. On AT machines that manage the number of games, the duration of AT is guaranteed for a certain number of games, but on AT machines that manage the number of times of navigation, if the target subject to navigation is concentrated and wins, it ends immediately. , It has become a cause for players to feel dissatisfied.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and in an AT machine (ART machine) that manages the number of times of navigation, a gaming machine that reduces the consumption speed of the number of times of navigation and does not spoil the interest during the AT period. The purpose is to provide.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a normal gaming state (for example, a low-lip state) and a high-probability re-gaming state (for example, a high-lip state where the re-gaming combination is more likely to be determined as a winning combination than the normal gaming state). State), a gaming machine having a plurality of symbols (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and the symbols are rotated by rotating the reels based on establishment of a start condition. The symbol changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) for varying the first symbol combination (for example, a combination of bell symbols) when the winning combination is determined based on the establishment of the start condition. ) Or a first winning combination (for example, a winning combination "F_3 choice bell A") that allows a stop display for a plurality of winning combinations including a second winning combination (for example, bell-shaped eyes), and when a winning combination is determined. A second role that allows stop display for a plurality of symbol combinations including a third symbol combination (for example, a replay symbol combination) or a fourth symbol combination (for example, a fall replay symbol combination) (for example, The winning combination determining means (for example, the main control board 71) that determines a winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of winning combinations including the winning combinations “F_maintenance lip_123” to “F_maintaining lip_321”) and the plurality of reels. Correspondingly provided stop operation detecting means (for example, stop switch 7S, main control board 71) for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and the winning combination and the stop operation determined by the combination determining means. Based on the detection of the stop operation by the detection means, stop control means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol, and when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, the first When the first symbol combination is displayed, the first quantity of gaming value (for example, 9 medals) is given, while when the second symbol combination is displayed, the game quantity is less than the first quantity. In the high-probability re-gaming state, with the gaming value imparting means (eg, the main control board 71) that imparts value or does not impart any gaming value, when the variation of the symbol is stopped, the third value When the symbol combination is displayed, the gaming state is maintained as the high-probability re-gaming state, while when the fourth symbol combination is displayed, the gaming state is changed from the high-probability re-gaming state to the normal gaming state. The game state control means (for example, the main control board 71) and the notification lottery for notifying the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player (for example, a specific section) are performed to determine whether or not to shift the game state. If the winning of the transfer lottery means (for example, the main control board 71) and the transfer lottery performed by the transfer lottery means, the notification game start means (for example, the main control board 71) for starting the notification game state, and the notification When the first winning combination is determined as a winning combination during the gaming state, a mode of a stop operation necessary for displaying the first symbol combination for the number of times indicated by the first winning combination navigation number (for example, the number of Bell navigation) When the second combination is determined as a winning combination during the notification game state, the third symbol combination is displayed for the number of times indicated by the second combination navigation count (eg, Lip Navi count). It is characterized by including an informing unit (for example, the main control board 71, the instruction monitor 147, the sub control board 72, the display unit 100) for informing the mode of the stop operation necessary for that.

In such an amusement machine, in the notification game state, when the winning of the first combination is won, the notification is made so that the first symbol combination having a large gaming value to be given is displayed, and when the winning of the second combination is won, The notification is performed so that the third symbol combination that maintains the probability replay state is displayed. At this time, the notification for the first winning combination is performed for the number of times indicated by the first winning navi count, and the notification for the second winning is performed for the number of times indicated by the second winning navi count. It is possible to notify each of the winning combinations based on the number of times of individual navigation. As a result, even when either the first winning combination or the second winning combination is concentrated during the notification game state, only one of the navigation times is consumed and the other navigation frequency is consumed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the consumption speed of the number of times of navigation, and as a result, the interest in the notification game state is not spoiled.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when a predetermined winning combination (for example, a bonus winning combination) is determined as a winning combination by the winning combination determining means, the predetermined winning combination is displayed until a symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed. A predetermined combination carry-over means (for example, main control board 71) for carrying over as a winning combination, a first addition means (for example, main control board 71) for increasing the number of times of the first combination navigation, and an increase of the number of times for the second combination navigation. The second addition means (for example, the main control board 71) to be further provided, the stop control means, the first winning combination in the game in which the predetermined combination is not carried over as the winning combination by the predetermined combination carry-over means. When the winning combination is determined, the variation of the symbols is stopped so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination can be displayed in accordance with the mode of the stop operation, and the predetermined winning combination carry-over means allows the predetermined winning combination. When the first combination is determined as the winning combination in the game that is carried over as the winning combination, the first symbol combination can be displayed and the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, while the second symbol combination is displayed. In the case where the first winning combination is determined as the winning combination in the game in which the predetermined winning combination is carried over as the winning combination by the predetermined winning combination carrying-out means, the notification means stops the fluctuation of the symbol to be undisplayable. , In the game in which the first combination means is carried over as the winning combination by the predetermined combination carryover means without notifying the mode of the stop operation necessary for displaying the first symbol combination, The predetermined winning combination is carried over as the winning combination by the predetermined winning combination carry-out means by reducing the increase amount of the number of times of the first winning combination compared to a game in which the predetermined winning combination is not carried over as a winning combination. In this game, the predetermined combination is increased in the number of times of the second combination navigation as compared with a game in which the predetermined combination is not carried over as a winning combination.

According to such a gaming machine, in the state where the predetermined winning combination is carried over as a winning combination, only the first symbol combination having a high gaming value given when the first winning combination is won is displayed. In the state of being present, it is possible to suppress the consumption of the number of times of first role navigation without notifying the first role. In addition, the number of times of first role navigation and the number of times of second role navigation are individually increased (added), respectively. On the contrary, with respect to the number of times of the second role navigation of the second role that consumes the number of times of navigation, the increase amount is increased. As a result, it is possible to reduce the consumption speed of the number of times of navigation, and as a result, the interest during the notification game state is not spoiled.

[Appendix 16]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 16 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given according to the above, is known.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057732, information such as information for establishing an internal winning combination is provided so that the winning combination determined as an internal winning combination is not lost in recent years. There is known a gaming machine that informs a player of advantageous information for the player. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time), and the AT function is provided. Gaming machines are called AT machines and ART machines.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
In such a gaming machine, an AT machine for managing the number of games, which manages the duration of AT by the number of games, and an AT machine for managing the so-called navigation frequency, which manages by the number of times information that is advantageous to the player, are known. Has been. On AT machines that manage the number of games, the duration of AT is guaranteed for a certain number of games, but on AT machines that manage the number of times of navigation, if the target subject to navigation is concentrated and wins, it ends immediately. , It has become a cause for players to feel dissatisfied.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and in an AT machine (ART machine) that manages the number of times of navigation, a gaming machine that reduces the consumption speed of the number of times of navigation and does not spoil the interest during the AT period. The purpose is to provide.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are displayed (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R), and a symbol that changes the symbol by rotating the reel based on the establishment of a start condition. A changing means (for example, a motor drive circuit 39, a main control board 71) and a winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations including a plurality of bonus winning combinations with a predetermined probability based on the establishment of the start condition. For example, a main control board 71) and a stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch 7S, a main control board 71) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, Based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detecting means, the stop control means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol, , When the variation of the symbols is stopped, the first specific game state (for example, the MB1 game state) is started when the first symbol combination corresponding to the first bonus combination is displayed, and the second bonus. A specific game starting means (for example, main control board 71) that starts a second specific game state (for example, MB2 game state) when the second symbol combination corresponding to the combination is displayed, and a stop operation advantageous for the player. The notification of notifying the state of (for example, a specific section) The transfer lottery means (for example, the main control board 71) for performing the transfer lottery to determine whether or not to transfer the game state to the game state, and the notification when the transfer lottery is won. When the notification game start means (for example, the main control board 71) that starts the game state and the notification target combination (for example, the push forward combination) that is the combination of the notification targets during the notification game state is determined as the winning combination, Notification means (for example, the main control board 71, the instruction monitor 147, the sub-control board 72, the display unit 100) for notifying the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player (for example, the correct pressing order) by the number of times of navigation. In the first specific game state, the winning combination determining means can determine the notification target winning combination as a winning combination, while in the second specific gaming status, the winning combination determining unit determines the notification target winning combination as a winning combination. It is characterized by not having.

According to such a gaming machine, when the notification target combination is determined as the winning combination during the notification game state, the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified by the number of times indicated by the number of times of navigation. This notification target combination may be determined as a winning combination during the first specific game state starting according to the first bonus combination, but the second specific game state starting according to the second bonus combination. Inside is not decided as a winning combination. Therefore, if the player moves to the first specific game state during the notification game state, he or she will play the game while consuming the number of times of navigation, but if the game can move to the second specific game state during the notification game state, the navigation will be performed. A game can be played without consuming the number of times. As described above, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to reduce the consumption speed of the number of times of navigation by the game in the second specific game state, and as a result, the interest in the notification game state is not spoiled.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the counting means (for example, the main control board 71) that counts the continuation period of the notification game state and the counting means counts a predetermined period (for example, 1500 games), the navigation An information game ending means (for example, a main control board 71) for ending the information game state regardless of the number of times is further provided, and the counting means is a period of the first specific game state performed during the information game state. Is counted as the duration of the notification game state, while the period of the second specific game state performed during the notification game state is not counted as the duration of the notification game state.

According to such a gaming machine, when the information game state continues for a predetermined period, the information game state is ended regardless of the remaining number of navigations, so that the state advantageous to the player continues for a long time. It is possible to prevent the player from playing the game and prevent the player from having a high gambling ability. As a result, the player can play the game with peace of mind. At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the period of the second specific game state is not counted as the continuation period of the notification game state. If the second specific game state for suppressing the consumption of the number of times of navigation is counted as the duration period of the notification game state, the period of the information game state is shortened by the second specific game state, so for the player If you look at it, you can easily feel dissatisfaction. In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the period of the second specific game state is not counted as the continuation period of the informing game state, so that the dissatisfaction felt by the player can be reduced.

[Appendix 17]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 17 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given according to the above, is known.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057732, information such as information for establishing an internal winning combination is provided so that the winning combination determined as an internal winning combination is not lost in recent years. There is known a gaming machine that informs a player of advantageous information for the player. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time), and the AT function is provided. Gaming machines are called AT machines and ART machines.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
By the way, in such a gaming machine, there is also known a gaming machine that displays a specific symbol (AT start symbol) such as "7-7-7" at the start of AT (ART). However, the conventional gaming machine displaying such an AT start symbol is forced to display the AT start symbol only by forcibly rotating the reel, and is performed regardless of the stop operation of the player. Was there. The control of forcibly displaying the AT start symbol in the pachi-slot machine that requires a push-push operation does not make the player enjoy the stop operation, and is rather annoying and detrimental.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of displaying a specific symbol according to a stop operation of a player at the start of an AT.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are displayed (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R), and a symbol that changes the symbol by rotating the reel based on the establishment of a start condition. A changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39 and the main control board 71) and a winning combination determining means (for example, the main control board 71) that determines a winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations with a predetermined probability based on the establishment of the start condition. ) And a stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch 7S, a main control board 71) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and the combination determining means. Based on the detected winning combination and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means, the stop control means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol, and advantageous for the player. With a transfer lottery means (for example, a main control board 71) for performing a transfer lottery for notifying whether or not the game state is transferred to a notification game state (for example, a specific section) for notifying a mode of stop operation (for example, the correct answer pressing order) If the winning of the transfer lottery is won, a right granting means (for example, the main control board 71) for granting the right to move to the notification game state, and if the predetermined condition is satisfied in the state where the right to transfer is given, the notification is given. A notification game start means (for example, a main control board 71) that shifts the game state to the game state, and the stop control means when the shift right is given and when the shift right is not given. It is characterized in that the variation of the symbol is stopped in a different mode.

According to such a gaming machine, the stop control means basically stops the rotation of the reel based on the winning combination and the stop operation, and in the state where the notification game state transition right is given, The rotation of the reel is stopped in a manner different from the state in which the transfer right is not granted. That is, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the reel stop control is made different between the state in which the notification game state transition right is granted and the state in which the reel is not granted, so immediately before the notification game state transition (at the start). It is possible to stop the rotation of the reel so as to display a specific symbol according to the stop operation of the player.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a bonus start means (for example, a main control board 71) that starts a bonus state when a specific symbol combination is derived as a result display of the stop control of the stop control means, and When the specific symbol combination is not derived in the unit game where the derivation of the specific symbol combination is permitted, carryover means (for example, the main control board 71) that carries over the permissible condition in which the specific symbol combination is derived. Further, the winning combination determining means determines a winning combination during the bonus state with a probability different from other states, and the winning combination is different in the degree of advantage for the player in the informing gaming state, and the winning combination is The determination means has a plurality of information game states with the same probability of determining a winning combination, and the stop control means has a right to shift to one information game state and the one information game state. And, when the right to shift to another notification game state of a different type is given, the variation of the symbol is stopped in a different mode.

According to such a gaming machine, since the reel stop control is changed according to the type of the notification game state of the transfer destination, for example, the notification game state that is more advantageous to the player and the notification game state that is not The symbols displayed at the start of the game state can be different. For the player, since the degree of advantage of the subsequent game varies depending on the combination of the symbols displayed at the start of the notification game state, the player is strongly interested in the stop operation at the start of the notification game state. And the enjoyment of the game is improved.

[Appendix 18]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 18 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given according to the above, is known.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057732, information such as information for establishing an internal winning combination is provided so that the winning combination determined as an internal winning combination is not lost in recent years. There is known a gaming machine that informs a player of advantageous information for the player. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time), and the AT function is provided. Gaming machines are called AT machines and ART machines.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
By the way, in the conventional gaming machines, there is known a gaming machine having a notification lamp for notifying that a bonus or the like is won when the player wins an advantageous state. For the player, it is possible to know that the notification lamp has been turned on/off in an advantageous state, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. In this respect, since the AT is in a state advantageous to the player as well as the bonus, it is required to devise a method of notifying the player of the result of the lottery for shifting to the AT.

However, with a lamp that is simply turned on/off, whether or not there is a winning is immediately recognized, but it makes the player feel that it is enough to turn on the lamp, which is interesting, resulting in a liquid crystal display device. There was a risk that the game would become monotonous because it would lose interest in other productions such as.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that does not spoil the interest of the game with respect to the notification of the result of the AT lottery.

[Means for solving the problem]
A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that plays a game using gaming value, and a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed and a start condition are satisfied. On the basis of the symbol changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) that changes the symbol by rotating the reel, based on the establishment of the start condition, the first winning combination is determined. First combination (for example, “F_3 selection”) that allows the stop display for a plurality of symbol combinations including the symbol combination (for example, the combination of bell symbols) or the second symbol combination (for example, the symbol combination of bell spills) Bell”), and a stop display for a plurality of symbol combinations including a third symbol combination (for example, a first symbol combination) or a fourth symbol combination (for example, a falling edge) when the winning combination is determined. A winning combination determining unit (for example, the main control board 71) that determines a winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of winning combinations including a second winning combination (for example, "F_3 selection one-sheet winning combination"), and the plurality of winning combinations. Stop operation detecting means (for example, stop switch 7S, main control board 71) provided corresponding to the reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and the winning combination and the winning combination determined by the combination determining means. Based on the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means, stop control means for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71), and when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, When the first symbol combination is displayed, a first quantity of gaming value (for example, 9 medals) is given, and when the second symbol combination is displayed, the second quantity smaller than the first quantity is displayed. When the third symbol combination is displayed without giving a certain amount of gaming value or giving any gaming value, a third amount of gaming value less than or equal to the gaming value used for the game (for example, 1 When the fourth symbol combination is displayed, a game value giving means for giving a game value of a fourth quantity smaller than the third quantity or not giving any game value ( For example, the main control board 71) and a transition lottery of whether or not to shift the game state to a notification game state (for example, a specific section) that notifies the player of an advantageous stop operation mode (for example, the correct pressing order). When the transfer lottery means (for example, the main control board 71) that wins is selected and the first winning combination is determined as the winning combination, the first notification that notifies the player of the advantageous stop operation mode Perform a game state (for example, ART game state) Without notifying the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player when the first winning combination is determined as the winning combination according to the first notification game control means (for example, the main control board 71) and the predetermined condition. , A second notification game control means for performing a second notification game state (for example, a single-card combination ART game state) for notifying a mode of a stop operation advantageous to the player when the second combination is determined as a winning combination ( For example, a main control board 71) and a notification means (for example, a status display 147b) for notifying that the current game state is the first notification game state or the second notification game state, Characterize.

According to such a gaming machine, during the first notification game state, the first combination is informed of the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player, while during the second notification game state, the first combination is performed. Only the second combination is informed of the mode of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player without any notification. Here, the advantageous situation for the player at the time of winning the first role is that the first symbol combination to which the first quantity of game value exceeding the game value used for the game is given is displayed. Therefore, by following the notification to the first role, the gaming value possessed by the player increases. On the other hand, the advantageous situation for the player at the time of winning the second role is that the third symbol combination to which the third value of the game value less than or equal to the game value used for the game is displayed is displayed. Even if the notification to the second role is followed, the gaming value possessed by the player does not increase. Therefore, the gaming machine according to the present invention has two notification game states, that is, a first notification game state in which a notification that the game value is increased and a second notification game state in which a notification that the game value is not increased are performed. It will be.

Here, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a notification means for notifying that the current game state is the notification game state, but this notification means is such that the current game state is the first notification game state or the second notification. In order to notify that it is in the gaming state, the notification by the notifying means will be performed even in the first advantageous gaming state which is truly advantageous or in the second informative gaming state which is not necessarily advantageous. .. As a result, the player cannot know whether or not the notification by the notification means will shift to a truly advantageous state (first notification game state) after that, and the notification by the notification means is displayed on the liquid crystal display. You will not lose interest in other productions such as devices. Thus, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being spoiled when the result of the AT lottery is notified by the notification means.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the second notification game control means performs the second notification game state when the second combination is determined as a winning combination in a game other than the first notification game state. It is characterized by

According to such a gaming machine, the second notification game state is not performed over the entire game other than the first notification game state, but is performed only for a part of the games other than the first notification game state. If the notification game state (AT) is performed for a long time on the pachi-slot machine, the gambling of the game may be increased, but the second notification is limited to some games other than the first notification game state. By performing the game state, it is possible to limit the period of the notification game state (the first notification game state and the second notification game state), and it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from unnecessarily increasing.

[Appendix 19]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 19 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given according to the above, is known.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057732, information such as information for establishing an internal winning combination is provided so that the winning combination determined as an internal winning combination is not lost in recent years. There is known a gaming machine that informs a player of advantageous information for the player. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time), and the AT function is provided. Gaming machines are called AT machines and ART machines.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
Here, in such an AT machine (ART machine), when the lottery for shifting to the AT is performed, a continuous effect (so-called precursor effect) that suggests whether or not the transfer lottery is successful may be performed. However, in the conventional gaming machine, the number of medals is basically reduced during the sign production, so the player feels a loss during the sign production, which should otherwise increase the interest of the game, and There was a problem that the interest of the people would decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that does not spoil the interest during the sign production that suggests the result of AT lottery.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a winning combination determining means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining a winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations, and a mode of the stop operation advantageous for the player (for example, the correct answer pushing order). Transition lottery means (for example, main control board 71) for performing the transition lottery to determine whether or not the game state is transferred to the first notification game state (for example, short ART) or the second notification game state (for example, long ART) to be notified. And, if the lottery for transitioning to the first notification game state is won, first notification game control means (for example, main control board 71) that performs the first notification game state for a first period (for example, for three games). And, if the lottery for shifting to the second notification game state is won, a second notification game control means for performing the second notification game state for a second period exceeding the first period (for example, 53 games) ( For example, when the main control board 71) and the notification target combination (for example, the push forward combination) that is the combination of the notification target during the first notification game state or the second notification game state is determined as the winning combination, the game Notification means (for example, the main control board 71, instruction monitor 147, sub-control board 72, display unit 100) for notifying a mode of the stop operation (for example, the pressing order of the correct answer) that is advantageous to the user, and performance execution for performing the performance Means (for example, the sub control board 72, the display unit 100), and the notification means for notifying that the current game state is the first notification game state or the second notification game state (for example, the main control board 71, State display device 147b), and, if the effect execution means wins the transition lottery to the first notification game state or the transition lottery to the second notification game state, the first period, the second It is characterized by executing an effect for notifying the player whether or not the player has won the lottery for transition to the notification game state.

According to such a gaming machine, as the notification game state for notifying the mode of the stop operation that is advantageous for the player, the first notification game state performed for the first period and the second period row exceeding the first period. Having a second notification game state that is said to be, if the selection lottery to the first notification game state or the second notification game state is won, whether to win the transition lottery to the second notification game state for the first period Is executed to notify. Since the second notification game state is performed over the second period that exceeds the first period during which this effect is performed, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first period is a precursor of the second notification game state. It can be in a gaming state. That is, when the first notification game state is won, the notification game state ends in the first period (with the production end), while when the second notification game state is won, Since the notification game state continues beyond the first period, the notification game state can be continued after the end of the effect. At this time, regardless of whether the winning state is the first notification game state or the second notification game state, the player is informed of the mode of the stop operation that is advantageous for the player. The player can benefit. As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the player can benefit during the so-called predictive production, so that the player's sense of loss during the predictive production can be suppressed, and as a result, the interest of the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.
Also, in the case of the first notification game state or the second notification game state, it is notified by the notification means, from the notification by this notification means, the player, the first notification game state or the second notification game state Since it is not possible to know which of the above winning symbols, it is possible to prevent the effect result from being known in advance during the predictive effect.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a setting means (for example, a setting key type switch 430, the main control board 71) for setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player. ), depending on the setting value set by the setting means, among the plurality of winning combinations, a setting indeterminate combination determined as a winning combination with the same probability regardless of the setting value set by the setting means. And, the setting lottery means that is determined as a winning combination with a probability is included, and the transition lottery means performs the transition lottery in response to the setting unquestioned winning combination being determined as a winning hand, while the setting lottery is It is characterized in that the transfer lottery is not performed in response to the determination of the winning combination, and the transfer lottery is performed with the same probability regardless of the set value set by the setting means.

According to such a gaming machine, the transfer lottery of whether or not to shift to the notification game state (the first notification game state or the second notification game state) is performed when the set unquestioned winning combination is determined as the winning combination. The probability is the same regardless of the set value. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the degree of expectation regarding the transition to the informing game state can be made the same for each set value, and the difference in payout performance is the winning probability of the set winning combination having the setting difference. Can be reduced to As a result, the difference in the payout performance for each set value can be given to the determination of the winning combination itself, not to the notification game state, so that the gaming machine having the notification game state has a high gambling performance. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the player can play with peace of mind.

[Appendix 20]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 20 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given according to the above, is known.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057732, information such as information for establishing an internal winning combination is provided so that the winning combination determined as an internal winning combination is not lost in recent years. There is known a gaming machine that informs a player of advantageous information for the player. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time), and the AT function is provided. Gaming machines are called AT machines and ART machines.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
Among gaming machines having such an AT function, there is known an AT machine for managing the number of games, which manages the duration of AT by the number of games. By the way, in such an AT machine that manages the number of games, if the number of winnings of the winning combination (for example, the pushing order bell) during the AT period is small, there are few medals that can be acquired during the AT period, However, the player sometimes complained.

Further, as a gaming machine having an AT function, there is also known an AT machine of so-called navigation frequency management, which manages the duration of AT by the number of times of notification of information advantageous to the player. Even in such an AT machine that manages the number of times of navigation, if the role to be informed is not easily established, the period for continuing to wait for the occurrence of the navigation becomes long, and even if it is during the AT period, the player is notified. On the other hand, there was a risk of giving a dull impression.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing the interest of the game from decreasing during the AT period.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are displayed (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R), and a symbol that changes the symbol by rotating the reel based on the establishment of a start condition. A changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39 and the main control board 71) and a winning combination determining means (for example, the main control board 71) that determines a winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations with a predetermined probability based on the establishment of the start condition. ) And a stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch 7S, a main control board 71) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and the combination determining means. Based on the detected winning combination and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means, the stop control means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) for stopping the change of the symbol, and the change of the symbol When stopped, when a specific symbol combination is displayed, a specific game starting means (for example, a main control board 71) for starting a specific game state (for example, a bonus state), and a mode of a stop operation advantageous for the player (For example, the pressing order of the correct answer) Notification lottery means (for example, the main control board 71) for performing the transition lottery for notifying the game state to the notification game state (for example, the specific section) for notifying the player, and the transition lottery. Based on the result of the transfer lottery of the means, a notification game control means (for example, a main control board 71) that executes the notification game state, and a notification target combination that is a combination of the notification targets during the notification game state (for example, When the push order is determined as the winning combination, the notification means (for example, the main control board 71, the instruction monitor 147, and the sub control board) for notifying the mode of the stop operation (for example, the correct press order) advantageous to the player. 72, a display unit 100), and the winning combination determining means determines the notification target winning combination as a winning combination with a high probability during the specific gaming state as compared with states other than the specific gaming state, and the notification game. The control means is characterized in that when the specific game start means starts the specific game state in a state where the transfer lottery is won, the notification game state is started.

In such a gaming machine, when shifting to the informing gaming state, a so-called AT machine or ART machine is realized in order to inform the player of a stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player when the informing target combination is determined as the winning combination. be able to. Here, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the specific game state is started in a state where the transfer lottery is won, the notification game state is started, that is, when the notification game state is started, the specific game state is started. It's time. In this specific game state, the notification target winning combination is won with a higher probability than in states other than the specific game state. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the notification game state is started together with the specific game state, then the notification is given. It can be expected that the target role will be won with a high probability. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the notification target winning combination is difficult to win during the notification game state, and as a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the notification game state.

Further, the game machine according to the present invention is characterized in that the notification game control means continues to execute the notification game state even after the specific game state ends.

In such a gaming machine, since the notification game state continues even after the specific game state in which the notification target winning combination is easy to win, the specific game state (bonus) can be aimed after receiving the notification.

[Appendix 21]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 21 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given according to the above, is known.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Here, as shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-238924, when a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination, there is also known a gaming machine that carries the winning bonus until the bonus is won. ing. Further, in a gaming machine carrying such a bonus, when a specific small winning combination is won in a state where the bonus is carried over, a notification may be given to urge the winning of the specific small winning combination or bonus.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
To the player, by appropriately performing the stop operation in accordance with this notification, the winning of a specific winning combination or a bonus can be realized. However, in the conventional gaming machine, since only the notification for prompting the winning of a specific small winning combination or the bonus is performed, for example, when the notification of the bonus is performed, the stop pattern of the symbol when the first reel is stopped Not only is it impossible to realize the bonus winning when the bonus winning is denied, but it is also impossible to win the specific small win that has not been notified.

If neither a specific small role or a bonus can be achieved, the player feels a sense of loss, and may lose interest even if the player has won the bonus. In particular, a beginner with a low skill of stopping operation is likely to be unable to win the notified winning combination (a specific small winning combination or a bonus), and the beginner may not be able to play the game with peace of mind.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine in which a player can play with peace of mind.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are displayed (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R), and a symbol display means for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels (for example, , A display window 4), and a symbol changing means (for example, a motor drive circuit 39, a main control board 71) for changing the symbol by rotating the reel based on the satisfaction of the starting condition, and the satisfaction of the starting condition. Based on this, a first symbol combination (for example, a combination of bell symbols) or a second symbol combination (for example, a symbol combination of bell spilled patterns) is included depending on the order of the stop operation when the winning combination is determined. Corresponding to the combination reel and a combination determination means (for example, the main control board 71) that determines a winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations including a push combination combination that allows a stop display for a combination of a plurality of symbols And a stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch 7S, a main control board 71) for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, a winning combination determined by the combination determining means, and the stop operation detection. Based on the detection of the stop operation by the means, stop control means for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71), and when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, the symbol display Specific game starting means for starting a specific game state (for example, bonus state) when a specific symbol combination (for example, symbol combination for “C_BB1”) corresponding to a specific combination (for example, “F_BB1”) is displayed on the means (For example, the main control board 71), when the specific winning combination is determined as a winning combination by the winning combination determining means, the specific winning combination is determined as a winning combination until the symbol display means displays a combination of the specific symbols. When the carry-over means to carry over (for example, the main control board 71) and the variation of the symbols are stopped by the stop control means, the symbol display means displays the first symbol combination corresponding to the push order combination. And, a profit giving unit (for example, the main control board 71) that gives a larger profit than when the second symbol combination is displayed, and a performance executing unit (for example, the sub control board 72, the display unit 100) that executes a performance. ) And, when the push order combination is determined as a winning combination in the game in which the carry-over means carries over the specific combination, all of the plurality of reels are rotating. In the pushing order combination, an effect of notifying the order of the stop operation in which the first symbol combination is displayed is executed, and when one reel is stopped, the stop is performed. In the symbol display means for displaying the symbol of the reel, the push forward combination composition symbol which constitutes the first symbol combination is displayed, and the specific symbol composition symbol which constitutes the specific symbol combination is displayed on the symbol display means. If not displayed, continue the effect of notifying the order of the stop operation, and in the case where both the push-forward combination composition symbol and the specific combination composition symbol are displayed on the symbol display means. , Performing an effect informing that the stop operation is performed in the order of the stop operation while avoiding the specific combination configuration symbol, and the specific combination configuration symbol is displayed on the symbol display unit, and the symbol display unit In the case where the push-combination-composition symbol is not displayed in, an effect of notifying that the specific-combination-composition symbol is stopped and displayed is executed.

According to such a gaming machine, when the push winning combination is determined as the winning combination in the game in which the specific winning combination is carried over, the first symbol combination (that is, more The effect of notifying the order of the stop operation (the order in which the correct answer is pressed) is displayed. From the player's perspective, by performing a stop operation in accordance with this notification, there is a possibility that the first symbol combination that can provide more profit at the time of winning the push order win can be displayed.

Then, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when one reel stops, the content to be notified is switched based on the symbol displayed on the stopped reel. Specifically, in the case where the push forward combination composition symbol is displayed on the reels stopped and the specific combination composition symbol is not displayed, a specific symbol combination is not displayed when all reels are stopped (that is, , There is no winning a specific role), so continue to inform the correct order of pressing. For the player, by performing the stop operation in accordance with the content of this notification, there is a possibility that the first symbol combination that can obtain more profit at the time of winning the push order combination can be displayed.

On the other hand, if both the push forward combination composition symbol and the specific combination composition symbol are displayed on the stopped reels, both the first symbol combination and the specific symbol combination may be displayed when all reels are stopped. Therefore, it is informed that the stop operation is performed in the correct answer pushing order while avoiding the specific combination pattern. For the player, by performing the stop operation in accordance with the content of this notification, there is a possibility that the first symbol combination that can obtain more profit at the time of winning the push order winning can be displayed, and if the skill of the stop operation is temporarily increased, Even if it is too low to avoid the specific combination pattern, the winning of the specific combination can be expected.

On the other hand, in the case where only the special winning combination composition symbol is displayed on the reels which have been stopped without displaying the press normal combination composition symbol, an effect is given to notify that the specific combination composition symbol is stopped and displayed. To do. As long as the pushing forward combination composition symbol is not displayed on the reels stopped, the first symbol combination is not displayed when all reels are stopped. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a notification made while all reels are rotating ( Press notification of the press winning combination) to switch to the notification of the specific combination. For the player, the winning of a specific combination can be expected by following the changed notification.

As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, by switching the content to be notified according to the progress of the game, the player can perform the notification without loss, and as a result, the player can play the game with peace of mind. it can.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that variably displays a plurality of symbols based on a player's start operation, stops the plurality of symbols based on a player's stop operation, and derives a result display. Therefore, a predetermined profit is given when the first symbol combination (for example, the combination of bell symbols) is derived as the result display, and the second symbol combination (for example, the bell spilled symbol pattern) is given as the result display. When a combination) is derived, a profit giving means (for example, the main control board 71) that gives a profit smaller than the predetermined profit, and a specific symbol combination (for example, a symbol combination of “C_BB1”) as a result display are Specific game starting means (for example, main control board 71) that starts a specific game state (for example, bonus state) when derived, and the specific symbol combination in a unit game in which the derivation of the specific symbol combination is allowed. If is not derived, carry-over means (for example, the main control board 71) that carries over the permissible condition that the combination of the specific symbols is derived, and effect execution means (for example, the sub-control board 72, display) that executes the effect. Unit 100), and if the derivation is allowed for any of the first symbol combination, the second symbol combination, and the specific symbol combination, the effect performing means first performs a start operation. Until the stop operation is accepted, an effect for notifying the mode of the stop operation from which the first symbol combination is derived is executed, and when the first stop operation is accepted, the first symbol combination is displayed as a result display. Derivable, and when the specific symbol combination cannot be derived as the result display, the effect of notifying the mode of the stop operation is continued, and as the result display, the first symbol combination and the specific symbol If none of the combinations is not derivable, an effect of notifying the mode of the stop operation for deriving the first symbol combination while avoiding the derivation of the specific symbol combination is executed, and as a result display, If the first symbol combination cannot be derived, and if the specific symbol combination can be derived as a result display, an effect of notifying a mode of a stop operation for deriving the specific symbol combination is executed, To do.

Even in such a gaming machine, by switching the content to be notified according to the progress of the game, the player can perform notification without loss, and as a result, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

[Appendix 22]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 22 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given according to the above, is known.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057732, information such as information for establishing an internal winning combination is provided so that the winning combination determined as an internal winning combination is not lost in recent years. There is known a gaming machine that informs a player of advantageous information for the player. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time), and the AT function is provided. Gaming machines are called AT machines and ART machines.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
However, in a conventional gaming machine equipped with an AT function, the role of the navigation during the AT period is merely to increase the number of medals, so the navigation during the AT period becomes monotonous, and the player feels a rut. As a result, there was a possibility that the interest of the game would be reduced even during the AT period.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest during a period in which information advantageous to a player is notified.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are displayed (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R), and a symbol that changes the symbol by rotating the reel based on the establishment of a start condition. A first symbol combination (for example, a combination of replay symbols) or a second symbol when it is determined as a winning combination based on the fluctuating means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the establishment of the start condition. The first combination (for example, “F_maintenance rep”) that allows the stop display for a plurality of symbol combinations including the symbol combination (for example, the combination of the symbols of the RT1 transition lip), and the first combination when the winning combination is determined. A second role that allows stop display for a plurality of symbol combinations including a symbol combination of 3 (for example, a symbol combination of bells) or a fourth symbol combination (for example, a symbol combination of bell spills) (for example, " F_3 choice bell") and a combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) for determining a winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations and a plurality of reels, which are provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and stop each reel. Based on the stop operation detecting means (for example, the stop switch 7S, the main control board 71) for detecting the stop operation for causing the winning combination and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detecting means determined by the winning combination determining means. By the stop control means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol, and the first gaming state (for example, the RT2 gaming state), when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped. , When the first symbol combination is displayed, the gaming state is maintained as the first gaming state, and when the second symbol combination is displayed, the gaming state is changed from the first gaming state to the second gaming state ( For example, the game state control means (for example, the main control board 71) to shift to the RT1 game state), and when the variation of the symbols is stopped, when the third symbol combination is displayed, the first quantity of games is displayed. A utility value (for example, 9 medals) is given, and when the fourth symbol combination is displayed, a game value less than the first quantity is given or no game value is given. Means (for example, the main control board 71) and, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, notifies the information of the stop operation necessary for displaying the first symbol combination when the first winning combination is determined as a winning combination. In addition, the first notification state control means for performing the first notification game state (for example, Lipnavi AT) that does not notify any information even if the second combination is determined as the winning combination during the first game state ( For example, Lord If the control board 71), the first gaming state, and the transfer lottery means (for example, the main control board 71) that carries out the transfer lottery at a higher frequency than the second gaming state, and the transfer lottery of the transfer lottery means is won. , When the second winning combination is determined as a winning combination, a second notification game state (for example, Bernavi AT) that notifies the information of the stop operation necessary for displaying the third symbol combination is performed. 2 notification state control means (for example, the main control board 71) is provided.

According to such a gaming machine, in the first notification game state, the information of the stop operation necessary for displaying the first symbol combination at the time of the first winning combination is notified. Here, among the symbol combinations according to the first combination, the first symbol combination maintains the first gaming state in which the frequency of the transfer lottery is high even when displayed, while the second symbol combination is displayed. If it is done, the game state will be shifted (fallen) to the second game state in which the frequency of the transfer lottery is low. Therefore, it can be said that the first notification game state is a notification game state in which the notification for maintaining the first game state in which the frequency of the transfer lottery is high is performed.

On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a second notification game state other than the first notification game state, and in this second notification game state, the third symbol combination is displayed when the second winning combination is won. Information of the stop operation necessary for this is notified. Here, among the symbol combinations corresponding to the second winning combination, the third symbol combination is a symbol combination to which a large number of game media (first quantity) is given when displayed, and the fourth symbol combination is It is a symbol combination in which a small amount of game medium is added (or a game medium is not added) when displayed. Therefore, it can be said that the second notification game state is a notification game state in which the notification for receiving the addition of the game medium is performed.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present invention has the first notification game state and the second notification game state, which are notification game states having different roles. For the player, since the meaning of the notification varies depending on the type of the notification game state, the notification during the notification game state does not become monotonous and the interest in the notification game state is prevented from decreasing. it can.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the second winning combination is won during the first notification game state, no information is notified, so that the increase of the game medium is suppressed during the first notification game state. Become. In the gaming machine, it is necessary to balance the profits between the player and the game store, but if the period for which the game medium increases increases for a long time, the profit for the player will become excessive. It needs to be suppressed. In a normal gaming machine, the information game state is the period during which the game medium increases, so it is necessary to make it difficult to shift to the information game state in order to balance profits, but for the player, If the period of the game state is suppressed, the interest will be reduced. In this respect, since the gaming machine according to the present invention has the notification game state of the second notification game state in which the game medium increases and the first notification game state in which the increase of the game medium is suppressed, the player and the game store While trying to balance the profit, it is possible to realize the game playability that allows easy transition to the notification game state.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a setting means (for example, a setting key type switch 430, the main control board 71) for setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player. ) Is further provided, and among the plurality of winning combinations, a specific winning combination that is determined as a winning combination with a probability according to the current game state regardless of the setting value set by the setting means (for example, “RT3 transition rip”). ) Is included, the winning combination determination means determines the specific winning combination as a winning combination with a first probability in the first gaming state, while the specific winning combination is determined from the first probability in the second gaming state. The winning combination is determined with a low second probability, and the transfer lottery means wins with the same probability regardless of the setting value set by the setting means in response to the specific combination being determined as the winning combination. The transfer lottery is performed, and the gaming state control means shifts the gaming state from the second gaming state to the first gaming state with a probability according to the set value set by the setting means.

According to such a gaming machine, when a specific winning combination determined as a winning combination is won regardless of the set value, a lottery for shifting to the second notification gaming state is performed. Thereby, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the degree of expectation regarding the transition to the second notification gaming state at the time of winning the specific combination can be made the same for each set value. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the transition to the first game state in which the specific winning combination is easy to win is performed with a probability according to the set value, for example, the set value that easily transitions to the first game state. It is possible to provide a setting value that is difficult to shift to, and it is possible to provide a characteristic for each setting value regarding the shift to the second notification game state.

[Appendix 23]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 23 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given according to the above, is known.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

In such a gaming machine, a gaming state relatively unfavorable for the player and a relatively advantageous gaming state are provided, and various game characteristics are realized by controlling the transition between these gaming states. There is. For example, in Patent Document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057732), information advantageous for a player such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to miss a winning combination determined as an internal winning combination. There is disclosed a gaming machine which provides a gaming state (AT) advantageous to the player by notifying the player of.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
In the gaming machine, in order to balance the profit between the player and the game store, it is required to appropriately manage the transition between the advantageous gaming state and the unfavorable gaming state. For example, a game machine that rarely shifts to an advantageous gaming state, but once it shifts to an advantageous gaming state, the gaming machine that continues to have an advantageous gaming state for a long period of time has a high gambling property and is not preferable. It is necessary to properly balance the transition frequency of the game and the duration of the advantageous game state.

From the standpoint of an amusement store, although it wants to grasp a gaming machine in which the balance of the gaming state is significantly impaired, in the past, only simple information such as insertion and payout of medals used in the gaming was accepted from the gaming machine. It was not always enough to grasp a gaming machine in which the balance of the state was significantly impaired.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of grasping that the gaming balance is impaired.

[Means for solving the problem]
A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal gaming state (for example, a normal section) and a specific gaming state (for example, a specific section) that is more advantageous to a player than the normal gaming state, A first counter (e.g., main control board 71) that counts the total number of games in the entire game state, and a second counter (e.g., main control) that counts the number of specific games in the specific game state. The board 71), a calculating unit (for example, the main control board 71) that calculates a specific section ratio indicating the ratio of the specific game count to the total number of games, and the specific section ratio calculated by the calculating unit are It is characterized by including a notification means (for example, an external centralized terminal board 73, a main control board 71) for notifying predetermined information to an external device when the ratio is equal to or higher than a predetermined ratio.

According to such a gaming machine, when the ratio of the number of specific games to the total number of games reaches a predetermined ratio or more, the fact is notified to the external device. As a result, the game store side can easily recognize a gaming machine in which the ratio of the advantageous state (specific gaming state) to the player is extremely high.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a third counter (for example, the main control board 71) that counts the total number of game values provided in all game states, and is provided in the specific game state. And a fourth counter (for example, a main control board 71) that counts the number of special games during the specific game showing the value of the game value, and the calculation unit occupies the total number of the special games during the specific game. The ratio value indicating the ratio of the number of grants is calculated, and the notifying unit notifies the external device of predetermined information when the ratio value is equal to or more than a predetermined value.

According to such a gaming machine, when the ratio of the number of specific games awarded to the total number of games reaches a predetermined value or more, the fact is notified to the external device. Usually, in a gaming machine, not only in a state advantageous to the player, but also in a state unfavorable to the player, a gaming value is given by winning a small winning combination or the like. A state in which the ratio of the number of specific games granted to the total number of granted is high means that a lot of game value is given in an advantageous state and almost no game value is given in an unfavorable state. It is shown, and there is a risk that it may increase gambling. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, in such a case, a predetermined notification is given to the external device to notify the gaming shop side. As a result, the game store side can easily grasp the gaming machine having a significantly high ratio of advantageous states for the player.

Also, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the notifying means sends the predetermined information to an external device regardless of the calculation result of the calculating means until the total number of games counted by the first counter reaches a predetermined number. It is characterized by not outputting to.

According to such a gaming machine, until the total number of games reaches a predetermined number, the predetermined information is not notified to the external device even if the ratio of the advantageous state for the player is extremely high. In a situation where a game is not played often after the game machine is installed, the ratio of the advantageous state moves largely up and down, and thus notification may be given even when it is originally unnecessary. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the notification is not made until the total number of games reaches a predetermined number, unnecessary notification is not made.

[Appendix 24]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 24 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given according to the above, is known.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057732, information such as information for establishing an internal winning combination is provided so that the winning combination determined as an internal winning combination is not lost in recent years. There is known a gaming machine that informs a player of advantageous information for the player. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time), and the AT function is provided. Gaming machines are called AT machines and ART machines.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
Among gaming machines having such an AT function, there is known an AT machine for managing the number of games, which manages the duration of AT by the number of games. By the way, in such an AT machine that manages the number of games, if the number of winnings of the winning combination (for example, the pushing order bell) during the AT period is small, there are few medals that can be acquired during the AT period, However, the player sometimes complained.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing the interest of the game from decreasing during the AT period.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are displayed (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R), and a symbol that changes the symbol by rotating the reel based on the establishment of a start condition. A changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39 and the main control board 71) and a winning combination determining means (for example, the main control board 71) that determines a winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations with a predetermined probability based on the establishment of the start condition. ) And a stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch 7S, a main control board 71) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and the combination determining means. Based on the detected winning combination and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detecting means, the stop control means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol, and a predetermined start condition are set. When satisfied, a notification game starting means (for example, a main control board 71) for starting a notification game state (for example, a specific section) and a notification target combination (for example, a push forward combination) that is a combination of the notification targets during the notification game state. ) Is determined as a winning combination, the notification means (for example, the main control board 71, the instruction monitor 147, the sub-control board 72, a display) for notifying a mode of the stop operation (for example, the correct pressing order) advantageous to the player. The unit 100), the notification game ending means (for example, the main control board 71) that ends the notification game state when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, and the notification game start means after the notification game state is started. Counting means (for example, main control board 71) that counts the number of continuations indicating the number of unit games, and notification means (for example, main control board 71, status) that the current game state is the notification game state. And a display device 147b), wherein the notification game ending means is configured such that the number of continuations counted by the counting means is a predetermined number in a situation where the notification by the notification means is performed for a guaranteed number of times or more during the notification game state. When the number of continuations reaches a predetermined number of times, the notification game state is terminated, and the counting means is in a situation where the notification by the notification means is not performed more than the guaranteed number of times during the notification game state. When the number of continuations to be counted reaches a predetermined number, after that, the notification game state is ended on condition that the notification by the notification means has reached the guaranteed number of times, and the notification means ends the notification game state. When, the notification that the current game state is the notification game state is finished.

According to such a gaming machine, the notification game state basically ends when the number of continuations in the notification game state reaches a predetermined number, but when the notification of the notification target combination has not been performed for the guaranteed number of times. Does not end even if the number of times of continuation reaches a predetermined number of times, and then continues until the number of times of notification of the notification target combination is performed for the number of times of guarantee, so in the information game state, at least the number of times of notification of the number of times of guarantee is performed. Become. For the player, even if the number of winnings of the notification target combination is small, the guaranteed number of times of notification will be performed, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the game during the notification game state is increased. It is possible to prevent the deterioration.
It should be noted that, because the notification means is notified by the notification means, if the notification game state has not ended even if the number of continuations reaches a predetermined number, the player continues the notification game state from the notification content of the notification means. You can understand what you are doing. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game from being accidentally ended during the notification game state.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the plurality of winning combinations are allowed to be stopped and displayed for a plurality of symbol combinations including the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination when the winning combination is determined. 1 combination (for example, a push sequence combination that guarantees the number of times of navigation), and a second that allows a stop display for a plurality of symbol combinations including the third symbol combination or the fourth symbol combination when it is determined as the winning symbol combination. A combination (for example, a push order combination that does not guarantee the number of navigation times) is included, and when the first symbol combination is displayed when the variation of the symbol is stopped, a first quantity of gaming value is given. Then, when the second symbol combination is displayed, a gaming value less than the first quantity is given or no gaming value is given, and when the third symbol combination is displayed, the first quantity is displayed. A game value of less than the second quantity is given, while a game value less than the second quantity is given or no game value is given when the fourth symbol combination is displayed. Value providing means (for example, main control board 71) is further provided, and the notification means, when the first winning combination is determined as a winning combination, a stop necessary for displaying the first symbol combination. Notifying the mode of operation, and when the second winning combination is determined as a winning combination, it notifies the mode of the stop operation necessary for displaying the third symbol combination, and the notifying game ending means is When the number of continuations counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined number in a situation where the notification of the first combination by the notification means is performed at least the guaranteed number of times during the notification game state, the second combination is executed. Regardless of the number of times the notification is given, the notification game state is terminated on condition that the number of times of continuation reaches a predetermined number, and the notification number for the first combination by the notification means is guaranteed during the notification game state. When the number of continuations counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined number in a situation where the notification is not performed above, regardless of the number of times the notification is given to the second winning combination, the notification by the notification means is then issued. It is characterized in that the notification game state is ended on condition that the guaranteed number of times is reached.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, at least the guaranteed number of times is notified during the notification game state. However, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, while guaranteeing the guaranteed number of times of notification for the first role, The second role is not guaranteed to be informed of the guaranteed number of times. Here, according to the notification for the first winning combination, a first quantity of game media is provided, and according to the notification for the second winning combination, a second quantity of game media smaller than the first quantity is provided, so that the present invention is realized. In such a gaming machine, the guaranteed number of times of notification is guaranteed for the first role to which many game media are added, and the guaranteed number of times of notification is guaranteed to the second role to which a small number of game media is added. Not not.

In recent game machines, in order to balance profits, a combination in which the number of medals does not increase, a combination in which medals decrease, or a combination in which medals increase is extremely small (for example, a three-combination combination in which the bet number and the payout number match) , A combination of one bet in which the bet number is smaller than the payout number, a four-character combination in which the payout number is slightly larger than the bet number, etc.) may be provided during the notification game state. Such a combination does not increase (or decrease) the number of medals even if it follows the notification, so that the player does not need to guarantee the number of notifications during the notification game state. On the other hand, for a winning combination in which the number of medals increases (for example, a winning combination in which the number of payouts is larger than the number of bets, etc.), the total number of medals (game media) given during the notification game state is affected Therefore, it is preferable for the player to guarantee the number of notifications during the notification game state.

In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the number of times of notification is guaranteed for the first winning combination to which a large number of game media are provided, and the number of notifications is not guaranteed to the second winning combination to which a small number of game media is added. For example, even if the notification for the second winning combination has been sufficiently given before the number of times of continuation in the notification game state reaches a predetermined number, if the notification for the first winning combination has not been given the guaranteed number of times. , The notification game state is continued without ending. For the player, the number of times of notification of the first role is guaranteed to affect the total number of game media given during the notification game state, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind and play the game during the notification game state. It is possible to prevent the interest from decreasing.

[Appendix 25]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 25 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given according to the above, is known.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057732, information such as information for establishing an internal winning combination is provided so that the winning combination determined as an internal winning combination is not lost in recent years. There is known a gaming machine that informs a player of advantageous information for the player. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time), and the AT function is provided. Gaming machines are called AT machines and ART machines.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
Among gaming machines having such an AT function, gaming machines having a chance zone (CZ) that is easy to move to an AT are also known, and in recent years, a CZ executed from among a plurality of types of CZs at the time of starting CZ is performed by a player. There is also known a game machine that can be selected. However, the method of selecting the CZ is monotonous and is not always a kind method for the player, and there is room for further improvement.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that realizes a CZ selection method that is friendly to the player.

[Means for solving the problem]
In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when a notification target combination (for example, a push order combination) that is a notification target combination is determined as a winning combination, a mode of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player (for example, a correct press order). ) Is a notification game state (for example, a specific section) and a normal game state (for example, a normal section) that does not notify the advantageous stop operation mode, and the winning machine is selected from a plurality of winning combinations. A role determination means for determining a role (for example, the main control board 71), and a right grant that grants a shift right to a lottery state when a predetermined condition is satisfied and a shift lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the notification game state. Means (for example, main control board 71), selection acceptance means (for example, main control board 71) for accepting selection of one lottery state from a plurality of lottery states in a state where the transfer right has been granted, When the selection accepting means accepts the selection of one lottery state, or when a predetermined operation is performed without accepting the selection of the one lottery status, a lottery state starting means for starting the lottery state (for example, a main control board). 71), and if the transfer lottery is won in the lottery state, the game state is shifted from the lottery state to the notification game state, and when the duration of the lottery state exceeds the end period, the lottery state is changed to the normal game state. Of the game state control means (for example, the main control board 71) that shifts the game state to, the number of unit games in the lottery state, and the number of unit games in the notification game state that are continuously performed from the lottery state. Counting means (for example, main control board 71) that counts the number of advantageous sections that is the sum, and notification game ending means (for example, main control board 71) that ends the notification game state when the number of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined number. ) And, the plurality of lottery states include a plurality of lottery states with different end periods, and the lottery state start means is configured to select the one lottery state by the selection receiving means. Is the start of the one lottery state that has been accepted, when a predetermined operation is performed without accepting the selection of one lottery state, the shortest lottery state with the shortest end period among the plurality of lottery states. It is characterized by starting.

When such a gaming machine shifts to a lottery state, it shifts to a notification game state that informs the player of a mode of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player, so that the game has a so-called CZ (lottery state) AT (notification game state). Machine and ART machine can be realized. Here, if a state advantageous to the player is continued for a long period of time, it may increase the gambling performance of the game, so in recent pachi-slot machines, the state advantageous to the player Is required to be kept within a certain period. In a so-called AT machine (ART machine), it can be said that the AT period is in an advantageous state, but the CZ period is also a period in which it is easy to shift to an advantageous AT, and it is preferable to include it in the advantageous state. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the number of advantageous intervals, which is the sum of the number of unit games in the lottery state (CZ) and the number of unit games in the notification game state (AT) continuously performed from the lottery state. However, when the predetermined number of times is reached, the notification game state is ended, and the period in which the advantageous state continues is limited to a fixed period.

In such a gaming machine, the gaming machine according to the present invention allows the player to select one lottery state from a plurality of lottery states having different end periods. For the player, since the lottery state (CZ) with different playability can be freely selected, it is possible to enjoy the gameplay that the player likes, but as described above, the period of this lottery state is also an advantageous period. In a gaming machine that is handled, it is preferable that a shorter lottery state be in a form that allows easy selection. In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the player selects the lottery by himself/herself, the selected lottery state is started, while when the game progresses without the player making a selection, , The shortest lottery state with the shortest end period which is considered more preferable for the player is started. As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is easy to start the shortest lottery state which is considered to be preferable for the player, so that it is possible to realize a method of selecting the lottery state (CZ) that is kind to the player.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the selection accepting means selects one of the lottery states indicated by the instruction information indicating one of the plurality of lottery states when the selection is accepted, The selection information of the lottery state is received, and the instruction information indicates the shortest lottery state in the initial state.

According to such a gaming machine, the lottery state is selected based on the lottery state pointed to by the instruction information (cursor), but the instruction information is the shortest lottery state which is considered to be preferable to the player. Is selected in. As a result, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is easy to select the shortest random determination state that is considered to be preferable to the player, and thus it is possible to realize a method of selecting the random determination state (CZ) that is kind to the player.

[Appendix 26]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 26 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given according to the above, is known.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057732, information such as information for establishing an internal winning combination is provided so that the winning combination determined as an internal winning combination is not lost in recent years. There is known a gaming machine that informs a player of advantageous information for the player. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time), and the AT function is provided. Gaming machines are called AT machines and ART machines.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
By the way, in the conventional gaming machine, if the setting is changed during the AT period, the AT will be cleared. Therefore, from the amusement store side, the AT should be maintained only when the setting is not changed (deferred). It was not possible to do so, and the options for store management were limited.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of various selections regarding maintenance/clearance of an AT.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention determines a winning game combination (for example, a specific section) when a winning combination is determined from a plurality of winning combinations (for example, the main control board 71) and a predetermined start condition is satisfied. When the notification game starting means to start (for example, the main control board 71) and the notification target combination which is the combination of the notification target during the notification game state is determined as the winning combination, the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player ( For example, when the notification means (for example, the main control board 71, the instruction monitor 147, the sub-control board 72, the display unit 100) for notifying the correct answer pressing order and a predetermined end condition are satisfied, the notification game state is ended. Information game ending means (for example, main control board 71) and setting means for setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player (for example, setting key type switch 430, When a new set value is set by the setting means in the main control board 71) and the notification game state, the game state is maintained as the notification game state, and predetermined initialization is performed during the notification game state. When the operation is performed, the game control means (for example, the main control board 71) for ending the notification game state is provided.

According to such a gaming machine, in the notification gaming state, when the notification target combination is determined as the winning combination, a mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, so that a so-called AT machine or ART machine is displayed. Can be realized. Then, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the initialization operation is performed during the information game state, the information game state is ended (cleared), but a new set value is set during the information game state. Also maintains the game state as the notification game state. From the amusement store side, it is possible to select whether to maintain/clear the notification game state while changing the setting value. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, various options for the amusement machine side regarding the operation of the gaming machine are provided. Can be given.

[Appendix 27]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 27 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given according to the above, is known.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

In such a gaming machine, a gaming state relatively unfavorable for the player and a relatively advantageous gaming state are provided, and various game characteristics are realized by controlling the transition between these gaming states. There is. For example, in Patent Document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057732), information advantageous for a player such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to miss a winning combination determined as an internal winning combination. There is disclosed a gaming machine which provides a gaming state (AT) advantageous to the player by notifying the player of.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
In the gaming machine, in order to balance the profit between the player and the game store, it is required to appropriately manage the transition between the advantageous gaming state and the unfavorable gaming state. For example, a game machine that rarely shifts to an advantageous gaming state, but once it shifts to an advantageous gaming state, the gaming machine that continues to have an advantageous gaming state for a long period of time has a high gambling property and is not preferable. It is necessary to properly balance the transition frequency of the game and the duration of the advantageous game state.

From the standpoint of an amusement store, although it wants to grasp a gaming machine in which the balance of the gaming state is significantly impaired, in the past, only simple information such as insertion and payout of medals used in the gaming was accepted from the gaming machine. It was not always enough to grasp a gaming machine in which the balance of the state was significantly impaired.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of grasping that the gaming balance is impaired.

[Means for solving the problem]
A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal gaming state (for example, a normal section) and a specific gaming state (for example, a specific section) that is more advantageous to a player than the normal gaming state, A first counter (e.g., main control board 71) that counts the total number of games in the entire game state, and a second counter (e.g., main control) that counts the number of specific games in the specific game state. A board 71), a calculation means for calculating a specific section ratio indicating a ratio of the specific game count to the total number of games, and a calculation means (for example, a main control board 71), which are provided in a position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. A display unit (for example, a ratio indicator 422, a main control board 71) for displaying the specific section ratio is provided.

According to such a gaming machine, the clerk of the game shop confirms the specific section ratio displayed on the display means, and the ratio of the state advantageous for the player (specific game state) is out of balance. You can easily figure out what. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to easily understand that the gaming balance is impaired on the gaming shop side. Further, since this display means is provided at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it, it is possible to prevent it from being seen by the player.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the display means displays the specific section ratio in a first display mode when the specific section ratio is a predetermined value or more, and the specific section ratio is less than the predetermined value. In this case, the specific section ratio is displayed in the second display mode.

According to such a gaming machine, when the specific section ratio becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined rate, the specific section ratio is displayed in different display modes, so that the game store side can grasp at a glance that the game is out of balance. it can.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a third counter (for example, the main control board 71) that counts the total number of game values provided in all game states, and is provided in the specific game state. A fourth counter (for example, the main control board 71) that counts the number of specific game grants that indicates the number of game values, and the calculating unit is the ratio of the specific game grant number to the total number of grants. Is calculated, and the display means switches and displays the specific section ratio and the ratio value.

According to such a gaming machine, the display means also displays the ratio (proportion of the prize) of the specific game-applied number to the total provided number. Normally, in a gaming machine, a gaming medium is awarded by a winning of a small win or the like, not only in a state advantageous to the player but also in a state unfavorable to the player. A state in which the ratio of the number of specific games given to the total number of games given is high indicates that a large number of game media are given in an advantageous state and almost no game medium is given in a disadvantageous state. However, there is a risk that the gambling will be enhanced. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, by displaying the accessory ratio on the display means, the clerk of the gaming shop can recognize the gaming machine having a significantly high ratio of advantageous states for the player.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the specific section ratio and the accessory ratio are switched and displayed on the display unit, it is not necessary to separately provide a display unit for displaying each ratio. Thus, for example, in the case of a gaming machine that already has a display means inside the gaming machine, it is only necessary to switch and display the specific section ratio and the accessory ratio on the display means, which is minor from the software aspect. It suffices to make a change, and even in the case of a game machine that does not currently have a display means inside the game machine, only one display means needs to be newly added, and a minimum change is sufficient.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the display means displays the ratio value in a first display mode when the ratio value is a specific value or more, and when the ratio value is less than the specific value, The ratio value is displayed in the second display mode.

According to such a gaming machine, when the ratio of the number of specific games being awarded to the total number of games is equal to or higher than a predetermined rate, the ratio values are displayed in different display modes, which means that the game is out of balance. It can be grasped at a glance at the amusement store side.

[Appendix 28]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 28 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given according to the above, is known.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057732, information such as information for establishing an internal winning combination is provided so that the winning combination determined as an internal winning combination is not lost in recent years. There is known a gaming machine that informs a player of advantageous information for the player. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time), and the AT function is provided. Gaming machines are called AT machines and ART machines.

In addition, in a game store where the game machine is actually installed, it is common to install an external device such as a data counter or a hall computer together with the game machine. For example, the game machine is installed above the game machine. The data counter receives a signal output from the gaming machine and displays the number of games, the number of bonuses, and the like.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
By the way, in the conventional gaming machine, the information that the hall side (data counter or hall computer) can grasp based on the external signal output from the gaming machine is limited to the number of games and the number of bonuses. Since the situation of the gaming machine cannot be accurately grasped by itself, in recent years, further improvement of the external signal output has been demanded.

The present invention has been made based on such a demand, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine in which the hall side can grasp more accurate information.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are displayed (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R), and a symbol that changes the symbol by rotating the reel based on the establishment of a start condition. A changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39 and the main control board 71) and a winning combination determining means (for example, the main control board 71) that determines a winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations with a predetermined probability based on the establishment of the start condition. ) And a stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch 7S, a main control board 71) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and the combination determining means. Based on the detected winning combination and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means, the stop control means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol, and the notification game start condition Based on establishment (e.g., winning a lottery to move to a specific section), an informing game starting means (e.g., main A control board 71), and a notification game ending means (for example, a main control board 71) for ending the notification game state based on establishment of a notification game end condition (for example, the number of games, the number of differences, the number of times of navigation), Comprising a counting means (for example, main control board 71) for counting the duration of the game state and an output means (for example, main control board 71) for outputting a predetermined signal to the outside, the notification game ending means, When the counting means counts a predetermined period (for example, 1500 games), the notification game state is ended regardless of whether or not the notification game ending condition is satisfied, and the output means causes the counting result of the counting means. When the notification game state is ended by, a predetermined signal is output to the outside.

According to such a gaming machine, the information game state basically ends when the information game end condition is satisfied, but when the continuation period reaches a predetermined period, the information game end condition is waited for. End without. If the information game state continues for a long period of time, the gambling performance is unnecessarily increased, so in recent years, there has been a demand for a mechanism in which the information game state does not continue for a long period of time. In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the duration of the information game state reaches a predetermined period, the information game state is forcibly ended without waiting for the establishment of the information game end condition (limit process). Therefore, it is possible to prevent unnecessary gambling.
Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when such limit processing is performed, the fact is output to the outside. Therefore, on the hall side, it is understood that the limit processing is performed in the gaming machine. It is possible to grasp new information that could not be grasped in the past.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the bonus starting means (for example, the main control board 71) for starting a bonus state advantageous to the player based on the satisfaction of the bonus starting condition, and the satisfaction of the bonus ending condition A bonus ending means (for example, a main control board 71) for ending the bonus state is further provided, and the counting means, when the bonus state is started during the notification game state, a period during the bonus state. Also as the duration of the notification game state, the output means, when the counting means counts the predetermined period during the bonus state of the notification game state, at the end of the bonus state, to the outside It is characterized by outputting a predetermined signal.

According to such a gaming machine, the hall side can grasp the fact that the limit processing is performed during the bonus state, so that the situation of the gaming machine can be grasped more accurately.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the notification game ending means is configured such that the counting means is set to the predetermined value in a situation in which the notification of the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is performed at least the guaranteed number of times during the notification game state. When the period is counted, the notification game state is ended, and the counting means counts the predetermined period in a situation where the notification of the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player during the notification game state is not performed for the guaranteed number of times or more. Then, after that, the notification game state is ended on condition that the number of times the notification of the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is performed reaches the guaranteed number.

According to such a gaming machine, the limit process is basically performed when the notification game state continues for a predetermined period, but if the advantageous notification is not performed for the guaranteed number of times during the notification game state, the limit process is performed. Even if it continues for a period, it does not end, and thereafter, advantageous notification continues until the guaranteed number of times is given, so that at least the guaranteed number of times is given in the notification game state. For the player, since the guaranteed number of times of notification is given, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing during the notification game state.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the output unit is an external device when the number of times the counting unit counts the predetermined period reaches a predetermined number within a specific period (for example, from turning on the power to turning off the power). It is characterized in that a specific signal is output to.

According to such a gaming machine, when the limit process is performed a predetermined number of times within a specific period, a specific signal (for example, an error signal) is output to the outside together with a signal indicating that the limit process has been performed. Output to the device. Thus, for example, when the limit process is performed a number of times that is not normally considered during the day, the hole side can know the fact.

1... Pachi-slot machine, 3L, 3C, 3R... Reel, 4L, 4C, 4R... Display window, 7L, 7C, 7R... Stop button, 71... Main control board, 72... Sub control board, 100... Display unit

Claims (2)

With multiple reels with multiple symbols displayed,
Based on the establishment of the start condition, a symbol changing means for changing the symbol by rotating the reel,
Based on the establishment of the start condition, a winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations with a predetermined probability,
Stop operation detecting means provided corresponding to the plurality of reels, for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel,
Based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detecting means, stop control means for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol,
When a predetermined start condition is satisfied, a notification game start means for starting a notification game state,
When a notification target combination that is a notification target combination is determined as a winning combination during the notification game state, notification means for notifying a mode of a stop operation advantageous to the player,
When a predetermined end condition is satisfied, a notification game ending means for ending the notification game state,
Counting means for counting the number of continuations indicating the number of unit games since the notification game start means started the notification game state,
A notification means for notifying that the current game state is the notification game state,
Equipped with
The notification game ending means,
When the number of continuations counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined number in a situation where the notification by the notifying means is performed more than the guaranteed number of times during the notification game state, on condition that the number of continuations reaches the predetermined number of times. End the notification game state,
When the number of continuations counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined number in a situation where the notification by the notification means is not performed more than the guaranteed number of times during the notification game state, then the notification by the notification means becomes the guaranteed number of times. The notification game state is ended on the condition that it has reached,
The notification means ends the notification that the current game state is the notification game state when the notification game state is ended.
A gaming machine characterized by that. In the plurality of winning combinations, a first winning combination that allows a stop display for a plurality of symbol combinations including a first symbol combination or a second symbol combination when it is determined as a winning combination, and a winning combination is determined. In this case, a second role that allows a stop display for a plurality of symbol combinations including the third symbol combination or the fourth symbol combination is included,
When the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, the first quantity is given a gaming value when the first symbol combination is displayed, while the first quantity is displayed when the second symbol combination is displayed. Less game value is given or no game value is given, and when the third symbol combination is displayed, a second quantity of game value less than the first quantity is given, while When a fourth symbol combination is displayed, a game value giving means for giving a game value less than the second quantity or giving no game value is further provided,
When the first winning combination is determined as a winning combination, the notification means notifies a mode of a stop operation required for displaying the first symbol combination, and the second winning combination is determined as a winning combination. Then, the mode of the stop operation necessary for displaying the third symbol combination is notified,
The notification game ending means,
When the number of continuations counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined number in a situation in which the notification for the first combination by the notification means is performed more than the guaranteed number of times during the notification game state, the second combination is given to the second combination. Regardless of the number of notifications made, the notification game state is terminated on condition that the number of continuations reaches a predetermined number,
When the number of continuations counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined number in a situation where the notification for the first combination by the notification means is not performed more than the guaranteed number of times during the notification game state, the second combination is given to the second combination. Regardless of the number of times the notification has been performed, then the notification game state is terminated on condition that the notification by the notification means has reached the guaranteed number of times,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein:

Images